Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
3.n.iiffid by Google
3.n.iiffid by Google
3.n.iiffid by Google
by Google
I9oo
by Google
3.n.iiffid by Google
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
H. C. BIERWIRTH, Ph.D.
NEW YORK
HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY
1900
3t.z.dcy Google
CoPYKIflHT, 1900
HENRY HOLT & CO.
Ubc Wtintjemann ptcei, *Mton, TII.S.».
D.n.iized by Google
^
PREFACE
This book consists of a systematic grammar, lists of commoii
Q The grammar differs somewhat from othera in the proportion of
space deToted to the several topics and in the order or mannei of
their presentation.
Id the chapter on nouns, I have based the classification solely
on the form of the nominative plural, because, in all but a few
irregular nouns, this case furnishes the clue to the formation of
the genitive singular, whereas the genitive singular, in the majority
of both regular and irregular nouns, furnishes no clue whatever
to the nominative plural. For the practical study of the beginner,
therefore, the distinction between a strong and a weak declension
is set aside; for subsequent historical study, however, it can easily
be restored, since the classes remain the same as in most grammars.
My reasons for treating the pronouns and pronominal adjectives
before the ordinary adjectives are as follows : firat, some of the
former, as biefet, jener, or others with strong endings, must be an-
ticipated anyway in order to explain the weak declension of the
latter; secondly, the pronominal adjectives are .the simpler of the
two kinds, as shown in sections 102 and 205 ; thirdly, a knowledge
of pi-ououns is more essential to proficiency in reading than a
knowledge of adjectives. Moreover, the usual order of treatment
— nouns, adjectives, pronouns — is probably nothing but a tradi-
tion, traceable to the study of Latin, where it is indeed natural
enough to pass on from domtnus, mensa and regnum, to bonus, bona,
bonum.
Of the pronouns, I have given the possessives a much fuller dis-
cussion than they ordinarily receive; and of the matters relating
to the adjective in its various forms, the uses of the superlative
seemed to call for special attention.
In the chapter on verbs, all paradigms of the active voice are so
arranged as to keep the simple forms together, because the separa-
tion of the imperative, infinitive and participles — probably also
copied from Latin giammar — obscures the relation of these forms
to the rest and interferes with the study of stem and endings.
The uses of the connecting vowel e in certain verb-forms (sections
293-296) are summarized and illustrated in a manner differing
slightly from that of other grammars and aiming to be serviceable
in practice rather than adequate from a philological point of view.
The modal auxiliaries are treated at considerable length, for reasons
too obvious to need mention. In the sections dealing with the
changes of vowels and consonants in strong verbs (386—402), I
have avoided all historical complications and adapted my state-
ments to the present condition of the language, and to the majority
of the commonest verbs. Among these sections there is one, 393,
on which a word of explanation may not be out of place. The
traditional rule that radical e, if long, changes to ie in the second
and third persons singular of the present indicative holds true for
befeljlen, empfe^fen, geben, 9ef(^e^en, lefen, fc^eten, fe^en and fte^Ien
— eight verbs; but breaks down before Ittot^tn, fleljen, genefen,
^eben, ne^men, pftegen, fte^en, treten and tveben — nine verbs. For
this reason I have given here, as also in the section on the
umlaut in comparison (24d), a plain statement of the principal
facts instead of a general rule which tempts the beginner to say ic^
ge^e, „bu gie^ft, et gie^t" or ftolj, „\lilivc, jlBljeft." Similarly, I have
made the sections on verbs compounded with the so-called doubtful
prefixes (446-449) more concrete and tangible by adding the com-
monest examples.
Little space is devoted in the grammar itself to indeclinable
words, since the most important prepositions, adverbs and conjunc-
tions have found their place in the second part of the book, among
the Words of Frequent Occurrence.
In the Syntax (pages 9d-lll), I have confined myself to those
matters in which German usage differs most from English and have
sought to give the student as much help as possible in the transla-
tion of English into German. Hence the full discussion of the uses
of the subjunctive and those of the infinitive.
The chapter on the order of words (pages 111—124) is longer
than I wish it were, and yet as short as I dare make it if it is to be
useful at that stage of the student's course where he needs it most,
namely in his composition work. It is here that, according to my
experience, he welcomes details. During the earliest stage, while
he is merely translating easy German into EnglislL, a little oral
instruction in tlie order of words will suffice him ; and during the
intermediate stage of sentence writing, as distinguished from com-
position proper, the sections in the largest type, with a few others
referred to in the exercises, will be all he requires. In treating
this subject, I have adhered to the older scheme and based the defi-
nitions of the orders on the relative instead of the absolute position
of the Terb, but I have tried to make the presentation simpler and
clearer by disposing of the general connectives at the outset (section
562) and by contrasting the normal order with the inverted one in
parallel columns (sections 564 and 5Q5).
In the second part of the book, I have collected methodically
what I have seen many, both teachers and students, collecting
at random. My method was this : after selecting from various
Readers and texts used during the first and second years such
material as I thought would best represent the average variety of
subjects and style, as well as a proper proportion of verse and
prose, I registered the number of times every word and every signi-
ficant construction or idiom connected with it occurred. The mate-
rial amounted to 160,000 words, or about 560 octavo pages. The
work of registration occupied most of my leisure time during four
years. The more direct result of it is this second part of the book ;
the less direct results are the grammar and the exercises. Judging,
then, by the labor bestowed on ascertaining what is most frequent
and, in so far at least, most helpful to the beginner, I think the
lists ought to be fairly trustworthy. Yet everybody who has fol-
lowed the counting of eleven million words in Germany, for steno-
graphical purposes, knows that the relative frequency of any given
word may vary greatly. This I say mainly in order to deal honestly
with all who may try the lists and find them wanting. The ques-
tion how the whole apparatus may best be used I am not entitled
to answer, for I have not yet given the collections a thorough test
in my own classes.
The exercises are intended to introduce the student by the
shortest and safest road that I could find into the reading of ordi-
nary prose. They are based on a vocabulary of about 750 words
and phrases, of which only a few do not belong to the commonest.
The study of the verb is taken up at the very beginning, and first
among its forms the past indicative of strong verbs, which is not
only the most frequent, but aleo, by reason of its simple inflection
and ita similarity to English, the easiest. The order in which the
declined parts of speech are presented in the exercisea is essentially
the same which I have tried to justify above when speaking of the
grammar. My reason for making the exercises few in number and
long, is that but few topics of grammar are required to get the
student started in reading, and that each of these can better be
mastered in a longer exercise which, as suggested on page 180, may
be taken in separate lessons, than by distributing over several
shorter exercises what belongs together and forms a unit. I am
aware that the latter method is often preferred because it seems to
insure dispatch ; bat I hope that the former, though it seems more
strenuous at first, will prove no less expeditious in the end and will
help the student to know his ground more thoroughly. As to the
material of which the exercises are made up, I can only say that it
is the beat I can offer without either baking the student's progress
by numerous notes on more advanced material or else neglecting
precisely those means which make his progress towards more ad-
vanced material safe and a constant return to the veriLel elements
unnecessary. These means are the use in the exercises of a vocab-
ulary that will tell in reading, and timely as well as rational atten-
tion to the modicum of grammar which grows the more irksome
the longer it is postponed.
The book as a whole, then, is an attempt, not to propose a new
method of teaching German, but to present in a somewhat modified
form and order such of its elements as have always been deemed
worth learning. If I have been successful in this, the credit be-
longs in large measure to my fi-iends, and more especially to my
colleague Mr. W. G. Howard and to Mr. G. F. Arnold of Brook-
line, from both of whom I have had the most patient and generous
help.
CAMBBmaB, Mabb., Angnst, 1900.
D.n.iized by Google
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAMMAR
PRONUNCIATION 1-4
PARTS OF SPEECH — ACCIDENCE 6-05
Aeticles 5
NouNB 6-13
Class I C
Class II 7
Claaa III 8
Class IV . ■ 9
Irregular Nouns 10
Proper Names 11
Peosouns and Pronominal Adjectives 13-37
Personal 13
Reflexive. Reciprocal. Intensive 10
Strong (Independent) and Weak (Dependent) Kodings . 19
Posaessive 20
Demonstrative 24
Interrogative 27
Relative 29
Indefinite 82
AiMECTivES 38-50
Strong and Weak Declension 38
Substantive Use 43
CompariBon ........... 45
NUMEBALS 60-53
Vebbb 53-82
©abfii. ©eiii. Sffierbeii 57
Weak Verba 63
Modal Auxiliaries. aSiffen - 67
Strong Verbs 76
Passive Voice 81
Reflexive Verbs 84
Impersonal Verbs 85
Compound Verbs . 80
Peefobitions 02
Adveebb 03
Conjunctions ....
r:,t.:J.^7t>0^lc
Vlll TASLB OF CONTENTS
PiOK
SYNTAX 05-111
Ubbs or THB Abticlbb 96
Ubbs of the Forms of Declbnsiok 90
Verne op the Fobhs of CoRjcoATioit 101
Tbe- Tenses of the Indicative 101
The SutijunetiTe 103
The Conditional. The Imperative 108
The Infinitive 108
Tiie Participles 110
ORDER OF WORDS 111-124
WOEDS OF FREQUENT OCCURItEHCE
The Commonest Nouns 126
The Commonest Adjectives 128
The Commonest Weak Verbs 130
The Commonest Strong Verbs ...... 131
The Commonest Preposiiiona 136
The Commonest Adverbs and ConjuDctiona .... 144
Stem-Groups 155
German Scbipt 173
Index 176
EXERCISES
1. Pronunciation. The articles 179
2. Nouns. Past indicative of strong verbs . . . . 179
3. Fast indicative of weak verba ■ 182
4. Personal pronauns. Past indicative of tvtiiMn .... 186
5. Present indicative of weak verbs .,.'.... 191
a. Pronominal words with strong endings only. Transposed order 196
7. Pronominal words with strong endings only (continued) . 200
Present indicative of strong verbs .......
8. Demonstrative, relative and interri^ative pronouns 206
Perfect indicative
0. Pronominal words with strong or weak endings . . . ' 212
Pluperfect indicative
10. Adjectives. Future indicative 218
11. Adjectives (continued). Normal order. Inverted order . . . 224
12. Modal auxiliaries, simple forms ....... 229
13. Compound verbs with inseparable prefixes 230
14. Compound verba with separable prefixes 240
1 5. Compound verbs (continued) . Modal auxiliaries, compound forma 244
m. Imperative 247
17. SubjunoUve (past and pluperfect). Present conditional . . 250
18. Subjunctive (present, perfect, future) 253
19. Passive 266
20. 1)it ©{fd^iii^te wm iungtn !Ro1anb 261
VOCABULAKIES , ' . I 269
GRAMMAR
PRONUNCIATION
1. The Alphabet.
0«rm3]i
Gennm Bonum
flfliman
Garman
Roman
foim
name farm
form
nama
form
a a
.1. A a
M n
en
N n
s s
bay B b
oh
o
E c
t-y C
?!>
pay
p p
5) b
V <l»y D d
Qq
koo
. Q q
g c
•y E e
SH r
er
B r
5 f
e« F f
® (§
...
S s
® 8
gay G g
X t
la.
T t
© 5
hrt Hh
U u
DO
U u
3 i
I i
SB S
low
V V
3 i
yot J j
SB IB
vay
W w
ffi (
k.h K k •
3E S
ix
X X
£ I
el L 1
?) H
ipailon
T y
5Km em Mm 3 S t«et Z Z
2, Of the two forma f and i, the latter ia used at the end of a
word, at the end of a syllable in compounds, and before suffixes
(except aufiises of inflection); elsewhere f ia uaed ; §au6, §auSt^llr,
^SuSdjen, but §Qu(eS ; \ai, Qeiart, leSbar, but Ufen, lieft,
8, Certain letters, when joined to others, change their form
slightly; i^ = cA/ cE = cA; ^ = te; ^ = J and j, sounded like ss
in hiss and therefore more commonly represented by ss than by ss.
4. The combination ^ is used at the end of a word or syllable
and before t ; likewise after a long vowel or a diphthong : %u%
(JIu^, ^^lii$, grofeattig, mu^e, ^a^t, lui^t ; S^ii^e, l^eifien. But gliif=
fe, ^af=fe, WiHe, toif^fet.
2 PRONUNCIATION
6. With few exceptions (13, 31, 41), there are no silent letters.
Vowels
6. A vowel doubled or followed by ^ is long : §aar, 3)le^[.
7. An accented vowel before a single consonant or at the end of
a syllable is usually long : le'fen, (Bebof , ba, fo, hi, bit, vox, nut.
But in some of the commonest monosyllables, even when etroagiy
accented, the vowel is short : a&, on, f)in, mit, um, toeg, baS, toaS.
S. A Towel before two or more tionsonants is usually short :
33[att, bumm, ^ilf. But in inflection, a long stem-vowel remains
long, even before several consonants : ftagft (from fragen), 93[utS
(from Slut). A vowel before i^ or ^ may be long, as in Suc^, SMafe ;
or short, as in ^a^, la^.
9. ?l, n has always the quality of a in father. Long: baben,
ma^\ ; shott : matt, 2Rann.
10. iS, t long sounds nearly like a in fate ; §eet, Qti/t, bet ; «
short, like e in met : Sett, ipenben, §en:.
11. Unaccented e is slurred ; thus, en in leiten sounds like en in
frighten ; el in ebel, like le in ladle ; eS in neueS, like oua in joyous ;
e in ^ate, like a in idea,; ge in ©efe^, nearly like ga in gazettes.
12. % i long sounds like i in machine: i^n, '^a ; l short, like i
in si* ; mit, fUXf'ft, §irt, irben.
13. 3«, ie is sounded like long i : bie, Siebet, ^^ilofo^j^ie' ; but in
certain words with the accent on the syllable preceding ie, these
two letters are sounded separately, the i being like the y in 3/0M .-
O^ami'lie, Si'nie.
U. O, long sounds nearly like in ruite : |o, SKoot ; short,
like the o often heard in New England in whole, only, a sound lying
between the a in fall and the in toll: toC, ®ott, foil.
16. M, U long sounds nearly like 00 in fool : bu, SBube ; u short,
like M in pull : bumm, Suttet.
16. The vowels a, 0, u often have a modified sound called um-
laut and indicated by two dots : S, a ; 6, B ; ft, ti. For fiu, Su
see 22.
17. a, 9 long sounds like a in dare : S^re, triige ; fi short, like e
in met : Sfte, SBanbe.
18. O, 8 long may be produce*! if one rounds the lips to pro-
PRONUNCIATION 8
Bounce in woe and then triea to sound an a like that of ape instead :
£)Elt, M\i. Short 6 has the same quality, but requires less rounding
of the lips : Bffne, tbnut.
19. U, & long may be produced if one rounds the lips to pro-
nounce 00 in woo and theu tries to sound an ee like that of eel
instead : iibei, tii^I. Short il has the same quality, but requires
less rounding of the lips: ^iitte, fiiUen.
DIFHTHONQS
20. %\, oi and ©i, tt sound like i in mtTie : S.aib, ©aite ; 2eib,
©eite.
21. an, an sounds like ou in th<m : laut, taufen.
22. @B, cu and SJii, Btt sound nearly like oy in boy : £eute, ^(Ute ;
Idute, ^iiute.
Consonants
83. 8, Ii, at the end of a word or syllable, also before inflec-
tional sufiixes beginning with a consonant, sounds like p : ®xab,
©tttt^en, [jafit ; elsewhere, like b : bxai^, Slei, lileiben, Sa^m.
24. S, c, before a, o, it or a consonant, sounds like k: Qato,
gtaubiuS ; elsewhere, like ts or j (45): (Safat, Gcber.
26. &ii, i), after a, o, u or an, has a deep guttural sound which
lies between k and A, uttered with audible breath, and resembles a
throat-clearing or hawking ; after e, i, a, 0, ii, ei, eu, qu or a conso-
nant, it has a higher palatal sound, similar to the first sound heard
in hei-e. Guttural : ®a(^, 2oc&, Sudi, auc^ ; palatal : SBted^, ii^,
JDad&er, £bi$«, Sticker, 2t\i)t, mi), ©trau^et, £tT(^e.
26. €^8 has the sound of x when g (or f) belongs to the same
stem with i) : Di^S, D^fe ; otherwise i^ retains its regular sound :
Sad(i§, Wad)(am.
27. ®, b, at the end of a word or syllable, also before inflectional
suffixes lieginning with a consonant, sounds like t : §anb, liinblic^,
gonbSntQnn, fcanbft ; elsewhere, like d.- ba, §anbe.
28. !Bt sounds like t : Stabt, ©efanbtet, (abt.
2B, ®, g sounds like ff in get: ge^t, gilt, qd% ©laS, grau.
30. But at the end of a word or syllable, and before inflectional
suffixes beginning with a consonant, g sounds like i} (25); i.e. gut-
tural in %aQ, tog, 8ug, (oflft, jag'^aff ; palatal in toeg, SBnig, frig,
aSetg, liegft, ljorjii9'Iic&.
D.n.iized by Google
4 PRONUNCIATION
81. ^, it, at the beginning of a woid, sounds like h in hat: ^iirt,
§auS, ^ei, §ei'mot ; alao in compounds : flt^erf, Sanb'^ug, Wo^tr';
and in the sufaxes ^aft and ^eit, which are unaccented : ^b^aft,
^ei^eit. Elsewhere f) is silent and indicates that the preceding
vowel is long : fro^, D^t, S&re, ge^e, fS^et,
Yet in some words not monosyllabic, where the syllable with ff
has the principal or secondary accent, If is sounded as in compounds :
a^a', ■^oiam', SSiil'^etm, m'to^ol
82. % i sounds like y in yea .- je, 3al)t.
88. 9lg, ag has the sound of tiff in singer.- ISnget, g^ingev, ^ung:
tig, Soffming.
34. du, qu 13 pronounced like tW, with the iv as after f^ and j
(44): Dual, quer.
SS. K, t is pronounced more distinctly and with more of a trill
than r in English : Slitter, reite, bif teter.
88. ©, f, fl. At the beginning of a word before a vowel, or
between two vowels, f sounds like « in sero : fage, lefe.
ST. When final or doubled, or when standii^ before a consonant
not at the beginning of a word (38), g or f sounds like s in so : baS,
■ Iflflen, lijftc. For fe see 3.
18. S(i, fti and ©(, 9t •** ^^^ beginning of a word, are sounded
like ahp and sht, with the sh pronounced lightly and quickly : ^pxf
t^en, ©jiannung, fte^en, ©taub ; also in compounds : feefpte'ti^en, it'
fte'^en ; elsewhere they sound like «p and st : 3ijefpe, Iteft.
39. S^, fi4 sounds like sA .- fd&abe, fi^nell.
40. %, t sounds like t ; %aQ, tritt ; except before i in words of
Prench or Latin origin, where it sounds like te or j (45): Slation',
31a' tio.
41. 2^, t^ sounds like t; a;^at, t^ut.
49. % ([ sounds like ts or j (46): ©a§, §i§e.
48. 8, sounds like /.■ SBater, bier. But in foreign words (ex-
cept when final) it sounds like v: Sfafe, ajip'te, broBt, relali'Ue (but
like/in brat), telatio').
44. SS, IP sounds like v : Yotldft, Siitoe. But in producing tv after
f(^ or J belonging to the same syllable, the lower lip touches the
upper Up (instead of the upper teeth, as in producing v): ©i^loeftei,
jWifd&en, SwanQ.
45. *[f ) Bounds like ta in eoUs: §oIj, jagen.
D.n.iized by Google
PARTS OF SPEECH — ACCIDENCE
DECLENSION
46. There are four cases : the nominative, which is the case
of the subject and also the case of address (vocative); the geni-
tive, which corresponds to the English possessive or the objec-
tive with o/; the dative, which is the ease of the indirect object
and corresponds to the English objective with to or for ; and
the accusative, or the case of the direct object. The genitive,
dative and accusative are called the oblique cases, in. distinction
from the nominative (or vocative).
47. There are three genders : masculine, feminine and
neuter.
THE ARTICLES
48. The Definite Article.
i.
m.f.n
N.
btt
bie
bos
tlui
G.
bci
btr
bt8
c/thc
D.
bcm
btE
bim
toth^
of the
4ft. Certain forms of the definite article may be contracted with
1. preceding preposition.
an bent: am attU
aufbaS;
: QUf« upon the
in bcm: im in the
bun^baS: bun^S through the
Don bem : Bom of, or fnrm, the
furbaS:
furs for the
ju bcm : jum to the
inbaS:
inS itUo the
bet bcm : beim at the
Dor baS;
: Bor« before the
an bo3 : anS to, or towards, the
ju bcr:
jur to the
. The Indefinite Article.
N. tin rine
ein
a
G. tints einet
eines
of a
D. einem einet
einetn
toa
A. einen eine
ein
a
3,B.db, Google
51. Nouns are divided into four classes, according to the
form of the nominative plural:
I. Nom. pi. = nom. sing., Bometimes modifying the vowel,
ir. Nom. pi. ^ nom. sing.+e, UBuaEj modifying the vowel.
in, Nora. pi. = nom. sing.+et, always modifying the vowel.
IV. Nom. pi. ^ nom. sing.+n or fn, never modifying the vowel.
Class IV adds n if the nomiuative singular ends in unaccented
e, et or et ; otherwise en. — The modification or umlaut (16) in
Classes I-III affects the atem-vowela a, D, (i, nu ; with the excep-
tion of nouns in turn, for which see 70.
62. Compound nouns have the inflection (aa also the gender) of
the final member.
53. The Oblique Cases of the Singular. (1) Feminines
of all Classes have the oblique cases like the nominative.
54. (2) Masculines and neuters of Classes I-III take e5
or ^ in the genitive, e or no ending in the dative, and have the
accusative like the nominative.
66. If the nominative ends in el, en or ex, the genitive takes g,
and the dative no ending. If it ends in an «-sound, the genitive
takes eS, and the dative may or may not take e. If it ends other-
wise, eS in the genitive, and e iu the dative are preferred for nouns
of one syllable ; but § in the genitive, and no ending in the dative
for nouns of more than one syllable.
56. (3) Masculines (there are no neuters) of Class IV form
the oblique cases of the singular like the nominative plural.
57. The Oblique Cases of the Plural, in all Clasaes, are like
the nominative plural, except that the dative adds n if the
nominative does not end in n."
Class I
58. Here belong: 1. Masculines and neuters in c(, en and cr.
2. Diminutives in c^en and (etn — all neuter. 3. A few neuters
in ®e-e. 4. Two feminines : bie 9Butter mother, bie Xo^tec
daughter.
59. There are no monosyllables in Class I.
* A llet of uouDs In SM itrordB pncUce in the upplkatioii of thoe rain.
baS ®e6au'be
be« ®e6au'be«
bon ©ebflu'be
baS ©ebau'be
bi« ©efcau'be
bcr ©efcau'be
ben (Sebau'ben
bie ©ebau'be
60. Examples. (1) With vowel unchanged in the plural : bet
Sninnen well, baS ©ebiiu'be buUding.
N. bet aSrunnen
G. beS fflrunnenS
D. bem 33ninnen
A. ben Sninnen
N. bie Srunnen
G. ber Srunnen
D. ben ^ninnen
A. bie Smnnen
61. Like bet Siunnen : bet SBttgen wagon, baS ©tfibt^eh little town,
bad ^rSuIein young lady. Also infinitives used as nouns (538): these
ate neuteT and form no plural ; e. g. baS Sefen reading. Like bag
©ebaube : ba§ ©efcirge mountain range, ber ^aifet emperor, baS gen;
ft« window, bet @fel donkey, baS Siinbel bundle.
62. (2) With vowel modified in the plural : bet (Sarten garden,
bet 3)atet father, bie 311utter -mo^Aer.
N. ber ®atten bet Satei bie aJluttet
G. beS SattenS be« SaterS ber 3Kutter
D. bem ®att«n bem Sater ber SKutter
A. ben ©arten ben 5Bater bie 3Jtutter
N. bie ©atlen bie aSatet bie WaiXvc
G. bet ©iitten ber 9iater ber SWatter
D. ben ©atten ben aSittetn ben 9)Itttterii
A. bie ©arten bie SSiilet bie aKiitter
68. Like bet ©arten : bet §afen harbor. Like bet SJater : ber
aSogel bird, baS Slbfiet convent. Like bie aRutter : bie Icc^ter daughter.
64. Here belong: 1. Many nouns of one syllable — mostly
masculine, as a rule modified in the pluial ; some feminine,
ail modified in the plural; a few neuter, only two or three of
these modilied in the plural. 2. Nouns in tg, ing, ling — all
masculine, with vowel unchanged in the plural. 3. Nouns in
ni§ and fa( — ■ mostly neuter, some feminine, and all with vowel
unchanged in the plural.
65. Nouns in niS double the § before endings.
66. ExAMPi-ES. (1) With vowel modified in the plural : bn
5p^n son, bet %hx% river, bie §anb hand.
bie §anb
bet §Qnb
bet §anb
bie §anb
bie §anbc
ber §anbe
ben ^finbra
bie §anbe
67. Like bet ©o^n : bet ^opf Aeorf, bet Saum tree. Like bet g^Iufe :
bet %la.% place, bet jjufe (long u, hence g thioughout, 4) foot. Like
bie §anb : bie Stabt city.
68. (2) With vowel unchaoged in the plural : ber Xa^ duy, ber
aHo'nat month, bad ©e^eim'ni* .secret.
ber So&n
bet gluS
beS ©o^nes
bes JludeS
bem ©o^ne
bem Jluffe
ben ©D^n
ben Slut
bie ©B^ne
bie Sliije
bet ©a^ne
bet Sllife
ben ©B^nai
ben SlilUen
bie ©e^ne
bie Sluff.
K. bet lag
G. be8 Xa^tS
D. bent laflf
A. ben lag
N. bie -Xa^t
G- bet %a^t
D. ben %a^w
A. bie Stage
bet SSo'nat
beS ano'natfl
bem '
lo'nat
ben SDlo'nat
bie Sno'nate
bet IDici'nate
ben IDio'natcn
bie SSo'iiafe
baS ©e^eim'
be§ ©e^eim'
bem @e
has ©e^eim'
bie @eEi
bet ©et)
ben ©ei
bie ©etjeim'
89. Like ber XaQ : bet Mrm arm, baS ^fetb horse. Like ber lOIonot :
bet ilBnig king, bet ^ilngUng young man, baS ©eflt^t feelintj, ba«
S^id Jul /a(e. Like baS ©e^eimniS ; baS Siinbnia alliance, baS 3fU0=
niS testimonial.
Class III
70. Here belong: 1, Many nouns of one syllable — mostly
neuter, a few masculine. 2. Nouns in turn (plural : turner) —
mostly neuter, a few masculine.
71. There are no feminines in Class III.
78. Examples : bag §au« home, bet SJtann ■man, baS ^er'jogtum
dukedom.
D.n.iized by Google
bag ^aug
beg §aufc»
bem ^auft
bag Oaug
ber 3Kann
beg gJlanneS
bem SBanne
ben 3Hann
bag ^ei/jogtum
beg §er'j09tura8
bem §er')09tum
ba3 ^er'jogtum
bie §aufer
ber OAufer
ben $oitfent
bie §aufer
bie 3'i''wntt
ber 5Ranner
ben aHanntnt
bie ?monner
bie §er'iO0ttimer
ber ^er'jogtamer
ben ^er'aogtamem
bie §«r'jOfltunier
73. Like bag §aug : bag 3)orf vUlage,
^ann : ber ®ott god, ber 33alb Meat.
atttertum antiquity, ber JReit^tum wealth.
bag ftinb child. Like ber
Like bag ^erjoghtm: bag
Class IV
74. Here belong: 1. Many nouns of one syllable — mostly
feminine, a few masculine. 2. All feminines of more than one
syllable, except bie 2Wuttcr, bie jEod)ter (58), and those in niS
and fat (64). 3. Masculines of mote than one syllable in e.
4. Many foreign masculines of more than one syllable with
the accent on the last.
Notice that all nouns in ci, ^eit, leit, fc^aft, unfl and in are
feminine and, having more tban one syllable, belong here.
75. 3)cr ^ert gentleman adds only n in the singular: beg,
bem, ben §crtn ; but en in the plural : bie, ber, ben, bie ^etren.
76. Nouns in in double the n before endings.
77. There are no neuters in Class IV.
78. Examples. (1) Masculines : ber SRenfd^ mnn, ber Stnabt boy.
N. ber ^nenfd^
G. beg ^Renf^en
D. bem ^DienfcEien
A. ben SHenf^eu
N. bie anenf^en
ber m<M\^m
ben 5Dlenf(l&at
bie a)len|(l&eu
G.
ber flnabe
beg finobeu
bem ^nabett
ben Anabett
bie J^naben
ber ftnaben
ben £na6en
bie jinabeu
78. Like ber 331enfi$ : ber ®raf count, ber Sttibenf student. Like
ber Snabe ; ber §afe hare, ber 5!reu|e Fmsaian, ^
niaBGULAR NOUNS
80. (2)
FeminineB r
bie 3i:au woman
bie ©(ume flower, bie
nigin queen,.
N.
bie ®rau
bie SS(ume
bit fliS'nigin
G.
bet grau
ber Slume
ber fie'niflin
D.
ber 'grttu
ber SSIume
ber i?B'niflin
A.
bie 3rau
bie ^lurne
bie flii'nigin
S".
bie 3taueii
bie ©lumen
bie JtB'niflinnen
G.
ber ^auw
ber ©lumen
bet fio'niginnen
D.
ben ^auea
ben ajlumen
ben Re'niflinneii
A.
bie SraufM
bie Slumen
bie Se'niginnen
81. Like bit 3^au : bie ©urg cmtle, bie '^axtti party, bie greifjeit
liberty, bie ^errlic^teit fflori/, bie aSiRenfd&aft science, bie ^pffnung
hope. Like bie Slume : bie JRofe rose, bie ©c^Weftet sister, bie ^if*'
island. Like bie fiBnigin : bie (jreunbin friend.
«a. Irregular Nouns. (1) The following maaeulinea are de-
clined like ©runnen (60), except that most of them are apt to drop
the final n in the nominative sin^tar.
ber ^Tiebc(n) peace
ber ®eban(e thought
bee OtiQube faith
iter ^ufe(il) heap
N. ber fflame
G. beg SlamenS
D. bem 91omen
A. beii 9!amen
ber Slame name
ber Samftn) seed
ber Slftabe[n) damage
ber SJiUe wiH
bie SRamen
bet Mnnien
ben Women
bie iWaraen
88. ^er 5f'f«n "^^^ bet '%t\i rock is declined as follows : gen.
geljens or ^elfen ; dat. ace. g^elfen or ^elS ; plur. ^felfen.
84, (3) The following masculines and neuters form the singular
after Classes I-III (54) ; tiie plural after Class IV (61).
ber 33auer peasant
ber I)Dm lAom
bet 91o(^5at neighbor
bet ©(^mevj pain
bet ©«e lahe
bet ©tant stale
ber i
[ rag
ber SJetler cousin
baS Suge eye
boS Sett fterf
boB Enbe end
baS C^r ear
bet potior doctor
bet ^rpjetfot ;»ro/eM
.:k«Cjt>0^k
PROPER NAMES
N. bet Staal
baS Muge
bet SicFtot
G. beS Staflt(8
beS Slugel
bes a)pnpti
D. bem Btaatt
bemSuge
bem ©Drtot
A. ben ©loot
bag Suge
ben I)oFlDt
N. bie ©toatta
bie Mugen
bie 5)o(ti>'teii
G. ber ©tnolw.
ber Stugea
bev ^otto'tCH
D. ben ©taaltii
ben ange»
ben 3)otto're»
A. bie ©tfloteii
hie augen
bie 2)0tt0'TCR
SB. Sauet and ^a4)bat also form a singular after Class IT:
beS, bem, ben Sauem or 9Jai^bam. ©ee usually forms the plural
©eeit, instead of ©eeen. ©(^merj often forms the gen. sing, ©c^mei:
jeni, instead of ©d^metje^ ; see ^eq, 86.
86. (3) 3)a3 §ei^ heart is declined as follows : beS ^etjenS, bem
§etjen, baS §etj ; bie, ber, ben, bie §ei^en.
87. Proper Names. (1) As in English, proper names rarely
.have more than two forms ; oue for the nominative, dative and
accusative; the other, ending in g, for the genitive. 'The use of
this genitive is more common iu German than in English and in-
cludes the names of countries and places ; but German also -cou-
struea names of countries and places in the dative with Don (as
English does with of), especially when the name ends in g : ftarls
aSu^ Charleys hooky ©d^iiaerS 3SJerfe SckUler's works, bie KUfte 3ieu=
@ngIanbS or gieus^nglanbs ilufte or bie Kiifte ton 3leu=@n((Ianb the coast
of New Mngland, bie ©tta^en oon $aiis the streets of Paris, bie Si^ni>
gin Bon finglanb the queen of England.
88. Names of countries and places are neuter and take an
article only if they are modified : baS ganje Iieut(d)Ianb all Ger-
many, ba^ ft^iine Strofiburfl beautiful ^asbui-g. Two important
exceptions are: bie Sc^TOeij Switzerland, bie lilrfei Turkey; these
two always have the article : bie Santone ber ©^Weij the cantons of
Switzerland.
89. (2) Masculine names of persons ending in an s-sound
usually take the ending enS : SKajenS SSuc^ Maximilian's book.
But with classical names in §, the genitive is usually not indicated,
unless it be by an apostrophe ; JJemoftfjeneS, or DemoflijeneS', SRebcn
Demosthenes' orations. Pemiuine names of persons in e may take
n3 or 8 : §elenen3, or §eteneg, Sleib Helen's dress.
90. The only common plural form is that made by adding i to
family names : S^neibetS gefjen au§ the Taylors are going out, id}
war bei ©d^mibtS Twos at the Smiths'.
91. (3) The indefinite article with generalizing force, or the
rdefinite article with demonstrative force may be used with a per-
I
12 PBOPEB NAMES
sonal name, which is then undeclined : bie SBcrfe exnti S^iHet the
works of a S., bie SReben beS SJemoftljeneg the orations of D., bie
2Berte iti jungen ©chiller the works of the youthful S.
93. But the genitive takes an ending when it is preceded by an
adjective and followed by the noun on which it depends : beS
gto^en griebti((iS S^^iaten Frederick the Greafs dfeds.
98. Combinations like litth Fred and long John require the
dehnite article in German : bet Heine Jri^, ber lange ^o^ann.
94. (4) A name after a title with preceding article is left un-
varied : bev 3:Db beS ffiaiferS, or be8 ^rinjen, aSilljelm the death of
Emperor, or Prince, Wtlliam ; baS §ailS be3 ^PtofeffotS, or beS 5)ol=
totS, or beS §erm, or ber ^rau, or beS (Jrdiilein3, S^mibt the house
of Prof., or Dr., or Mr., or Mm., or Miss, Smith. A name after
a title without preceding article is declined, and the title (except
§ert) is then left unvaried : fi(ii|er, or ^prinj, 3BiI^eIra3 Xob ; $10=
feffot, or S^ottor, or %xaM, or grfiulein, ©d^mibtS §auS ; but ^enn
Sc^raibtS §QuS.
98, ^rofeffor, I'oltcit and some other titles often appear un-
varied even after the article : baS §au5 b«S Iioftor Si^mibt.
96. Instead of ba# §au8 be§ ^tSuIeinS S., one also finds, by at-
traction of the title into the feminine gender, bag ^auS ber ^tdulein
®. When this is likely to be mistaken for the gen. plur., of the
Misses S., the ambiguity may be avoided by saying bag §aug ton
^ritulein <S>., a constrnctlon which, in colloquial langua^, is also
common with other titles : baS §auS bon %xau, or §eirm, ©.
97. Of two titles, the second is regularly left unvaried : baS
§QUS beS ^ptofefforg 2)oltov ©ijmibt or be^ $erm Sloltor ©^mibt ; and,
of course, also; ^rofefjoi: iottor ©^mibtg §au8 or 0ertn ©ollor
©(^mibts §QUS.
98. An appended title is always declined : giHebric^S beS ©ro^en
©iefle Frederick the Greafs victories, bie ©iege beS SBnigS giriebrit^
be« ®ro|i€n.
99. In names of nobility joined by Don, the genitive is in-
dicated on the name before Don only if the one after it is that of
an estate and denotes descent : ber lob SEJit^etma Bon Dvanien the
death of Wmiam of Orange. Other combinations of names, whether
with ttcn or without, indicate the genitive on the last : SQiil^elm
Bon ^umbolbtS SSriefe William von Huvthold^s leUers, ^tmn^ §etne5
©ebi^te Heinrich Hein^s poems.
100. (5) Of the names of the mouths (which are all masculine
and mostly used with the definite article, 462), 3Karj March, TOfli
May, 3uni June and ^uli July are now regularly used without
the genitive -§ ; the others may or may not take i : in ben erfteri
a;aflen be« 50iatj (rarely 2Ufitjeg ; obsolete, aRSrjen) in the first days
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 13
of March ; am SJiotgeit b€3 jloeiten SlprilS or 3lprU on the morning of
the second of April.
101. In "certain phrases, both article and genitive -i are
omitted ; er (am 9litfang 3Kai or ^itte guni or gnbe ©eptember he
came at the beginning of May or in the middle of June or attheend
of Scpt^nber. See also 282, 462.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES
102. Explanatory Notes. (1) A pronoun is a woi-dused for a
noun; an adjective is a word joined to a noun (or pronoun) to
qualify its meaning. An attributive adjective is directly connected
with its noun and represents an attribute as inherent in a noun,
not as asserted of it by means of a verb ; a predicate adjective is
connected with its noun by means of a verb. Thus, in : the rich ^
■man saw that the little ^ girl wfio * spoke to him * was poor ° ,- so he '
said: "Take this''," and gave her^ a shilling — ', *, ', ' and ' are
pronouns, * and " are attributive adjectives, and ' is a predicate ad-
jective. (2) In German, as in English, many pronouns are used
adjectively, often without change of form, as this in this man ; and
in both languages such pronouns are then called pronominal adjec-
tives (or adjective pronouns) and differ from ordinary or descrip-
tive adjectives, like rich and little, by simply limiting their nouns,
without describing them. But in German it is more important
than in English to distinguish these two kinds of qualifiers, for
ordinary German adjectives (when attributive) are subject to two
modes of inflection, called the strong and the weak (125 ff) ; that
is, every ordinary adjective may be inflected with two different
sets of endings, of which it sometimes takes the one and sometimes
the other, according to a principle to be stated later (211) ; where-
as pronominal adjectives are subject to only one of these modes of
inflection. Being thus the simpler and easier of the two kinds,
the pronominal adjectives will be treated first, in connection with
the pronouns.
The Personal Pronouns
103. Inflection.
First Pekson Second Person
K. i^ / bu thou
G. meiner, mein of me ieiner, bein of thee
D. mir to me bir to thee
A. mid^ me hi* thee- ,
14 PERSONAL PRONOUNS
K. tpir we i^ ye, you
G. unfet of us tuet of you
D. \mi to MS aid) to you
A. un* MS tuif you
Third Person : Sikgvlar
masc. fern. neut.
N. tx he fie she eS it
G. feiner, fern of him i^ret of her feinev, fein of it
D. itim *o Aiwi i^r *o her \^m to it
A. i^ him [ie Aer cS it
Third Person ; Plural
Common GoDder
N. fie they
G. i^rer of them
D. i^en to them
A, fie th&m
104. For the use of the genitives with certain verbs see 117, 477,
479. For meinett)al6en, meineth>egen, um meinettriHen etc., forms
containing the stems of the genitives, see 663. For the possea-
sives, which ai'e likewise related to the genitives, see 133 ff.
105. The grammatical geuder of the personal pronoun (as of
pronouns in general) ^rees with that of the noun to which it re-
fers, but with nouns like ba3 ^aulein, bag 9)iabi$en, baS SBeib, the
natural gender prevails : xi) rief ba§ 3Rabi$en, unb fie tarn I called
the girl and she came; see also 138.
106. Use in Address, ^u and i^c are used to address per-
sons vrith vchom the speaker is intimate : loo bift bu gflocfeii,
liebet SQtubet ? where have you been, dear irother ? 3cf) bin mit
unjeret ©diroeftet fjiei: bet SBoter getnefen / have leen vdfh our sister
here to see father. SSJte £)Qbt it)t if)rt gefunbeti ? lootjl ? How did
you find him ? well ? Similarly in addressing young children.
If the speaker is not intimate with the person or persona ad-
dressed, he uses ©ie (originally the third person plural, but
capitalized) with the verb in the third person plural: lua^
tDii«fd)en ©ie, mein §err ? or meine §en:en ? what do you wish,
sir? or gentlemen? 3c^ toat flcftetn bei 3f)ncil, ^tt ©t^mibt /
PERSONAL PIIONOTTNS 15
was at your house yesterday, Mr. Smith. 3)ii and i^t are com-
mon in fairy tales, in poetry and in elevated or archaic style
(where il)t may also be applied to one person). All three, bu,
i^r and @te, are usually rendered by you ; hence you must be
translated into German according to the relation of the person
speaking to the person addressed.
107. lu letters, bu and i^t (as also betn and euer, 134 ft.) are
written with capitals.
108. Substitutes for the Personal Pronouns. For the per-
sonal pronouns of the third peiBon when depending on a prep-
osition and referring to objects without life, German commonly
substitutes the adverb bo (before a vowel bat) compounded
with the preposition, or it uses some other adverb : bcr ^nalie
natjin bie ^bcr unb fdiriet bamit (instead of mit i^r) the boy took
the pen and wrote {therewith) with it; ^let ftanbcn jtif^C, unb
barauf (instead of auf it)nen) (agen Bide ©Jitter here stood some
tables and (thereon) on them lay many hooks ; cribtii^ fonben wit
bo^ 3'i""*f ^^^ fliHSfil ^inein (instead of in e§) finally we found
the room and went into it.
109. Special Uses of cd. (1) @$, and also the neuter demon-
stratives ba§ and bieS,* often serve as the indefinite subject of
some form of [ein he with a predicate nominative of auy gender,
the verb agreeing in number and person with the predicate nom-
inative : a) i^ fliaube, e6 ift meine SRuttev, ober ift t& boc^ meine
©C^Weper? I think it is my mother, or is it after all my sister? b)
eS ftnb feine SItetn or feine ©Item finb e« (or finb'S) it is, or they are,
his parents; c) hjel^e SUcfeet na^m er? 65 Waren bie beften, bie er
na^nt which books did he take? It was the best ones that he took ;
d) bag, or bieS, ift mein ©ruber that, or this, is my brother ; e) ba§,
or bie§, fmb meine ©^loefieni those, or these, are my sisters ; f) ^et
tp ba§ SBilb, bieS 6ia ii^ unb baS finb ©ie here is the picture, this is
myself and that is you.
110. There is this difEereoce, however, between the use of eS on
the one hand and that of bag and bieS on the other : when the
predicate of eS is a personal pronoun (as of bieS and bad in 109 f),
the order of subject and predicate nominative is necessarily 're-
versed ; hence,
>Tbe demonstretlTea are uticlpated here in order both to eompare and eontrut (110)
their ,.«»,& that ff.*. Dinilized by Google
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
„ea Wn id)" (noi
■ ,e« i(t W)
buti(f)feine8 <V«/
„es feib i^r (no
r „e3 i(t i^f)
but itir feit. ea it U ym
„e3 mat cr"
but er loor til itims he
„e§ iDowrt Sie- 1
[uor „e3 mat ©ie")
but ©ie lOQTCH e« ti K«s
„e8 ift Tie"
but fie ift eg ii (s she
„ift(«f'e?"
but lit (tees? isUshef
111. (2) Qi may stand as tlie anticipatory or grammatical sub-
ject of a verb, the latter agreeing iu number with the true or
logical subject. In this use, e8 often corresponds to the expletive
there and, being used chiefly to vary the older, disappears (like
there) when the sentence is turned bo as to begin with the true
subject: eS toar tinmal tin Kiinig there was once a king; t% tamen
einmat brei Sriiber there came once three brothers (but brei 93tiiber
lamen einmal) ; eS Ube bie girei^eit ! long live freedom. ! See also 424.
113. (3) @S may represent a predicate word or phrase of a pre-
ceding clause, or a preceding statement in general. In this use, t&
sometimes corresponds to so and sometimes has no equivalent in
English : jie ioairen reit^, abet je^t pub fie eS nii^t me^t theij were rkh,
but are so im longer; bet eine bon i^nen ift Solbat, bet anbere toiU eS
toetben one of them is a aoldi^, the other in going to be ; ift eS Waljr,
bofe et tot i^ ? 3Kan fagt e^ is it true that he is dead ? They say so.
The Rbplbxivb Recipeocal and Intensive
Pronouns
113. SefleziTe Pronouns occur mostly in the accusative or
the dative. For the first and second persons, singular and
plural, German uses the corresponding personal pronouns as
i-eflexives; but for the third person, dative and accusative of
both numbers and all genders, it lias a special form, namely firf).
114. (1) Inflection of the present indicative of a verb used
with the reflexive pronoun in the accusative :
ii^ fveue mid) / am glad, I rejoice toit fteuen un8
bu freuft bic^ thou art glad, thou rcjoieeet i^t fteut eud^
er freut fid) etc. etc. fte fteuen fit^
fie fteut fid^ ©ie freuen fic^
e§ fteut fi(^
Thus also : li} wunbere mi(^ I wonder, am surprised, xi) fe^ne mic^
(na(l6) I long {for), '\ij fitflete mic^ lam, vexed, \i) f(^(ime raii^ lam
ashamed.
3.n.iized by Google
REFLEXIVE PRONOtTNa 17
115. (2) Inflection of the present indicative of a verb with
the reflexive pronoun in the dative :
i(^ ((^mei^le mit IfioMer myself Wit f(^mei<^eln vxiM
bu f(^itKi(^eIft bit thou fiatterest thysdf i^t fc^etc^elt eu(^
et f(!^mei(^elt ji(^ hefiatterx himself fie fi^mei^eln fic^
fie f<^mei<^elt ftc^ etc. ®te fc^metc^eln ftc^
ee i<i&mei(^e[t fi^
Thus also : it^ btn!e mir / imagine, \i) bilbe mit ein / imagine, i(^
ge^e mil Wii^e I take pains.
lia. (3) A reflexive proaoun, accusative or dative, may unite so
closely with its verb that the two form a single notion in which
the original reflex action disappears. That many such verbs,
though reflexive in form, are no longer so in meaning is clear from
the fact that their English equivalents are not reflexive ; as in all
the examples of 114 aud 116, except fit^ lc(nnei(^eln. Moreover,
some of these German reflexive verbs may even require the inten-
sive felbft (123) if the reflex action is to be restored and clearly
expressed ; thus, i<I) iicgett mic^ means simply / am, vexed, not 7
vex ■myself, which would be \6) drgere mit^ feI6ft. The verbs with
which tbe reflexive pronoun retains its original meaning are mostly
transitive verbs used with a reflexive pronoun for an object, and
most of these are also reflexive in English, as xi) table mit^ / blame
mygelf, bu ft^neibeft bi(^ you ciit yourself. See also 472.
117. (4) Reflexive pronouns in the genitive are needed occasionally with
verba taking ihe genitive as sole object (4TT) or as secondsry object (4TS);
they are then supplied from the personal pronouns and mostly used with (tlbft
(123): fit fltlxntt l^rer jtlbfl nle ahe never tMitk« of herself, ttbatmt bi(^ btintt
felb(t have pity on thyself .
118. Notes on the Reflexive fid^. (1) The reflexive firfi,
as appears from 115, has six different equivalents in English:
himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself, yourselves, any one of
which may at times require to or for before it : ct (or fie) fagtc
fi(^ gleicfi : bai gcljt nic^t he (or she) said at once to himself (or
to herself) : that won't do ; fie fjolten fic| ^olj au§ bem SSJalbc
they fetched wood for themselves out of the forest. To these
meanings must be added that of one's self, when fic^ is used with
the infinitive, as in fidj frE|mci(f|ctn flatter one's self; that of the
corresponding reflexive without self or selves, often when fid|
is used after a preposition : et t)ot ®clb bet fit^ he has money
18 KECIPBOCAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS
witk him, fie f)at ©ctb 6et fi^ she has money with her etc.; that
of each other or one another, for which see 122.
lie. (2) In a dependent clause, ft(^ refers to the subject of that
clause ; to refer to the subject of the principal clause, a personal
pronoun is used : ber Secret flberlie^ eS bent finafcen, o6 er [id^ baS S3in^
faufen obet tton itjtn lei^en tootle the teacher left U to the boy whether
he would buy (himself) the book or borrow it Jrom him (i.e. the
teaeher; if another, a third, person is referred to, a noun or name
or a demonstrative, as biefem, should be used).
120. (3) In an infinitiTO phrase, fit^ refers as a rule to the
logical subject of the infinitive, that is, to the substantive which
would be the subject if the phrase were turned into a clause ; the
subject of the principal clause is referred to, as in 119, by means
of a personal pronoun : ber Server tlberliefe e5 bem ffna6en,.fii^ baS
39u(^ pi laufen ober bon i^tn ju Ici^en = ber Scorer tiberliefe ei bem Jtna:^
ben, ob ex jidi ba« Sui^ taufen ober «on iEjm lei^en tooK? (119) ; bet
Se^KT befall bem JInaben, ji<^ bad Sui^ )u tauftn unb e^ ilim gu getfjen
= ber Setter befatjl bem Knaben, er foDe |i(^ bag Sui^ laufen unb e8
i^nx jeigen the teacher ordered the boy to buy the book and show it to
181. But in certain iiiflnitivo phraaea after taffm (543), ^Brcll or fe^tn (545),
fl0 refeis to the Hutject of the principal clause; namely; (1) always when
the dependent infinitive haa passive force: tc Itefi fi<5 "("^ ^ufe faftrtn he had
kimge^ drinen home, tx ^Brtc fxdf riifen he heard kimte^caUed; (2) usually when
the dependent infinitive is intransitive : fit Itefi i^n ju fii^ lotnmcn «Ae had him
come to her (but if the verbal notion is ju ■ |li^ - tolitintn, the infinitive is virtually
reflexive ; fl^ then refers to the logical subject i^n and the meaning of the
sentence is she allowed him to come to or reconer his senses ; similarly, and
more clearly, in fie Ilcfi i^tl fi(& Ollf ben Sftamoi btrmncn the let him recall the
name); tX ]a% or ^Brte, twn $Mtl auf fit^ jiiflitgtn he sate, or heard, the bird
flyitig loward him (auf l^n would refer to another peteon or object),
1S8. The Reciprocal Pronoim is the indeclinable einanber ; but
where no ambiguity can arise, un8, eu(^ and fi(^ are likewise used
in a reciprocal sense : totr fallen einanber or un* (ace.) we saw each
other or one another; loir begegneten einanber or unS (dat.) we met
each other or one another; i^t fe^t einanber or eut^ you see each
other or one another; fte begepen einanber or fii^ thiy meet eaeh
other or one another.
123, The Intensive or Emphatic Pronoun is the indeclinable
felbft (or felBet): i<^ felbft Xoax ba I myself was there, ©ie (laben eS
felbft get^an you did it yourself or yourselves, ber fiaifer felbft tDm=
manbierte bie S^ruplJen the emperor himself commanded the troops, fie
fc^Idgt ftt^ felbft she strikes herself.
134, ©elbft is also used adverbially, meaning euen (728).
r , .1 ,.Ck>0^1c
SIBOMU ASD W£A£ BMDIMOS
Strong (Independent) and Weak (Dependent)
Endings
125. For the inflection of most of the pronouns yet to be
treated, as for that of all attributive adjectives (pronominal
and ordinary, 102), German uses two sets of endings, called
the strong or independent, and the weak or dependent:
126. Strong Endings
127. Weak Endings
A, en
198. The strong endings show
five distinct forms : et, eS, em, e,
en, and are substantially the
same as those of the definite ar-
ticle, only with t for ie, and ti
for aS. The endings of the ar-
ticle are therefore classed with
the strong.
130. The indefinite article, as
also the attributive pronominal
adjectives mein niy, bein thif,
your, fein his, i^t her, fein its,
unfer our, euer j/our, Hjt their,
3^r your and lein no, take the
strong endings, except in three
cases (nom. sing. masc. ; nom.
and ace. sing, neut,), which are
without endings. This modifi-
cation of the strong inflection is
called the defective inflection,
and the modified endings are re-
ferred to as the defective end-
ings.
A. en e e en
129. The weak endings show
only two distinct forms : e and
en. For the correct use of these
it is important to notice: 1. In
four cases (ace. sing. masc. ;
nom. and ace. sing. fern. ; dat.
plui.), the weak endings are
the same as the strong. These
cases may therefore be set aside,
as in them the distinction be-
tween strong and weak disap-
pears and no difficulty can arise.
2. In the other cases, the weak
endings are dependent on the
strong; that is, a pronoun or
adjective takes a weak ending
only when preceded by a pro-
nominal word with a strong end-
ing, and, if so preceded, takes it
regularly. For these cases,
therefore, it is necessary to
study carefully the combinations
of strong and weak endings, as
given in 131, and not only the
weak endings, which, unlike the
strong, have no independent
131. Strong and Weak Endings Combined:
eg en
en
138. Notes. 1. For a. case in which a weak ending occurs alone, that ie,
independently of a preceding strong ending, see 226. 2, For a few cases in
which a pronominal modifier with strong ending faiis to make a following
ordinary adjective take the weak ending, see 225. 3. In combinations of
several pronominal adjectives, the second (or third) takes the weak ending
if it is capable of being used after the definite article, but tlii" applies only
to onber-, btlb-, Piel and lutnlg (194 ff); otherwise, such adjectives do not
affect one another; hence: aUt bitfe (not .bleftn") Seatt ail these people; allc
meint (not „m(tnen") alteii Silt^r all my old books; bit(e8 jeitiea (not ..(einen")
dltcftcn ^reiinbce i^fthis his oldest friend. Thus also when the last word is used
prononunatly or substantively; a&e biefe all tKeae, a&ii bitfeS all this etc.
The PossEasTVE Pronouns and Adjectives
133. Three Uses. Fire Fonns. The posaessives are de-
rived from the personal pronouns, the stem of each possessive
being tliat of the genitive of the corresponding pronoun, as
shown in 134. They are used as predicate adjectives, as attrib-
utive adjectives and as pronouns ; but appear in five different
forms.
134. Form I. As predicate adjectives, the possessives have the
form of the stem and are invariable :
Petnmal piononnB
FoMeasivea
PeisoDol pronouns Posaeaalves
i*
meiit(ei:)
mein mine
b«
bein(er)
bein lh«ie,ym
er
iein(et)
fefn kk
fie
i^ret
i^t hen
e^
(ein(er)
lein ii»
i^rec
Examples : ba8 §au8 ift mein the_kouse i
■ bie @^re (inb unfer the victory and the honor
SReii^ unb bie Staft unb bie $en;lic()teit thine
euer yours
i^r tkeirx
3l)r yours
power, and the glory ; bie StttC^e ift meitl vengeance is »
; bet ©ieg unb
rs ; bein ift baS
the kingdom,, and the
.:k«Ck>O^IC
135. Form n. As attributive adjectiveB, the possessives
have tlie defective (130) endings. The nominatives of the
singular are
mein
meine
mein
my
unfet unfere unfet
our
bein
beine
bein
thy, your
euet eueie euei
your
fein
feine
fein
his
t^r t&tc i^
their
i^r
i^re
i^r
her
31f» 3^ve 3^r
your
fern
feme
fein
its
188. When declined, unfer often, and euet usually, drops either
the e before the i of the stem or the e of the declensional ending
(229). — The former e is regaiarly dropped in ber unfriflt etc., ber
eurige etc, (143).
1S7. Examples :
my brother t
K, mein Stubet
G. mein (6 SntberS
D. mein era a9rubet
A. mein en 33ruber
N. meine Sriiber
G. meiner Sriiber
D. meinen Stiibern
A. mein e Siiiber
*• daughter kia or Ua house
bei
ine ^od^tec
er aroi^ter
er aroc^tet
in t 2:oe^tei:
ine, 3;6(^tet
,nen a:e<^tem
your flower
euie aSlume
euier S9Iume
euier 93(ume
eure ajlume
eure SMumen
euciT Slumen
D, unferen Sij^nen euten ©lumen
N. unfer <Bo%n
G. unfeteS So^neS
D. unfeiem ©o^ne
A, unfetttt ©o^n
N. unfete SB^e
unfer er
mfere SB^ne
ire Slumen
fein ^aui
feints §aufed
(eineu ^aufe
fein ^au§
feine §aufer
fein ft J^Sufet
fein en §aufem
feinf §aufet
her or thmr child
if)r Sinb
i^reS Sinbe«
i^rem ffinbe
i^r Sinb
iljre jtinber
i^rer ^inbet
ifjten ^inbern
ibce flinber
ISS. For the agreement in gender in such sentences as ba Iteg
baS SJeib i&ten (instead of feinen) JStufl fte^ten the woman then left her
water-pot, see lOd, also 145,
D.n.iized by Google
22
189. Instead of the possessive adjectives, German often uses the
definite article, either alone or with the dative of a personal or
reflexive pronoun, provided that no ambiguity can arise thereby.
Thus : instead of fit ijattt bie 39lumen in i^t« ^anti, we find com-
monly [k ^atte bie Blumen in bet §anb she had the fiowers in her
hand ; instead of ei; brucfte meine J^anb, almost always tx btilctte mir
bie §Qnb he pressed my hand ; instead of et btai^ fetn ©ein, almost
always er brad^ jit^ ba^ Sein he broke his leg.
140. Forms HI, IV, V, As pronouns, the possessives have the
same English equivalents as the predicate adjectives in 134, and
appear in the following three forms :
141. Form III, 143. Form IV, pre- I4a. Form V, pre-
having the strong ceded by the definite ceded by the definite
endings. The nomi- article and having article and having
natives of the singu- the weak endings, the suffis ig with the
lar are The nominatives of weak endings. The
the singular are nominatives of the
singular are
(einer
i^rtr
feinw
bcine
nieined
beintd
feiu
unfcrei unjere uniertS
eurei euTC euitd
i^ter i^vt ititeB
Inflection of iiieintl, t, tS:
SINGULAR
iwr, bic,
ber, bie,
bet, bie,
ber, bie,
bet, bie.
baS mciiie
bn§ beine
bttS feiue
bng itree
bo 3 leine
bo 3 unjere
bag eure
bttg i^te
ber, bie, bad meinige
bet, bic, baS beinigc
ber, bie, ba§ feinige
ber, bie, ba3 i^rige
ber, bie, boSfeiitige
bet, bie, baSunftige
bet, bie, bag eutige
ber, bie, baS i^tige
ber, bie, bnSS^riflt
Inflection of ber, bie, baS m
mtr me in em
N. bet nieine bie i
N- meine
N. bie t
G. ber i
D. belt 1
O'-^C
POSSESsrvBS 23
Inflection of unfeTCt, t, tS: Inflection of btr, bie, \>ai utijere:
N. unt«er unlete mi(erei8 bet unjert bie uiifere boSuntere
G. uiitereS unjerw unfereS beS mijeten bee unfeicn beS unieten
N. iinfete N, bie unferen
G. untetK G. bet unferen
On the endings consult 126, 128. On the endings consult 127, 129, 131,
144. Examples of Forms III, IV, V : bein Snibet ift )u §aufe,
meinet (HI), or bet meine _(IV), or bcr meiniflf (V) ift auf ban ^elbe
your brother is at home, mine is in the field ; idf laS e§ nic^t in ^f^iem
Suctie, fonbem in meinem (HI), or in bem metnen (IV), or in bcm
metni(|(n (V) I did not read it in your book, but in mine; ift bag i^r
5ffiagen obet (einer (HI), or bet feine (IV), or bet feinige (V)? 6§ ift
feiner (HI), or bet feint (IV), or bee feiniflC (V) is that her (or their)
carriage or his? It is his ; tringen ©ic mir einige ©ticket ; toenn Sie
meine (III), or bie nteinen (IV), or bie meinigen (V) nii^l ftnben fiJnnen,
fo bringen ©ie S^te (HI), or bie '^^xtn (IV), or bie S^rigen (V) bring
me some books ; if you cannot find mine, bring yours.
145. Forms and Dses distiaguished. The use of the attributive
posseasivea (Form II), whose equivalents are the shorter English
possessives my, thy etc., presents no difftculty if the beginner is
told to make their endings agree in gender, number and case with
the word denoting the object possessed, not, as he ia sometimes
tempted to do, with the word denoting the possessor, whose gender,
number and person are indicated by the stem of tho possessive or
by the contest. This difference between the ofUcc of the stem of
the possessives and the office of their endings explains also the use
of the other Forms ; for though all four have but one set of equiva-
lents in English, namely the longer possessives tnine, thine etc.,
German distinguishes by inflection the possessive pronouns (Forms
HI, IV, V) from the uninflected predicate adjectives (Form I);
and corresponding to this difference in form, there is the following
distinction in meaning and use : the bare steins of Form I denote
ownership and nothing more; hence biefeS §Qu^ ift mein means
simply this house is my property or it belongs to me, and to no one
else; in other words, this house is here distinguished merely in
general from all objects that are not mine. But the pronominal
Forms with their strong endings (added to the stem, as in III, or
24 DEMONSTRATIVES
contained in the article, as ia IV and V) denote more than mere
ownership ; they also refer the object possessed to a certain class.
Hence biefe§ §au3 ift meineS (III) or baS meine (IV) or baS meinige
(V) means this house is the one (or the house) that belongs to me ;
in other words, this house is here distinguished not merely from all
OBJECTS that are not -mine, but also from all houses that are not
mine. Owing to this their greater distinguishing or defining power,
Forma III, IV and V are the only possessives used after the indef-
inite subjects %i, baS and bieS ; thus; icem ge^Brt bet SHing? ift eS
beinet or bet beine or ber beinige (not „ift eg betn")? 3a, eS ift meiner
or ber meine or ber tneintge (not „eS ift mein") to whom, does the ring
belong ? etc. Porm I occurs after ti, bag and bieS only when these
pronouns are definite and refer to a neuter noun ; thus : unb baS
^auS,'^ ^ab' xii eS nii^l beja^It? ifl eS ntt^t mein? and the house?
didn't Ipayfor it? is it not mine {my property)?
148. NoTs. The diBtJnction between thi» house is cheap and thi» hoase is the
cheap one ia parallel to that between bieftS ^u8 i|i nidn (1) and bicffS $aue
If) mtineS (III) or baS melnt (IV) or bo« mrinige (V). If Enghah could use <me
after poBseasiye adjectivea as after others, it might also distinguish between Mia
house is mine and this femse ia " my one " ; for one in thia use ia the equivalent
of the German ending (2T2J,
147. Frequency. Of the possessive pronouns, Form IV is the
least common, both in writing and in speaking, and is chiefly used
in the higher styles. Form III is more common in speaking than
Form V, but in writing both are equally common.
For the substantive use of the possessives see 234.
The Dbmonstrativb Pbonouns and Adjectives
148. The DemonstratiTes are
ber, bie, boS that, that one; he, she, it
biefet, biefe, biefeS this, this one, the latter
jener, jene, jeneS that, that one, the former
berjeniae, biejenige, baSjenige that, that one; he
berfelbe, biefelbe, baSfelbe the same
fotf^er, fotc^e, foIi^eS such, such a one.
Each of these words is used both as pronoun and as adjective.
140. ^tr, as adjective, is infiected like the de&nite article and
differs from it only in greater emphasis, which is often indicated
by spaced letters: bag Su($ liabe ill) gelefen, gieb mir tin anbereS that
hook I have read, give me another.
3.n.iized by Google
DEMONSTRATIVES
150. $ti, as pronoun, is inflected as follows :
G.
k.fi.n
beren
beHm
beren
D.
bet
bem
benen
A.
ben
bie
hai
bie
Examples : bet niit bem @tod in bet §anb, bcr ift e§ thai one
(or that fellow') with the stick in kit harid, he is the one; metttctt
@ie bie bott ? do you -mean her yoiider ? e§ fam etn Ttann, bet roar
alt, unb beffeii ©ot)n mar trout there came a man, he was old, and
his son was sick ; ic^ fat) 9)f arie fleftem mit i^r Jreunbin wnb beren
SBruber / saw Mary yesterday with her friend and her friends
brother (if the possessive adjective ifjrem were used here in-
stead of the demonstrative pronoun bcrcn, the meaning would
be Mary's brother') ; \a, ba§ finb (plural verb, 109) ^nbf^u^e,
ober bie finb ju biinn, bte lotU irE| nidjt yes, those are gloves, but they
are too thin, they are not what I want ; ba& finb @ie that's you ;
id) fa^ einigc ^ftanjen, beren SWten waren abgefaden / saw some
plants, their blossoms had fallen off; ba traf fic JWei Sinbet, unb
benen gab fic ba§ SBrot then she met two children, and she game tlie
bread to them. ; fatjren ©ie mit 3l)ren 5|?ferbcn, ober mit benen 3f)re§
(^reurtbcg ? do you drive with your horses or with those of your
friend ? infotge beffen (gen. sing. neut. with the preposition in=
folge) tarn er gar nic^t in consequence of this he did not come at
all. See also 178. For the position of the verb in a demon-
strative clause like beren Sliiten iDorcn abgefaHcn (as distin-
guished from beren ^liiten abgefaUen Waren, relative clause), see
587, 594 ; also 170.
ISl. The genitive singular neuter is be§ in certain compounds,
as beSWegen, be6^»al6, adverbs meaning on that account; be^letc^en,
adv., likewise (158) ; and in archaic or poetic language; beS rft^me
ber blut'ge S^ljrann fid) nidflt of that the bloody tyrant shall not boast ;
so the masculine before relatives : beS, bet oline ©tinbe War of him
wlio was -without sin. The genitive plural is berer before a relative
clause : er beneibete baS ©litd berer, bie ttbet itjm ftanben he envied the
happiness of (those who stood above him) his superiors. i^iOOqIc
DEMONSTKATIVES
152. I)iefet and 3cii«, as pronouns and as adjectives, liave
the strong endings :
m. f. n. m.f.n.
N. biefer bieff bief e8 or bie« (shortened) bie[t
G. bieftfi bic(er , biefe8 biefer
D. biefem biefer bieftnt bieftn
A. biefen biefe bieftSor bie6 (shortened) biefe
N. jener jene jeneS jene
G. jen t& jener jen e8 jen er
etc. etc.
Examples : biefer SRanii ift alter ols jener this man is older
than that one ; Sutfc unb SBebftcr Xoaxm grofee SRebwcr ; biefer hjor
eiit Slmerifancr, jener ein Sridnber Burke and Webster were great
orators ; the latter was an American, the former an Irishman ;
bieS ift mein ^u«, unb bie:3 ftnb (plural verb, 109) mcine ©drten
thU is my house, and these are my gardens ; bies) bin id) this is I.
153. ^erjcntge and Sietfetbe are compounds of bet (inflected
like the article throughout) and jenig- (from jen-) or fetb-, with
weak endings in both uses, as pronouns and as adjectives :
N. berjenigt biejenige baejemge biejenigen
G. be^iemgett beqenigen beSjenistn beijenigeit
D. bemjenigeii berjeniQen bemienigen benjem(|fn
A. benjenig en biejenig t baSjenige biejenig en
N. betfelbe biefelbe basfelbe biefelben
G. besfelben berfelbeit besfelbew betfelben
©erjenige is an emphatic bet and is used chiefly before relatives.
Examples: biejenigen Scute, bie Diet ©clb t)a6cn, geben me^r
the people who have much -money give more; biejenigen, bic bid (Setb
^aben, gebcn mct)t those who have etc. ; eS ift betfelbe SKann, ben
ic^ geftetn faf) it is the same man that I saw yesterday ; eg ift bei:=
[■.:,t.:f:k«CiOO^|i
;J
INTBBBOGATIVE8 27
fet&e, ben id) geftcm fal) it is the same man that etc. ; fie faflte mir
ba^gfclbe she told me ike same.
154. €o[if|cr, as pronoun and a^ adjective, lias the strong
endings: fotc^e gtc(f)f)eit! suck impudence! foti^en Seuten gebe ic^
nic^tS to such people I don't give anything ; biefcr ^ut geffiQt mic
nic^t, gebcn @ie mir foldjen this hat does not suit me, give me such
a one ; cr lott nur fot^, bie fEeifeig finb he praises only such as
(lit. ■who') are industrious.
155. Eut: 1) foli^ is regularly uninflected when followed by
the indefinite article : geben @ie mir fol(^ einen §ut or fold^ ein Sui
give me suck a hat or such a book; 2) it is frequently uninflected
when followed by an ordinary adjective (224) ; 3) it may be pre-
ceded by the indefinite article and is then inflected like an ordinary
adjective after the indefinite article (223). For ]o tin such, see
729 f.
The Interrogative Pronouns — The Interrogative
Adjective
156. The Interrogatives are
tow who; luaS what;
toeli^er, ioeli^e, tnelc^eS what, whieh.
3Ser and \aa^ are pronouns only ; icelt^er is pronoun or adjective.
157. ^cr and ^a# have no plural; the cases of the singu-
lar are
N. inet who Id oil what
G. tueffcn whose loeffen of what
D. toem to ichom wanting
A. loen whom, iDaS what
Examples : wet tommt ba ? who comes there ? loeffen S8uc^
f)a£ien ©ie ? whose book have you ? loem gaben ©te eS ? to whom
did you give it ? ma fjaficn ©ie gcjetjen unb loaS ^abcn ©ie gefagt ?
whom did you see, and what did you say ? Or in indirect (de-
pendent) questions ; cr fragt, met ba tommt he asks who is com-
ing there ; fte ftagte, toen i(§ gefel)cn I)fitle she asked whom I had
3.n.iiz;d by Google
28 INTBBROGATIVES
IBS. (1) A shorter form loeS, for wejjen of what, occurs in WeSs
ijalb and WeSloeflen, adverbs meaning why, what for, on what ac-
count (161).
159. (2) In place of the missing dative of iraS with a prep-
osition, German commonly uses the adverb too (before a vowel
ttiDt) compounded with a preposition (108). Such compounds
iBDtan whereat, at what iDorin wherein, in what
iDDtauf whereon, on what loomit wherewith, with what
lOOtauS out of what Itoju whereto, to what.
Examples : ivorin foti ic^ e§ fdjidcii ? in what shall I send it ?
Womit fc^rteb cr ? what was he writing with ? id) fragtc, TOorin 'v6)
e§ fd)iiien joCe / asked in what I should send it, Cf. 173.
160. (3) SBaS often means why? or how? Thus: fein SBunbet,
bafe tx fadt ; roaS Ifiuft tx fo fi^netl ? no wonder that he falls, why
does he run so fast? luaS Iflufen bie 5Pferbe bo)^ f(^neH ! how fast the
horses run t>
161. (4) Sa« may stand for cthiaS : Ijabm 6ie loaS ©uteS? have
you anything good ?
162. (5) In reasl fiir ein, a phrase meaning what sort or kind
of, IdqS is indeclinable and flir has no prepositional force : TOaS
fiir ciri SKann (nom.) ift er V what kind of a man is he? mit VoaS
fiir cincr ^bcr (dat. after mit) ft^rcitcn @ic? with what kind of
pen do you write ? In exclamations, tuaS ffic must often be
rendered by lohat . . .! e.g. loaS fiir SSerge imb Wai fiir SSainne !
what mountains and what trees !
163. SSelt^, as pronoun and as adjective, has the strong
111. f. n. ni.f.n.
N. votii) er wd^ e loeltt) eS \w\^ t
G. \ot\i}ti hjeld&er Iceld^eS Wefc^ier
D. Ireli^ em tceli^ er wetc^ em Me^ en
A. raeld^ ctt tDel(^ e Wel(^ e€ Weld^e
164. 9Bcl(I)er may refer to a person or a thing; — as adjec-
tive meaning what or which, as pronoun meaning only which :
RELATIVES 29
mit Ipctrfjcm 93rubcr torn \k ? with which brother did she come ?
loetd)e§ 93u[^ tooDcn ©ic ? which, or what, look do you want ? v\\t
hjrfc^m Don bcil SStiibcm font fie ? with which of the brothers did
she come ? iBefc^e^ Don biefen SBfi(t)em rtolten @ie ? which of these
books do you want ?
166. Before the indefinite article, Welc^er often drops its ending :
WelA ein ^ann ! what a man ! (Also before ordinary adjectives,
see 224).
The Relative PRONotrNS — The Relative Adjective
166. The Relatives are
bet, bie, bag who, which, that
toeti^er, loelc^e, lueli^eS who, which, that
toer he who, whoever
WaS what, whatveeff, that which, a thing which.
3)cr, ttJCr and roaS are pronouns only ; locldict is pronoun or
adjective,
167. Set is inflected like the demonstrative pronoun ber
(150) and may refer to a person or a thing: a) ber ^ann, ber
Qcftem l)ict loar the man who was here yesterday ; b) baS SBuc^,
bad id) Icfe the hook (thaf) I am reading ; c) bic, bie ba Warcn,
belamen ®cjcE|cnIe those who were there received presents; ber.,
SBagen, in bcm cr lom tke carriage in which he came.
188. (1) In sentences like 167 b, the relative is never left out
as it often is in English. But instead of the demonstrative ante-
cedent and the relative pronoun (as bie, bie in 167 c), Geiman often
uses a form of ber as a compound relative containing both anteced-
ent and relative : bie ba toaren betamen ©ef^ente those who were etc.
169. (2) ®cv is the relative used when the antecedent is a per-
sonal pronoun of the first or second person : wai tueifet bu baSon, b«
nie i^nget gelitten ijat ? what do you know about it who have never
suffered from hunger ? Usually, however, the personal pronoun is
repeated, after the relative, making the verb first or second person ;
loaS loeifet bu bauon, ber bu nie §unger gelitten ^aft what do you know
etc. ; tc^, bet ii^ (ein Df)t ftlr ^ufl( ^abe Iwho have no ear for musie ;
tai}, bit i^t bei aSatat^pn foi^tet, roitb man nie Betflenen you who
so RELATIVES
fought at Marathon wUl always 6e rememiered. Similarly after a
vocative ,- fiifeer ^riebe, ber bu ton bcm §tmm«I bift ! sweet peace that
art from, heaven !
170. (3) In simple narrative, especially in fairy tales, Ger-
man often uses the demonstrative ber for the relative bet (or
iBctdjcr, 171) : e« rear ciiimal cin SRann, bcr rear orm (for bet
arm rear) there was once a man, and he was poor (for who was
poor"). For the position of the verb, see 587, 594.
171. SStl^T, a& pronoun and as adjective, is inflected like
the interrc^ative Welder (163) and used like the relative bcr:
a) ber 3Rann, rerirftcr geffcm f)ia rear the man who was here yes-
terday ; b) bo§ SSu(^, ioctrf[c§ (never omitted) ic§ tcfe the book
(thaf) I am reading ; e) bie, IBcIctje ba Warcn, &efamcn ®efd|enfc
those who were there received presents ; d) bcr SBogen, in iDcIc^ciii
cr tare the carriage in which he came.
172. The Choice between liet and welifieT, as relative pronouns,
ia largely a matter of style and euphony. But the genitive of loeI=
i)ix, as pronoim, ia seldom used, that of bet being preferred : bie
SBii^Et, beren (not „WeIt^er") 99lattet jeitiflen waren the books the
leaves of which were torn; et flJtitflt oft Bon ©l)arfaml«it, €in«r
^^ugenb, beten (very rarely reedier) cr fiii) nit()t rti^men fottte he often
speaks of economy, a virtue of which he should not boast. On the
other hand, weli^er, and not beren, must be used in the following
sentence because the relative bet ia not used adjectively : et fjjtit^t
oft Hon ©ijorfamleit, Welc^et ^^ugenb {of which virtue) et \i^ ni(^t ril^=
men foffte.
173. Substitutes for twt and Ivcbfitt. For a dative or ac-
cusative of ber or roclf^et depending on a preposition, German
often uses a compound of reo (before vowels loot) with a prep-
osition (159) : bcr SEBagen, iporin (for in bcm or in reeld)em) cr
(am the carriage in which he came ; bttS SDIcffcr, iDomtt (for mit
bcm or mit n)eld)cm) ec ba§ Srot f^nitt the knife with which he
cut the bread.
This substitution is common when the relative refers to objects
without life, as above ; it is regular when the relative refers to
nic^tS, atleS, etlra« or to a clause : id^ t^aht nidit^ gefagt, reotuuS er
baS folfletn iBnnte I said nothing from which he might infer that; et
ft^rieb fttr eine Sritung, reobur(^ et etreaS ©elb oetbiente he wrote for a
RELATIVES 81
newspaper, whereby he earned a little moneys it is permissible
when tlie relative refers to a collective term like 2}Dlt people, JRegi;
mcnt regiment, §eer army, 3!ecfammlun{| assembly, Seute people etc. ;
boS SHegiment, toorin er biente the regiment in which he served ; but
it is incorrect when the relative refers to an individual : eg ift mein
3!at«r, mit bem (not „tBDinit") er fprii^t U is my father with whom he
is speaking.
174. Sometimes a simple adverb takes the place of ber or notU
<li}tt and a preposition : in bem SReftautant, h)0 i(^ effe in the restaurant
where Idine; bie %xt, loie er Ubt the way hi which (lit, how) he
175. S3et and ®aS are inflected like the interrogatives tuer
and maiS (157) and are compound relatives, i.e. antecedent and
relative combined : locr jU fpot font, toutbe licfttaft he who, or
whoever, came too late was punished; toaS ic^ ^abc, gcBe i^ bit
wfeai, or whatever, I have I give thee.
176. (1) The implied antecedent may be emphasized by means
of a demonstrative following the relative clause : roet ju fpSt lom,
bet tourbe fceftraft ; Was id) (labe, baS gebe id^ bit. With wer this must
be done if there is a change of construction : toer ju fpfit lam, bem
hjurbe eine ©trafe aufetlegt whosoever came too late, on him a fine
was imposed.
177. (2) SEBaS, or WaS . . . ba§, is also used of persons : moS
noi} bit Seine btauc^en tann, (ba5) Qttft ^xnau§ whoever can still use
his legs goes out or those who can etc.
178. KoTB, In connection with this special use of nta?, observe: 1. The
commonest neuter emgulai' pronouns which, though neuter, may be used of
persons are : Wi, l»ae, i«b(B, aU«B, t(in(3 or tetnS, elnfB or eiiifl, bos eine, bos
anbere ; thus : baS fc^rcit unb iDefnt iinb lac^t they scream and weep and laugh or
suck a fellow (or creature) streams etc,; jebeS moUfe boS @elb ^aben, a6ec ttinS
tDotltt bie %tbtlt t^n eoergbody (or eocA) wanted the money, }>at lu^ody (or
nettWj UKM wiiling to do the work; baS eine (or etn€) tuartete auf bcS anbtmi
SSort We one waited /cr tie other to speak; an Seiertnflen gefet oUeS au8 on ftoii-
(iays all go out or everybody goes out. — 2. The commonest neuter singtil&r
pronouns which, though singular, may be used of things in tl>e plural are :
atteS (186), (iniaeS, manrf|«8, tne^tereS (190), onbereS (196), beibeS (197), uUlt*
(198), nienigeS (199). la the same way, English sometimes uses everything
or ah things with no great difference in meaning.
179. (3) After a neuter pronoun (personal, demonstrative or in-
definite, as eS, baS, aHeS, ettuaS, nii^tS, monies, Biel, loenig), also
after adjectives used substantively, luaS, instead of baS or Weli^eS,
is the regular relative ; baS, toaS \i) ^abt, gebe x&i bir that which, or
what, I have I give thee; baS ift eS, Wa^ it^ nidit oerfte&e that's what
J do not understand; aHeg, WaS i(^ £)a&e, gebe it^ bir «W ifia* etc. ;
baS ift ethjaS, tuaS man nit^t oft fi«^t that is something which one does
32 mDEPDJITB PBONOUN8 AND ADJECTIVES
■ not often see; bad htat bag SBefte, load ©ie t^un tonnten that was the
best you could do. — Similarly, n>a§ is now more commonly used
than ipel^eS to refer to a preceding clause i er ft^tiet fiii: einc 3^
tung, ioaS i^m ettUaS ®elb einbradite he wrote for a newspaper, and
this yielded him a little money.
180. Indefinite Relatives. The adverbs auc^, ouc^ nut, aud^ im;
met, nut immei:, when following upon tvelt^et. Wet, toflS (or upon the
I'elative eonjunctions hjenn, too, Wie, ivann etc.), add to these words
the indefinite meaning of -ever, although hjer and WaS are often
indefinite without such an adverb : toelc^e 3Bittel er aucfe Betfui^te, eS
flelang ifftn ni(^t whatever means he tried, he did not succeed ; toer CS
oui) immet (ei, unb Wa« et au(i) imtnet bringe, tufe tt)n t)etetn whoever it
Tnay be, and whatever he may bring, call him in ; Wo er ft(l& nur
jeigte, rief atteS ^urra^ ! wherever he showed himself, everybody
cheered.
The Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives
181. The commonest indefinite pronouns and adjectives :
PnmoDna only FnmDiiiis oi AdJ«ctWea
jebermann every ons aH all beib- both, two
jetnanb some one, any etnig-* some, a few- Biel much, many
one marui) Tnany {a) tuenig little, few
niemanb no one, not meijrei:- several rin one
any one jeb- eocA, every lein no, none, not a
man one anbet- other, the rest, (an, one, any)
ettvag something, any- else me^t more
thing tDenigec less, fewer
nic^t§ nothing, not
anything
192. Sebetmoim, jenwiiii and ititnianh form the genitives jeber^
mannS, iemonb(e)S and niemanb(e)§ ; the other cases of the
singular (there ia no plural) are like the nominative, but ie=
monb and niemonb sometimes form a dative in em or en and an
accusative in en. — Scbennann (lite jebet, 193) may be preceded
by ein : etn jebermann Ijat feine 3tt)ter everybody has kis faults.
Not anyone or not anybody is niemanb (not nicfet jemanb): didn't
you hear anybody ? ^aft bu niemanb geljiirt ? / didn't hear anybo'^y
• The hjphen Bller tintfl-, intSMC-. t<t>-. anbet- auJ 6(ib- iodicaWa that thise wMds
(unlike aE, nanA and sevena othen) nrely or neve
3.n.iized by Google
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 33
ic^ ^abe niemanb ge^Brt. iRtd)t jemanb occurs chiefly in questions
expecting an affii'ioative ansvrer and then means m>t somebody: ^ft
bu ntc^t jemanb an bet I^ut gefe^en ? didn't you see somebody at the
door? See also 184, 202.
183. SHan is indeclinable. Its equivalents are a) OTie : man
mufe arbeitcn um JU leben one must work in order to live ; b) they
or people : man fagt, bet ^rSfibent fei Ijiet they, or people, say that
the president is here ; c) a passive construction : man (agt, et
fomtne moigen it is said that he will come to-morrow.
German never uses er to refer to a preceding man, as English
often uses he to refer to a preceding one: Wenn man ju f(^nell ISuft,
fo fann man (not „er") Iriiijt fallen if one runs too fast, he is likely to
have a fall. — 'Whenever a ease of man is required other than the
nominative, a form of einer (270) is used : toenn man gu fc^neU lauft,
fo ge^t einem leit^t bet Sltem aui if one runs too fast, he is likely to
lose his breath.
184. (StmS and nu^tS are indeclinable. Both occur fre-
quently with a substantive adjective in apposition (232). ®t=
MJOS may also have a noun as appositive : etmaS ®clb some
money. For njoS instead of ctttiaS see 161.
Not anything is nic^tS (not nic^t etWaS): didn't you see anything?
I didn't see anything ^afi bu mi^ii gefe^en ? ^c^ ^be ni(^t3 gefe^en.
9Ii^t zVcoai occurs chiefly in questions expecting an affii-mative
answer and then means not something: ^aft bu ntc^t etloaS an bet
3^ut gebiirt ? didn't you hear something at the door ? See also 182,
202.
185. %%, cinig-, moni^ and mt^- (247), as pronouns and as
adjectives, have the strong endings.
186. (1) Use of all : ade famen all came; fie tamen alfe they
all caiiu; oHcS (178) mar Bertoren all, or everything, was lost;
aKeg (neut. sing, used of persons, 178) ging au3 all, or everybody,
went out ; alter SRut all courage ; aDe Xugenb all virtue ; alleS
SJertraucn all confidence ; alte jEugenben all virtues.
18T. Before pronominal words, especially before the definite
article and the possessives, aH usually drops its ending : aQ bet
®(an) all the sjilendor, all mein ®lud Ml my happiness, mit all biefen
31ebenSarten with all these phrases. — Observe, however, that the
definite article is much less common after afl than after all, and is
84 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
used, as a rule, ouly with demonstrative or specializing force ; thus,
all ber @lanj, ben bu gefe^Cn all the splendor that you have seen or
oil bet ®lan) beS ^euttgen g^e(te« all the splmdor of to-day's festival,
but allei ®Ianj fc^ien i^m @itnbe all splendor (in general) seemed sin
to him.
188. aiH often meaos ev»ry: ei lam aHe 3^afl(e) or olle 2jQl)t(e)
eiitmal he came oTice evert/ day or every year; atte ©tunbe einen
®feti)ffel Don every hour one tahle-spoonfid ; er ^ot alien ®ntnb boju
he has every reason for it.
IBO, All in the sense of entire, whole is ganj : he stayed all day
et blieb ben ganjen 2^ag.
190. (2) Use of cinig-, man(^ and meljtet- (24J). The singu-
lar of cintg- is rare and, in the neuter, is often replaced by
itmaS : cr (wt mit ciraged (etiDoS) gefagt, roaS ic^ nic^t gtau&c he told
me some things (something) that I don't believe ; cinige ^t\\ nat^t)et
«owie tijoe afterwards ; Dot einiger 3nt som,e time ago ; ctnigc tT>oII=
ten nic^t som^ were not willing ; fte gab ifjm einigc ^pfel she gave
him some apples ; ic^ Ijabe feitbem mandjeS (1 T8) betgeffen / have
forgotten much, or many things, since then ; inandier ©olbat fid
in jenet ©dllai^t many a soldier fell in that battle ; manege fatten
aQen SKut Berloren many (i.e. a number, less than nielc, 198) had
lost all courage ; et etjfltjtte mit meljreteS, ipa§ tc^ iiii^t gtauljte he
told ms several things that I did not believe ; et tarn mit nic[)rcren
(5reunben ke came with several friends.
191. For einig-, mandi and me^rei- before ordinary adjectives, see
226. 9)land) often drops its ending before an ordinary adjective,
see 224.
192. 3e>-, as pronoun and as adjective, occurs only in the
singular and has the strong endings : jcbci Iictant ctn ^ud) each,
or everybody, received a book ; ct griifet jcbcn, ben et fennt he bows
to everybody he knows.
193. 3*^ ""*? ^ preceded by the indefinite article and is then
inflected like an ordinary adjective according to 221.
194. 3(n)ier-, beib-, bitl and ktienig, as pronouns and as adjec-
tives, take the weak endings when preceded by a pronominal
word with strong ending; otherwise they take tte strong
endings.
For onfctt-, Olri and menia before ordinary adjectives, see 226;, ^^gL,
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 36
195. (1) Use of anber- : bte aSufi! licbtc cr fe^r, ffir anbeteS (178)
ftatte tx fcineil Sinn music he loved very much, for other things he
did 7U)t care ; t^u beine 5|3ftii^t, baS anbcrc finbet ficEi Bon fetbft do
your duty, the rest tvill take care of itself ; etttKiS, or nid)tS, an=
bcreS something, or nothing, else ; einigt lefen, anbert fc^reibcrt
some are reading, others writing ; bie, or jene, anberen ^ufer finb
neu the, or those, other houses are new.
196. Snber-, like jeb- (193), may be preceded by the indefinite
article and is then inflected like an ordinary adjective, according to
221. In this use it means another in the sense of a different one,
not another in the sense of one more, which is no(^ ein (724 c).
197. (2) Use of beib- : beibe famcn, SJatet unb ©o()n both cam^,
father and son ; bdbt ©ruber fanten hoth brothers came. When
preceded by a pronominal word, beib- often means simply two :
bic beibtH the two ; meine beiben Sriiber finb t]tcr my two, or both
my, brothers are here ; er o^ab ba^ ®etb bicfen beibcn Sttbeitern he
gave the jnoney to these two laborers. Cases of the singular also
occur, chiefly in the neuter (178) : beibeS ift loo^r both state-
ments are true; mtt betbtm Jllfcicben content vdth either ; fie roiH
bcibed or beibt^ ni^t sA« wants both or neither; et roar beibeS,
!J)ic^tet unb ^(b he ums both, poet and hero ; ef, 688 g.
198. (3) Use of uicl : toiele tamen jU fpflt mant/ came too late;
ba§ Qid Oielet SKenfc^cn the aim of many men ; in Uicttit StSbtcn
in many towns ; feiu DieltS 9Iaucf)en fc^obet i^m his excessive smoh-
iii^ hurts him ; \6) licbc %\)xt Dielen Somptimcnte nicfrt I do not liJee
your many compliments ; bas ©ingen bcr Uiclen ^SiJgcI the singing
of the numerous birds. — When not preceded by the article or a
possessive adjective, oiel (like roenig, 199) is often uninflected
and is then apt to have a collective meanitig, whereas the in-
flected forms tend to have a distributive meaning : toir f|oben
nit()t biel flpfel biefeS Saljr, unb Dielt finb nit^t ju effcn vje have not
many (a large crop of) apples this year, and many are not fit to
eat ; er tteft Diet, abet nicies Won bem, rooS er lieft, DerfteW er nid)t
he reads a great deal, hut many of the things that he reads he does
not understand; Diet S3cin much (a large quantity of) urine;
btcler 9Bein many kinds of wine.
D.n.iized by Google
86 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
199. (4) Use of roenig: lucnige famen s" jpat fe.w came too
late ; baS 3'''^ wenigw 2Jienftt)en the aim of few Ttien ; in nenigen
©tfibten in few towns; fcin loemgtS ®clb (/«; little' money he has ;
ba§ Sefen biefer meitigeii Seiten the reading of thtMfew pages. On
the following compare 198: er fdjteibt tucnig he writes little; n
leiftet mit Ivcnigcnt Oiel he accomplishes much with small vuans;
nur iDcnigtS rouftte er ju nu^cn only a few things did he maimge to
■make use of; loenig |)offnun9 little hope; incnig SSJein little («
small quantity of) wins; tDcnigct 2Bein few kinds of wine (with-
out further context Wenigcr SSem may also mean less wine, 204)-
800. The uninfected form tutnig occurs frequently after fin and
is used both adjectively and pronominally or substantively : ein
tuenig ^offnung a little hope; ein toenig ift bej^er a\A gat nii^tS a liule
is better than none at all.
201. 6ijt and fein. (1) For ein see 269, 270.
Si02. (2) ^cin, as adjective, has the defective (130) endings ;
as pronoun, the strong endings : tein Sltenft^ tam or feiner torn
nobody came ; td) fjabe teinew Sltcnfc^en gcfel)cn or ic^ tjobe fctnen
gefe^en / hav'n't seen anybody ; fie ttaut feiiitm SRenji^cn or (ic
traut feintnt she trusts nobody ; ®elb RioUcn ©te? ic^ fyxbe tcinS is
it money you want ? I hav'n't any ; bamalS f)afte er Dictc Silbet,
jegt t|Qt er gar (707) feint at that tims lie had many pictures, now
he has n^ne at all; teixitS (178) bon betben iBoQte eS eingcfte^it
neither of the two was willing to eovfess it.
Not a or an and not anyone or anybody are tein (not nil^t ein) :
hav'nH ymi seen anybody ? ^ft bu leinen gef e^en ? 3ii(^t ein is em-
phatic or occurs chiefly in questions expecting an affirmative answer,
and then means not one, not somebody: nit^t ein(e)S Bon ben SSudiem
not one of the books; [jaben Sie nii^t einen gefe^en? didn't you see
somebody? See also 182, 184.
SOS. (3) For (in and letn before ordinary adjectivea see 221,
204. Snt^r and loetttgcr, as pronouns and as adjectives, are
usually invariable : bet eine gab mef)r, ber anbete weniger the ons
gave more, the other less ; tx flat mel)t ©ctb, abet iDeniger Sanb alg
i^ he has mare money, hit less land than I ; fpric^ mit mef)t SBe=
ba(^t unb ffieniget Site speak with more discretion and less haste.
For tlie use of mt^T in comparing adjecUvee see 241.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
The folloniDg tables aSord a view of the pronouns xnd
pronominal adjectives (inclnding the articles) in their yi
1 U
PtonaunB and AdjectiTss
indeclinable oi rBgDf~~'~
nndeclliMd
flit 113 ff.
eiiiantxi: 122
fclbfl 123
man 163
ttmaS \
ni(^t8 J
i4 bu, et eto. 103
ttx demonst 150
btt relaL 167
atx 157, 175
UKI8 157, 175
jtbcnnatm •>,
jtmanb [- 182
ntnnan)) J
IV
mentgtt
I 204
Attributive adjec-
tives with defective tiUiutlve adjectives
endings with sttongemUngs
bdnec
feiiwt
(tlntr
unltwr
fttn
nnfre
36tfr
tiner one 270
teiner none 202
btv the 48
bee that 149
bW«, jtntr 152
attltttx 163, 171
an
VI
PrDnoans and attritm-
tive Hdjecttvea with
weak endings
btr mdnt ber nitinige
bet beine bet btintse
ber feine bet lelntge
ber l(|te bet l^tlfle
ber ftlne ber feinifle
ber untere ber unfrige
ber eute ber tutlge
bev i^te ber l^rige
her 3^re ber S^rtge
^"*fl* \ 153
betfelBt J
ber tine 271
1851
einie-
tnan0
nie^rer-
foh^ 154 ~) may Btxad after
jeb- 192 J indef. art. 155, 193
V-VI
Pronouns and attiibutiTe adjectives with
attong or weak endinse (ttsnsition gronp be-
tween pronominal and ordinaiy adjectives, 108)
.:k« Google
ADJECTIVES
ADJECTIVES
206. Declined and Undeclined. Adjectives * are declined
when used attributively (211 £E.) or substantively (231 ff.) ;
undeclined, when used a) predicatively : ha$ ^auS ift aft, unb
bic ^nfter finb flciii ihe house is old, and the windows are small ; b)
appositively : cin §au^, grofe unb fd^On a house, large and hand-
some ; c) adverbially : fie f Jngt gut she sings well.
207. Adjectivea in er from names of places are not declined : tx
ging auf bie 2eil))iger 3Reffe he went to the Leipskfair.
20S. ®anj and ^alb have no ending when used without the article
before neuter geographical names ; ganj @nglanb all EnglaTid, but^
mb Serlin through half of Berlin. See also 278.
809. Certain other adjectives, most of which are used only predi-
catively, are never declined ; such are aUein alone, bereit ready,
fcinb hostile, genug enough, lauler sheer, nothing but.
210. Almost any adjective may be used in its predicative form
as an adverb, like gut in 206 c.
Strong and Weak Declension op the Attributive
Adjective
211. The Principle of Declension. Every attributive adjec-
tive is subject to two modes of inflection, according to the
following principle : when the adjective is preceded by a pro-
nominal word with strong ending, it takes the weak ending ;
otherwise the strong.
212. According as the pronominal word haa the strong endings
throughout, or the defective endings (130), or appears in its stem-
form, the application of this principle results in three types of
adjective declension, in addition to that which is found when there
is no pronominal word before the adjective. The last mentioned
type, which is the simplest and in which the adjective haa strong
endings throughout, differs most from the first mentioned, in which
the adjective has weak endings throughout. For the sake of
contrast, these two are given below in parallel columns and called
Types 1 and II. The third and fourth types are mixtures of the
first and second ; in all four, however, the application of the Prin-
ciple of 211 is the same.
•The term " wUectlTe," It not otherwise deflaed, aaua heuDGtorth "oTdlnmiT or descrlp-
UTB»d]«UYe"(im!).
D.n.iized by Google
STRONG AND WEAK DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
213. Type I. When not
preceded by any pronominal
word, the adjective takes the
strong endings throughout.
K. gutet Mann
G. flute* Cannes
D. gut em TOonne
A. gut en Mann
S. gute ^Wanner
G. gufer tUlannet
D. gut en ^Wfinnem
A. gute 3)iann«
N. gut e %xau
G. fluter g^irau
D. gutet ^xan
A. gute Jrau
N". gute §rauen
G. gutet grauen
D. gut en Jiauen
A. gute grauen
good child
N. guted Kinb
G. guteS ^inbeS
D. gutetn jlinbe
A. gutt« jlinb
K. gut* Jlinber
G. gutet Jlinbei
D. gut (It Rinbwii
A. gute Sinbet
In SIT the weak eudliigi Bra in hes
214. Type n. When pre-
ceded by a pronominal word
with strong endings through-
out, the adjectire takes the
weak endings throughout.
SI 6. This applies to btefet,
jenev, jeber, bet (the or that, 149)
in ail their cases; to certain
other words in all but a few
cases, see 226. For jeb-and (oId&
after tin or fetn see 223.
217. this or the good inan
bief« or ber gute 3Rann
biefe# or beg guten 3Kann«3
biefem or bem guten ^anne
biefen or ben guten* Maxin
biefe or bie guten IDtdnnet
biefer or ber guten URannet
biefen or ben guten ?UIannent
biefe or bie guten ^Jiannec
this or the good woman
biefe or bie gute fjtau
biefer or ber guten grau
biefer or ber guten ^au
biefe or bie gute grau
biefe or bie guten ;^auen
biefer or bet guten ^Jtauen
biefen or ben guten %Tantn
biefe or bie guten ^auen
this or the good child
biefen or bad gute Ainb
biefeS or beS guten Jlinbed
biefem or bem gut en Rinbe
biefeS or baS gute Sinb
biefe or bie gut tn jtinbei
biefer or ber guten Jtinbet
biefen or ben guten Jtinbetn
biefe pr bie guten Sinber
type oal; where Ui«}- differ Cvm the ■UonB;
40
STRONG AND WEAK DECLENSION OF AUJEUTIVBS
218. There are four pronominal adjectives that can stand after
most of the limiting words in 215 ; anber-, beib-. Bid, ioenig (194) ;
they are then treated like ordinary adjectives ; bieftr, or icdd^er,
anbcre Wann this, or which, other man; jene beibeit Jtnaben those
two boys.
819. After bcqenige, bei^elbe, ber eine (271), an adjective has
weak endings throughout: berfelbc alte Serl the same old fellow etc,
SSO. If aeveral adjectives precede a noun, they take uniform
endings, either all strong or all weak : gutcr alttt 9Rann ffood old
man, jenet flutf atte JKann thai good old man.
221. Tjrpe m. When preceded by a pronominal word with
defective inflection (130), the adjective takes the strong ending
in those cases in which the pronominal word lacks the ending
(nom. sing, masc; nom. ace. sing, neut.); the weak ending in
all otheiB. This applies to
tnein meine mem my
bein beine bein your
(ein feine fein hia
\,\jX xifXt i^r her
fein feine fein
unfer unftce unfer our
euer cure eutt your
i^r i^re i^t their
3^ Stire .gil&r your
tein !eine fein
822. Examples .
no good child
tein guttS ^inb
teine^ guten ^inbel
teinem guten fiinbe
lein gutcS ^inb
leine guten fiinbet
teinet guten fiinber
teinen guten ^inbetn
leine guten jtinber
The inflection of teine gute %xav. does not differ from that of biefe
gute grau, 217.
N. unfer or i^t alter Skater our or their old father
G. unfereS or i^reS alien SSaterf etc.
N. euer or Jl^t alteS §ttuS your old house
G. tuxti or 3()reg alien §aufe6 etc.
N.
lein
gutcr SBann
G.
leineg
guten 3Ramii
D.
leinem
guten ^anne
A.
teinen
guten tUlann
U.
teine
guten tUlanner
G.
teinet
fluten ^Hanner
D.
teinen
guten 3)ionnem
A.
leine
guten SRdnner
.:k«Gt>(")^IC
aXBONG ANU WEAK DECI^NSION OF AJJJBCTIVES 41
228. There are six pronominal adjectives that can stand after
some or most of the limiting words in 221 : anbet-, bttb-, Biel, totnig
(194), foli^ (155), jeb- (193); they are then treated like ordinary
adjectives : ein anbereS §auS another house, meine anbeten alten
sadder my other old books, lafe bein UieleS Slebtn stop your excessive
talkmg, mtt feinem IsenigtR ®elbe vdtk t/m little money he has, ein
fol^et (= folc^ ein, 165) aJlann such a man, ein jebet Diann every
man, etnc* i«be« tCtanneg etc.
224. Type IV. When preceded by a pronominal word that
IB indeclinable or regularly undeclined, or by the stem of one
that occasionally drops its ending (as 10-14 below), the adjec-
tive takes the strong ending. This applies cTiiefly to the
following list (which includes also some words not pronominal) :
1. etttaS some 10. mani^(191) vuiny a, many
2. mefjt more 11. fol(^ (155) such a, such
3. Weniget less 12. weld) (165) what a, w/iat
i. WaS ftit what kind of, what 13. uiel (198) much,viany
5. alfetlei all kinds of 14. Wenig (199) little, fow
6, uieletlei many kinds of 15. jWei two
t . mandieilet m.any kinds of 16. btei three
8. genug enough 17. Bier four, and other unde-
9. lauter sheer, nothing but clined cardinals.
Examples : mit ctlpaS laltcm SBaffet with some cold water ;
me^r, or lauter, fdllec^tt Siii^cr more, or none but, bad books ; roa§
flit grofee Slugcn! what large eyes! aQerlei bunte 99Iumat all kinds
"/ 9'^y Jioiixrs ; jiDci Heine ^Bgel two little birds ; mit folc^ fc^lec^
. ter Willi) with such poor milk; Uiel, or gcnug, or tocnig fatten
SBaffer much, or cTwugk, or little cold water ; rocid) gtoBf 9tugen !
what large eyes ! mottC^ brauet (but matt^ci braDt) ©olbat many
a brave soldier ; nian(^ guttS (but mauc^eS gute) ^etj many a
good heart.
SZi. Special Uses. (1) The nominative and accusative plural
(occasionally also other cases) of the pronominal words below,
though having the strong endings, are frequently followed by ordi-
nary adjectives with strong instead of weak endings r
anben other tnant^ many
einifle tome, a few foldje such
me^rere several Biele many
iwttige few-
l^
.:k« Google
12
8TEONG AHD WEAK DECLENSION OF At>JECTIVBS
Examples: Biele gute g^reunbe many good friends ; anbm e^rlidf»e
Seute other honest people ; maiK^f gtiictlit^e ©tunben ■many happy
hours; tuenige, or einiflC, ^iibfc^t aJBgel few, or some, pretty Urds ;
mefitere lange ©ttafitn several long streets.
3S6. (2) Adjectives before a genitive singular in i of masculine
or neuter nouns, when not preceded by a pronominal word with
strong ending, have the weak ending en more often than the strong
ending es : tin a:run( talttm, !larett aSajferS a, drink of cold, clear
water; eine Sabung raui^bfen *l!ulBetS a cargo of smokeless powder.
In certain phrases, however, eS is the only or the more common
ending : fletobtS $Beg3 direct, leiweStoegS 6y no means, fei gute« 5Hut«
fie of good courage.
227. (3) Adjectives preceded by a personal pronoun should
hare strong endings only, but in the dative singular of all genders
and in the nominative (less often in the accusative) plural the weak
endings are also found (the genitives are not in use):
r bu
lAou poor man
ntmet 9)
f armem
F bu
r eiu^ Q
reu,^ |„
9)ianne
anannn
anannem
thou poor woman
atme grou
arnier
"" {I
bi(6 anne Staa
f orme ^
19V i giautn
eu* armen gmuett
^ f anne ^
^ \ avmen "
c (Sow jwor cAiM
ru annee Sinb
unS <
• eui^
roimem .. .
i ffmbe
L armen
armeS ffinb
faxmz ^ ,
J fiijibcr
annen ffinbem
( ''™^ fiiit&et:
2SB. Changes in Stem or Endings. (1) Adjectives in e drop
this e in inflection : tneife wise — Weifer, Ineifc, WeiftS, toeifein,
ttieifeit.
28». (2) Adjectives in unaccented el, en, ev (136) commonly
drop the t of these syllables in inflection (or sometimes the e of the
ending): ebet noble — eblcr, ebtc, eble8, eblem (or ebelm), eblm (or
THE AWECTIVB AB 8UBSTANTIVB 43
ebelit); ^eitcr cheerful — ^ettrcr, ^eUrt, ^fitteS, ^eittem (or ^eiterm),
^eitwn (or ^eitem); offen open — offnet, offne, offnt*, offnem, offnen.
230.' (3) SQoii high drops c in inflection : ein ^o^er Sevg a high
mountain.
The Adjectivb as Substantive
231. Use and Inflection. In German, as in English, adjec-
tives may be used substantively and thus denote persons or
objects which possess the quality expressed by the adjective.
In German, such an adjective is written with a capital, like a
noun, but inflected like an adjective standing before a noun.
It then denotes, in the singular of the masculine and feminine,
a person possessing the quality ; in the singular of the neuter,
a thing which, or that in general which, possesses the quality ;
in the plural, persons (never things) possessing the quality.
232. Examples : (1) bcr 9t»e the old man ; ein Slttec an old
man ; bic, or eine, 9Iltc the, or an, old woman ; bo^ ?ltte the old
(thing or things) or that in general which is old ; ?IltcS unb 5Reue^
old things and new; bte ?tltcil the old people, the ancients; bie
Sc^iine the beautiful woman, the fair one ; dnc ©(^6nc a beauty ;
bag @UtC, ^iO.^ S^5ne unb ba^ SBa^re the good, the beautiful and
the true or whatever is good, beautiful and true ; gutet ^ttct ! good
old man ! bct ®eutfc^e the German (rnan); ein Dcutfi^ct a German
(man) ; ein junger 2)eutft()er a young German ; bic altcn 5Dcutfc^cn
the old Germans ; eine 3)eiitft^e a German (woman') ; ©c^Watje unb
SSeifee black and white people ; bic ©[^loorjcn unb bie SEBcifecn the
hlaeks and the whites ; bee SWeijenbe the traveller ; bag ®epdc£ bcS
.' Meifcnbcn the baggage of the traveller ; tein JRcifcnbcr getjt in jcne^
§otel no traveller goes to that hotel ; id) fal) uicic 9tcifenbc (225)
I saw many travellers ; Sfcifcnben (dat. plur.) mufe man flcfaUig fciii
one must be obliging to travellers ; bet ©ebicnte the servant ; cm
Sebienter a servant ; bie Sonne fdjeint auf ©erec^te unb Ungetet^tc,
auf ®Ute unb ©iife the swn shin^ on just and unjust, on good and
bad; etroaS (WaS), or liiet, ®uteS soTne, or much, good; manrf|e5
©d)6nc miieh that is beautiful, many a beautiful thin^ ; mit ®utem
Eommt man incitet ofe mit ©Bfcm with good words, or treatment, one
44 THE ADJECTIVE AS SUBSTANTIVE
gets on better than with had ; gicbt c^ etiDaS 9Ieuc§ (ace.) ? is there
anything luw or any news ? jut SRecfjteii unb jur Siinten (dat. sing,
fem. to agree with §ant)) on the right and on the left (hand'); ba§
9!ote 'iia jmif^en bcm ©rflnen ift ein !3)ai^ the red (ohjecf) there amid
the green is a roof.
288. (2) The following are examples of the substantive use of
adjectives after personal pronouns (227): xif, or bu, Ungliidlii^cr /,
or thou, unfortunate man; ii}, or bu, Un(|Iu(flic^e /, or thou, unfortu-
nate woman ; mit Un(|Iii({Ii<^em to me unfortunate ma.n ; mir Unglti(f=
tii^en to me unfortunate man or woman ; t^r SUingliiubtgen ye of
little faith ; wir Xeutf(i()e or ®eut((^en we Germans ; unS ©cutfc^en
to us Germans ; unS Iieutfd^e tis Germans.
234. (3) TLe following are examples of the substantive use of
the possessives, which applies only to Forms IV and V (142, 143):
ic& befcfiU^e baS ^eine or baS SReiniflt / protect what is mine ; Sie
^aben iai 3(»re get^an, unb er baS ©eine i/ou did your duty and he did
his; jebcr liebt bie ©dnen everybody loves his oien (friends).
2S0. IfoTB. In rendering English cLdjectaTe-phrasee, the student ehould
carefully observe the differeuce in meaning between a German substantive ad-
jective (with a capital) Aud an ordiuikry adjective agreeing with an omitted
uoun. Thus, he ftod bookx enoujA, good {ones) as loeli as bad (ones) is correctly
ec I)oM( SBfldfift Rfnufl, flute fomoH ali (^I«6t( (with SBiit^tt understood) ; not . . .
@Ute . . , ©C^letflte, which could refer only to persons. Similarly, in bit tldne
^t n mltnenDmnicn the little, or small, one he Uiok vnth Aim, Utine is as va^e
as one, if ijie context is unknown, except that titiut mast refer to some feminine
noun, which may be ®3ne saw, ^tttji cap, Xsiljitt daughter or any other uoun
of that gender ; but bit SXtiai ^at n mitgenomtnen can me&n only the little girl,
or hU laUe daugliter, he took imih him.
286. Special Uses. (1) Substantive adjectives sometimes have
the weak ending instead of the (grammatically correct) strong
ending when the case is sufficiently clear from a preceding strong
adjective : on umfaffenbeS ®anje (instead of ©anjeS) a comprehensive
whole; m flietfe alter 33cfannten (as often as a3etannta;) in a circle of
old acquaintances ; eine Stmalft in Gngtanb lebenber ^leutfdten (as often
as Sleutfd&er) a number of Germans livintj in E. In the last two
examples, the substantives are regarded as masculine nouns in e of
Class IV, like flnabe or j^anjofe, hence the ending en. Similarly in
the following : i^m alS altem 33camten or a^efanntcn or Sebienten
(more often than SBeamtem, Sefannlem, Sebientem) to him as an old
official or acquainianee or savant ; but here the strong ending is
also avoided for euphony, especially in i^m alS attem Seamtem. — In
the gen. sing. neut. after an indeclinable pronominal word preceded
by a preposition, as in hjegen ettoaS ©($[immen (for S^IimmeS) on
account of something bad, the weak ending is even required, since
the strong ending would make the word appear like an accusative.
aST, (2) Certain adjectives have no endings when useni substan-
COMPARISON OP AD.TECTIVES 45
tively ; these occur mostly in pairs, without article, and are now
often written with small initials : beliebt bri alt unb jung a favorite
of old and young; tilt unb jung fle^t (or ge^en) auS old and young are
going out ; gleit^ unb ^Inif gefettt fi^ gern birde of a feather flock to-
gether ; rei($ unb arm, (id^ unb niebtig -rich and poor, high and low.
388. (3) Neuter substantive adjectives denoting colors are in-
variable, only the genitive (sing.) aometimes taking an g ; bag, or
ein, Sllau the, or a, blue; iiS} bin fiit ein tiefeteS Siot lam in favor of
a deeper red; ciinnerft bu bic^ beS fonberbaren ®riinS jener SBiefe? do
you remember the strange green of that meadow ?
289. (4) Neuter substantive adjectives denoting languages take
frequently, but not necessarily, an ending when directly preceded
by.the definite article : baS J'eutffi^e (also 3!)eut(d^) the German lan-
guage; iai ©tubtum be8 (Sngtif^en (less often gnfllif(li) the study of
English ; im (JtanjBftfd^en (also ^tanjijfifi^) in the French language.
Otherwise these substantives remain uninflected : baS befte ^eutfc^
■ the best German; et fjJrai^ ein Snglifc^, bag niemanb betftanb Ae spoke
(an) English that nobody understood; n fagte ti auf Stalienif<^ he
said it in Italian ; (ein) teineS Sleutfc^ (a) pure German.
Comparison of Adjectives
240. Rule of Formation. Comparatives and superlatives
are formed by adding cc and ft to the stem of the positive.
841. 3)ie^r is used with adjectives that occur only predicatively
(209) : et War ilfin me^r feinb aU itjt he was more hostile to him than
to her; also when different qualities of the same object or person
are compared : er toor meljr gludlti^ alS Hug he was lucky rather than
prudent.
342. Changes in Stem or Superlative Sign. (1) Adjectives in
e drop tliis t before the cr of the comparative : tcrife wise, comp.
h)eif«r.
243. (2) Adjectives ending in unaccented el, en, er commonly
drop the e of these syllables before the er of the comparative : ebel
noble, comp. eblet.
244. (3) Adjectives in g, ^, fc^, j, b, t usually insert e before the
ft of the superlative : tjei^ hot, ^ei^eft ; ftolj proud, ftoljeft ; milb
mild, milbeft ; 6unt gay, bunteft ; gefettidft clever, geft^irftefl. But par-
ticiples in b add ft only : tebeulenb impoHant, bebeutenbft ; fc^meii^elnb
flattering, f(i()mei(t>elnbft.
245. Umlaut in Comparison. The foUowiog adjectives reg-
ularly modify the vowel in the comparative and superlative :
" COMPAHISON OF ADJECTIVES
all
Ultt
Slteft
old
Iran!
trorfer
Itonlji /«
laU
laltet
taitift
cold
lane
langet
tdngft l^ng
«9
argei
Stall
bad
na^
na^er a*6
mm 7,ear
flart
(lartCT
Hartft
strong
0ri>&
flriJin 3*
gtij^t srm(
atm
iiinner
atmft
pow
¥^
^e^er 246
^B<^ft high
tDatm
tvarmei:
iDSnnft
warm '
tot
roter
tBfeft red
M
totttt
^rteft
hard
jung
jtinger
jangft young
M«tf
Wai^fei
f^amt
sharp
trug
fliiger
tltteft «-&e
Wlpot, Wwatje. Mlodtjetl
black
lurj
fatjer
tai^eft sAort
The following often modify the
fromm pious, bumm stupid,
vowel : blafe ^/e, nofe wei, fc^al
gefunb hemtky.
248. Irregular Comparison. (1) The following adjectives
are irregular in their comparison :
0ro&
flut
fltefeet flte^t great
beffer beft i/oorf
bid me^r meift ™w;A
^Dc^ l^B^er E)&c(ift A^A
S47. From the comparative mt^r more (248) is formed a pronominal adjec-
tive, comparative in form, but not in meaning : iik^wm seueral (190).
248. (2) The following comparatives and superlatives lack a
positive ; they are related to the prepositions or adverbs given in
the place of the positive, and the superlative is formed by adding
ft to the comparative :
in in
inntr inner
Innevft inii«rnw»i
nu8 out
auBer outer
aufeerft outermost
Dben <Aove
obet upper
obetft uppermosi
unlet under
unlet lower
Dot before
Bntber fore, front
Botbetft foremost
Winter SeStnd
WinJet hinder, hind
^intei-ft kindmoit
218. (3) From the superlatives erft first and le^t last are
formed the comparatives etftetet or bet etftete the former and Ie|=
teter or bet le^tete the latter.
250. Inflection. Comparatives and superlatives when de-
clined take the same endings as positives, according to 211.
Examples : grflfeete ^reube (fern.) greater joy, like gute %tav.
216 ; bet aitete ^ann the older tnau, like biefer or bet gute Wtmn 217 ;
mein bepeS ^ni) my best book, like (etn guteS fltnb 222.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVEa 47
N. ffc'i^ext gveube bei dUetc 3)lann
G. gri^geier ^eube bei alteitn ^Itanneg
B. gti>$erer ^eube bem dlteren ^Ranne
A. gt&^etf §rcube ben aiteren Mam
N. gtB^eie 3i;eubm bie iilteTCn 2)iann«
G. Qxo^n tv gteuben bet iilter en 5(ianner
D. grBfeetw grtuben ben altercn SRSnnem
A. gtBfieic ^leuben bit iiltem Sltdnnei
N. mein bt\lt6 Su<^
G. meineg beften Su^e8
D- meinem teften Sut^e
A. mein 6efte« Suc^
N. meine befteii m^n
G. meinet beftw Sud^er
D. meinen befl« Silt^em
A. meine beften Suiter
Ul. XOn before the Superlative. Superlatives are often
strengthened by prefixing the genitive pluial aller of all: mrin
aHerbefteS Sud& wjy very best book.
ass. Uses of the ComporatlTe. The comparative is used either
declined or undeclined, like the positive (206) : attributively, bied
tp ber griifiere SBogel this is the larger bird; substantively, bu toirft
nD(i(» ®v6feereS benn baS fetjen thou shalt see greater things than these;
predicatively, bie(er Sioget ift grijfeet alS jenfr this bird is larger than
that one; appoaitively, bet f^djS aber, fc^neHer unb |(^lauet alS bet
SBotf, entfam the fox, however, being quicker and more cunning than
the wolf, escaped; adverbially, biefet SJogel ftngt f^iJnet al3 jener
this bird sings more beautifully than that one.
2fi3. The comparative is sometimes used absolutely (261), that
is, without implying direct comparison : et bliet Idngete 3*i' ^*
stayed (not longer than others, but) quite a while; eine dltere S)ame
an elderlg lady.
254. Uses of the Soperlatlve. From the fact that all three
degrees of the adjective are customarily given without inflec-
tional endings, as in 245 and 246, the beginner often very
naturally, but wrongly, infers that the superlative, like tho
positive (206) and comparative (252), may be used predicatively
and adverbially in its stem-form. He is therefore tempted to
ti'anslate a sentence like he is happiest when he works most by
48 COMPARISON OF AD-TECTIVES
er ift nflludli^ft," roenn a ..meift" arbeitct. There is, however,
only one superlative that occuis in ite stem-form as predicate
adjective (259), and relatively few occur thus as adverbs (262).
The regular forms which superlatives asaume are diose treated
below (255-258, 260).
255. (1) When attributive to a noun expressed or under-
stood, the superlative is mostly preceded by the definite article
or some other pronominal word with strong ending, and then
takes the weak ending. In this form it is used, aa English
superlatives after the definite article are ordinarily used, to
designate among several objects of the same class or kind that
one which possesses in tlie highest degree the quality denoted
by the adjective : a) bcr bcftc %i)cc fommt auS Sfjina the best tea
comes from China; b) bet %t)ee au§ Sl)ina tft bet befte the tea
from ChiTM is the best. In this last example, ber befte and the
best, though in the predicate, are not predicate adjectives, bat
are attributive to the nouns %^ec and tea understood ; so also in
c) Don atten ©c^iilerinnen mar fie bic ftetligftc of all the pupils she
was the most diligent and d) bie grOfeten Seutc finb nid)t immer bie
ftflrtften the tallest people are vat always the strongest.
2G6. When not preceded as in 255, the attributive superlative
takes strong endings; (ielifter ^reunb ! dearest friend.' ber Sieber
f C^bnfteS the moat beautiful of songs.
257. (2) As predicate adjective, the superlative occurs only
in tlie dative after am : thus, am bcften, am tiefftcn, am aCerbeftcn
— a form which resembles that of the similarly constructed
phrases at Us best, at its deepest, at its very best and can some-
times be rendered by such phrases ; usually, however, it corre-
sponds to the English superlative without definite article. This
form of the German superlative is used when the same object,
or class of objects, is compared with itself imder diverse condi-
tions or relations : thus, a) bcrS^ec tftom beften (not „ber befte,"
nor „beft"). wenn cr iibcr Sanb fommt tea is best if it comes over-
land ; b) bie SRofen finb om (c^flnftcn im 3uni roses are finest in
June ; c) fie War am fleifjiflften, aU fie allein orbeitete she was laost
diligent when she worked alone.
D.n.iized by Google
COMPABISON OF ADJECTIVES 49
268. The auperiative with am ia also used when objects of
different kinds are compared in respect to a common quality : \^
^dbt Haffee, %1)k unb Satao, abtx ii} gebe bir ben fiatao, lurit er am
^ei^eften ift / have coffee, tea and cocoa, but I give you the cocoa
because it is (the) hottest.
Here b» ^igtftc would naturally mean Vte hotted cocoa iind would imply that
more than one kind or quanlit; of cocoa were in qoeBtion, which is not the
case. Yet, if the context is such that it is easy to supply a common term under
which the objects of the difierent classes may be grouped as in a higher or
larger class, we may also use Ihe attributive form : Ihua, uon bieftn brtt ®e>
trfinirn {beoerageii), Safftt, Iljef unb Sa(ao, tft b(t fiafoo am l)fl6tptn or boB
^i6t|Je (i-e. ©ettditf). Similarly in the following example, thou^ here the
common term is not bo eTident: Don b(n bteieu — Eoiw, gui^S unb SftI — root
ber %\iA% am fi^laufltn or bet fi^lauflr of the three, namely the lUm, the fox and
the mmkey, the fox maa the most cunning, where btr f^laiiftt does not mean bft
fc^hujlf gui^S, but say ber fi^iaiijlt ©eftUe or Strl, feUow. — It is probably the
equivalence of the two forms in comparisons of tins hind which often leads to
the inaccurate substitution of the predicate form with am for Ihe attributive
form, H8 In Dolt aUcll ®c^il1eTiiin«n mat fu am fleiB'Sllen instead of blf ^tigiflfle
— the better form, since the objects or persons compared are here clearly of the
8S9. The only superlative used in its stem-form as predicate
adjective is aHerlitbft ; bo8 Sieb ift (iKetUebft the song is (rnost) charm-
ing or very sweet.
260. (3) When used adverbially, the superlative regularly
tabes the form with am : bu (Sufft am ft^ncHfteit or am allet)(^nell'
ften yo% run fastest or fastest of all ; er ift am glitdltc^fteti, Ittenn
cr am meiften atfieitet (254).
261. Absolute Comparison. Superlatives implying direct com-
parison are called relative ; such are the forms in 255-268, 260.
Superlatives implying only the possession of a quality in a very
liigh degree, i.e. general eminence without direct comparison with
other objects, are called absolute; such are the predicate form
aKetliebft in 259, most of the adverbial foniis in 262-264 below, and
some rarer uses of the attributive form after the indefinite ailicle
or without article, as ein e^renBoKpet Smjjfang o. most honorable
reception, fruc^tbotfte ©egenben 'most, or exceedingly, fertile regvms.
In place, however, of such attributive forms, the better and more
usual way is to employ an adverb in the (absolute) superlative (or
fel)t very, iiberauS extremely, ungnnetn uncommonly) with the posi-
tive form of the adjective: thus, ein oufietft (extremely) eljrenDoQet
Smpfang ; unflemein ^^tbate @egenben.
2&i, (1) Superlatives in stem-form, uaed adverbially :
Qtlerlitbft charmingly ergebenft most devotedly
aufeetft extremely geffiUigft (most obligingly) Mndly,
eiligP most ha^Uy please
D.n.llzedbyGOOgIC
50 NUMERALS
ge^OTfamft nuxl obediently jfinsf' recently, lately
g&tigft mo*l kindly ISngfl long since
^dfit megl kigMy, highly meift ntoitly
^it^l moii politely mik|li(^ft at much at poi^He, to (he
innigfl most eordtaUy, fervently utmott.
ExAHPLKS : i^ finbe ed f)&^^ fonbeibar I think it extremely, or
very, ttrange ; geben ©ie mit gefdQigft baS S9tot give me the bread,
please; %\jx jfinflfl berftorbeiter greunb your reeently deceased Jriend ;
fomtnen ©it mijglid^p 6alb come as soon as possible.
363. (2) Adverbs derived from superlatives by meaas of the
suffix €n« :
beftend m the best manner meiftttiS /or the moit part, mostly
erftntd inthe_firstfiace,Jirst mjttbeftcnd at the least, not lest
fru^e^eniS at ike earliest, not before DKnigflCltd " " " " "
^St^teniS at the highest, at the most t^ifiitnS in the nearest future, very soon
{f>atefttn$ at the latest, not later (c^Bttftend in the handsomest manner.
ExAMPLBB : tx lafet be^enS grtt^en he sends his beat regards or
compliments ; er lommt fpateftenS im 3Rai he vill be here in May at
the latest ; ©ie ftnb ^iii^ftend H^i'8 V^ ^'''^ sixty at the most.
2M. (3) Adverbial phrases formed from auperlativea by means
of aufS with the accusative singular : aufS befte in the best possible
■manner ; QufS fl^flnfte in the most beautiful, or handsomest, Tnanner
possible, most handsomely ; aufS flatfte in the clearest manner possi-
ble, -most clearly.
2S6. Observe the difference in meaning between the phrase with
a«f3 aud that with am (260) : fie fang aufS befte she sang in the best
manner possible or to the best of her ability; fie fang am beften she
sang best {of all those who sang).
For a list of the conuttonest adject!'
2641. The Cardinals :
1 ein(8, 268)
9 nnm
2ll«l
10 |<Sn
3 bid
11.11
4 rter
12 jmJH
Sflnl
13 bKiif^n
«!«*»
14 bierie^n
1 flctai
15 (anfrtn
8«*1
16 Mnin _
1 : COCl^H
17 riebje^
HTJMBRAI.8
60 m»a
18 ot^tje^n
70 fiebaig
19 neunje^n ■
80 a(^ji9
20 iiwmjig
90 ncunjig
100 ^unbert
22 jiwiunbilronsig
23 bwiunbjroanjig
200 iioeiliunbert
30 breifeig
1000 laufenb
31 dnunbbreilig
1133 lauienbeiti^nbtrt brtiunbbwife
32 iiwiimbbraSig
or elf^unbed breiunbbreigig
40 Dierjig
50 fiinfjig
100000 ^unberllaufenb
267. Fonns find Uses of cm-. (1) gin, the uadeclined stein-
fonn, is used in numeration a) before unb with other cardinals aiid
before ordinals: emunbbierjig 4^, ber rinimbBierjigfte the 4^st; b)
before (mnbett and taufenb, in the aense of one hundred and one
thousand: ein taufeitb 9Jiann one thousand men, but taufenb 3)Iann a
thousand men; c) in ein paax and ein Menig, as na^ ein paax ^agen
after a few days, mtt ein tuenig 3Kut with a Utile courage.
268. (2) @ing/ a neuter pronominal form, is used when no other
numeral follows ; thus, in counting : einS, jWet, btei etc. ; tiunbett
unb einS ; taufenb unb einS ; also in expressions of time (280), as bie
U^t ift ein# or ^alb einS it is one o'clock or half past twelve.
269. (3) @in- one, when qualifying a noun expressed and not
preceded by the definite article or some other pronominal word
with strong ending, is declined like the indefinite article, but has
greater emphasis, which is often indicated by spaced letters (149) t
i(^ ^abe nur e i n e n 3tpfel, bu ^ft jtcei / have only one apple, you
270. (4) (gin-
singular of meint
te, when used pronominally is declined like the
e, eS (141), with strong endings :
!l or ein I
Examples : meine SBriibet ftnb nic^t aHe ju §aufe, einer ift im 3tuS=
lanb my brothers are not all at home, one of them is abroad; Wenn
©it ein 39ui^ faufen, fo taufe ii^ auc^ ein(<)S if you buy a book, I shall
buy one also.
271. (5) Sin- one, when preceded by the definite article or some
other pronominal word with strong ending, may be pronoun or
adjective and is declined, singular and plural, like ber, bie,
mein« or meinige (142, 143), with weak endings;
masc. fem. neut. m.f.n.
N. ber eine bie fine baS eine bie eincn
G. be3 dnen bet eincn beS eitien bet eiiicn
D. bem dnen ber etnen bem eintn ben eintn
A, ben eintn bie eine ba# eine bie einen
Examples : ber eine uon ben teiben Srilbetn, ber ju §aufe ift the one
of the two brothers that is at home; luenn ©ie baS eine 33u(^ Eaufen,
fo faufe id} hai anbere if you buy one book, /shall buy the other ; bie
einen rieten bieS, bie anbem bad {the ones) some advised this, {the)
'others that; bet 3iinf'>lbat ftanb feft auf feinem einen 93ein the tin
soldier stood firm, on his one leg; aCe liefen (ie iDcg, nur biefer eine
nii^t all ran away, exo&pt this one.
272. One ftftet au adjeoUve, ordiDEirj or pronominal, is represented in Ger-
man by the ending of the ftdjecUve, not by a form of (tn- : give me a pea, and
that a nea one gieb mit fine SJtbd, unb jtDat cine neue ; loAicA lumse f this one or
the red one? ntlitri ^auS ? bleftS obn bai role '/
273. The Other Cardinals are usually undeclined, but the geni-
tives iWeiet and breier, and the datives jtoeitn and bteieii are used
when the case would not otherwise be obvious.
ST4. Iteratires are formed from the cardinals by adding the suffix
mai time ; einmal once, jtoeimal twice, btcimal three times etc.
2T6. Variatives are formed by adding etlei to the cardinals : etnerlei
of one kind, jweietlei of two kinds, breierlei of three kinds etc. These
words are indeclinable adjectives : ein Vtoi Bon jWeierlei %k^ a coat
of two kinds of cloth. Similar formations are Dieletlei of many
kinds, allerlei of all kinds, mani^erlei of many kinds, of many a kind.
S76. The Ordinals are adjectives resembling the superlatives;
the undeclined stem-form appears only in compounds and in the
adverb erft (70C) :
bet erfte ihefrsl ber jHKinjigfte lie ivientieth
bet jroeite the second ber einunbintonjigfte the imenty-frst
bet btille the third ber jroeinnbjlDaniigJte ihe twenty-
bet Oferie (he fourth second
bet funftt theffih ber breiunbjnjQnjigfte the Iweniy-
ber ted)(lc the sixth third
bet (tebenle ike seventh bet breifeigfle the Ihirlieth
ber Q*(e (one t) the eighth bet bietjigfte the fortieth
ber neunte the ninth etc.,with-te up bet ^unbetl(te Oie hundredth
to twentieth, after that with fte. bet laufenb(te the thousandth.
.:k«Ck>O^IC
Examples: bie often Sfumen finb bie ©^neeflWen the first flowern
are the snowdrops ; feine St^Wefter tear bie erfte, unb et bet britle his
sister was the first, arid he the third ; fte tamen flnt eiminbjlpanjigften
?Hai unb reiften tciebet q6 am fitbenunbjtDanjigften they came on the
Slat of May and went away again on the ^th.
277. Fractionals, with the exception of ^alb half^ are formed
byaddiDg tel (from leil parf) to the stem of theordiuals. Before
the t of tel, the final t of the stem is dropped : ein Iirittel a third,
ein aSiertel a fourth, ein gtinftel a fifth, ein ^unbertftel a hundredth.
They are nouns of the Firat Class.
27S. ^alb in uaed and inflected like an adjective : \if tfght ein
^albeS Stot / have half a (oaf of bread; \6) flab i^m funfje^n unb
einen mben SJoHar I gave him ISi dollars; bet ^albt Stpfel fle^i>rt bit
half the apple belongs to you. But Ifalb has no ending in certain
expressions of Idme : ti ift ^alb fteben U is half past six, nor when
used to form the so-called dimidiatives, which are invariable adjee-
tives : onbett^olb ii, brittet»alb 2i, bierte^alb Si. See also 208.
37». Ordinal Adverbs are formed by adding en« (263) to the
stem of the ordinals : etftenS first, jloeiten* secondly, biittenS thirdly,
SiettenS fourthly etc.
280. The Hours of the Day are expressed as in the following
examples : eS tft neun U^t it is 9 o'clock; et lam «m elf U^r he came
at 11 o'clock; i% ift ein SSiertel auf fed^S it is a quarter past five ; eS
ift mb fec(iS it is half past five; eS ift btei 33iertel auf fec^S it is a
quarteir to six.
2S1. Dates. When simply the year is given, the cardinals are
used and may or may not be preceded by im ^a^re : ©oet^e tvuibe
1749 (ftehe^n^unbert neununbtiietjig), or im ^ai}Xi 1749, geboten (not
« in 1749 **) Goethe was bom in 1749.
383. When the day of the month is given, an ordinal is used,
preceded by am (= an bem, sc. S^age beS ^onatS), or, in dating let-
ters, by ben (sc. flag beS ffltonat^), and followed directly by the
name of the month : @oetE)e Wutbe am 28. (at^tunbjWanjiaften) Sluguft
1749 geboten Goethe was bom etc.; Setltn, ben 4, (bietten) 3(l)ril
1891 Berlin, April 4th, 1891.
VERBS
CONJUGATION
283. The German verb has two voices : the active and the pas-
sive ; four motles : the indicative, subjunctive, imperative and
conditional; one verbal noun : the infinitive; and two verbal ad-
jectives : the present participle and the past participle.
54
884. The Simple Forms are
1. the present indicative active
2. the present subjunctive active
3. the past indicative active
4. the past subjunctive active
5. the imperative active
6. the present infinitive active
7. the present participle active
8. the past participle active.
285. The Compound Forms are made with the auxiliaries fatten
have, fein be, and Werben become.
286. The Stem is found by dropping from the present in-
finitive the final en or n.
287. The Principal Parts are 1. the present infinitive ; 2.
the first person singular of the past indicative ; 3. the past
participle.
288. Weak and Strong Verbs. Verbs are divided, with
reference to their inflection, into two classes, the weak and the
strong.
289. (1) In the weak verbs, the first person singular of the
past indicative adds (c)t to the stem for a t«iise-sign, and takes
e for an ending. The past participle ends in (c)t.
The tense-sign is used throughout the past ladicative and subjunctive.
290. (2) In the strong verbs, the first person singular of the
past indicative changes the stem-vowel for a tense-sign, and
takes no ending. The past participle ends in cit.
291
(butse
In both classes, the past participle
e 336, 426).
has tlie prefix ge
292. Examples (principal parts) :
weak
rob = en, Io6't = e ge = bb = t
reb = en j^eb^ette fle=reb = et
praise
talk
praised praised
talked talked
strong
fe^=en fa^ ge=fe^ = en
fec^t=en fD*t ge = fo(|t=er
rmg=en fang ge = fung = er
fiffht
sinij
fought fought
saiig sung
393.
The Vowel t in certain Verb-Forms.
(1) The tense-sign
t, the participle-ending t, the personal ending t of the third singu-
lar and second plural, aiid the personal ending ft of the second
singular (298) are regularly separated by the vowel e from a pre-
D.n.iized by Google
55
ceding b or t, also from m or n after a consonant (but not from
mm or nn) :
iiif lebcte, leilete I. sing, past ind. and subj.
flertbet, gefcittl past part.
eriebel, leiltt 3. sing. prea. ind.
i^Kbtt, leilel 2.plnr. prea. ind. and Bubj.
bu rebefl, leiielt 2. aing. prea. ind, and aubj.
bu tebeteft, leiteteft 2. aing. paat ind. and subj.
of otmeii breathe,
iiftrten open,
weak verba.
1. aing. paat ind. t
paat part
3. sing. prea. ind.
2. plur. pres. ind. and siibj.
2. sing. pres. ind. and aubj.
2. plur. past ind. and subj.
2. plur. past. ind. and aubj. of tanjcn dance and
loun[if)en wish, weak verbs.
2. sing. pres. ind. and subj. \ of |(^neibtn cuf,reilcn
2. plur. paat ind. and subj. / ride, strong verbs.
ftamnt:(e, gebrumm:"!, t^r TDmntd, i^r rcnn^, bu Iann:'i't
of reben talk,
leiten lead,
weak verbs.
iit almete, Bffnete
geatmct, geiiffnet
eratmct, offnct
i^Qtmct, Cjfnet
buatntcfl, iiffncFt
i^ratmtiet, Bffntttl
i^r tanjl 1 1, loiiufrfit 1 1
bu f^dbtft, reiteft
i^r fifiniltct, Tittel
But without e : er
etc. See also 398.
281. (2) The personal ending (t (298) of the second singular is
regularly separated by the vowel e from a preceding *-Hound ;
iDunf^eft \ 2. aing. pres. ind. and subj. of iDunfd)en wish,
tanje[t J tnitsfn dance, weak verbs.
meijcft 2. sing. pres. ind. and subj. ^ of imiien thow,
IDieIt(t 2. sing, past ind. and aubj. J strong verb.
fi^efl 2. sing. prea. ind. and subj. of fi^n sil, strong verb.
fl^ t (t 2. aing. past ind. \ of eff EH eaC, ■
H^e(t 2. aing. past subj. J strong verb.
396, (3) The vowel e occurs also in many subjunctive forms
not coming under the rules above, and distinguishes these forms
from the corresponding ones of the indicative : bu liebeft, 2. sing.
pres, subj., but bu liebp, 2, sing, pres, ind. of licben love; ii)x licbtt,
2. plur. pres. subj., but i^t lielit, 2. plur. pres. ind. of lieben love;
bu flingcfc 2. sing, past subj., but bu gingft, 2. sing, past ind. of
ge^en go.
296. (4) The use of e is sometimes optional. As a rule, the
longer forms with e are preferred in stately and solemn style ; the
shorter, in familiar and colloquial speech. Such varying forms are
i^t marel or watt yew were, ge^t( or ge^t (imper.) i/o, et ftnlet or
fmtt he sinks.
D.n.iized by Google
■ 56 ENDINGS
' 297. Endings are added to the stem or, in the past indicative
and subjunctive of weak verbs, to the tense-sign t.
298. (I) The personal forms of both \yeak and strong verbs are
■with or without endings, as follows :
1. pers. e ; or no ending 1. pei's. m
2. " (e)(t ; e ; or no ending 2. " (e)t
3. " {e)t ; e ; or no ending 3. " en
For the use of (e), see 293-396.
898, (1) The 1. sing, has e, except in a)' 6in am and fei mai/
be (312) ; b) the pres. ind. of the modal auxiliaries (340) and of
tnifftn (384) ; c) the past ind. of strong verbs (including war was
and Warb became, 312, 314).
800. (2) The 2. sing, has («)ft, except in the imperative, which
has t or, as in many strong verba (including fei be, 312), no end-
ing (401).
Two forma have only t : mu^t (340), loei^t (384).
301. (3) The 3. sing, has (e)t in the pi'es. ind., except in the
modal auxiliaries (340), h)i(fen (384), werben (314) and a few strong
verbs (397).
308. The 3. sing, has e in the past ind. of weak verbs and in
the pres. and past snbj. of all verbs, except fei way be (312).
301. The 3. sing, has no ending in the past ind. of strong verbs
(including war was and Warb became, 312, 314) and in the excep-
tions under 301, 303.
804. (4) The 1. and 3. plur. have en, except in a) fwb are
(312) and b) the prea. ind. of tlfun and the pres. ind. and subj. of
verba in ein or em (335), all of which have only n : ion t^un i"e do,
fie t^un they do, Joit ^anbelii we act, fie Wanbent thei/ wander etc.
806. (5) The 2. plur. has (e)t, except in fetb (prea. ind.) arc and
feib (imper.) be (312).
306. (II) The non-personal forms of both weak and strong verba
have the following endings :
(1) In the present infinitive mostly en, but n in fein be, tljun do
and in verbs with stems of more than one syllable ending in I or r, ■
as Ijanbeln act, teanbern wander.
80T. (2) In the present participle mostly enb, but nb wher-'
ever the infinitive ends in n only (except in fein and t^un, which
make feienb and t^uenb) ; hence the present participle may usually
be foi-med by a<lding b to the present infinitive.
808. (3) For the past participle see 289, 290, also 402.
SIMPLE FORMS <
adeii ©ein SSevben
fallen €6111 SBcrbcn
309. Principal Parts :
ifobtn, iiatte, geffabt have frin, max, ift gemefen* be
werben, toatb or ttutbe, ift fleWorben become.
Though Ijaben belongs with the weak verbs, and (dn and irreben with the
strong, ^eir inflections are here given together on iiccount of their ci
aa auxiliaries (322 S.).
310. The Simple Forms of t)aben, fetit, toer'Dm.
(1) ^ a belt
Pres. Ind. Prea. Subj.
Paat Ind. Past Subj.
/ have I may have
/ had Imight or should h.
ic() liaht ii) ^aht
\^ batte ic^ kfoiit
bu bap bu babeft
bu bfltfeff bu bflttep
er ^t « ^abe
er l^atte et ^dtte
toir ^aben toit ^abcit
iDir fatten tcir fatten
t^r ^abl ii^T ^btt
i&r ^atttt i^r ^attet
fie ^btn fie ^abcn
fie fatten ftt ^atttn
Imperative
Present Infinitive
2. sing, bobt have
(ju) b«bcit {to) have'
2. plur. ^abt Aa«e
2. sing, or 2. plur. ifabttt ©ie
have
Present Pftrtidplfi
Past Participle
tjab tub having
gtl^abt had
311. 0aben drops ita b in ^afl and l)at and assimilates it to the tenae-aign
t throughout the past ind. and subj.;
it also adds the umlaut in the past subj..
which is unusual in verbs taking the tense-^gn t (289, 290).
312. (2)@cirt
Pres. Ind. Free. Subj.
Past Ind. Past Subj.
lam I may be
/ was Imight or should be
\iii bin it^ fei
\&j War i(^ loare
bu bift bu fei (ft
bu Warp bu toarrft
er ift et fei
er tear « toiirr
loir fmb toir fei en
h)ir War en Wtr mdren
itjr feib iffr feiet
ilfv tear {e)t (296) ibr loaret
fie finb fie fei en
fie tDorftt (te Wdrcn
• The principal parta of yerbs (skidg fdi, u BullIUry sbouW alwurs be leamfld wllh IB
before the p«>« participle.
n:,ti:.:kvX"i00J^lc
SIMPLE FORMS OF fiobcit Scill
2. sing, fei be
2. plur. feib be
2. slug, or 2. plur. feiei
Preeeiit Portidpte
feicttk being
Ptesent Infinitiye
(pi) feiit (to) be
Past Participle
geMefctt been
313. The tonae of ftin ar
and bip ; 2) in ftin, ifl etc. ;
endingH see 209 ft.
derived from three stems, appearing 1) id bin
3) in gtV>t\tn, IDqi etc For irregularities in tbe
314. (3) :
Ptes. Ind.
Ibeeome
id} toerte
im tDtrft
ec wirb
toil Uinbctt
iifx totxitt
fie toetbfit
Serbcn
Pres. Sobj.
/ mat/ become
0} Werbe
bu tcerbtft
er Wetbe
Wir Inetb en
i^t »«b(t
fie Werben
Put Ind.
I became
i^ Watb or
bu matbp or
et Watb or
wir Ipuiben
it)t tourbef
fte Wurbeit
/
Wutbt
Itiuibeft
toutbe
Past Sabj.
ight or should h.
id^ iciitbe
bu miiibeft
er teiiib e
wir iriitbta
i^r luiirbet
fie Wlirbre
Present InflnltlTe
()u) toerben {to) become
Past Partidple
flf toorb tw become
Imperative
2. sing. Werbc become
2. plur. toerbrt become
2. ging. or 2. plur. MeTbtn @ie i
Present Participle
hietb Mb beeominff
31B, ^tvbcn cliajiges t to i (302) in mlrfi, whicli also drops tlie b, and in
iDltb. The eteta of Uie past ind. has two forms, ivatb- and iDurb-, the former
occurring only in the Angular. For irregularities in the eodiogs see 299 ff.
316. Remarks ou tlie Subjunctive and Imperative: (a) The sub-
junctive has various equivalents in English (514 ff.). For the
sake of uniformity, only mai/ and might or should are given in the
models. — As the present subjunctive is often, used to express a
wish or request (515), any of ita forms may approach the force of
an imperative: er l^oiit (or )^abt et) ®ebulb let him have patience;
^aben toir (or (le) ®ebulb let us (or them) have patience ; likewise
with other verbs : man berfe i^n inS (SefaitgniS ! let him be thrown
info prison! ge^en Wir let us go.
817. (b) In the first two forms of the imperative, as (fate and
i)abt, tbe pronouns bll and i^i are used oi)ly wlien requii'cd for
emphasis or contrast : ^abe bu ©ebulb, hienn er aut^ ungebutbig ift
have thou patience, though he be impatient ; these two are the orig-
COMPOUND F0BM3 OP §Qben ©ein SBerben 69
iiial forms of the imperative. The third form, as Ijaben ©ie
(106), is really the 3. plur, of the pres. subj., used as the second
person ; but it is now more frequently employed as an imperative
than, the other two, and ©ie is never omitted.
318. The Compound Forms of f|o6en, fein, rocrben are made
and inflected as follows :
319. $aben szo, 6etn and SBetben
Perfect Indic&tlve
pres. ind. of 'ijaim + pres. iud. of fein +
past part, of ^atien past part, of fein or tvetben
/ have had I have been or become
id^ i/aU ge^flbt ii^ Bin getcelen or getnorbcn
bu ^afl fle^abt bu bift geWefen or geWorben
et i}at ge^abt et ift geWejen or g«iDorben
toil ^abeit ge^abt loir ftnb geWefen or geworben
i^t ^abt ge^bt iljr feib geWejen or getoorbtn
fie ifabtn ge^flbt fie finb gelueten or geworben
Perfect Subjunctive
pres. subj. of ^aben + ' pres. subj. of fein +
past part, of ^aben past part, of fein or tnerben
/ may have had I Tttay have been, or become
ic^ l^abe ge^bt xi) fei geioefen or getnoiben
bu ^obefi gebubt bu feieft getvefen or getvoiben
er i^aht ge^abt et fei geivefen or gelvorben
wit ^flben ge^abt toir feien getoefen or getoorben
i&t &abet ge&abt i^r feiet getoefen or getcorben
fie ^aben gebabt fie feien getoefen or geworben
Pluperfect Indicative
past ind. of (laben + past. ind. of fein +
past part, of ^ben past part, of fein or hieiben
I had had I had been or become
ic§ ^atie ge^abt i<^ mar geioefen or getootben
bu ^atteft ge^abt bu Warft geiuefen or getvorben
et ijoXti gebflbt et toot geloefen or getootben
wit fatten ge^abt Wit htaten getoefen or geiuotben
i^t ^attet ge&abt i^ luatt geicefcn or getootben
fie fatten gebabt fie toaren geWeftn or getootben
Pluperfect Subjunctive
past Bubj. of ^flben + past subj. of fein +
past part, of ^aben past part, of fein or toetben
I might or should have had I might or should have been or become
COMPOUND FORMS OP ^abcii ©ciii aSJerben
bu ^tte(i ^tifabi
wit fatten ge^abl
(ie fatten ge^abl
id^ Ware getvefen oi getvorben
bu Wdrefi geWefen or geWotben
n W&tt fleWefen or gelootben
toir loaren gehjefen or getootben
i&t htaret getpefen or gelootben
fie toaten getoefen or getootben
Future Indkative
pres. ind. of toetben +
pres. inf. of fein or loetben
I shall be or become
pres. ind. of loetben +
pres. inf. of ^aben
/ shall have
iH} »etbe ^oben ic^ loetbe (ein or toerben
bu Wirft ^aben bu toitft fein ot toerben
et. loirb ^obtn et witb fein or wetben
wit wetben ^ben Wit Wetben fein or loetben
i^r toetbet ^aben i^t toerbet fein or toetben
jie loetben ^aben fie »etben fein or toetben
Future Subjunctive*
prea, subj, of toetben + pres. snbj. of loetben +
pres. inf. ot ^aben ptea. inf. of fein or toetben
I shall have I shall be or become
idfi loetbe Ijaben
bu toetbeft ^aben etc.
\i} loetbe fein or toetben
bu toetbeft fein or toetben etc.
Future Perfect Indicative
prea. ind of toetben + pres. ind. of Wetben +
perf. inf. of ^aben perf, inf. of fein or toetben
I shall have had I shall have been or become
i<^ loetbe geljabt E^aben
bu toitft gebubt ^uben
iiS} loetbe geWefen fein or geWorben fein
bu Witft geWefen fein or getootben fein
etc.
Future Perfect Subjunctive
pres. subj. of Werben + prea. subj. of toetben +
perf. inf. of ^aben perf. inf. of fein or wetben
I shall have had I shall have been or become
\6) toetbe ge^abt ^aben
bu toetbeft geijabt ^aben
etc.
ic^ toerbe getoefen fein or getootben fein
bu Werbeft gewefen fein or getootben fein
Present Conditional
past aiibj. of wetben + past subj. of werben +
pres. inf. df ^oben pres. inf. of fein or loetben
I sliould have I should be or beeoine
• The t\it. euhj., the lUt perf. iod. and subj., Uie perf. coadlt and tbe perf, ioL aie ran
la the other rorma imdiaiii therefore be learned liter. / ^ i
^labeii ©ein SSetbcii ah auxiliaries
ii^ toilrte ^aben
bu h)Urb«ft |aben
« watbe ^aben
Wit tsttrben ^aben
i^t tuatbct ^aben
fie loftrben ^aben
i<$ watb« ein or toetben
bu wttrbefi rin or toerben
er totttbe ein or wevben
Mir milrten ein or toerben
|ie mUrben ein or ftjerben
past subj. of loerben
perf. inf. of ^a6en
I should have had
perfect ConQitiOxUl
+ past subj. of Werben +
perf. inf. of fein or werben
/ should have been ot become
\i) marte fle^bt ^aben
bu toutbefl fle^bt |flben
ic^ toiitbe getoefen fein or geWorben fein
bu toutbeft getoefen (ein or geloorben fein
Perfect InfinitiTe
pres. inf. of ^oben + pres. inf. of fein +
past part, of ^dben past part, of fein or tneiben
(to) have had (to) have been or become
gel^abt (ju) ^aben getoefen (ju) fein or gehjorben (ju) fein
>31. Where both the infinitive and the participle occur in a
compound form (fut. perf, ind. and subj. ; perf, condit, ; perf. inf.),
the German order is the reTerae of the English, e.g, I shall have
had is in German tc^ Icerbe ge^abt E^aben " / shall had have."
322. ^ben, ftin, loctbcn as Auxiliaries. (I) With ^a.i)tn or
with fein (S19, 320) are made : the perfect and the pluperfect
tenses, indicative and subjunctive ; and the perfect infinitive.
323, (1) ^abm is used a) with all transitive and reflexive
(414) verbs : ic^ t)atte baS fflu^ gefclien / had seen the book, er
^tte fic^ gefdj&mt Jte would have been ashamed; b) with the
modal auxiliaries (341, 346) : fie t)at lommcit Ipoden she in-
tended to come ; e) with most impersonal (419) and many other
intransitive verbs : eg Ijat gefc^nett it has snowed ; er t|Ot mir 06=
fatten he pleased me; fie (fatten meiner geba^t they had reraeTn-
bered me ; ^at er gefc^Iafen ? has he been sleeping ?
334. (2) Sein is used with many intransitives, most of
which signify a cliange of condition, a transition, or a move-
ment to or from a place. The commonest are
abge^tn 30 off, start aufge^en rise, op&n
antontmen arrive auffi)ringen jump up, fly open,
62 fallen @eiit SJer
' auf^e^en rise, get up
auSge^en go out, proeeml {from)
begegnen (dat.) mee^
bleibeit »tay, remain
eilen* hasten, hum"}/
einfaUen fall in; (dat.) occur to
ein|<^tafen fall asleep
eintieffen arrive, come to pass
eintreten enter, set in
entfte^en arise, ensue
erfi^einen appear
eDua^en awake, wake up
fasten* go driving, drive, pass
fallen fall
ftiegen* fli/
fltetien fiee
fliefien Jlow
folgen (dot.) follow
fottge^en go away
ge^en go, walk
gelingen (dat.) succeed
gefd&e^en happen, come to pass
^ingt^en go or wa/ft aionji
fommen come
(riec^en* creep, craw^
laufen* run
Examples : loann finb ©ie aufgeftonben ? when did you get up ?
c8 rodK ein ©treit barauS cntftanben a quarrel would have arisen
from it ; Biete waren geftorfien many had died ; fie xoat tiic^tig gc=
loadlfen she had grown a great deal.
386. The verbs in 324 which are marked with an asterisk some-
times take ^ben when they denote motion without reference to a
starting-point or point of arrival : bie Sinber tjatten lange gelaufen unb
gef)}iungen tJie children had been running and jumping a long time
(but (ie iDaren auf tie Sffiiefe gelaufen unb ttaten ilttet ben ®xabin ge=
fptungen th«y had run out upon the Tiieadow and had jumped across
the ditch) ; er ^at Biel geteift or geWonbert he has travelled, or wan-
dered, a great deal (but et ift nad) 31. geteift or « ift butc^ bie ffiiifte
geWanbert he has gone to N^. or he has wandered through the desert) ;
feitbem id^ au3 bem 9Seflen fort bin, tjabe ii) ni(^t me^r geritten since J
left the west, I have not been on horseback (but Don S^icago au8 bin
i(| geritten from Chicago I went, or came, on horseback).
328, (II) With Werben are made : the future and the future per-
Cll Aa AUXILIARIES
loSge^en go off, start
teifen* travel, go
reiten* ride
d^eibeil depart, go away
(^nrimmen* swim, float
ein he
inlen sink
(jringeit* Jump, burst, a-ack
trig en me, mount
letben die
tiirjen fall, tw)nJ>lc, rush
tteten step, tread
Betge^en pass, perish
beift^lDtnben disappear, vanish
terfmten sink away, be absorbed in
bonommen (dat.) occur, seem
Wac^fen grow, increase
Iranbetn* wander
tuei^en recede, give way
ioetterge^en go on, proceed
toeiben become
Iciebettommen come again or back
jte^en march, go, move
juge^en come to pass, come about
jurudfotnmen come back, return.
3.n.iized by Google
WEAK VERBS 68
feet tenses, indicative and subjuuctive; the conditional mode,'
present and perfect; the entire passive (407 fF.).
337. (Ill) The compound forma of any given verb ace therefore
made by combining the forms of ^aben or fetn or toetben before
the plus-sign ( + ) in 319-320 with those forms of the given verb
which correspond to the form after the plus-sign.
Weak Veebs
328. Characteristics. For the characteristics which distinguish
the weak verbs from the strong, see 288-292; for the endings,
297-308.
329. Models.
(1) Sobeit
lobte getobt praise
Simple Forms
Pres. Ind. Pres. Subj.
I praise I may praise
t(^ lobe ti^ lobe
bu lobft bu lobeft
et lobt « iDbe
Wtr loben Wii lobeR
i^r lobt i^t iDbtt
fu bbcN fie loben
Past Ind. Past Snbj.
X praised I might or sfiould praise
\^ fobte ic^ lobtt
bu iDbteft bu [obtept
er lobte et lobte
Wit lobtm wit lobtfw
itir lobtft i^ lob let
pe iDbten f" lo^ten
Imperative
2. sing, lobe praise
2.*phir. lobt praise
2. sing, or 2. plur. lobeii ©ie
Present Infinitive
(ju) lobfll {to) praise
praise
Present Participle
lobenb praising
Past Participle
gelobt praised
830. Com POUND Forms
Perf. Ind. Perf. Subj.
I ham praised ' I may have praised
id) ^abe gebbt i(^ t}aU gelobt
bu ^(t gelobt etc. bu ^abeji gelobt etc.
PIup. Ind.
/ had praised
bu ^otleft gdobt etc
Plup. Subj.
I might or should have praised
i(^ liatte gelobt
bu ^atteft gelobt etc. ^
WEAK VERBS
Put. Ind.
I shall praise
i^ Wetbe bben
bu toitft loben etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind."
I shall have praised
id} TOerte gelobt tja&en
bu mttft getobt IjQ&en etc.
Pt«B. Condit. .
/ should praise
\^ ivtiibe loben
bu totitbeft loben etc.
Perfect
gelobt (ju) I^aben
331. (2) iReben tebete gerebet {
Fut. Subj.*
/ shall praise
idf metbe loben
bu toerbeft loben etc.
Put. Perf. Subj.*
I shall have praised
ii$ ioerbe gelobt ^»aben
bu toetbeft gelobt baben et«.
Perf. Condit.*
I should have praised
i(i(i Itiiitbe gelobt ^aben
bu Wiiibeft gelobt ^aben etc.
(to) have praised
Simple Forms
Prea. Subj. Past Ind. Past Subj.
/ talked I might or should talk
Ptes. Ind.
I talk I may talk
vif leb e \ii teb c xiif leb etc
bu tebep bu lebep bu lebettp
et teb ct et teb e er teb tit
Wit lebett toil reben tvit tebekn
i^t tebrt \^x rebet it»t vebetct
fie reb to. fie teb eii fte teb eten
Imperative
2. sing, tebe talk
2. plur. tebet talk
2. sing, or plur. teb en ©ie talk
Present Partldple
teb tub talking
i^ tebete
bu teb eteft
et teb ete
tcit tebeten
i^t tebttet
fie teb eten
Present InfinttiTe
(ju) reben {to) talk
Past Participle
geiebet talked
Perf. Ind.
/ have talked
i(^ ^abe getebet
bu ^a(t getebet etc
Compound Forms
Perf. Subj.
/ may have talked
xif ^flbe gerebet
bu ^abeft getebet et«.
3.n.iized by Google
WKAK VERBS
nnp. Ind.
Plup. Snbj.
/ had talked
i^ tfatte getebet
bu ^atteft gerebet etc.
i(^ ^iitte getebet
bu liitteft gerebet etc.
Put. Ind.
Fut. Subj.
IshaUtalk
IshaUtalk
Of wetbe leben
bu roiift reben etc.
ic^ toerbe leben
bu merbeft reben etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
Fut. Perf. Subj.
I shall have talked
I shall have talked
i^ Merbe gerebet ^ben
bu toitft getebet ^aben etc.
\^ Itetbe geiebel tjaben
bu toetbeft getebet (taben ?tc.
Pi«B. Condit.
Perf. Condit.
I should talk
I should have talked
\ii wttrbe teben
bu WUtbeft tebm etc.
i^ iDtirbe gerebet ^ben
bu warbeft getebet fiaben etc.
Perfect Infinitive
gerebet (ju) ^aben {to) have talked
333. (3) 5D(gen folgte
ift gefolgt follow
Simple Forms
Free. Ind. Free. Subj.
Part Ind. Part Subj.
I follow I may follow
I followed I might or shouU follow
\i) frige \6^ folgt
iij folgte id) folgte
bu folgft bu folgefi
bu folgteft bu folgteft
er frigt er folge
et folgte er folgte
loir frigen Wit frigeu
toir fotgten ttrir folgfeu
iljr folflt ifir folget
i^r folgtet i^rt forgfet
fit frigeii fte folges
fie frig ten fte folgten
Imperative
Present Infinitive
2. sing, folge follow
{iu)folgen {to)folhw
2. plur. frigt follow
2. sing, or pliir. fotgw ©ie follow
Prwent Participle
Part Participle
friflewb following
gefolgt followed .
WEAK VERBS
Perf. Ind.
/ have followed
M^ bin flefclgt
bu bi(t gefolgt etc.
PIup. Ind.
I had followed
i^ foax gefolgt
bu luatft gefolgt etc
Put. Ind.
I shall follow
\ij toeibe folgen
b\i toitft fDtgen etc.
Put. Perf. Ind.
I shall have followed
id^ toerte gefolgt fein
bu toitft flefotflt fein etc.
Free. Condlt.
I slwuld follow
'\6^ tourbe folgen
bu totttbeft fotflen etc.
Compound Forms
Peri. SubJ.
I may have followed
i(^ f« flefolgt
bu feieft gefotgt etc,
Plup. Subj.
I might or should have foUowed
\i) Ware gefolgt
bu roateft flefolgt etc.
Pot. Sub].
7 shall follow
xij tuetbe folgen
bu toerbeft folgen etc.
Put. Perf. Sub).
I shall have followed
\^ Joetbe gefotgt fein
bu toetbeft gefotgt fein etc.
Perf. Condlt.
I should have f
i(^ foiirbe gefolgt fein
bu ioUrbeft gefolgt fein etc.
Perfect InfinUiTe
gefolgt (ju) fein ((o) havefolhwed
335. Verbs in e(n and ent frequently drop the e of these syllables
before the ending % \ id^ ^anbte (for ^anbele from ^anbetn ax>t), ic^
Wanbre (for tuanbere from toanbern wand&f). See also 304.
336. Verbs of Foreign Origin in icttn form the past participle
without the prefix ge : ftubiert (not „geftubiert") from ftubieten
study.
337. Irregular Weak Verbs. (1) The following verbs
change the Btem-vowel e to a in the past indicative and past
participle :
Past Subj. Past Psrt.
btennte gebt a nnt hum
fennte getannt know
nennle gen a nnt name
tennte ift getannt run
fenbete flefanbt send
toenbete geW a nbt turn.
Inf.
brennen
tennen
Past Ind.
bmnnte
lonnte
nennen
nannte
rennen
fenben
toenben
tannte
fanbte
to a nbte
MODAL AUXILLARIES Gl
Jtennen and nennen are the commonest verbs of this group. The
<!ommoneat compound of {ennen ia etfennen, erfannte, erfannt recog-
niae. — Setiben and iuenben have also the regular form of the past
indicative and past participle : fenbete, gefenbet, htenbete, getoenbet.
338. (2) The following are still more irregular, but nearer
their English equivalents :
Inf. Past. Ind. Past. Subj. Past. Part.
bring en brac^te brd^te gebraii&t brinff brought brought
benlen bat^te bfic^te gebad^t think thought thought
For a list of the commonest weak verbs see 626.
The Modal Auxiliaeies and SSiffen.
339. Principal Parts of the Modal Auxiliaries:
bUtfen butfte gebutft be allowed, be permUted ; LnterrogatiTely :
■may I ; with a negative : miist not
tbnnen fonnte gefonnt can, be able, may
mi>gen mo^te geme(^t may, like to, care to
miiffen mu|ite gemu^t must, be obliged, be compelled, have to,
cannot but
(oHeil foUte gefoSt shall, ought, am. to or arn. told to
tVoUcn iDoDte getDoQt will, be willing, want to, intend to, mean
to, be on the point of, be about to.
340. Inflection of the Modal Auxiliaries.
Simple Forms
Present Indicative
i4 bntf
tonn mag
m,i
feu
Bil
t>u k.tffl
tannft magft
m»ft
fell ft
wilfl
It b«tf
tonn mng
mnt
l.a
wil
tDtt btttfen
fbnnen mbgen
fen en
uelen
i*t blltfl
tijnnt raijgt
mii^t
foUl
molt
(ie batfta
iijnnen raBgtn
miiRen
foaen
moQen
i* bUtft
tonne mCge
mUfl.
fole
toeUe
bu bttrfeft
tiinneft megefi
milfjefl
feu eft
nolift
ep b«tfi
tiinne mage
mUJ,
foOe
tteBe
,. t,«ogle
MODAL AUXILIAltlES
toiv
btirfcit
(Bnncn
mttflew maflen
fsln
tnodcn
i^r
biirfet
liinnef
mi^Qct mafjtt
(ollt
Itolrt
(ie
buifen
liinncn
Past Indicative
fMa
woDtn
i^
burftf
lonnte
mo^ it mufite
follt
woffte
bu
burftep
fonnteft
mo(^teft mu&tefi
felll.|l
uolttfl
etc.
etc.
etc. etc.
etc.
etc
Part Subjunctive
ii$ biirfle (Bnnte mbifte mttfelt follte tooUte
bu btltftef) tbnntcfl mS^tep mU^tcft fodtcft iDoKtefl
etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
Impaiathre
in. sing. tooQe
2. plur. tooKct
2. sing, or 2. plur. toolltn Sie
Ptesent Infinitive, see 339.
Present Participle
btitftiib tiinnenb mSstnb mtiffettb foHenb iDoHenb
Past Participle, see 339.
Compound Fokms
Perf. Subj.
tc^ ^be fleburft, gelonnt et«.
Ferf. Ind.
id^ i}abt geburft, grfonnt etc.
Plup. Ind.
tc^ (jatte fleburft, gelonnt etc.
Put. Ind.
ic^ irerbe butfen, I5nnen etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
iH} iceibe gebutft ^aben
li) iptibe getonnt ^aben etc.
Pnw. Condlt.
i^ IvUibe biiifen
i4 Wttrbe tennen etc.
Plup. Subj.
id) \}attt gebutft, gefonnt etc.
Fnt. Subj.
ii) toetbe biitfen, tSnnen etc.
Fnt. Petf. Subj.
id^ werbe gebutft ^aben
\i) Werbe gdonnt l^aben etc.
Peif. CondU.
id^ wiiibe gebutft ijaben
ic^ fotttbe gdConnI ^aben etc.
Perfect Infinitive
cburft (ju) ^aben, gelonnt (ju) l^aben etc.
MODAL ATJXIT.IARTB8 69
342, Irregular or Special Forms and Uses. The singular of the
present indicative, except that of ittollen, was originally the past
tense of a strong verb, hence no endings In the 1. and 3. persons
(299, 303). When this strong past had acquired present meaning,
a new weak past was formed with the tense-sign (.
848. The vowel of the singular of the present indicative is differ-
ent (except in foKen) from that of the plural. The plural has the
same vowel as the infinitive.
344. Siitfen, tflnnen, miigen, ntuffen have no umlaut in the past
indicative and past participle, ©oHen and luoHen have no umlaut
anywhere.
345. ^Ugen changes g to d^ in the past indicative, past subjunc-
tive and past participle.
346. When a compound form ordinarily requiring the past parti-
ciple is accompanied by a dependent infinitive, the infinitive of the
modal auxiliary is used instead of the past participle : id) ^abe ti
ni^t t^un iBnnen (for gelonnt) I have not been able to do it, but ii^
^6e ti nii^t getonnt (when the dependent infinitive is not expressed)
I have not been, or / was not, able ; so also : bu Ijatteft t3 vkiji tefen
bllrfen (for geburft) you would not have been allowed to read it, but bu
l^iitteft «3 nii|t gtbut^ etc.
847. 3"/ ''^^ '" ^^ English, is omitted before an infinitive de-
pending on a modal auxiliary : \^ Witt nat^ §Qufe ge^en unb arbeiten
I will go home and work.
348. ^eifeen IM, ^elfen help, ^ijren hear, lafjen let, cause, fe^en see
(also (el)ien teach, lernen learn, madden make, cause) commonly fol-
low the construction of the modal auxiliaries in 346 : id^ ijobt fie
fiitflen ^eten (for ge^brt) / have heard her siwf ; a (lat mi^ (ommen
iaffen (for gelaffen), he let me come or caused me to eome or sent for
me; t(^ tjabe i^n Hnnen lenten (for gefetnt) I have made his aequaint-
S4». DifflcultieB of Use and Construction. If the construction
in 346 and other constructions and uses of the modal auxiliaries
seem strange to the beginner, this is not because of any irregularity
in German, but chiefly because of three peculiarities of the corre-
sponding verbs in English : I. the defective inflection of can, mai/,
must, shall, will (360) ; II. the varying meanings of shall, should ;
will, wmild ; may, might (361-354) ; III. the illogical formation of
certain verb-phrases, such as could have done, might have done and
ought to have done (365-367).
360. (I) The English modal auxiliaries are defective, none of
them having an infinitive or a past participle, and one of them,
must, having only a present tense. For the forms which are want-
ing, English uses verb-phrases, e.g. in / have not been able to do it
70 MODAI. AUXIIJARIBS
the two words of tlie verb-phrase bean able take the place of one
word, uamely the past participle of can, which Euglish has not, but
which German has : ii^ ^fce eS ni^t t^iin iBnnen (for gefonnt, 346) ;
in I shall be able to do it the verb-.phraae be able stands for the
infinitive of can, in Geimau lOnnen, hence : i(^ toetbe eS t^un I5nn«n ;
in Twos Miged to go yesterday the verb-phrase was obliged stands
for the past indicative of must, in German mu^te, hence : ic^ tnu^te
geftetn ge^en ; in had Ibeen willing to go, he would have gone also the
verb-phrase been willing stands for the past participle of will, in
German luoHen (for getvoKt, 346), hence : ^atte ti^ ge&en hioffen,
fo toitre tx aail} gegangen.
3S1. (II) (1) English uses shall to denote obligation or futurity ;
should, to denote obligation, futurity, condition or conditional de-
pendence. For obligation German uses foil ; for futurity, ioetbe ;
for condition, the subjunctive; and for conditional dependence, the
conditional or the subjunctive (518, 519). Thus : he says that I
shall go (obligation), and I shall go (futurity) er fagt, tc^ foU Qti/tn,
unb i^ loetbe ge^cn ; you should not always come so late (obligation)
iju foUteft nii^t immet fo ftJSt fommtn ; he said that he should come
(futurity without condition j the direct statement is I shall come)
« fdflte, er toerbe tommen ; if you should come {condition), I should see
you (conditional dependence) Wenn bu Ifimeft, fo ioilrbe ii^ bii^ fe^en,
862, (2) English uses will to denote volition or futurity ; would,
to denote volition or conditional dependence. For volition German
uses hiitl ; for futurity, Werbe ; for conditional dependence, the
conditional or the subjunctive. Thus : lie says he will go (volition,
intends, or is willing, to go), and he will go (futurity) tx fagt, er toill
ge^en, unb et Witb ^efftn ; he simply would go (volition, insisted on
going) to the right, and if you had not met him, he would have gone
(conditional dependence) to the right et loollte bun^aud tec^tS fle^en,
unb loateft bu i^m nid(it begegnet, fo tottvbe er te(^ts gegangcn fein or fo
loare er re^ts geganflen.
3S3. (3) English uses may and might, as German uses mBgen, to
denote possibility, concession and the like. But English uses may
and might also to form the present and past tenses of the subjunc-
tive (potential), whereas in German the subjunctive is never forjned
with mBgen, but by inflection of the verb ; thus : I play that he may
sing ii$ fpiel«, bamit er fmge ; I played that he might sing ic^ fpielte,
bamit et ffinge,
304. EzpreBsioDS like 1<^ tpUlt, bamit er fingtii mi%t I play that he may be
inclined to, or lite to. Hag and iif \pMU, bamit n fingen itiadjtc I played that he
might be inclined to, or lite to, aing are so aearlj equivalent to those above
t^t they are oft«n used in the place of them ; nevertheless, iilBgf and moil^tE are
here not mere auziliariee of tlie subjunctive, as may and might are in En^isb.
356. (III). Such a verb-phrase as £»m^ Aaiterfowe in aconditional
-sentence contrary to fact (518, 519) like I could have done it yet-
MODAL AUXILIARIES 71
terday if you had helped me is an illogical formation, as becomes
evident when we substitute foi could its equivalent should be able
(to). We then have / should be able to have done it yesterday if you
had helped me, whereas the meaning of the original sentence is /
should have been, able to do it yesterday if you etc. Hence it appears
that the idea of past time belongs, logically, to the ability, which
is expressed in the auxiliary, and not to the doikg, which is ex-
pi-essed in the principal verb. In other words, what was needed in
formiug the original sentence was not the past subjunctive of can
with the perfect infinitive of do, i.e. could + have done, but the
pluperfect subjunctive of can with the present infinitive of do. As
it is impossible, however, to form the pluperfect subjunctive of can,
for lack of a past participle, we indicate the idea of past time by
putting the principal verb do in the perfect infinitive have done.
German, on the other hand, does form the pluperfect subjunctive
of {Bnnen and uses with it, logically, the present infinitive of t^un ;
thus : t^ ^iitte ti geftem t^un tiinnen, Icenn bu mit gt^Dlfen ^tte|i.
The same illogical formation appears in I might have done it
yesterday if you had helped me, if might have done be understood aa
the virtual equivalent of could have done, requiring the same ren-
dering in German ; and also in he ought to, or should, have written
ex ^fitte f(^tei6eti"foli«n.
3GS. When, however, verb-phrases like could have done and might
have done are used in sentences not involving a condition contrary
to fact, the idea of past time does attach to the principal verb, and
the perfect infinitive of the principal verb becomes the logical form
in English and in German : I proved that he could not have done it
since he was not there (i.e. it could not be, or w<is impossible, that he
did U) \i) htmUi, baf; et ti nidfit ^ttifan f}ahtn lonnte, ba et nid^t ba
toot ; he might have lain there all day, so far as I knew er moi^tc ben
gonjen -Cog ba gelegen Ijaben, fo biel ii^ toufete.
3S7. Note. ExpreBtdons like I sWI no("can" {= be iMe to) do it ; I have
not "couM" (= })een able to) do it; and if I had "could" (= been able to)' do
it, I *AouId have done it do occur in certain dialects and in older writers ; they
are tlierefore well adapted t« iUuatrata the use of the Cierman aiuiliaTies in tlie
corresponding eipresslona tt^ mitit tS niif)t l^un Ibniira ; ii^ t|ab( tt nt^t t^un
Knntn ; and nmn iif H ^Sttt t^un fBnntn, fo mUtU ii^ t« gct^an tfaita.
3SS. Meanings and Equivalents of the Hodal Auxiliaries. The
modal auxiliaries in the order of frequency, with the commonest
meanings and equivalents, also in the order of frequency :
^ntten, denoting : (a) Physical ability or possibility : can, be
able: id^ lonn je^t iriebet ge^en lean walk again now ; fo etiraS (ann
me borfommen such a thing can never occur ; et liinnte e§ t^n, toenn
er (liet todte he would be ahle to do it if he were here.
3W. (b) Permission or right : may, can, be allowed to ; of t«n
interchangeable with bUtfen (378) : fo, bag @(fen i(t je^ fttttflr *i«
1. k>o^ Ic
72 MODAL AUXILIARIES
Sinber ti^nnen ^weintommen there, dinner is ready now, the children
may come in ; ber 5|Jtafil)eitt aKein lonn leinen firieg wKaten the Presi-
dent alone cannot {has not the ri^ht to) declare war.
360. (c) Concession: may; often ititeichangeable mth mdgcn
(375) : boS lann iro^l Wa^r fein that may be true, I admit.
For (iJnnen in the sense of know see 382, 383.
861. !9Si)0tU, denoting : (a) Will or determination : will, am de-
termined to : i(^ Win ge^en unb leiner foil mic^ Ijinbem / vriU go, and
nobody shall kinder me.
saa. (b) Wiab or desire, usually with gein gladly, greatly, much,
fain, lief, like to j or with [iebet (compar. of getn) rather, "liefer,"
prefer to ; or with am liebften (superl. of ^ztn) most of all, "liefest,"
like best of all: tx luiH biii^ gent (etbft Sfxtiftv. he {Uke^ would like, or
begs leave, to see you personally ; geftem tDoHte et eS gem t^un yester-
day he was attxious to do it ; tx totH bi^ tieber fetbft f^jred^en he prefers
to see you personally ; et Witt bi^ am (tebften felbft fl)ve(i()en he very
much prefers to see you personally ,- ic^ Wcffte liebet ftetben al3 . . , i"
had rather die than . . . ; tx iDoUte am (iebften tefen he preferred read-
ing to everything else; iH) luiH, or WDllte, ebenfo gem bleiben Wie ge^fen
Iliad as lief stay as go. See also 369, 376.
863. (e) Willingness : be willing to : fie \ooQ.tt mit ba3 Sudff Wo^l
geben, aflein fie tonnte eS nii^t finbeit ifs true, she was willing to give
me the book, but she could not find it.
364. (d) Incipient action : be about to, be on the point of : er tVDQte
fluSge^n, alS i^ font he was on the point of going out when I came;
bie Ut»t Wollte eben fc^Iagen the clock was just about to strike.
365. (e) Assertion or pretension : assert that, maintain that, pre-
tend to : man toiff Wiffen, ba^ ber Riinig tot fei people pretend to know,
or will have U, that the king is dead; tx toifi ben 3)ieb nitfet gefe^en
^a&en he maintains that he did not see the thief
366. (f) Confidence, assurance (generally with f^on or Ibd^I easily<
no doubt and sometimes approaching the meaning of Werben in the
regular future) : be sure to and similar phrases : la^ i^n nur, er toitt
bflS Smc() fc^on finben Just let him alone, he is sure to find the book ;
auf fol^ cinem ^fetb Will it^ Wo^I reiten lemen on such a horse I am
bound to learn, or can hardly help learning, to ride ; §auptmann WiU
er Wotjl toerben, D&etft abet nie ! he will soon he captain, I am sure,
but colonel never/ baS WoCte Wolfl fo, or nic^t anber^, lommen I don't
see how it could have turned out otherwise.
ffipllen with a negative may sometimes be rendered by faU to :
baS ift eS eben. Was mit nit^t gefatten will that^s just what fails to
please me, or what X don't like, what I fail to appreciate ; Wit War=
teten lange, qI8 et abtx nirfit fommen Wollte, gingen Wit Weg «■« waited
a long tim^e, but when he failed to come, or was evidently not coming,
we went away.
D.n.iized by Google
MODAL AUXILIARIES 73
867, ®ollen, denoting: (a) Command: shall, should : bu foUft
beinen Stdi^ften lietien aid bii^ felbft thou shalt love thy neighbor as
thyself; bet JtBntg befall, fie fofften befreit Werben the king commanded
that they should be set free.
368. (b) Destiny, fate and (based upon the assurance of destiny
or fate) prediction, prophecy, promise or threat ; shall, should, be
destined to : §eil bit, SRacbetl^, bu foKft jli)nig Bon ©c^ottlanb toeiben !
hail, Macbeth, thou shalt be king of Scotland I jie jDgen in ben flrieg
unb Wu^ten ni(ftt, ba^ fie nie jutiidle^ren foCten they went to the war
and did not ktiow that they were destined never to return ; Wen JoKte
i(^ ba anberS tteffen ali meinen ©ruber ! whom should I meet there but
my brother.' iai fpQte fie ntit i^rem Seben bufien she was (destined) to
pay for that with her life.
369. (c) Duty, obligation : shall, should, ought to, am to : et (jfttte
JU §aitfe bleiben foKcn he ought to, or should, have stayed at home;
fage i^r, fie foH um fiinf U^t ^iet fein tell her that she is to be here at
five o'clock ; xoas foil i(^ bamit anfangen ? lohat am, I to do with it ?
bu follteft Uebet (362) ju j^aufe bleiben you had better stay at home ;
ii^ fagte, ¥t foUt eS liebev nit^t t^iun I told him he had belter let it
870. (d) Report : is said to or is r^orted to : et foU tot fein he is
said to be dead; uiele fpUtcn ba geloefen (ein many were reported to
have been there; baS 3!er6re(^en, toelc&eS et begangen ^aben (oil the
crime which he is said to have coTnmitted.
371. (e) Hypothesis (and, with au^, concession) : should or
might: foltte er ouc^ arm fein, fo ift et boc^ e^rlt(^ even though he may
be poor, he is at legist honest ; similarly in certain questions : foKte
er iBO^t Itant fein ? (might he perhaps be sieh ? i.e.) / wonder whether
he i» sick or is it possible (likely) that he is sick ?
878. SRfiffett, denoting : (a) Moral or physical necessity : be com-
pelled to, be obliged to, have to, must, cannot but, cannot help (doing
thus or so) ; in the past subjunctive ought to : et ift arm unb miife
arbeiten he is poor and is compelled to work ; jeber, bet i&n fQ&, mufete
i^n lieb ^aben everybody who saw him, could not but love him ; man
mtifefe ifjm ^elfen, meine i^, benn er ift fc^loQ^ one ought to help him,
I think, for he is feeble.
373. (b) Prohibition (with a negative): must not: baS mu^t bu
nii^t t^un, mein fiinb you must not do t/iat, my child, i.e. you are not
allowed to do that, see 379. This meaning arises from the original
meaning of both the English must and the German muKen, namely :
be free to ; hence, with a negative ; not be free to, not he allowed to.
Of course, miiffen in the sense of be obliged to may also be used
with a negative : et ^at e« rnc^t t^un mtiffen, ober et tjat eS get^ian he
was not obliged to do it, but he did it.
874. (c) Logical necessity, inference : must : btefet §err mufi teid)
T4 MODAL AUX1UARLE8
fein, et giebt ben 91nnen fo Diet @elb this gentleman must be rick, he
gives so much tnoney to the poor ; man mll^te bentiitt fein, toenn man
\o fXvoai glaubtc one would have to he crcuey to believe such a thing.
3TS. SRBgen, denoting : (a) Gonjectute, coDcession, petmisijian,
possibility : may, might ; often interchangeable with tflnnen (360) :
baS mog too^l toatit fein that may he true, I admit ; er mo<^te ba ge=
toefen fein (356), Dbgtei<^ i^n teiner gefe^en fiatte he might have been
there although nobody liad seen him ; jie mSgen ge^en they may go,
i.e. I give them permission or I don't care whether they go or not,
876. (b) Inclination, desire, liking, preference (especially in the
past- subjunctive ntbi^te), request, polite command: like, should like
to, care to, care for, care about : i^ mag gcrn 3Ku(if tjijren / like to
hear music ; er mod^tc nie f))ie(en he never eared about playing ; iH}
mii^te ein §au« taufen / should like to buy a house; man moi^te
glau&en, er fei tau6 one would be inclined to believe he was deaf;
fogen 6ie i^im, et mijge urn fec^S i}\n fein tell him {that he is expected,
or requested) to he here at six; ii) tcintte i^en, (ie mi}<$ten fte^en
Meiben I motioned to them to stop; ii) mag Heber (362) lefen alS
f^reiben, aber id^ mag am lieBften re^men I prefer reading to writing,
but Hike arithmetic best of all ; \i^ mod^te lieber 9lrjt fein als Aauf:
manit / had rather be a physician than a merchant ; er Id||t fogen,
©te miii^ten fo gut fein unb gleii^ lommen he sends word wouldn't you
he kind enough to come at once.
Here belongs also the optative (515) use of the subjunctive of
mogen : mijgeft bu immer ©liid b^ben ! wy you always be successful/
mij^te et batb toiebettommen ! would that he might soon return /
For mSgen with the infinitive as the equivalent of a subjunctive
of purpose, see 354.
877. (c) Power : can, he alle: tein ©alrament mag Seben ben Xoten
tuiebetgeben no sacrament can restore the dead to life. This is the
original meaning of mBgen, which is now rai'e and generally ex-
pressed by fiinnen or bermiSgen. Compare : bie ^Jla^t power, mad&=
tig powerful.
878. S^flrfcn, denoting r (a) Permission, right, softened assertion :
be allowed, be permitted, can, m,ay, be justified in, have a right to,
have authority to; often interchangeable with tdnnen (369) ; fie
butften atle a$t lage auSgeben they were allowed to go out every week ;
bu barfft je^t ^eteinlommen you may come in now ,- beine 3Ruttet butfte
Inoijl befe fein, atS bu ba3 tljatft your mother had indeed a right to be
angry when you did that ; Iret barf ^tet befe^Ien? who has the right
to command here ? wie btttfen ©ie bebaujiten, ba| ii^ e3 getl)an ? how
can you (how dare you) assert that I did it ? barf i^ um3 Stot bitten ?
may I ask you for the bread? biitfte ic^ Sie TOobl motgen befii^en?
might I perhaps call on you to-morrow ? taufenb %f}altx biirften genug
fein a thousand thaler are likely to be sufficient, or are su^ident, I
should say. ,-- ,
MODAL AUXILIABIBS 76
879. (b) Limitation or restriction (with a negative) : nat be al-
lowed, not be at liberty, must not (373) ; ic^ batf f§ nit^ft t^un / am
not allowed to do it ; ^iet batf ni^t flerau^t Wetben no gmokiag al-
lowed here; i^ luill bit wa3 fagen, o6er leinet batf ti ^Bren I'll tell
you something, Imt no one mwBt hear it.
380. (c) Kequirement, need : need to : et batf nut ben 2Rlinb fluf=
t^un, fo fcbtueigt aHeS he need but i^en his mouth, and all are silent.
This is me original meaning of biicfen, now more frequently ex-
pressed by bebiltfen stand in need of. Compare : baS SebftrfniS need,
want.
3B1. The Hodal Auziliaries without Dependent Infinitive.
Every modal auxiliary may omit the dependent infinitive when
this is easily suggested by the context; and If the infinitive is
transitive, its object appears as the direct object of the auxiliary ;
(1) id^ fann nic^t toeg I cannot go, or get, away ; ftt Icetben nit^t ^n
{dnnen they will not be able to go (thither) there ; et fann ni^t tfinauS
he cannot get out or out-of-doors or go out to walk; fte liinnen nil^t
na(^ §aule they cannot get, or go, home ; fte ^ot eS oft berf u(^t, o6et
fie ^at cS nie getonnt she has often, tried it, but she hoe never been able
to do it. See also 382, 38a — (2) ic^ mitt baS SBuc^ mc^t / don't
want the book; \6) MiH ail3 J want to go out or am about to go out;
ma3 tooQen ©ie ? what do you want ? fie woUen leinen Stiinig mtffx they
. want a king no longer. (3) et foU inS ©efangmS ke shall go, or is to
go, to jail ; et foH glei^ ^iet^er he is to come this way immediately;
bet Srief foU nac^ gnglanb the letter is to goto England ; ipaS foil i^ ?
what am I required, or expected, to do? what do you want of me?
baS Sinb foil feinen itaffee the child is not to have, or m,ust not have,
any coffee. (4) Wit miljjen motgen auf ©ee we must go to sea to-mor-
row i et ffot ti get^an, ob er eS gemu|t (lat, Weife ic& nic^t he did it,
whether he was obliged, or had, to do it I don't know. (5) befui^e bu
i^n, ic^ mag eS nic^t do you go and visit him, I don't like to ; magft bu
gem fflui^en? do you like cake? are you fond of cake? ic^ mag lieber
Stot I prefer bread or I would rather have bread. (6) bet jttanfe
barf tein fjleift^ the patient must eat no meat ; man iifvA ni(^t oHeS,
loaS man batf one does not do everything one is allowed to.
Here, as in 357, older English illDStrates modern Ciermau ; for in Shake-
speare we And sAemiot taith me; thou sAott to prison; yon may aaay hy night;
what vioiddst thou of 119 f etc.
. 383. iliSnnen, when used without a dependent infinitive, some-
times means know, know how, be skilled or versed in ; ex tann loebet
3)eutf(^ nod} @nglif4 ke knows neither German nor English ; tannft
bu beine ©rammatit ^eute ? do you know your grammar lesson to-day ?
383. Note. Sonnen is easily confounded with lennen know,
partly on account of similarity in spelling, partly on account of its
meaning in 382. Sennen, again, ia often confounded by the l>egin-
ner with loifjen (384), wliich also means know. Notice therefore :
76
Siffett STBONG VERBS
(1) ionntn hmit geloimt in the sense of know ia chiefly used of
langui^es, rules, lessons and certain games ; thus : ^at tx feine 2tU
tion, or ftin ©ebii^t, getonnt ? did he know his lesson or his poem ?
IBnnen ©ie St^ad) ? do you know, or play, chess ? (2) {enne;n (annte
gelannt means be acquainted wUh, know persons or things, kn<yw
through one's senses ; thus : ti^ lenne St^'^'" SIniber nii^t I don't know
your brother {by sight) or am, not acquainted with him ; ic^ tenne
biefe SRelobie I know, or recognise, this tune or U is familiar to mi/
ear ; (3) tvtffeit bufite geWu|t means know facts, know that some-
thing is thus or so, know through on^s intellect or understanding ;
thus : i(^ nti^, ba^ et teic^ ift, unb ic^ Wei^ and}, too er too^nt, obex id)
!enne i^n nid^t I know that he is rich and I also know where he lives,
but I don't know him, personally.
384. ^ifftn know resembles the modal auxiliaries in the in-
flection of its simple forms :
Pres. Ind.
Pres. Subj.
Past Ind.
Part Subj.
\i) m\%
■\i} iDiffe
ic^ reufeft
t^ roa^te
bu Weigt
bu luiqe^
bu iDugtefit
bu ti;4 tt^
er loeife
et toiffe
er h)u&(e
ei iDufetc
ton miff en
Wir toifjctt
wir Wu^ttn
tDir tuii^tctt
itrt mifet
i^r iriffet
i^r Wu^tet
i^r iDuMet
fie mifint
fie tottfctt
fie wufertH
f.e toiifettii
Imperative
Present Infinitire
i. sing, toiffe
ftnnw
(ju) Wifleii {to) know
I. plur. wiffet
fciww
i. sing, or plui
■. loilfen ©ie know
Present PBTtlclple
Past :
Participle
tuiffcitb knowing
aewus
;t known
The compound forms are made with ^abeii aad have none of the
irregular constructions and uses of the modal auxiliariea : fut. ind.
xi) luerbe toiffen ; perf, ind. ii^ ^abe gtwu^t etc. A dependent infin-
itive requires ju : er ^ot eS nii^t anjufangen getou^t he did not know
how to go at it. For wifftn as distinguished from fennen and
tennen, see 383.
Strong Verbs
3B6. Characteristics. For the characteristics which distinguish
the strong verbs from tlie weak see 288 ff,
3SS. Stems of the Principal Parts. (1) The stem-vowel of the
STRONG VERBS 77
past is always different from that of the infinitive. The stem-
vowel of the past participle is sometimes the same as that of the
infinitive ; fel^en [a^ S^F^^^*^ ^^ ' sometimes the same as that of
the past : fei^ten fo^t Qtp>iS)ten fight ; and sometimes different from
both : (ingen fang gefungen »vng.
887. (2) In most verbs the fioal consonant of the stem is the
same in the past and past participle as in the infinitive ; but :
388. (a) Six verbs (shortening the vowel while changing it)
double the consonant (b becoming tt) in the past and past parti-
ciple ; one, nei^men, in the past participle only :
grtifen griff gtgriffen grasp ftteiten (tritt gettritltn strive
reittn ritl ift geriiten ride leibtn litt gefitten styfer
fi^jttn ti^tf \\t gefi^ritten i^rUe fftiwiben [(^itt geit^ttten cu/
ne^men nafiin genoinmen itJce
889. (b) Four verbs (lengthening the vowel while changing it)
simplify the consonant (d becoming f) in the past ; one, bitten, in
the past and past participle :
t^iftxAva et|^ra( i(t erft^rorfeii he lommen torn ift gelommen eome
frightened tteffen ttof getroffen hii
foffen fiel Ift gefoHen fall bitten bat gebeten heg, ask
Verbs with etems in ff change only the fona of f| (4) : la(fen, infln., let;
titg, stem of past ind. and subj. ; (ag, 2. sing, imper. ; logl, 2. pliu. imp«r.
3M. (c) The following verbs undergo other changes of the st«m :
getien ging tft gegongett go fle^n [tanb geftanben stand
^iien 5ie6 gefwuen hew Hiun t^mt gct^n do
fieeii fa^ gefeffen sit jie^n jog gesogeit draw
391. (8) From the st^m of the infinitive itre formed aiso Ihe present indic-
ative and BQbjunctive, the imperative and the present participle. From ^e
stem of the past indicative is formed also the past subjunctive. — For changes
within the several tenses or moods and tor exceptions to the endings as given in
2B8, see 392 S.
892. The Present. In certain strong verbs, the second and third
persons singular of the present indicative undergo special changes.
(1) Verbs with short t (8) in the stem change this e to short
i in the 2. and 3. sing. pres. ind. ; e.g.
brei^n break id^ biei!^ bu briifift er &ti<^
trefftn hit ^ treffe bu ttiffft er irifft
S98. (2) The following verbs with long e in the stem change
this e to ie (— long i, 13) in the 2. and 3. sing. pres. ind. :
befe^Ien command id) befe^Ie bu befle^lft ec bcfjc^lt
(inpfe^leH recommend iif cmpfe^lE bu Euipfie^lft er empfie^lt
STRONG
VERBS
fle6ni give
14 9*
ta sliHt (#»
et fliebt{gi6t)
lelen read
let l.|.
b» lliiifl
It ll€(t
|*n ...
14 Ml
bu Mfi
et (l.tl
fte^ltn steal
i* fmit
bu f«<wi
« ftUftlt
gei*Sen .»».
apaee
.8 9*l,i€l|l
8M. (3) The following verbs change long e to short i ami
double the consonant in the 2. and 3. sing. pres. Ind. :
ne^meit take tcft ne^me bu nimmft er nimmt
trefen >tep, tread idf Itelt bu triltft er triH (397)
39B. (4) Verbs with a in the stem modify this a in the 2. and
3. sing. pres. ind. ; e.g.
tragen carry \<i) troge bu trdgft ct irHgl
Itftloten deep i^ ft^lafc bu f(()iaf(t er l^taft
3»e. (5) Saufen run and ftoften pwsA always modify the stem-
vowel in the 2. and 3. sing. pres. ind, : Idufft lauft, ftijfeeft ftSfet ;
{ommen come sometimes r fiJmmft IBmmt. — ©rlBfc^en be extinguished,
go out changes B to i ; erli^t^eft etlifc^t. ©ebftren give birth to
chaises a to te ; gebierft ge&iert,
397. (6) The following verba with stems in t (all of which
change the vowel according to 392, 394, 395) do not separate the
endings (i and t from the stem by the vowel e (293) in the 2.
and 3- sing. pres. ind. In the 3. sing, one t is dropped :
fe^teit fight
i* fe*te
bu fil^t
txW
gelten he worth
\<i) gette
bu giltft
M gilt
treltn s'g>, tread
i* trete
bu trittft
« Irilt (394)
^Iten hold
i* ^Ite
bu ^Itft
erpt
rateh advite
I* rate
bu tattt
er rat
m. The Past. (1
In the pas
indicative,
verbs with stems in
b or t (tt) often reject the e (293) between the stem and the end-
ing (i of the 2. singular; e.g. bu banbft you bound, bu littjl you
suffered,
899. (2) The past subjunctive is formed from the stem of the
past indicative by adding the proper endings (298 ff,, 295) and by
modifying the st«m-vowel, if this be capable of modification ; thus :
ind. i(^ fong, subj, iif f&nge etc., see 403.
400. Certain verba have double formB with diBerent vowels in bott indica-
tive and aubjunctive ; certain others have double forms with different vowels In
tbe Hubjunctlve only ; see 633, 636, 642, 648.
401. The Imperative. Most strong verbs that change e to i or
ie in the 2. and 3. sing, of the present indicative (392-394) make
the same change in the 2. sing, of the imperative and omit the end-
ing e (300) ; thus :
D.n.iized by Google
8TEONG
VERBS
Pres. Ind. Sing.
1 2 3
httite bnm 6ri(^l
Imper. Slug.
2
blii, break
befe&Ie bcfit^tft fepe^fl
te^e (ieMt fie^t
fle^ {fieW ^^^ (S^fiof-O
ne^Die nimmft nlmmt
nimm (a-te
But:
loeirbe ifijcft witb
roeibe become
The ending e is often omitted tn other strong verbs : fomm eome,
get) ffo, Io| ^i etc.
402. The Past Participle sometimes drops the e of ita ending,
especially after ^ : gefe^in seen. I'^n do forms gef^an done. @e=
gelfen eaten, trom ef(en 6a(, contains the prefix ge twice; when fl^
ej^en was contracted to geffen and no longer felt to be a participle,
another ge was prefixed,
403. Models. (1) ©e^en fat) gefe^en see.
Pres. Ind.
I see
bu M(t
a fietit
Ifir le^teti
fte leiira
Simpl:
Prea. Subj.
I ■may see
bu (elieft
« fetie
tnic feCien
i^ fe^et
ImperatiTe
2. sing, fit^ see
2. plur, fe^it «ee
2. sing, or plur. fe^tn
Present Participle
Past. Ind. Psst. SubJ.
I might or should si
bu fafffi
er fa^
icir fallen
i&t fQ&t
fie fat) en
id^ fa^ e
bu f4eft
er fa^e
toit fa^en
i^(r fa^et
fte fa^en
Present Infinitive
(iu)fe^eil {to) see
Past Participle
,. Compound Eokms
Pert. Ind. Perf. SubJ.
I have seen I may have seen
i^ ffobt gefe^en i^ ^obe gefelien
bu baft gefe^en etc bu ^abeft gefelien .etc. .
STEOMQ VERBS
Flap. lod.
I had seen
i(^ ffattt gefe^en
bu ^atteft flcft^en etc.
Fnt. Ind.
/ shall see
\6) toetbe fe^en
bu hiirft feffen etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
I shall have seen,
ii) Wrtbe gefe^en ^a6en
hi Itiitft gtfefftn ^taben etc.
Pres. Condit.
I should see
bu inUrbeft f«^en etc.
Plnp. Subj.
/ might or should have seen
\4 Ijattt gefe^ien
bu ^atteft gefe^en etc.
Fut. Subj.
J shall see
i(^ merbe Je^en
bu tterteft fe^en etc.
Fut. Perf. Subj.
/ shall have seen
id) merbe gefe^en (laben
bu luerbeft gefe^en ^ab«n etc,
Perf. Condit.
I should have seen
id} toiirbe gefe^en ^aben
bu tD^tbeft gefeE^en ^abtn etc.
Perfect Infinitive
gefe^en (ju) (jaben (to) have se
405. (2) fiommen tarn tft gelommen come.
Pres. Ind.
I come
\^ lontnte
bu lommft
et lommt
Juit Irnnmm
i^r totmnt
fie loimnen
Pies. Snbj.
/ may come
\i) lomme
bu tDmmefit
«r tomme
mit fomnten
xifc itsmmtt
fie lommen
Simple Forms
Past Ind.
Imperative
2. aing. !omm come
2. plur. lommt come
2. sing, or 2. plur. tDmnten ©ie
Present Participle
lonuil tub coming
i(^ lam
bu tarn ft
er fatn
toix tarn en
it)! tamt
fit famen
Past Subj.
I might or should eo
Eame
bu f am eft
er lame
iDir Ifimen
i^r fame*
fie tdmen
Present Infinitive
(ju) tommen {to) com
Past Participle
gefommen come
THE PAsams
i. Compound Forms
Perf. Ind. Perf. SubJ.
/ have come I may have come
i^ inn Qttommm li) fei gelommen
bu t>ift gcfommen etc. bu feitft gelommen etc.
Plnp. Ind. Plup. Subj.
/ had come I might or should have com.
x^ loot gefommm ic^ Wfire gefoninien
bu hjarft gefommen etc. bu roSteft getonnnen etc.
Fut. Ind.
I shall come
i(^ werbe tommen
bu roirft fommen etc.
Put. Subj.
/ shall came
ic^ toerbe lommeit
bw wertcft fotnmen etc.
Fut. Peif . Ind.
I shall have come
id^ toetbe gelDinnien fein
bu Wirft fletomtnen Jein etc.
Pres. Condit.
/ should come
i(^ lotirbe tommen
bu imiibeft tommen etc.
Perfect InfinUire
getommen (ju) fein {to) have
For the commonest strong verbs see 827 B.
Fut. Perf. SubJ.
/ shall have come
i^ tp«be getommen fein
bu Weibeft geEommen fein etc.
Perf. Condit.
/ should have come
\i) tDitrbe getommen fein
bu toiirteft getommen fein etc.
The Passive
407. Formation. The auxiliary of the passive is ttterben, and
the forms of the passive are the forms of loetben construed with
the past participle of a transitive verb. This participle follows
the simple personal forms of tuerben, but precedes hterben (infin-
itive), loerbenb (present participle) and lootben (form of the past
participle used in the passive instead of getooiben). Corresponding
to the simple personal forms of the active, the passive has there-
fore : the simple personal forms of irerben + the past participle of
the transitive verb (transposed in the pres. inf. and the parti-
ciples) ; and corresponding to the compound forms of the active,
the passive has : the simple personal forms of the auxiliary of
toerben + the past participle of the transitive verb + tootben or
Werben or lootben fein (except in the perf. inf.).
THE PASSIVE
408. Inflection of tbe Passive of iaitn praise.
Forms Cobsespondihg to the Siupi,e Forms op the Active
Pres. Ind. Ptes. SubJ.
I-may be praised
i{^ Inerbe gelotrt
bu toetbeft gelobt etc.
id^ Mcrbe gelobt
bu toitft flelobt etc.
Post Ind. Paat Subj.
/ was praised I might or should be praised
iiSf Voaxi or ivuirbe gelobt ti$ touibe gelobt
bu tsaibft or lourteft gebbt etc. bu tcjirbeft gelobt etc.
ImperatiTe
2. sing. Werbe gelobt bep
2, plur. tveibet gelobt be praised
2. sing, or plur. toerben ©ie gelobt
Je praised
Present Partidple
gelobt totrbenb being praised
Infinitive
gelobt (ju) hjerben (to) be praised
Past. Partidple
geloBt Worben been praised
FOKMB COKRESPONDINO TO THE COMPOUND FoBMS
OF THE Active
Peif. Ind.
I have been praised
ic^ bin gelobt toorben
bu bift gelobt toorben etc.
Plnp. Ind.
/ had been praised
i(^ tvat gebbt hjoiben
bu Watft gelobt ivotben etc.
Fut. Ind.
I shall he praised
\i) ioerbe gelobt tuerben
bu loiift gelobt toerben etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
/ shall have been praised
ii$ Ioerbe gelobt tooiben fein
b« hjirft gelobt Icorben fein etc.
Perf. Subj.
I may have been praised
\S) fei gelobt hjotben
bu feieft gelobt tpotben etc.
Plup. Subj.
I might or should have been praised
\i) ipore gelobt lootben
bu WSreft gelobt toorben etc.
Fut. Subj.
I shall he praised
\ii toerbe gelobt toerben
bu loerbeft gelobt Werben etc.
Fut. Perf. Subj.
I shall have been praised
\^ hjerbe gelobt TOotben fein
bu Wetbeft gelobt toorben fein etc,
THE PASSIVE 83
Pres. Condit. Perfect Condlt.
I should be praised I should have been praised
id() tvilrbe gelobt loeiben ic^ WUibe gelobt tvorben fein
bu tDutbeft getobt toetben etc. bw trarbeft gelobt Woiben fein etc.
Perfect Infinitive
gelobt tporben (ju) fein (to) have beeth praised
410. Ueaning of the Passive. The passive roice denotes a proc-
ess, a change of condition, an action as affecting the person "or
tEiiig acted on ; this is more fittingly expressed by the German
Wwbtn become than by the English be. Moreover, English verb-
phrases consisting of a form of be and a past participle are not
al^ys passive ; be is often an independent verb, and the past par-
ticiple constTU^ with it is then a predicate adjective. When be is
so used with a past participle as predicate adjective, it denotes a
state, a condition resulting from an action, and this idea German
expresses by the use of \t\xi he: /^ . [ • ■ ■• - . '
einige Sd^uEie tcecben aai §ol} ge= biefe @(^ut)e finb oM $o[) gemad^t
matlfet some shoes are made of thsse shoes are wooden
ber Srief tnntbe getabe gefc^riebcn, ber Sritf mat fc^on gefc^rieben, al8
qIS itfe tarn the letter was just \i) [am the letter was (already
being written when I came written) finished when I came
b« Srief mufe mit S^inte gefi^rieben ber Sticf raufe urn 12 U^r gef(^rie=
merben the letter must be writ- ben [ein the letter must be (writ-
ten in ink ten) finished by 12 o'clock
bag $eer ift toieber gefi$Iagen mot= baS §eet ift gefc^Iagen unb jie^t fii^
ben the ai-my has been defeated juriitf the army is defeated and
again is retreatiny ^ the defeated
army is retreating
bet ©olbat Wat gefangen Worben ber 6oIbat tear gefangen the sol-
tlie soldier had been captured dier was a captive
411. The Passive of Intransitive Verbs. Many intransitive
verba, and also transitive verba when used without a direct object,
form an impersonal passive : eS ttntb \ifOn getangt there is dancing
going on already ; e3 tritb um Stntlcort gebeten an answer is requested ;
C5 Wurbe ju Biel gef(^loa§t im I^eater there was too much talking in
the theater. When the sentence is in the inverted order, eS is
omitted : wm 3lnttt)Drt Witb gebeten ; im S^^eatet Wutbe ju Biel ge^
fi$l»a§t. See also 424.
418. Substitutes for the Passive. The passive is less frequent
in German than in English. Its commonest substitutes are an
active verb with the indefinite pronoun matt for its subject: nai^
bet ©C^tat^t begtub man bie 2^oten after the battle the dead were
84 REFLEXIVE VERBS
buried; or a reflexive verb: bte ©a^e ^nt.fic^ je^l ouffleflftrt the
matter has now been cleared up.
41S. Passive verb-phrasee followed by an mflniUve are nsoall; rendered
with man, a clause often takiug the place of the English infimtive-oonBtruotion ;
he woi ordered to go man befafit t^m ju geSen ; fte icas fcnoion to be honest (651)
man roiigle, baft tx (ficltifi loor ; he lotM heard to tay man ^rte i^n (agen or iiion
i)Brle, bofi n )aaU. But passive verb-phrases followed by a clause with Viat
tisusUy admit of a passive veib-pbraea in German with a ba^-clausc as logical
subject : he wai told, or ijiformed, or given to uiiderstand that he must go iftm
TOutbe B'foflt, or berld)tft, or ju BtrRe^tn qtithtxt, bag n 6'^rn niiiffe {or er mfl|Te
qtiftn) or withes as anticipatory subject (111): eS TOutbe t^ni flefogt, or btrli^tet,
or JU Dttpt^en itsebtn, bafi tx etc.
Reflexive Verbs
414. Inflection. The inflection of the aimple forms of a reflexive
verb ia clear fi-om 114, 115. Only the imperative need be added
here ; 2. sing, ft^iime bic^ be ashamed {of yourself); 2. plur. fc^Amt
eild^ be ashamed (of yourselves) ; 2. sing, and 2. plur. fi^amen ©ie
fi(i^ be ashamed {of yourself or of yourselves). — The perfect and
pluperfect (ind, and aubj.) and the perfect infinitive are made with
Ijaben (323) : ii$ ^obe, or ^afie, micb geft^amt / have, or had, bem
ashamed etc,
415. Uses and Constructions. Some reflexive verbs are con-
strued with a genitive : tx f^Smt [i(^ feiner iSUetn he m ashamed of
his parents ; fteue bt^ beS SebenS ! r^oice in life .' Of eriniiere mi^
feiutt nt^t / do not remember him ; others with a dative : bflS ^(l^t
na^t jii$ fcineni Snbe the year is drawing to a close ; still others with
a prepositional phraae : ^e fttrc^tete fii^ tor bem §unbe she was afi-aid
of the dog.
416. Some intransitive verbs are used with a reflexive pronoun
in the accusative followed by a factitive predicate ; bu Wirft bit^ tot
lad^en you'll laugh yourself to death ; others imperaonally and with
an adverb of manner : eS tanjt, or fingt, or fljielt f«^ ^iet flut it is
good dancing, singing, or playing here, i.e., the place is well suited
for dancing etc. This does not necessarily mean, as the impersonal
passive (411) e€ tDirb ^i«r gut getanjt does, that there is gooddancin/j
actually going on.
41T. A few verbs are used with a reflexive pronoun in the dative,
and generally have a second object in the accusative or in the form
of an infinitive-phrase : itHf fjabe mir baS nie ringebtlbet / never imag-
ined that ; i{^ bilbrte mir nie ein, Jo uiel Sinftufe ju beji^en / never
imagined that I had so much influence.
3.n.iized by Google
IMPERSONAL VERBS
Impersonal Verbs
419. Characteristics. Classes. Impersonal verbs ascribe an ac-
tion or a state to an indefinite agent or subject, eg it, or express a
verbal idea witbout reference to a subject, Such ai'e :
420. ( 1 ) Verbs denoting phenomena of nature : «g regnet it rains ;
eS bonnerte it thtmder&d ; eg wirb morgen (dfmeien it will snow to-mor-
row ; eg S^Qi ^ter geftem ge^agelt it haUed here yesterdatj.
421. (2) Verbs and verb-phrases with fein or wetben, describing
a state of mind or body. With some the subject experiencing this
state is put in the accusative ; with others, in the dative ; and with
a few, either in the accusative or in the dative : eS fritrt mii$. I feel
cold; eS ^ungert mi(^ I feel hungry ; e§ burftet mtt^ I feel thirsty ; e8
gtaut mit Dor ber 3lai^t I dread the night ; eg biinft mit^ (or mir) me-
thinks, it seems to me ; eg ift mir, al5 o6 \ii ^ujit ^6rte it seems to
me as if I heard music ; eg ift, or ipitb, mit bange I feel, or begin to
feel, anxious; eg toat, or hjatb, mit f^lei^t ju 3Kute I felt, or began
to feel, unwell.
423. (3) Idiomatic expressions derived from verbs not ordinarily-
used impersonally : eg fe^dt mit an @elb latn, in need of, or I lack,
money; eg ge^t i^m nidll gut things don't go well with him or he is
not well; eg giebt with an accusative : eg giebt einen @ott there is a
God; eg ga6 ju jenet 3^'* ""i^ trine (Sifenbatmen there were no rail-
roads at that time ; eS mufi einen ©ott geben tJiere must be a God ; eg
gilt brin Seben your life is at stake ; ii tteibt mic^ ^inaug in bie ffielt
(U or something i.e.) a desire, or an impulse, urges me to go forth
into the world; ba tief e§ i^m aiig bem SBalbe ju th^i (it i.e.) a voice
called to him from the forest.
428. (4) Intransitive verbs used passively or reflexively i eg Wirb
^eute SIbenb getanit metben there will be dancing to-night ; eg lo^nt fic^
bet ^U^e (gen.) it.is worth the trouble; eg ^i^nbett fu^ um @elb it is
a question of money ; eg ftogt fttlfe, ob et ge^en !ann it is a question
whether he can go ,- eg fc^tdbt fi($ fc^tcer mit einer fcti^en gebet it is
hard writing with such a pen. See also 416.
4S4. Omission of tS. In the inverted order of words, eg is com-
monly omitted with the class of verbs in 421 : mi(^ ftiert / feel
cold; Hfn ^ungerte hs was hungry; butftet i^n, fo ttdnle i^n if he
thirst, give him drink; i^nen lOUtbe tange they began to be afraid;
mi{^ blintt, er toitb alt it seems tome he is growing old. With the
passive constructions (423), ti must be omitted in the inverted
order : (feute Slbenb Initb getanjt Wetben. Of the reflexive construc-
tions (423), some omit eg or substitute bag for it, others retain it :
ob et ge^ien lann, fragt jii^ (or, with emphasis, bag ftagt (it^ that is a
question). Verba like those in 422 retain the eg in the inverted
order. See also 111. ,-. .
COMPOUND VEBB8
Compound Verbs
425. Two Classes. There are two classes of compound
verbs : those with inseparable prefixes and those with separable
prefixes.
. Insbfarablk Compounds
126. Inseparable Prefixes. There are six prefixes that are
never separated from the verb: k, cnt (427), et, gc, Der, ger.
Verbs compounded with these have the accent on the stem and
are inflected like simple verbs, except that the past participle
omits the prefix ge ; thus : Dcrfte'^en Octftonb' Dcrftan'bcn (not „9e=
berftartben") understand; gefjiJ'reit geljBr'te getjSrf (not ..gcfletjfitt")
belong.
427. 6nt changes to tmp in empfangtn receive, empfe^Ien recom^
mend, em)>finben feel.
438. The past participle ot an; verb compounded with gt is Identical in form
witli the past participle of the simple verb :
489. The past participle of an inseparahly compounded strong verb having
the same stem-vowel as its iuflnitive is identical in form with tliat infinitive :
MHpfanflett emppng tmpfanBen receitte, uerftnltii Brtjiitfi netjiofien thrwt out.
430. Model. 8efi^rei&en kfc^tieft Ijcfd^riekn desert, an insep-
arable compound taking t)aben as auxiliary.
Simple Forms
Pres. Ind. Pi«s. Subj. Past Ind. Past. Subj.
I describe I may describe I described Imight or should describe
xif b^iftttbt i^ beft^reibc ii^ befc^tieb td^ bcfc^tiebe
bu bef^ietb^ bu befi^reibeft bu befc^riebft bu befc|riebf|l
etc. etc. etc. etc.
ImperaUve Present Inflnitive
2. sing, beft^tcibe describe (pi) befd^reibtn (to) desenie
2. plur, beft^reibt describe
2. sing, or pliir. befc^r^tben ©le describe
Present Participle Past Participle
befc^iwibenb descrying bef^rieben described
D.n.iized by Google
COMPOUND VEKB8
Compound Forms
Perf. Ind.
I have described
tii) ^abe befi^rieben
bu ^aft befd^irieben etc.
Plnp, Ind.
I had described
ic& tjQtte befd^ttieben
bu IfQtteft befi^rieben etc.
Fut. Ind.
/ shall describe
ii$ tperbe 6ef(^reiben
bu toitft bef^reiben etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
/ ahoR have described
t(^ loetbe bef(J»tieben (jaben
bu iDtrft bef^iieben (raben etc.
Perf. SubJ.
/ may have described
ii$ tiabe befc^rieben
bu ^abeft beff^rieben etc.
Plnp. Subj.
I might or should have described
i^ ^dtte befc^rteben
bu ^fittej't befd^tieben etc.
Fut. Subj.
I shall desert
id} Wecbe befc^reiben
bu Wetbeft bc\iS)xtibin etc. -
Fut. Perf. Snbj.
I shall have described
id) iiieirbe befi^rieben ^aben
bu Werbeft beft^rieben ^aben etc.
Prea. Condit.
I should describe
i^ toitrbe bef(i()i:eiben
bu tpUrbeft bef(^teiben etc.
Perf. Condit.
/ should have described
\il hiiitbe be|d)rieben ^aben
bu totirbeft bef^rieben ^ben etc.
Perfect Infinitive
befi^rieben (ju) tiQben (to) have described
43E. To inilect an iDseparablj compounded verb tliiit takes {tin b8 nuxiliaiy,
as tmcctfin, Uf nrelflt, tfl Derrdll fro on a journey, eabstituC« for the forms of ^aben
in 431 tlioBe of fein.
483. HeaningB of the Inseparable Prefixes. 33e, like English
be-, makes intraiieitive verbs transitive and also fomia vei'bs from
adjectives or nouns; tlagen wail: be!(agen bewail; fallen Jail: bes
fatten befall; htx free: befreien set free; bet ffiitt host: btioirten
entertain.
434. @nt of ten denotes separation ; ge^en go.- entge^en escape.
48S. @r means forth, up, up out of and sometimes pet or acquire
by the action of the verb ; fte^en stand: etfte^en stand forth, arise,
originate; finbenj^nrf: tx^nhm fnd out,inv^if ; raten guess: errateit
get at by guessing, guess; jagen hunt: erjagen get, or acquire, by
hunting.
4se. The meanings of ge are too varied and obscure to be given
here.
D.n.iized by Google
88 COMPOUND VBBB8
487. 2(ev means forth, away and aometimea corresponds to mis- .■
taufcn barter, buy: Bertauftti barter away, sell; ge^en go, pass: btx--
geljen pass away ; fu^ten lead: eetftt^ten mislead, seditee ; toten ad-
vise: 'ovccaitn miaadoise, betray.
4as. 3*"^ means cusuTider, in pieces: teifien tear: jerreifien tear in
pieces.
Separable Compounds
439. Separable Prefixes. (1) Among the commonest separ-
able prefixes are t)et and f)in, with certain of their compounds,
^r denotes motion toward the speaker or toward the point of
view which the speaker takes or wishes the reader to take; in
other words, such motion as is described by hither, here, this
way, along this way with reference to its end, and by thence,
from, there with reference to its starting-point. §in is the
opposite of fjcr and denotes motion thither, there, that way, along
that way with reference to its end, and motion hence, from here
with reference to its starting-point Thus : §etfet)en look this way ;
^infe^m look that way; f)etfd)irfcn send hither, I)infc^i<fen send
thither ^ gctjft bu l)in obcr lomnift bu I)er ? are yon on your way to
it (him. Iter, them') t or are yo\h coming back from it (him, her,
thent") ?
MO. The following are examples of common compounds of ^«r
and ^tn as prefixes :
^etftbfiangen Jiang down (from above, this way)
^eianlommcn com^e on, along this way ; apjtroach
^etouftttingen bring, or carry, up (from below, this way')
^iXanHxtttXl step out (from within, this way)
^eibeifufjrtn lead, or bring, on (this way, f^om farther off)
^eteintragen carry, or bring, in (from without, this way)
^enimfliegen fiy around, about, this way and that
^entnterf alien fall down (from above, this way)
^erBor^oIen fetch out or forth (from within, this way)
um^ietpiegeil Jly around, about, this way and that
^inabge^en go down (that way, from up her^
^inauf6(t<f«n look up (that way, from bdow her^
^inauSroerfen throw out (that way, from within here)
i/iMmtXtttn step in (that way, from without here)
t»iniiberfegeln sail across (from this side)
ifimmUx^^xdtXt send down (from above liere)-
Mmutret«n stup up to (from here) -. .
COMPOUND VERBS 0!*
^ii^ut^un put with, add to
bo^infa^ren drive along (that way, from here)
441. (2) Among the commonest separable pi-efixes are
also the following words :
ab off imfox up(ward) tot before, pre-
an on, at tntQtQm tov>ard,to meet boxbti by, past
auf up, upon feft fast, firm Bortibei: by, past
<xvk out, from' ^ovi forth, away, on 'ootfoaxti forward, on
bei by, to ^eim home Weg away, off, from
ba there \oi loose, off \Dt\XiX further, on
bar there, m view mit unth, along ju to, toward
boBon away, ahng, off na^ after, for juriirf back
tin into niebei down jujammen together
442. Accent and Construction. Separable compounds dif-
fer from the inseparable in four points: 1. the prefix has the
principal accent ; 2. in the present and past (ind. and subj.)
and in the imperative, the prefix is separated from the verb and
put at the end of the clause, unless the clause be a dependent
one with transposed order (587), in which case the prefix re-
mains united with the verb: ic^ fangc etii neueS ^u6) an' I am
beginning a new book; fange noc^ feiii neueS S9uc^ an' don't begin a
new book yet ; et fagt, cr fange ein neueS S8ui^ an' he says he is begin-
ning . . . ; but er fagt, ba^ cr etn neueS S8uc^ an'fange he says that
A« ts . . . ; 3. the ge of the past participle is put between the
prefix and the verb: ic^ fta&e ein iicueS SBut^ an'gefangcn, / have
begun . . . ; 4. when the infinitive requires ju to, this is put
between the prefix and the verb: ct bat mic^, ein ncueS S3uc^ an''
^ufangcn he begged me to begin . . .
443. Model. 9tnfan9en, fing on, ongefongen begin, a separable
compound taking ^aben as auxiliary.
SiMPLS FOKHS
Prea. Ind. Pres. Subj. Past Ind. Past Subj.
/ begin I may begin I began I might or should begin
id^ fange an i^ fange an ii^ fing an i(!^ finge an
bu fongft an bu fongeft an bu ffngjt on bu fingeft an
er fdnflt an er fange an er (tng an er finge an
luir fangen an Wit fangen an wir fingen an Wir fingen an
etc. etc. etc. etc. t-
90
COMPOUND VERBS
Impeiative
2. aiDg. fang(e) on hegin
2. plur. fanflt an begin
2. sing, or plur. fangen ©it a
Present Participle
anfangenb beginning
beyin
Present Infinitive
anfangen begin
anjufangen to begin
Past Participle
angefangen begun
Perf. Ind.
/ have begun
itifi ^be angefongen
bu ^aft angefongen etc.
Plup. Ind.
/ had begun
vil ^atte angefangen
bu ^atie(t angefangen etc.
Rit. Ind.
/ shall begin
i(^ Werte anfangen
bu toitft anfangen etc.
Fut. Perf. Ind.
/ shall have beffun
lij Werbe angefangen ^aben
bn tttitft angefangen \tai>tn etc.
PreB. Condit.
I should begin
ii) loiitbe anfangen
bu tcUrbeft anfongen etc.
angefangf
Compound Forms
Perf. Subj.
/ mag have begun
ill) ^abe angefangen
bw ^abeft angefangen etc.
Plnp. SubJ.
might or should have begun
ii} ^fitte angefangen
bu ^otteft angefangen etc.
Fut. SubJ.
I shall begin
id) Werbe anfangen
bu loetbeft anfangen etc.
Fut. Perf. SubJ.
I shall have begun
ic^ Werbe angefangen tjaben
bu toerbeft angefangen ^aben efce.
Perf. Condit.
/ should have begun
ii$ murbe angefangen tfabm
bu tourbeft angefangen ^aben etc.
Perfect Infinitive
( ju ) tfaben {to) have begun
44B, To inflect a, separabl; compounded verb that takes fehi as auxiliary,
as juriidfel)iren, !e^ttt juiild, i|1 jutfldsete^tt return, suhstltut« for tlie forms of
^Mn in 444 Uiose of |ein.
446. Prefixes Separable or Inseparable. (1) ®urd(i through,
llbet over, across, um ivund, ahout, untet under and tuiebet again
form botU separable and insepai'able compounds. As a rule, these
prefixea are separable when used in a literal sense, i. e. with the
meanings given above, and inseparable when used in a derived or
figurative sense. This twofold use sometimes has its conutei'part
in English ; thus, from unter under and geben go are made
COMPOUND VERBS
91
ier and unterge'^ett
n'der and untetging' underwent!
n'der and untergan'gtn undergone.
un'tergelfen go un'^
giltfl un'ter- went u
un'tergegangen gone m
Compare the use of <nier in i
overcame, overcome', or that of up In set up' and uptef.
447. Some of the commonest compounds with ina^, iiber, um,
unter, Wiebet are:
Separable
o'ver and overcome.
burc^'btingen
ii'berge^en
a'berfe^en
um'btingen
um'ge^en
um'Ietjren
um'fommen
um'feljen refi.
hrie'bet6ringen
ioie'berfinben
tpte'bergeben
trie'ber^oUn
ioie'btrtommen
toie'betfe^en
brang Wt^'
ging ii'ber
fe^te it' bet
brai^te um'
fling um'
felfrte um'
tarn um'
fQ^ um'
bta^te toie'bet
fanb luie'bet
gab toie'bct
|oIU Wie'bei:
tarn toie'bet
fa^ toU'bei
tft but^'gebtungen ^wwa thrmigh
ift ii'bergegangen yo oii«r
Wbergefe^t /en-y <wer
um'gebra^t Ai^, murder
ift um'gegimflai (mtt) associate with
um'ge!e^tt
i^ um'gelommen
um'gefe^en
luie'betgeBrac^t
loie'betgefunben
lote'bergegeben
lijie'bergelolt
turn round
perish
look round, back
bring back
find again, recover
give back, return
fetch back
|t toie'bergetommen come again, return
toie'betgefe^en see, or meet, again
Inseparable
burdttbrtn'gtn
Kberfal'len
uberge'bcn
tiberge'^ien
ilbetfanen
iibetU'gcn
iibtme'^raen
flberra'fd^en
ilbetfe'^en
iibetfe'^En
abemat'tigen
(ibetluin'beit
ilberjtu'gen
umai/inen
umge'ben
unteibre'c^en
unterbrii'cten
untec^aCten
unteme'^men
untetfc^ei'ben
burc^brang'
iiberfid'
libergab'
ilbecging'
Ubetliefi'
ttbetleg'te
ttberna^m'
iiberrafc^'te
ttb«[ai)'
^eife^'te
tibettoartiflte
iibermanb'
iibetjeug'te
umgab'
unterbtai^'
unterbrud'te
unt«^te(f
untetnQ^m'
unterf(^i«b'
buTc^bnin'gen
ilberfal'Ien
Uberge'ben
itbergan'gen
ttbttfaf'fen
ubetlegt'
iibernorn'men
(ibenaf<^f
ilbetfC^fn
fiberfegf
ilbertuartigt
tibertoun'ben
iiberjeugf
umarmt
umge'ben
unterbro'c^en
untetbtiiif
untw^al'ten
untecnom'men
untetf^ie'ben
permeate
surprise, attack
deliver up, surrender
pass by (trans.)
turn over to, make over
consider, think over
take upon on^s self
surprise
overlook
translate
overpower
conyuer
embrace
surround
interrupt
suppress, oppress
entertain, support
undertake
discriminate, distmguiah
.OOQlC
az PREPOSITIONS
untetftti'^en unterftii^'te untetftu^t' support, aio
untetfii'(^en untetfu^'tt untetfuttif investigate,
unterlDct'fen unterWatf untetlDor'fen subjugate, refl. submit,
trieber^o'len tuteberljol'te iDiebcr^olt' r^eat
449. (2) With the prefixes in 446 are sometimes classed the
following : ffintet behind, mi% amiss, mis-, boK fully, toibet against,
re-. Their commonest compounds, however, are inseparable :
^inteilaf'fen
^intaliefe'
^tntetlaffen
leave behind, bequec
rai^brau'cEjen
mifebtaui'te
milbtauddf
misuse, abuse
also
gemirfctaudit
miS^ait'beln
mife^an'belte
mimn'belt
maltreat
also
gemi^'tjaitbelt
UDQbiin'gen
BDtI6iracl)'te
BcHbtai^f
accomplish, finish
boKen'ben
BDUen'bete
bJjUen'bet
toiber a^'ren
wiberfuftt'
ift loibetfa^'ten occur to, befall
ioiiix t'^tn refl
Wiber e^'te
iDiberJe^f
resist, oppose
iDiber pxi'^m
luibet pxa^'
Wiberfntc't^en
gainsay, contradict
toiber'fte^en
Kiber tanb'
luibetftan'ben
resist, witlistand
PREPOSITIONS
450. Prepositions governing the Genitive
anpott, ftatt instead of ober^alb
aujier^alb without, outside (of)
bieSfeita on this side of
l^albeit for the sake of
^albet for the sake of
inner^lB within, inside (of)
jenfeitS on the further side of ,
beyond
Iraft by virtue of
laut according to
mittelp by means of
tDtUen for the sake of
ungeflt^tet notwithstanding
unter^alb belov^
untDeit not far from
Beonogt hy dint of
Ka^renb during
ttiegcn on account of
lings alotig
(Ufofge in consequence of
tro| in spite of
The last three sometimes take the dative. For examples see 652.
. 451. Prepositions governing the Dative :
fluS out of gemfifl in accordance with famt along with
au{;et besides mit with feit since
in by, at nac^ after, to mn of, from
binnen within nd^ft next to ju to
entgegen against nebft along with juhjiber contrary to
gegenilbtr opposite oi above
For examples see 654 ff.
D.n.iized by Google
ADVERBS CON.nJNCTIONS 93
452. Prepositions governing the Accusative :
6t§ till, unto flcgen aijainst xm about, round
buvd^ through o^ne without toiber against.
fttr for (rniber without
Yot examples see 664 ff.
453. Prepositions governing the Dative or Accusative :
an on, at in in, into untet under, among
auf on, upon, up neben beside Bor before
jointer behind iibcr above, over jWlfti^en between.
These take the dative id answer to the questions where? or
when? the accusative in answer to the questions whither? or how
long? Fov examples see 671 ff.
ADVERBS
444. For the idiomatic uses of suvh adverbs as boi^, no(^, ja, see
687 ff- For the use of adverbs as conjunctions, see 457. For the
position of adverbs in the sentence, see 606 ff. For the uninflected
adjective as adverb, see 210. For ordinal adverbs, see 279. For
adverbs employed chiefly as separable prefixes of verbs, see 439 ff.
For adverbs identical in form with certain prepositions, compare
for example jenfeitS on the other side, yonder with jenfeit? beS 3^Iuf=
feS on the other side of the river (652) ; see also ju (657 f.) and BiS
(670).
COHJUNCTIONS
455. Three Classes. Conjunctions are of three kinds :
general connectives, adverbial conjunctions and subordinating
conjunctions.
456. (1) The General Connectives are aOer hut, hut yet ;
otteirt hut, only ; benrt for ; obet or ; fonbern hut, hut on the coro-
trary ; unb and ; they join sentences of equal syntactical rank
and have no effect on the order of words (562). Thua, the
two simple sentences esi regnete it rained and icfj luutbc nafe /
became wet may be combined into a compound sentence as fol-
lows: e^ rcgnctc, unb icf| tnutbe nafe; or id) lourbe ncfe, benn eg
regnete. Similarly : eS I)at gcccgnct, unb id) bin nafj geicorben.
457. (2) Adverbial Conjunctions, like general connectives,
CONJUHCTIONS
join sentences of equal synlactical rank, but invert the order of
the subject and the personal verb (565) ; the moat important
alfo so, so then, henee
au(^ also, too, moreover
aw^etbem besides
ba then, there (459)
bagCQcn on the other hand
bo^et hence
bamalS at that time, then
bann then
batauf thereupon
barum therefore
bt^u besides
bennc(^ j/et, notwithstanding
beS&alb 1 therefore,
beStoegen / on that account
bot^ yet, still, hut, though
enblic& finally
f enter furthermore
fretlii^ to be sure, it is tr
inbeflen however
jebot^ nevertheless, but
no^ yet, still / nor
nun now
fo so
fogleic^ directly
fonft else, otherwise, fom
Bieffeic^t perhaps
Uielme&t i-ather
iDO^I perhaps, I presume
juetft first, at first
jute^t last, at last
jtoat fo be mire, it is irtie.
.erly
Examples : eS tcgncte, otfo irucbc ict) nofe ; ed regnete, botjcr
murbe i^ na^ ; cS tcgnete, beS^alb murbe i^ iiafe ; tS rcgnete, jutetit
iDurbe id) nafe. Similarly ; c§ ^at gcregnet, bal)cc din id) nofe gc=
hjorbeii.
458. It is sometimes impossible to distinguish the adverbial use
of these words from the conjunctional. They causei inversion only
when tliey stand at the head of the clause, and some of them do
not even in that position necessarily invert the order (683).
459. (3) Subordinating Conjunctions introduce dependent
clauses and transpose the personal verb to the end of its clause ;
the most important are
ali when, as, than na^'btm after tsarum why
al3 ob as if ob whether tDCtt heeavae
alS Wenn as if obgUti^ although tDenn when, whenever
bis until otifd^on although Wenn if, when
ba since, as (457) o6lvo^l although Wenti au$ ei'en ^, although
bamtt so that feitbem since toenngleit^ even ifo''
bttfe that fc if loie how, as
elje before folPte j^ist as, as looljei whence
inbem while toii^renb while too where
je the (717) luann when too^in whither.
Examples :
id| tcaf it)n, al5 cS f o ftart regnete / -met him when it
USES OP THE ARTICLES 95
rallied so hard, not „alS eS regnete fo ftarl" ; fie fonitte mid), Dt>=
gtcic^ fie mic^ langc nirfit gefctKn I)atte sh^ knew me although she
hdU not seen me for a long time, not „ • • . obgleic^ fte tjOtte mid)
lange nid)t gefe^en" etc. See Order of Words, 587 fE.
460. The subordinating elements, i.e. the elements which, when
introducing a dependent clause, transpose the personal part of the
verb to the end of the clause, inclnde also the relative and indirect
interrogative pronouns or adjectives,, aa totXH^tT, trer etc.
SYNTAX
OSES OF THE ARTICLES
461. The principal points in which the uses of the German
articles differ from those of the English are as follows :
(1) Abstract nouns and nouns used in a generic sense are com-
monly preceded by the definite article ; bie 3^'* f'*^* nintmer ftiUe,
ber 9touin beluegt fit^ nie time never stands stUl, space never moves;
bie 3iatur i/at j,i)te Si^filtnge nature has her favorites ; baS SBcinen ift
nic^t immer ein S^i"^*" "^^ ©C^toSc^e weeping is not always a sign of
weakness; iai @oIb ift gelb gold is yellow, but fein ©d^ilb iDat mit
®oIb bebetft his shield was eovered.with gold.
462. (2) Names of seasons, months, days of the week and streets
take the definite article ; id^ mag ben 3Bintet nii^t I do not like winter ;
m %fv\\ in April; am SHittWci^ on Wednesday ; in ber 3n*b"<^f''^''&*
in Frederick Street. But after frit the names of months have no
article: frit W&ti since March. See also 100, 101, 282.
488. (3) German uses the definite article in certain prepositional
phrases where English omits it ; in bie ©^ule, or jut ©(^uU, ge^en
go to school ; in ber flit^e at ehurch ; jum ffleifljiet for example. In
certain other phrases, German omits the article where English
requires it : in ®egentoart meineS SgaterS in the presence of my father ;
auf 3iBunf(i) frineS ^eunbeS at the request of his friend.
464. (4) For the use of the definite article instead of a possessive adjective,
see 130. For the definite article before names, see Bl fl.
468. (5) The indefinite article is usually omitted hefore a predi-
cate noun denoting vocation, profession or rank, if the noun is
without modifier : ber Satet war ©(^nribet, bet Sc^n tear Strjt the
father was a tailor, the son a physician (but et War ein gefc^tifter,
clever, ©^neiber). So also before ^unbert and taufenb (267), and
in certain phrases: auf e^rlii^e 23etfe in an honest way; mit gutem
©elDiffen with a clear conscience; similarly after aU in appositive
phrases : alS (Sele^itter ftetjt er nii^t fetjr t)o4 <w « scholar he does not
stand very high.
D.n.iized by Google
USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION
USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION
4B6. Nouns of HeaBure, Weight, etc. Masculine and neuter
nouns denoting meaaurc, weight, quantity or extent stand in the sin-
gular after numerals, ferainines usually in the plural ; and after all
genders the noun denoting the substance weighed or measured is used
without inflection : jmet @laS 3Baffer two glasses of water (not ,jwei
©lafec tton afiaffer") ; mit btei *Pfunb Saff«e wUh three pounds of coffee
(not „mtt brei ^funben Bon ftaffee"). So also r btetje^n Jufi (mi^ thir-
teen feet hiffh; jetjntaufcnl) 3Jiann (ea thousand men (soldiers) ; but
btei 3Keiten (fem.) long three miles long ; fftnf (SHeit (fem.) 'Xui^ five
yards of doth. 3KQrt (fem,), however, remains uninflected ; jefin:
taufenb ^arl ten thmtsand marks.
487. If the noun denoting the substance weighed or measui-ed is
modified by an a^ljective, the genitive or au appositive is used in
some combinations, and the dative after upn in others : ein ®laS
talten (226) 2iBa(jer« (appositively talteg aBaf(«r) « ffiass of cold
water; (aufe btei 5pfunb wen biefem fiaffee Imy three pounds of this
eoffee; ti$ btaud&e etne ©He gutet ©eibe (appositively gute Seibe) I
need a yard of good silk. If the noun of measure is in the dative,
the noun denoting the substance measured is more often attracted
into that case ; mit einem Spaat WoHenen ©tntmVfen (instead of Woffe:
net ©triimljfe) with a pair of woolen stockings.
488. Names of Cities, kingdoms, provinces, and also of months
follow the general designation directly and without inflection :
bie ©tabt ^ariS (not „Bi}n ^aris") the city of P.; bit ©tra^en ber
©tabt 9leW=^ort the streets of the city of JV. ¥. (but bie Stra^en
3lett=g)ort8, without ©tabt). So also: baS fientgreit^ Sa^etn the
kingdom of BavarUi ; m bet ^[{robinj Sranbenbutg in the province of
B. ; im ^Rciiat 9ll)ril in the month of April (100, 101, 282, 462).
469. The Hominatiye, besides being the case of the subject
and the case of address, is also the case of the predicate noun
with intransitive verbs and with the passive of verbs which
in the active take two accusatives : mein J^reunb (am nid(it my
friend did not come; ^iite, liebet f^^eunb listen, dear friend; ec
\\i unb bleibt rin Itebet alter (^i^'unb he is, and always wUl be, a dear
old friend; jie wtirb nie eine gro&e ©lijauftJteferin toerben she will never
be a great actress; unter feineit ^eunben ^efe er 'ber 2Clte' among his
friends he went by the name of ' the old man ' ; unlet feinen (Sreun=
ben Irutbe er ' bet %IU ' genannt among his friends he was called ' the
old man ' (in the active feine ^eunbe nonnten t^n ' ben 9llten ').
470. Siietben in the sense of be changed into, turn into is commonly
construed with ju and the dative : ber ^tof^ Wat ju einem fi^bnen
^rinjen getootben the frog had turned into a handsome prixtce.
USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION 97
4T1. The predicate noun of the infinitives fein, Inetben, bleiben,
fc^einen is often attracted into the accusative when the infinitive
phrase is the object of Iaf(en or ^eigen : Ia| mti^ beinen J^teuitb fein
let me be your friend, ^etfe i^n etnen tu^tigen ©olbaten loetben bid him
become a goad soldier.
478. An appoBitive to a reflexive pronoun in the accoaative standB in the
nominative only when the pronoun haa bo closely onil^d (116) with its verb that
Ihe two virtually form an intransitive verb, as in \\6f 6tlragtn, fi^ btXH^mtn, M
flup^ccn, fill] gebfirBeii — all meaning coj^wt or deport one's self, behave; fiat
((^dmcit beashamed; R(^ grSmtn grieve; fit^ loiberidjtn resist. Thus: ct bdtug,
or Bena^m, fii) ats tf blii^fr aKaitn he behaved aa on honest man (behaves) ; er
ftfiSmt,' or grnmt, [ict) aU ier Utl|(bet btintS Unglflde he is ashamed, or grieces, as
(Be is) the author of your misfortune. Similarly : er jftgtf, or BtltifS, ft^ al8
mein greunb he showed himself as my friend, i.e. ftis ions my friend and appeared
aaauch; tt^ iinlerjdifinf mi(^al8 3^r ae^orfamtc ©ttner I sul^cribe myself a> your
humUe servant, i.e. 1 am your humUe servant and as such »u6scrt6e myself; tx
fifUt fti^ a[« brr Stlrlblgte bar he iums outtobetlie (trended. But er fietlt Tk^ ali
ben SSelcibigten bar he represents himself as the qffended, i.e. he loanfs others to look
upon kirn as the offended, just as in fie fieUcn i^n alB btn StUibigltu bur they re-
prewnieK.
473. The Genitlye. Of the various uses of the genitive the
following are the most important :
(1) The genitive may denote quality, character, manner: ein
aSort lateintfi^en Utfprunge a word of Latin origin ; ©elbfltttfe fle«
lingen SEietteS coins of small value ; guter 3)ttifle, or gutet Saune, fein
be in good spirits or in good humor ; et te^rte unBenii^tetet ©a^e JU»
tiid he returned without having aeeompliahed anything.
474. More commonly, however, a quality or characteristic is
expressed by Bott with the dative ; ein ©elbftild Don fleringem SIBett a
coin of small value; ein 3liann Don gtofiei: Sii^nljeit a man of great
boldness. A noun expressing the kindred notion of material or sub-
stance is mostly construed with Uon or aui : eine ^ette ban t^Um
®Dlbe a, chain of genuine gold; bie giguren ttaren ouS 5Siaii)S gema^t
the figures were made of wax. Origin also is commonly expressed
by auS where English is apt to use of or from ; er ftammt aui gwtet
3^amilie he comes of a good family ; §en: S. QuS Stemen Mr. S. of
Bremen.
475. (2) The genitive may express various adverbial relations ,
and form adverbs : eineS Stages or SKotgenS or SlbenbS one (or some)
day or morning or evening ; abenbS or beS 2tbenb§ in the evening;
naiiita or beS 5Jaii)tg at night; meineS ®!if(enS as far as I know, to
my knowledge ; teineSloegS by no means.
476. (3) The genitive is used with many adjectives, as
fiii^ig capable miic^Hg alle to use, f^ulbig guilty
fro^ glad master of ftc&er sure, certain
geWi^ s^ire, certain miibe tired iibetbniffig tired
mert woHhy toiitbig worthy.
CiOOgk
98 USES OP THE FORMS OF DBXJLENSION
Examples: eine3 SSetbredfeenS fi^ulbig ffuUty of a crime; bef[en
WUtbig or untoiitbig worthy or unworthy of it.
477. (4) The genitive may be used as the only object after eev-
tain verba, as
Qi^ten heed ettoa^nen mention entbe^ien lack, do withmit
biiUx^mneed gebenfen remember, mentMn ^nncn wait /or
fl^Dlieil spare.
Examples : friner Unbantbarfeit ntd&t ju ertua^nen not to mention
his ingratitude ; fd^oiie metiier spare me.
478. Most of these verbs occur more frequently with other con-
stnictions, as baS erlDii^nte et nid)t that he did not mention; f^one
mi(f) spare m^ ; '\^ ac^tete mi)i batauf or aiif i^n I paid no attention
to it ox to him.
479. (5) The genitive aa secondary object is used with
andaaen awme to&ibigen deem woHhy \\i) Bemiittittgen takepos-
betauien deprive |i(^ anne^men assume session of
befi^ulbigen accuse charge of fiii) eittftnnen remember
entfegen depose ^xH} txbatmert take pity on fiif tx^zwn enjoy
(iterpi^ten convict p^ mnnetn remember ft(^ iril^men boost
BerfM^etn assure jic^ 6ebienen make use of ji(^ fc^fimen bn ashamed.
Examples : beS §o4*'*"*t^ angetlagt accused of high treason ; tx-.
haxmt bii^ meinet take pity on me ; «t [(^Smt fi(^ feiiteS 39etraflen3 Ae
is ashamed of his conduct.
4B0. Some of these verbs admit of other constructions : ic^
erinnete mic^ nic^t baran or an bit @ef(^ic^te / do not rememher it or
the incident ; zx til^iute fldfe bamit he boasted of it.
4B1. In colloquial language, Bon with the dative often takes the
place of the genitive ; ouf bet onbent ©eite Don ber Stta|e on the
other side of the street, better auf bet anbetn ©eite bet Stta|e.
488. This substitution of Bon with the dative is necessary if the
form of the genitive would not clearly indicate its case : ba3 ®e:
f^lpSg Don Seuten, bie nirfjH baUon Winen the talk of people that know
nothing about it ; it is common in oriinaiy prose when the genitive
would be separated from the governing word : Bon ben 3*'"^61 S"''
tam ntd^t einet not one of the enemies escaped, also after pronouns :
mantle, or Biele, or einige ton ben geinben entlamen ; it is often re-
sorted to (sometimes ueetllessly) to avoid a succession of genitives :
bie ttberfi^rift Bom etften fiai)itel beS ^u^eS the heading of the first
chapter of the book.
4B3. The use of Uie genitives of tbe personsil pronouns ia almost conflued to
such verba as are mendoned In 4TT, 479, and to cerUun compaunds (653) ;
hence, in expreaaions like one of you or some of them, won with the dative is
used; (iiier Don ta(tt, (tnigc con i^neii.
484. For the genitive after nouns of measure etc., see 406, 407. —For the
USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION 99
— For the rendering of Buch eipteasionB as
etc., see 468.
4S6. The Dative. (1) The dative as secondary object is used
with many transitive verbs, as
anbieten offer getien give fc^reiBen lerite
anjeigen announce glauben believe fenben send
kijlgen brtng, take (to) kHftn lend fd^enten j>reseHt, give
einbilben (fid^) imagine mittetlen communicate fd^den send
tmpft^tn recommend ne^men take, deprive Berbieten forbid
ettiaten declare, explain laitti advise berfpte^en promise
erlauben aUow reii^en hand, offer Berjciffen forgive
erjii^len tell fagen say, tell jeiflen show.
Examples : er (tot mir frinen 55!agen an he offered me his carriage ;
ii^ ^abe mir nie fo etWaS eingebilbet / never imagined such a thing ;
glauben ©te imt, t»aS ic^ ^^nen fage? do you believe what I tell you?.
bie Iiiebe na^en i^m at fein ®elb the thieves took all his 'oumeyfrom
him; (ic fi^ricb itjiet (Jtettnbtn eiiwn Srief she urrote a leUer to lier
friend; bet ©c^UIer jetgte b«m Server baS ©ik^i the teacher showed the
book to his teacher.
486. Note. The German dative of the indirect object is often rendered in
English by the objective after to. But the objective after to Ts used not only to
eipreSB the indirect object of a transitive verb, but also as a prepowtional plirase
with intransitive verbs, and then generally represents the Oerman dative with
jii or naiil, e.g. I go to my father iij ge^e jii meintm Safer ; I go to Berlin liff
Stilt nad) Sttlln. It is therefore impurtant to distinguish these tnu expressions
and to avoid rendering the indirect object of a transitive verb by ju with the
dative; thus, I ffine it tomy father ia not „iij) gtbt ti jU mcinem »ater," but id)
geb( ti mtlitem iSativ.
487. (2) The dative as the sole object is used with some conimoii
intransitive verbs which in English appear as transitive, as
aittWorten answer ^ol^tn follow nti^en benefit
begegnen meet gefaSen please fi^aben injure
banfen thank ge^Dr(^en obey fi^meii^tln flatter
bitnen serve glauben believe tiauen trust
etnfallen occur to |elfen help wiberfte'^en resist
Examples : i^ bin i^m feegeflnet / have met htm ; folge meinem
SHate follow my advice ; ®ctt lottb bit ^elfen God will help you.
488. (3) The dative is used with a number of idiomatic verb-
phrasea, e.g. eS t^ut mil Crib, ba^ ©ie Ipeg miiffen I am sorry that yo^i
must go ; xif toitt ^^ntn ju §ilfe !omm«n / will come to your assist-
ance; t^m Wiitbe ein grBfiar** ©liidf jU teil « greater happiness fell to
his lot ; baS toitb itjnen loo^I t^un that wUl do t/iem good ; eS War i^m
ni(^t tei^t, bafe 11$ lam it did not suit him that I came; mir trfiumfe,
ba^ i(^ bei i^m fei I dreamed that I was with him; ttfm (afl Uiel baran
it was a matter of great concern to him ; ba§ gcfl^ieijt i(»m r«($t that
server him right ; Wai feblt bir? what is the matter withjiou?
100 USES OP THE POEMS OF DECLENSION
189. (4) The dative may have the force of a possessive (139) :
bcm SerBrettjer Wurte bet ^op^ abgefc^Iagen the eriminaps head was
eut off; et ^at fi^ ben 3u| Betle^t he has hurt his foot.
490. (5) Tlie dative is used with a large nuinber of adjectives,
Itt this use also it frequently represents the English objective with
to (486) or for. Such adjectives are
belannt known leid&t easy treu faithful
bantbat g^-ateful (ieb dear, agreeable unbetannt unknown
feinbEi^ hostile mBgUi^ possible utitteu unfaithful
fretnb unknown na^e near unmijglit^ impossible
ge^tn^am obedient fcfjicer difficult untert^antg snl^ect.
ExAMFLES : ber §Err ift miv ftemb the gentleman is a stranger to
me ; eS ift mit unmSglitf) baS ;li t^un it is impossible for me to do U ;
ex ift bem flbntge treu gebtieben he has remained faithful to the king.
491. For the dative after prepo»Uorifi, see 664 Q., 671 fi.
492. The Accusative. (1) In addition to its common use as
the direct object of a transitive verb, the accusative is used in ad-
verbial expressions denoting time, distance, price, weight etc. ; i(^
bin ben ganjen S^ag (long) bort geWefen / was there aU day ,- bet ftleine
ift brct ^a1}xt alt the little one is three years old ; ic^ fal) iljn bie Strode
ijinuntetge^cn I saw him go down the street ; eS foftet einen 3:^alev it
costs one dollar, etc.
493. (2) A few verbs take two accusatives : et le^tt bie jtnaben
3)iatf)ematit he teaches the boys mathematics; fie fragten mid^ wieleS
/Aey asked me many things ; nut biǤ eine Mtte i(^ bii^ only this one
thing do I ask of you. With ea«h of these three verbs, the two
accusatives designate different objects, and with ftagen and bitten
the accusative of the thing occurs mostly in the form of a pronom-
inal word. But with nennen name, cidl, ^et^en call and a few
others, both accusatives designate the same object : fie nannten i^n
einen bummen ^ungen they called him a stupid boy ; er ^ie^ mii^ feinen
^[teiinb he called me his friend.
494. Verbs of choosing, making, appointing, which in English
take two accusatives, are construed with ju : fte mad^ten i^n jum
Slnfil^ter they made hint leader; ba3 S80EI toii^Ite ®tant mieber j(um
^Priifibenten the people elected Grant President again ; ber fiiJnig flying
i^n juin Slittet the king dubbed him knight. In the passive : et toutbe
jum Stnfiititer gemac^t, etc.
488, (3) The accusative is often used absolutely: fo ttat er inS
Simmer, ben $ut auf bem Sopfe thus he entered the room, his hat on
his head; often with a participle : ru^ig fafi fie ba, bie fi^Bnen 9Iugen
auf i^r Sinb geric^itet she sat there calmly, her beautiful eyes fixed on
her child.
496. For the accusative after prepositions, see 064 H., 671 ff.
^-,00<^
t^lc
USES OF THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION 101
USES OF THE FORtfS OF CONJUGATION
497. Number and Person. (1) A collective nouu takes its verb
in the singular, but when it is modified by a noun in the plural and
the id&a of plurality la prominent, the verb is frequently in the
plural: baS Jgeer tourte geff^Iagen the army was defeated; etne
tDtenge Seutc Berforamelten fl^ um i^ a multitude of people gathered
about Mm.
49S, (2) Whether the conunon verb of two or more Bingular Bubjectfl con-
nected hf unb, or not connected by any conjimctlon, shall be in the eingolar or
In the plural is determined mainly by the following considerations ; a) if the
Terb implies a joint action of several snbjectfi, it is regularly in the plural : tn
tftm ntretniBKti (or paartcn) [id^ entft^roffcn^rit iiitb Stbac^tlartiteit fo, bag er etc.
in him determination and ddUyerotion were to ayiyoined that he etc. But nitli
other verbs the singular is preferred, b) when each subject is regarded separ-
ately; bee StTDin, baS Siitx, bai <Sali gt^ort bcm Siinlg the stream, the sea, the
salt belong to the king ; or c) when the subjects are regarded as a unit : jlltii
unb eiferfui^t lanu i^r nit^tB on^iben envy andjealoutycannet touch, or affect, Aer.
Moreover, d) the verb is more likely to be in the singular when it precedes
the subjects : uerQdngllf^ Ifl Siffditum, SDIai^t, Sfire unb Siu^m riches, power,
horun- and glory are iraiisitoTif ; and e) if the subjects denote persons, the verb
must not to in the singular unless it precedes ; in beni Sagcn fag ia Saifet, bie
£aiiftln unb bet ^ttnj in the carriage sat the emperor, the empress and the prince,
but bcr Saifir, He fiatferin unb bet ^tinj fa&cii etc.
4B8, Even when one of Several subjects is in the plural, the verb may be in
the singular if It stands nearest to a ^gular subject ; ba lommt bie gutter unb
bit Jfinber there comes the mother and the children.
Soo. (3) When several subjects are connected by nbet or, toeber , . .
no(^ neither . . . nor, m(^t nur (or allein) . . . fonbern audi not <mly
. . . but also or fotto^l . , . al§ au(^ as well as, the verb agrees in
number (also in person, 503) with the nearest.
901. (4) For the number of the verb with eS bai, iM, see 100, 110.
602. (5) When a verb is used with two subjects, one of the
first person and another of the second or third, it is in the fifst
person plural r ii^ unb bu ^ben ttiel gelitteit I and you have sujffh-ed
much ; i^ aber unb mrin §au8 iDoIIen bent §enn bienen hut as for me
and my house, we will serve the Lord. If only the second and third
persons are represented, the verb is in the second : bu unb bein Sni=
bcE feib meine (Jteunbe you and your brother are my friends.
508. Usually, however, the two personal pronouns are summed
up in a plural pronoun of the proper person : ic^ unb bu, hfir ^a6en
Btel gelitten. When the subjects are connected by one of the con-
junctions in 500, the verb agrees with the nearest subject : tuebtr
il^, nod) bu tannft iljm b«If«n neither I, nor you can help him.
The Tenses of the Indicative
504. Ho Progressive Forme. The German verb has no special
progressive forms, thus : ic^ ge^e = I walk or / am walking ; '\i}
102 THK TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
^itiQ ^^ I -walked or I was walking ; t%Xo\x't)'tDaxxa^:= it becomes, gets,
grows warm or it is becoming, getting, growing warm.
606. Emphatic formB witli do or did are expresBed by emphasis on the verb
or hy emphatic adverbs, as boc^ or TOoI|t : cc ^at (emphatic) c« gfjogt or tt ^ot c8
Eioc^ (emphatic) (|F|a(|t or ec ^t eS lOD^l (emphatic) grfaqt Ae did sa^ ao. — la
interrogative or negative forms also, do or did must not be tjanalated : what do
you think? (= what think you f) tnaS glaubfl bu? I did not write (^I tarotenot)
Idi \<S)(lti nt^t.
606. The Present, besides being tlie regular tense to express
events or states in present time, is often used iu lively narration
for the past : toaljrenb \6) arlieite, Ijbve td^ tinm ©tljufe ; ic^ fV^nflt Won
nttinem ©tu^I auf unb fe^e aue bem g^enftet toMle I was working, I
suddenly heard a stiot ; I jumped up Jrom my chair and looked out
the window.
807. The present is often used in the place of the future : ii^
ge&e motgen auf bie ^agb / shall go hunting to-m/tnvw.
608. The present (often with fdfion already, i.e. now or by this
time) ia common where English employs the perfect, to signify that
a state, condition or action begun in the past still continues : Icie
lange fxni) ©ie fd^on ^et? how long have you been here? Wte lange
ift tt trani? haw long has he been ill? (loie lange ifl er hanf
geWefen? means how long was he ill?) et t^ fc^on bret %si^i ftant he
has now been, ill three days ; ic^ Wo^ne je§t je^n 3a^re auf bent £anbe
/ have been living in the country these ten years.
609. The Past, besides being the regular tense of narration, may
also be used where English uses the pluperfect (just as the present
is used for the English perfect, 608) : ic| Wo^itle fd&on je^n ^n^re auf
bem Sanbe / htid then been living in the country for ten years (and
was still living there). For the past as distinguished from the per-
fect, see 611.
610. The Perfect. (1) German often uses the perfect where
English uses the past : fie ift geftcm angelommen unb fiat glei^ iljre
2tr6eit angefangen she arrived yesterday and began her work at once ;
toer ^at biefe^ ©ebitfjt gef cEirieSen ? ®cet^e ^al eS gef (i()rieben wAo wrote
this poem? G. wrote it ; jener 3:urm ift tm U^ten ^a^t^unbert etbaut
Wctben that tower was built in the last century.
611. (2) The perfect, as used in 610, merely conveys informa-
tion, stating the bare facts without reference to attendant circum-
stances. But it the facta form part of a connected narrative or
description, or if the reader is to be transported to the scene of
action and given a vivid presentation of the facts, the past is used :
als fie nun geftern antatn unb i^te 9ltbeit anfing, ba fragte ii^ fie, o& etc.
now when she arrived yesterday and began her work, I asked her if
etc. ; ba etfd^ien (>lij(j[ic^ ein 58ote Bom SSnig, ritt auf ben ^au^jtmann
ju, iibergab i^m einen SBrief unb Berfd^ttanb luiebet ebenfo f((inetl, Wie er
THE SUBJUNCTIVE 108
gefommen War then a messenger from the Mng suddenly appeared,
rode up to the captain, handed htm a letter and disappeared affain as
quickly as he had com,e.
81B. (3) The use of the German perfect, however, coincides with
that of the English when the i:esult of the act is regarded as more
important than the act itself : @ott fri 3!)aitf, alleS ift gut gegangen
thank God, everything has gone well ; i^ ^abe mir (Hcet^teS ©ebi^tt
getauft unb lefe fie je^}! I have bought me G'g poems and am now
reading them ; bie ©onne ift untevgegangen the sun has set.
513. The Future and Future Perfect (often with too^l) may be
used to state what the speaker surmises or conjectures to be true :
Iper (lotjft? (53 Icirb (Icofil) bein Smbet fein who knocks? It is
probably {or I presume it is) your broths; itv 5Dienet toirb e* i^m ge^
geten ^abm it must be (or you will find that U is) the servant who
gave it to him,.
The Subjunctive
514. Cbaracteristice. The indicative presents facts — affirma-
tively, negatively, interrogatively, conditionally (620). The sub-
junctive presents ideas — as wishes, purposes, conditions (conces-
sions) contrary to fact — or, in indirect discourse, statements which
the speaker does not affirm to be facts.
815. The Optative Subjunctive. The present subjunctive may
be used as optative, expressing a wish or request or even a com-
mand (316) : er lefce ^dc^ ! long may he livel mege fie gliitftic^ reifen
may she /lave a safe journey; er bringe biefeit Srief "turn ®tafen let
him take this letter to the count.
616. The past and pluperfect subjniictive may also be used optatlvely, see
522, 378.
617. The Subjunctive of Purpose, The subjunctive is often used
to express purpose : fage eS t^m, bamit er lomme tdl him, in order
that he may come ; batum tarn id^t fo ftii^, ba| i($ bit bie gutc 9tac^ndj)t
btfii^te tha/t^s why I came so early, that I might bring you the good
news. But if the attainment of the purpose is confidently ex-
pected, the indicative is used : gteb eS ii}x nur, bamit fie ge^t Just give
it to her, in order that she mAiy go. See also 364.
618. The Conditional (Potential) Subjunctive. (1) The subjunc-
tive is used in sentences which state what would or would not l>e,
on a supposition that is contrary to fact. The clause stating the
supposition or condition takes the past subjunctive; the clause
stating the conclusion, the past subjunctive or the present condi-
tional : ware i^ gefunb, fo ginge i^ au3 or fo wiirbe it^ auSge^en were
I well, I should go out.
D.n.iized by Google
104 THE SUBJUNCTIVE
SIB. (2) The subjunctive is used in sentences which state what
would have been, or would uot have been, on a supposition that
was coutrary to fact. The clause stating the supposition or condi-
tion takes the pluperfect subjunctive; the clause stating the con-
clusion, the pluperfect subjunctive or the perfect conditional ; Watt
id^ flejunb geWefen, fo torn ii^ auggegaiiflen or (o wiitbe xH) auSgegangen
feilt fiad I been well, I should have gone out.
620. If the Bupposltion is not contrary to fact, the Indicative is used : mcnn
li^ (rani bin, fo bltibe ii^ ju .&au)t wflen (ewr) I am not weU, I stay at home;
roinn et baS gd^n ifat, fo rotrb tr befitaft O' Ae has done that, h^ wiM be punished.
Hbdcb it la not the conjunction (metiti), but the thought which detennines the
use of the subjunctive. — This is also true when tlie conditional clause becomes
concessive, as by adding aiiiii : tutnn ii^ aitc^ nttfit rfi(^ bin, or bin i* (573) au(^
nlt^t ttidt, fo bin 1^ boq fllilalit^ even tf, or although, I am. not rich, y^ I am
happy; but, contrary to fact : luenn i^ auiii ntfftt td(^ Watt, or xoiu It^ oudft
nt^t nii^, fo mSrt li^ boi^ glUiirtd) eeesi if I viere not rich, I •should yet be happy.
SBl. (3) The conditional sentence may be incomplete; for a) the
condition may be only implied ; et jjitang jutC^iK, fonft {= Wenn et
ni(^t juruiJge fining en tcdte) toate et gefaCen he sprang back, else {=^ if
he had not sprung bac/c) he would have /alien ; etn ©olbot D^ne ®e=
toe^r ware tein ©clbat (i.e, ein ©olbat todre !ein ©olbat, Wenn er fein
©eWeljt ^Stte) « soldier without a musket would he no soldier. This
is called the Potential Subjunctive. Or b) the conclusion may be
only implied : et fa^ auS, alS (— a(9 et auSfe&en lotitbe) Icenn et Don
bet Sleife tame, more commonly : er faf) au3, alS fame er (576) Bon bet
SJeife he looked as (-= as he would look) if he came from, a journey.
6S9. Sometimes the onuaslon of the conclusion mokes the subjunctive of the
conditional clause (especially when nut or boi$ is added) equivalent to the op-
tative subjunctive (616) : xo&tt t% nut abtnb V only it were evening (i.e. ftoto
glad I shovld he if etc.) ; ^fittt tr boi^ on miifl geft^riebenl wotdd that he had
written to me (supply t should then have known movi it or I should then, have
Adped him or some other coccluaion).
G2S, (4) With the conditional or potential Hiibjonctlve may be classed : a)^
the " diplomatic " subjunctive, used to soften an assertion : ti bilrfte ju f))dt feIn'
it is too late, I think or I fear ; eS TOdre roo^l an ber ifett it might pa-hapa be in
order {to do thus or so) ; bas mart alfo Qbgeinad|t that is settled, I should say or
in my opinion ; nii^t bog i^ loilgle not that I am aware of; b) the subjunctive
in relative clauses of a hypothetical character r ta if! btr Sobn, ber mit^ ^iniiber-
trflge there is the boat that might carry me across; er fui^t tinen, bcc i^m btiflebe
he is looking for some one to help hun; bamaXi (job (S feinen, ber boB neglnubt
Wtte there unw no one then viho tcould have believed it; c) the subjunctive in
other clauses of a hypothetical character, especially in such as follow a negative
or a statement tiat precludes what otherwise might be ; it^ TOcifi itiditS tauon,
ba6 \(it mi^ gefinbert ^fltte I am net aware of having changed ; tr mar in arm, at9
bag tr nni ti&itt Iielfen IBnnen he was too poor to (E« ahU Ui) help us ; a) the sub-
junctive in concessive clauses like the following : t« ffl ^eift ob«r lalt, t^ gtttt be
it hot or cold, I shdUgo; er fei no^ fo rei^, or luie ret^ (ran* (d, idf fonn ibn.
ni(!^t niSten however rich he may be, I cannot respect him; fit btlonunt nHt9, fi(
lomme benn unb bitte she wUl get nothing unless she comes and asks.
B24. The Subjunctive of Indirect Statement. (1) The subjunc-
tive is often used after words of saying, reporting, thinking, belies-
THE SUBJUNCTIVE 105
ing, inquiring, doubting, hoping, fearing etc. : a) er crjafltte mil, ba^
tx lxa.nl geWefen \n, bafe cr f"^ ober fdjon wiebei ftarf genufl fU^le urn ju
rei(en unb ba^ er morgen 9[bf(^ieb ne^men Werbe he told me that he had
been ill, hut that he felt strong enough again for his journey and
would sag good-bge to-morrow ) b) bairauf ftaflte i(^ iljn, ob et Selb fle=
nug jwr SHeiJe l^abe unb ob it^ iljm irgenb toie Be^i[fli<^ fein tBnne then I
a»ked him whether he had money enough for the journey and
whether I could assist htm in any way; c) iii) ^offte nflmtt^i, «t toerbe
etWaS ®elb Bon mir anne^men, aber er banfte I hoped, you know, that
he would accept some money from me, but he declined with thanks.
626. (2) By using tlie subjunctive after such words, the speaker
represents himself as in a cautious or reserved attitude, as unwilling
to vouch for his statement, or as making the statement on another's
authority. But if he is stating what he believes to be facts, or
what he wishes to be regarded as such, he uses tht in-licative : a)
et ei^a^tte mir, ba^ er !ranf geWefen \\i, baft er ftc^ abet --■ . u roieber ftan
genug fii^lt urn ju tei(en unb baft et morgen iftbfcl^ieb ne^ -:,:! ipirb. The
indicative is also quite natural in sentences like tin ; ' iwing : b)
t(^ ftagte i^n, ob er nod) 6ielb ^atte, a\% er na^ §aufefu -\ ■ asked him
if he had any m.oney left on coming hoTne, for here the speaker uses
the indicative to report his own question (^atteft bu ito^ @elb, alS
bu.iw^ §au[e tamft?) with a degree of certainty and directness
which differs but little from the original form. Similarly in c) \^
^offe, ba^ er lommen tcirb or tommt / hope that he will come. Here
the speaker is expressing a feeling of his own, of which he must
needs be sure, and in order to express it with directness and confi-
dence he can hardly avoid the indicative. If he were making the
statement about another person, he might prefer the subjunctive :
d) jie ^offt, ba^ ct lommen luerbe.
SSe. After words or phrases implying^ certainty, m loifFfn jtnoui, f(I)tn see,
berotlttn prove, jdflen ahm, edtwatv. recognize, see, Btft^tftf" come to pass, (S ip
j^atfaifle Uiaafact, ce folgt it follows, ti ifi belatim it is welt known, the indic-
ative is tlie regular mode ; 16 Knife, bofe bu flelfiiB 6tft I know tluU you are dilu
gent; eg t(} bffannl, tag bU cnglSnber ben ©pott Iteben it is v>eU known that the
English are fond of sport.
887. A BubjuncUve in an indirect statement often attracts the verb o( a
dependent clause within Umt Btat«meut into the same mode, but not if there is
reason to emphasize the action of such a verb as a fact : er fagte, ber ^utifle, ben
er fieleV" ^abt, fti etner Don metitcn ©djUlern he said (Ae boy whom (according to
his statement) he saw was one of my pupils ; but er faate, ber Sunge, ben et flefe^
^en ^at, fei einer ete. he said the bay whom he (actually) saw was etc.
S28. (3) The tense of the dependent subjunctive after words of
saying, reporting etc. is, as a rule, the same that was used, or would
be used, in the direct statement. Thus the subjunctives in 524
represent the following indicatives: a) id^ bin trant geloefen ; fU^Ie
mid^ . . . ; unb iDerbe . . . ne^men ; b) ^aft bu ®elb . . . ? unb tann id^
. . . fein ; o) et loirb ettoaS . . . anne^men.
1-06
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
SS9. (4) Observe, honrerer, the following exceptions and modiii-
cations :
(a) A past indicative in the direct statement (unless both mode
and tense remain unchanged) becomes a perfect subjunctive in the
indirect :
IMiect
2)et Slieb na^m bte U^r bom S^if Ae,
fprang aug bem 55^"!*"^/ ^'^f """
bie ©trafee wnb berjiiitoanb bann
in ber ^Renge i^e thief took the
watch from, the tahle, Jumped
out of the window, ran across
the street and then disappeared
in the crowd.
Indirect
Sie fagte, ber 2)ieb Ijabe bie U^x
Bom a:if(^e genommen, |ei au^
bem %tn\ttx gefprungen, (fci) ilbet
bie ©tra^e gelaufen unb (fei)
bann in ber SRenge Berfditownben
she said that the thi«/had taken
the watch etc.
Direct
Sei Sttb ^atte bi( UI)r f^on Doni liftfie
genotninfii, als fic fnB ^''''n'fC *"■' ™
thief had cdreadytiAetitkeiBaich from
the table when she entered the room.
But if it is deiaiTable to report the
say; fie lagtr, bet 2)ieb ^abt bie Uht j
statement were btr 3)leb ^atle bi( ll^i: 1
or gctretcn {el.
6S1. One reason wliy the indirect
620) and the pluperfect subjunctive (
commonly used in conditions contrary I
na^nif bl( U^t oom Sift^e etc., instead of ifait bit U^t
means . . . vioiiid take the vtatch from the taile and i
on what condition f in other words, nabmt EU^eets a clause with if and leavee
the statement incomplete ; and wmilarly with the example in 530.
B3S, (b) Where the forms of tlie present, perfect and future
subjunctive cannot be distinguished from the corresponding indica-
tive forms, German resorts to the following substitutions {especially
after a governing verb in the past tense) i
for the pres. snbj, it substitutes the past subj.
for the perf, subj, it substitutes the plup. subj,
for the fut. subj. it substitutes the pres. condit.
Indirect
@te fagte, bet Diet ^atte bit U^r Won
font Xitd|e genommen, ale fie Ing ^'t"'
mfttrat she said the thief had already
t with greater caution, one'may
: in ber $anb ge^abt (as if the direct
tn ber $>[inb), aU fie inS ijtmmet ttot
Folds the past suhjunctive { in
that both those forms are so
fact '(618, 619) ; thus, fie faste, ber SHeb
'""' " "' £ifi^ a«iDmmen (528),
IHrect
$aben bie Sinber fi^ angelleibet?
unb geljen |ie mit un§ ? unb iper=
ben pe ettig fein? have the chU-
dren dressed themselves? and
are they r/oinr/ with us? and
will they be good ?
Indiiea
©ie ftagtc, o6 bie fiinber ftd^ ange^
fleibet patten (for ^^t&va) unb ob
fie mit unS gtngen (for ge^en)
unb o6 fie artig fein wlitben (for
iDCrben) she asked whether the
children had dressed etc.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE 107'
^ie fieiite Wtinfi^en bic^ feltft ju @rfagte,ormeinte,bie2euteWunf(t)=
fl)re(^en the people wish to apeak ten (for Wttnfd^ten) bid) fe'6ft ju
wi(A yim personally. fptectien Ae aaia!, or thought, the
people wished to etc.
3)ie Seute Wilnfdjen bic^i (elb(l ;u dr fagt, or meint, bte Seute h)iinfcti=
fjjtei^en. ten (for iriinfc^en) bii^ felbft ju
633. After a governing verb in the present tense, however, the question or '
statement is apt to retain more of its direct form (625), tmd the dependent verb
often remains unchanged : fie fraat, cb bie SXnUx fid) onfledetbct ^awn iinb ob fit
mit line ge^tn unb ob \it aud) attig v<n ratrbcn ; tt font, or mt\t\i, ble itait tDiinfii^ni
bii^ (elbfl ju (ptedjcn. — Notice that bj the BUbatitution of iDiiiiliiiten for Itflnfc^di,
in the second and third examples of 632, no distinctively subjunctive form 1b
gained, for in all regular weak verbs the past subjunctive is identical with the
past indicative. Ilence, if in this class of verbs Ihe indirect character of a
statement is indicated, it is virtually done (as in English) by a change of tense,
rather than of mood.
S34. In the less careful spoken language, especiall; of Northern Germuiy,
but sometimes also iu good writers, the substitutions in 533 arc found when they
are not called for : fit frofltt, ob b(r Snabe \M\% Watt (for fd), ob er IfiiKii iWontd
btt (i(^ ^Sttf (for l)ob() unb cb n ortig fein mflrbe (for vnixU) ake asked if tlKboy
was reaiy and hod fits cloofc wiOi him avd if he v>ould be jjood. Here, then, the
indirect character of the statement or question is indicated by a change of both
t«nse and mood.
S39. (5) The substitutions in 532 must be distinguished from
cases in wliich the past or pluperfect subjunctive or the present
conditional is used because it is, or would be, used in the direct
statement also. This applies mainly to conditional and concessive
sentences contrary to fact, such as are described in 518 and 519 :
Direct Indirect
3(^1 ware feant fleiuotben, unb i^r ©rfagte, et Ware ttanlgemorben unb
fillet mi(^ jebt gewi^ ntd)t fjier, toir fallen i^n je^t getDi^ ni(i^t
au(^ toiirbe i(| morgen nittit na4 ^iw, aud^ WUtbe er morgen ni^t
fionbon abreifen tiJnnen {supply nad^t Sonbon afcreifen fijnnen he
a past condition contrary to said that he should have /alien
fact, e.g. toenn iH} in bem Slima ill etc.
gefclicben tpiire) / should have
fallen ill, and you may be sure
you would not see me here now,
nor should I be able to go to L.
to-morrow (if I had stayed in
that climate).
6S6. (6) With the subjunctive of indirect 8tat«meut may be classed the
" dubitative " subjunctive, used in exclamatory questions : t^ ^ll( btrft flcrufsn ?
{do you mean to say that) I had called you f baS niHrt lioefit ? {do you mean to
say that this is poHry f) you call this poetry f njHr'S mBglt* ? Ibnnf t^ nli^t mtffX,
Wit id) luoDte ? is it possible f ean I no longer do as I woaM t -• i
CONDITIONAL IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE
The Conditional — The Imperative
637. (1) The two conditional tenses are chiefly used in the con-
clusion of conditional sentences contrary to fact, where they often take
the place of the past aubjunctive (518) or the pluperfect subjunctive
(519), especially when it is desirable to indicate the idea of relative
futurity move clearly by the use of the auxiliary iDtitbe than could be
done by the subjunctive forms. — For the potential use (521 a) of
the past subjunctive of regular weak verbs (whose forms are iden-
tical with those of the indicative), it is sometimes necessary to
substitute the present conditional ; thus : einen @Dlbaten D^ne (Setve^i:
tviitbe id^ nid^t fiirc^ten (a soldier without a musket I should not be
afraid of), instead of . . , ftird&tete ic^ nil^t, which, without sufficient
contest, might mean . . . I (actually) was not afraid of. The condi-
tional should not be used in the condition itself ; hence, not „ti)enn
tx fommen iiiutbe," but menu er !dnie (or fiime er), fo toiirbe it^ i^n
feljen if he should come, I should see him..
(2) For the Imperative, see 317, also 316, 547, 559.
The Infinitive
53B. The Infinitive as Verbal Noun (61, 283), mostly corresponds
to the verbal in ing : O) lie6e bag tafi^e g^a^ten ni^t I do not like
fast driving; 3*i' i'^'" ©(^reifcen time for writing {to write); baS
Uberft^teiten ber ®eletfe ift betfeoten the crossing of the raUway tracks
is forbidden; fooA tear ba fiir ein ©ingen unb ^jau^jen ! what a singing
and shnuting there was.' iai Sefen tton ^iii^em or baS SUcfterlefen
the reading of books. Some nouns of this kind are no longer felt to
have a verbal character, as ba^ Seben life, baS Stnbenfcn memorial.
S39. Different from the use in 538 is that in which the infinitive
(uncapitalized) retains its verbal force and may therefore take an
adverb (instead of an adjective, as taft^e above) or, if transitive, an
object in the accusative (instead of an objective genitive, as ber ®e=
leife above). In this, its full verbal use, the infinitive (with or
without adjuncts) is especially frequent as subject, and usually
appears without ju if it precedes the verb, or with ju if it follows
the verb and is announced by the anticipatory subject ti: feinen
j^einben berjei^en ift ebet forgiving one's enemies is noble or eS i|t ebel,
feinen J^einben jU Betjei^en it is noble to forgive one's enemies; fret
atmen madfj* baS fieben nii^t oDein drawing a free breath is not the
whole of life; eS ift Uetboten, bie ©eleife ju fl&erfd^reiten it is forbidden
to etc.; ffltti^er lefen ift teic^tet alS Stid^ter ff^reiben reading books is
easier than writing books ; Ittgen unb betriigen finb na^e Dertoanbt lying
and cheating are closely related ; tjoc^ fptingen tVoQen ift noc^ nil^t ^od^
fptingen wanting to junip high is not the same thing as jumping
THE INFINITIVE 109
high; baS (»ei^, or baS ^iefee, gut einfaufen that's what I call, or
should call, a good purchase or bargain.
640, Note. The rendering of verbal nouns in irig is one of Uie diflicult
sabjects in compositioa and cannot be fullf discussed here, but attention dionld
be called to a group of German oonstruotions wiuch are frequently rendered by
verbals in iiig; namely, mfinitive phrases and clauses with bag anticipated by
such adverbs as babet, baburd), bafilr, lw(|Cflen, bamit, bouon, barauf and boju (892
fi). Thus, he waa proud of having done U ahme is either et war flolj liatauf, eS
aVitia getlian jii ftaben or tt wax ftolj bfltouf, bafi « tS attein gtt^an fiatte. The
use of a clause with Dag is necessary nben the two subjects are not the same ;
hence fte was proud of my having dime it alone is « roar jlolj batauf, bafe i(^ e6
atlein flet^ali l)attc. The same applies to consteucUons with onjlatt or oljiie in
648 : withryut knojoing it, slw had burned Oie letter oimi t9 iu roifFtn, or otfit bag
fit (8 lougte, ^tte [\e iKiiSrief tsfiiiannt ivHtkout her brotlier''a knowing it, she had
etc. o^ne 606 Hit Scubtt ti rougle, ^Ite fit etc. See also 663.
641. The Inflnltlye without jn. (1) The infinitive without ju is
used after the modal auxiliaries (347).
S42. (2) The infiiiitive without ju is used with (affeii let, cause to :
er tte^ ben Strjt tommen he (had the physician come) sent for the
physician; et lie^ mii^ bie %^m jumac^en he made me shut the door.
613. If in the last example of 542 mic^, which is at the same
time the object of Iteft and the subject of jumai^en, is omitted, the
infinitive acquires passive meaning : a) er Ke^ bie %^m jumac^ien he
caused the door to be shut or he had the door shut. In such cases
the agent or subject of the dependent infinitive is sometimes repre-
sented, as in the regular passive, by Bon with the dative or by butd)
with the accusative : b) et lie|i bie %^ux Vm feinem ©tenet jumac^en he
had the door shut by his servant. If the object of the dependent
infinitive is the same person or thing as the subject of laffen, the
reflexive (121), not the personal, pronoun ia used : c) er lie^ fit^ Bon
bem Sutfd^ier nac^ §aiife fa(tren he had himself driven home by the
coachman (in et lie^ ttjn Bon bem Sutfdjet nat^ §aufe fasten, the per-
sonal pronotm t^n would refer to another, a third, person : he had _
him, this third person, driven etc). Similarly ; d) baS la^t fii^ ^ijren '
that is worth hearing or listening to. — Frequently laffen with fi^ is
equivaleut to liJnnen : e) baS Stot la^t ftc^ nii^t eflen the bread (can-
not be eaten) is not Jit to eat; f) t% lie^ (id^ «info(^ ntc^t beft^teiben
(it simply could not be deserved) it was simply indeserihable.
641. From this twofold meaning (active and passive) arise phrases which
without the context are ambiguous ; thus, i(^ lieg iftn lut^Mi may mean I caused
him to look {for some one) or I caused him to be looked for [bg some one).
646. (3) The infinitive without ju is generally used with fii^len
feel, ^eifeen bid, call, ^elfen help, ^iSten hear, le^ten teach, letnen
learn, mat^en make, nenneii call, fe(»en see: ^tlf mtr baS 3'''""^' reim=
Qm help me clean the room ; i(^ fjijrte fie fingen T heard her sing ; hai
nenne ti$ betrilgen / call that cheating ; iij ^abe i^n taufeti fe^en (348)
816. (4) The infinitive without ju is used after ^ben have, keep.
110 THE PAETlcrpIJIS
b(eiben remain aud finben find, and may then have the force of a
present participle : id^ f}abe no(l(t eittige Bon beinen Sriefen ouf meinem
2^if(^e Itegen IstUl have soitie of your letters lying on iiiy tails; b«
55iogen blieb Dot b«m §aufe fte^en the carriaye remained standing in
front of the house ; i(^ f anb i^n f (^laf en I found him, sleeping. So
also ill the phrases fpojieren ge^en go walking, ffrnjieren reiten yo
riding, fpajieten fa^ren yo driving, fi^lofen ge^ien yo to bed, @ie ^abeii
gut ttben it m all well enotiyh for you to talk.
S4T. (5) The infinitive without in is used with the force of aa imperative
(650) : {Itttftt^en ! stand itiil !
SU. The InfinltiTe with ju (which is repeated if there are several
infinitive phrases) corresponds in many of its uses to the English
infinitive with to : « bat nttt^, i&m oft ju fc^retben he begged me to
vmte to him ofien ; (ie befaljl i^m, ftiH )u fi^en unb ju Warten she
ordered him to ait still and wait,- id^ ^aoe etWaS anbereS ju t^un I
have somethiny else to do.
The infinitive with ju is also used after the prepositions um in
order, oifm without, anjtatt instead : n tarn, um mid) ;u fe^en he came
in order to see me; o^ne ein SBort ju fagen, ging fie ^inau§ without
sayiny a word, she went out ; anftatt, or ftatt, )u f(i)teiben, laS er ein
Sud^ instead of writing, he read a hook.
H9. The infinitive with ju has passive force as predicate of fein :
baS ift nit^t ju bejcfereiben that is (not to be described) indeserHiaile ;
er \\i nic^t me^r ju retten he is past saving. Similarly (and as in
English) ein ^auS ju Bermiettn a house to let.
660, For the order of words in an infinitive phrase, see 022.
B51, Note. Several infiniUve constructions in En^ish, especially that with
a subject accusative, have to be rendered In German b; a dependent clauae;
I fcnow him to be honest is, not „1^ wtig il)u elicli^ ju fdn," but ii^ nwig, bafi tt
t^tUit tji. Similarly, I wish him to do it ie ^ uittnft^e. Bag (t ti tl)ue. So also
In the passive : Ae was knovm to be honest is man itiuQtt, bdQ er et|rli^ war.
Also, he did not know what to mj/ is, not „er wugte n)d)l, mai ju iagen," bat er
wugtc nii^t, maS tr fagen follte, luid tell him where to go ia |agf i^m, Wo ec ^in<
gc^eit ton or mug.
The Participles
S62. Both participles are verbal adjectives (283). For their
comparison see 244. For their position in the sentence see 616,
616. Of special uses and constructions notice the following:
683, (1) The present participle may be used appositively, denot-
ing an accompanying circumstance, state or condition, but it may
not be used, as in English, to express merely adverbial relations of
time, cause or manner. Thus we may say bem engen ^fabe folgenb,
gelangten fte in eine ©bene followiny the narrow path, they reached a
plain ; fo serbrai^ten Wir bie ^t\.i, SSerfe frftreibenb unb ©li^oc^ fijielenb
thus we passed the time, writing verses and playiny chess. But the
ORDER OP WORDS 111
participle in an English sentence like the following must become an
adverbial clause in German : not seeing htm in the garden, I looked
for him in the house ba \ii itjn nidjt im ©arten fnnb, fud^te ic^ i^n m
§aufe.
So a^BO with verbal nouna in vag (540) preceded b; !i prepoaitioD and expres-
sing adverbial reiations : before, or a/ler, visiting my broUier I iwfced her whether
et«. eV i$ ntfinen iStubec befud)te, or nai^bem id) meintn Brutxr btiu^l ^attt,
ftagtf id) fie, ob etc.
664. The present participle of s trajiBitive verb used as an attributive adjec-
tive and preceded by ju iM« passive force and implies possibility or necessity :
bit ju rrobtmbe Srflung luurbe gut Dtttelbtgt theforh-eis Viat had to he, i
be, taken was w^l d,'- ''
665. Tlie present participle is used predicatively only when it has lost ita
verbal force entirely and is felt to be an ordinary adjective: et ){1 Iribotb he is
ailing or ill ; fie tjl ttijtnb she ia charming.
GG6. (2) The past participle used as an adjective has passive
force if its verb is transitive : baS gefc^lagene §eer the defeated
army ; if its verb is intransitive and takes fein (324) for its auxili-
ary, it has active force and describes the state or condition ra^ulting
from the action of the verb : ba4 erfi^ienene 33u(^ the book that has
BS7. The past participle in ita appositive use is less restricted
than the present participle (563) : uom g^etnbe Berfofgf, gelangttn fie
in eine iSbene pursued by the eneiny, they reached a plain. But ;
not having found him. in the garden, I looked for him in the house
ia ii) ii}n im ©arten nidfit gefunben ^atte, fud&te ic^ i&n im §aufe,
668. The past participle, in the aense of the present participle in English, is
treqaently used with tomiiifn : tr lam Htlouft" <"" flelpniKflen or nef^TOommen
he came running or jumping or naimming.
669. The past participle is sometimes used with the force of an imperative
(647): ftiUflfflanbdi ! aland stall
660. The past participle, like the infinitive without ju (539), occurs with
^etgen ; ba^ ^etgt gut rlngtlauFt (Aot's what I call a good bargain-
Mi. For the use of the past participle as predicate adjective, see 410.
THE ORDER OF WORDS
562. Explanatory Notes. 1. By " verb " is here meant only
the personal part of the verb ; by " subject " is meant the
subject with ita modifietB or adjuncts. 2. The general connec-
tives (456) aber, oUcin, benn, obex, fonbcrit and uiib never affect
the order of words. To indicate this more clearly, these con-
nectives are bracketed in the examples of 564, 565. . .
ORDER OP WORDS
A. Order op Verb and Suuject
563. The Three Orders. According to the relative position
of the principal elements of the sentence — verb and subject —
German distinguishes three orders : I. The Normal Order, in
which the verb closely follows the subject, which begins the
sentence ; this order is used chiefly in independent sentences.
II. The Inverted Order, in which the verb closely precedes the
subject ; this order also is used chiefly in independent sentences.
III. The Transposed Order (687 ft.), in which the verb stands
at the end of its clause and may or may not follow the subject
closely; this order is used only in dependent clauses.
564. The Nonnal Order is 565. The Inverted Order is
used (as in English) in inde- used (as only seldom in Eng-
peiident declarative sentences lish) in independent declara-
wbich begin with the subject : tive sentences which, for em-
phasis, for variety or in order
to establish the easiest connec-
tion with what precedes, begin
with any other element than
the subject :
1. et ^t jegt ein grofecS |>auS i- jetjt l^t er ein flto^eS §au§
he has now a large House now he has a large house
2. bcr jiingfte SItuktr meineS 2. bort auf bcm Sctfle ^t ber
grcunbeS ^t bott auf bent SSccgc jiingfte ffltubtt meineS (^i^euiibcS
Ctrl gvofeeg ^ii8 geOout- the ein grofee^ |wu§ ge&ant yonder
youngest brother of my friend on the vwuntain, the youngest
has huilt a large house yonder brother of my friend has huUt a
on the mountain
3. et ^t tteQci(^t ein ^uS
gemietet, [ober] et iviiti einS bauen,
rocnn er fommt he has perhaps
rented a house or he will build
one when he comes
i- bet Stfi^ei jencS ^aufcS,
large house
3. uiellctd)t ^t er ein §au« 9e=
mietet, [ober] TOertn er tommt,
toirb et einS bauen perhaps he
has rented a house, or when he
comes he wUl huild one
i. tuorgen loirb ber $efi^er
ORDER OF WORDS
118
ein reid)er oltet Saufnianti, wirt
motgen mit feinec ^xan utib feiner
Sotfitcr nac^ ©nglanb teifcn, [a6et]
tr Htifif bott iiicfjt langc, [benn]
et ifi fc^Dii fett cineiii Satire ixani,
[unb] er kvid bcit SSintet in 3ta=
lien jubringcn the owner of that
house, a rick old vierchajU, tvill go
to Unglartd to-^morrow, with his
wife and Msdaughter,-hut he wUi
not stay there long, for he has
not been well all this year aiid
he intends to spend the winter in
Italy
5. t^ ^lie fein ©ilbet unb
®ofb / have no silver and gold
6- ii^ ueig, ba| et fommt /
know that he is coming
7. ber Site antwottttc : „9iic
in tncinem Scften!" the old man
answered: " Never in my life ! "
s. iii ging nidjt ju iE)in, ba ic^
njufete, bafi ct tani / did not go
to him, since I knew that he was
t. fie ift nic^t \^6n, [aKetn] fit
ift gut she is not beaxififid, hit she
jene§ ^ufe8, ciit teic^a alter
Saufmann, mit feiner gi^ou iinb
feiner ^^od^tet nac^ ©nglonb Eci=
fcit, [aber] lange 6Iei6t et bort iiic^t,
[benn] f4on feit eincm 3a^rc ift tt
franf, [unb] ben SBintcr uiU er in
Stalicn jubringen to-morrow the
owner of that house, a rich old
merchant, will go to England,
with his wife and his daughter,
but he will not stay there long,
for he has not been well all this
year and he intends to spend
the winter in Italy
6. @ilber unb @Dlb l^bt i^
nic^t silver and gold have I rume
6. bafe er fommt, roti^ ii^ that
he is coming I know
7. „9tie in mctnem Ceben!"
antmortett ber 9Ite "Never in
my life ! " answered tlie old man
8. ba id| roufete, bafe er lam,
giug u^ nid|t ju it)m since I knew
that he was coming, I did not
go to him
8. l^iJn ift Re trid^it, [aKetn] gut
ift fie she is not beautiful, hut she
w. er fu^t fc^neH nac^ ber w. urn ben 3[tjt ju ^olen, fu^t
©tabt, utn ben 2(i^t ju ^olen he tr ft^neH nai^ ber ©tabt in order
drove quickly to town in order to to get the physieian he drove
get the physician quickly to town
a bad $aibS, bag er baut, (D' n. je^ntaufenb ^^a(er loftet bad
fitt je^ntoufenb St^ialet the house $auS, baS er baut the house that
that he is building costs ten thou- he is building costs ten thousand
sand dollars dollars
12. tr gdb bag ^ud} nii^t mir, >*- nid^t mtr gati er bad $ui$,
114
ORDER OF WORDS
[fonbem] er gab eS meinem Srubet
he did not give the book to me,
but he gave it to itiy brother
13. ber ^ii^e, feineS SBerfpre=
($en« eingcben!, ^olf bem 9Innen
tk» rich Ttian, mindful of his
promise, helped the poor man
u. ber SSntg, »on bem ©rafen
Detlal^en, Wnrbt gefongen the king,
deserted by the count, was cap-
16. er ^at mx bag ©ud^ nid^t
gefc^entt, ct ^at e^ ntir nur ge=
lie()en he did not give me the book,
he only lent it to me
sae. The normal order ia used
(as in English) in independent
interrogative (exclamatory) sen-
tences which begin with the
subject: 1. in toittft mil befe^Ien?
yoit mean to order me about?
i. mtr ifat ein groped §auS?
who hag a large house ?
3. Wad nta^t ben tDIenfc^en glitd=
lid) ? what makes man happy ?
*. iDeffen Sni^ litgt auf bem
lif i^e ? whose book is lying on
the table ?
B68. The normal order ia used
(as in English) in independent
declarative sentences tliat have
imperative force : Sit bitibcti
^ier! yoa stay here/ bn filcibrt
^ier ! you stay here/
670. The normal order may
be used (aa sometimes in Eng-
lish) in independent optative
(or imperative, 515) sentences
[(onbem] meinem Sniber gab er
e# he did not give the book to me,
but he gave it to my brother
is. fetneS aSerftjtec^enS einges
bent, fialf bet fRtxift bem Strmen
iHindful of his promise, the rich
man helped tlie poor man
II. Bon bem ®rafen berla((en,
ntutbe ber ^Bttig gefangen de-
serted by t/ie count, the king was
captured
16. gefd^enli ifai er mir baS
Sui$ nt(^t, nm getie^en ^t er eS
mir he did not give me the book,
he only lent it to me
B67. The inverted order is
used (as in English) in inde-
pendent interrogative sentences
which begin with any other ele-
ment than the subject : i. willf)
bu mir befe^len? do you. mean to
order me ahout ?
i. Wer (pred. nora.) ift jen«
SRann ? who is that man ?
s. rvai (pred. nom.) ift ber
SReuf^ ? what is man ?
». Weffen Sui^ legl er auf ben
3^i|tf) ? whose book is he laying
on the tahle?
6. Wo, or tnann, or tnomtt wifl
et t^n fc^lagen, unb Ivem ^a( er eS
gefagt? where, or when, or with
what will he strike him ? and to
whom did he say so ?
669. The inverted order is
used in regular imperative sen-
tences when the subject is ex-
preaaed (317): bleiben ©it ^ier !
stay here/ iltH bu ^et ! stay
{thou) here/
6T1. The inverted order is
regularly used (as sometimes in
English) in independent optative
(or imperative, 515) sentences ;
OBDBB OF WOKDS
115
when the verb is in the third
person : i. tSott gelie, 'ifa^ ei
lommt ! God grant that he comes /
n. er Itbt ^0^ ! lon^ may he live.'
3. aDe ^tiligcn feictt bet mix ! all
saints be with me! 4. jeber S^fi'
Ux bringe feln Suc^i fei ewwT/
student bnng his hook
672, The normal order may
be used in dependent concessive
clauses : er f(t not^ fo rei(^, td^
mag tlftt vx&it though he be neuer
so rich, I do not like him
874. The normal order is used
(as in Englisti) in dependent
substantive clauses when baft
is omitted : \ii} [age, et ift flei^tg
(instead of ba^ et fteifiig ift) Isay
he is diligent ; [te glauben, bet
5urft fei tfiit (instead of bo^ ber
JJurft ^ier fei) the^ think the
prince is here
1. flebe &ottf ba| et tommt ! may
God grant that he comes! s. Uaren
wit boc^ ju §aufe! would that
we were at home! a. mSgefl bn
@ltt<{ l^aben ! m.ay you have good
tmk! 4. gelobtfei ©ott! God be
praised! s. fo fei tS\ so let it
be ! fl. gt^en \»\t let ita go
673. The inverted order may
be used in dependent concessive
clauses ; fei er no^ fo rei(^, it^
mag i^n nid&t (be he or) though
he be never so rich, I do not like
him; it is regularly used when
the first part of obgletiit), toenn:
gfeic^, obfc^on or \otm auH) is omit-
ted : mare eS auH) ioa^t (instead
of loenn eS aud) luabt toiite), fo
(579, 729) ginge it^ bod& ni^t
even if (or althougli) it were true,
still I should not go ; iff er gleicE)
atm (instead of o6flIet(b, or menn=
gleic^, er atm ift), fo ift er bod^
gut though he be poor, (yet) he is
676. The inverted order is
used in independent declai'ative
and independent optative sen-
tences beginning with the antici-
patory subject (HI) eS: eSlnnteu
brei Sriiber there came three
brothers; eS Itbe bie t^tt^cUI
long live freedom. !
676. The inverted order is
used (as sometimes in English)
in dependent conditional clauses
when loenn or ob is omitted :
ft&ttt t^ i&n gefe^en (instead of
toenn id) i^n gefe^en ^iitte), fo gtnge
t^ had I seen him, I should go;
giebft l>n mir taufenb ^^aler, fo
gebe ii^ bit ba* ipferb if you give
me a thousand dollars, I shall
give you the horse ; et fptii^t, atS
tofite er reii$ (instead of alS toenn.
lie OEDEIt OF WORDS
or ale ob, et reic^ toSre, 521) he
talks as if he were rich
677. The inverted order is
used in exclamatory (588) and
emphatic declarative sentences;
here the verb is often accom-
panied by bo($ (sometimes =
for) : Wie ((^iitt tft (it ! how beauti-
ful she is ! ^nt ier abtx eine 3iafe I
what a nose that fellow has! MS)
fenne i^ tte((cr, ^6' ii^ i^n bo^
fifter gefe^en qIS @ie / Amow him
better, for I have seen him oftener
than you
678. Notes on the Inverted Order. (1) Several elements can
precede the verb only when they are of the same kind ; thus : ba=
malS, im go^re 1808, al8 man 9la))D(epn not^ liberal! filr^tete (three
expressions of time), ttPoOte nlemanb baran gfauben at that time, in the
year 1808, whim everybody was still afraid of N., nobody would believe
in it I but not : „ju jenet ^ni, in eintr Iteinen ©tabt am Sltjein (one
expression of time and one of place), kvp^ntt ein arm«r penfionierter
^tt^ixamn," here the proper order ia : ju jener ^i\i uio^nte in einer
tleinfn ©tobt am Wjnn ein armer ittnfionierter ^anfptmonn at that time,
there lived in a small town on the Rhine a poor pensioned captain.
679. Certain demonstrative atlverba or pronouns (as [o, bann, ba,
ber, bie, baS) are not regarded as separate elements when used to
sum up or suggest preceding clauses or phrases : abet TOenn et !ummt,
[o (729) ttiirb er ein §auS 6auen but when he comes, he will build a
house ; wenn er f ommt, bann ge^t iil^ if he comes, then I shall go ; ba
et &lieb, (o Hieb i^ auc^ a-s he stayed, I stayed too; baft et tommt, ba8
Mti^ iitf (565. 6) that he is coming I know ; unten am (JIuffe, loo bie
33aume fte^ien, ba ift e* Wcji down by the Hver, where the trees stand,
t/iere it is cool.
680. Nor are certain adverbs, as ni(t)t &nd nilT (606. i% lo), when modifying
or emphasizing tlie first element, reganled as separate elementa (686).
6B1. (2) In the simplest inverted sentences, the verb precedes
the subject immediately ; but if the subject is a noun and the sen-
tence contains also an unemphatic adverb or pronoun, the subject is
often separated from the verb by such adverb or pronoun : bamalS
tiagten i>ft bie SIr&etttr iiber §i^e or bamals tlaglen bie 9lrticttcr oft
Uber §i§e at that time, the laborers often complained of the heat, but
always bamal^ tlagten fie oft (not „oft fie") etc.; bann gab mit bein
Srubtr, or gab bein Sruber mit, ba^ ^ud^ then your brother gave me
tlie book, but always bann gab er mit (not „mir er") baS 5Bu(^ ; etft
mu^en ftc^ bie Sinbet (better than etft wnfi^tn bie Stitber fi^t) first
ORDER OF WORDS 117
the children washed themselves, but always eift ioitf^ man fl^ (uot
6B2. (3) When two or more sentences of the inverted order
having the same subject are connected by unb, the subject need not
be repeated if the verb follows unb immediately : geftern tarn mein
Sennit ju vm unb e^^lte mir gfeit^ bie @ef(i&ict)te yesterday my friend
came to wte and told me at once the story. But if another element
than the verb follows unb, the subject (a pronoun) is inserted after
the verb : geftem (am mein ^tnnb ju mir, unb gleii^ etja^Ite er mit
etc., not „((eftern !am mein ^eunb ju mir unb gfeii^ erja^tte mir bie
©ef^it^te."
fiB3. (4) Certain words may or may not cause inversion ; such
bo^ yet, still, but niimliti^ namely, that is erftenS in the first place,
jeboc^ yet, however to say first
enttoeber either fteilii^ to be sure, it is jWeitenS in the second
geloi^ certainly true place, secondly, etc.
jWCir to he sure, it is true
The more of a pause the speaker makes after these woivls, the
more they become detached from what follows (like exclamations,
684) and lose their inverting force : eS ge^t nut f^Iec^t, b(i($ ge^t f8
or bo(^ ti fle^t it goes hut poo^'ly, still it goes ; entWeber foutmt mein
i^rnbet, ober ic^ fomme or enttoeber mein Smtier tommt, obet id) bnraie
either my brother will come or I shall ; ic^ tBlff bit faflen, Warum er
lam ; etfttnS, ber Mrjt net ilim ju lommen ; jweitenS, er Bronc^tt ©elb ;
brittenS, etc. I will tell you why he came ; first, the physician advised
him to come ; secondly, he needed money ; thirdly etc. Here, too, with
less of a pause, inversion may take place : etfteitS riet ber Srjt i^m etc.
8S4. (5) Words used with exclamatory or parenthetical force are
wholly separated in constraction from what" follows and cause no
inversion ; such are
fUrWQ^r ! forsooth/ enblii$ ! at last/ nun Wd^I well then
teibet ! alas/ nun well \a yes, nay, in fact
ai)\ alas! oh/ too^l well, indeed im ©egeitteil on the contrary.
Examples ; leiber ! e9 ift ju fudt alas/ it is too late; enblic^ ! tr
tpintnt at last/ he cow.es ; nun, IC^ bin ^iei well, I am here; er ift \e
gro^ alS bu ; ja, tr ip greyer he is as tall as you, in fact, he is taller.
But leiber ift e* JU flJiit unfortunately, or / am, sorry to say, it is too
late ; enblic^ tommt tr at last he comes.
sas. (6) Concessive clauses often fail to cause inversion : Wenn
bu aui$ laufft, bu tDmmfl boc^ ya ||)at (instead of \t> tnmntft bn boi^
etc.) even if you run, you will be late anyway ; see 572, 573.
SSe. (7) Certain words, as and} also, too, nut only, alone, feffcft or
118 OEDEE or WOKDS
fogat even, when modifying or emphasizing the subject, and not the
verb or the sentence as a whole, cause no inversion : aui} iHt bin
©olbat I too am. a soldier, but aut^ bin Of ©olbat moreover, or brides,
lam. a soldier; nut tX bnrf eS nit^t Wiffen only he, or he alone, must
not know aiout U, but mit fciltf et eS nit^t lutffen only, or ftirf, Ae mwsi
not know about it.
587. The Transposed Order is used in dependent clauses
introduced by a subordinating element — as a conjunction
(459), or a relative or indirect interrogative pronoun or adjec-
tive (460) : — allc fa^eit, bafe c* unmijgltf^ ttwr all saw that it
was impossible ; i(^ ftagtc it)n, oh tx iitdjt tDmntcit tflnne / asked
him if he could not come ; fie fauftc baS ^ud, tDcil fie met|t @elb
fyittt she bought the house, because she had more moiiey ; it§ Jrat
!jter, ate er nac^ ber ©tabt ging / was here when he went to town;
bag ^ug, ba§ et gefiaut ifiA, (oftet Diet @etb the house that he has
built costs a great deal of money ; boct ftel)t bet §Ctr, bcffen 99tubet
wit gcftcrn ftafeit there stands the gentleman whose brother vx m^et
yesterday; man fragtc it)n, iBO bee 9)lanu ju finbert fei, bet boS gefagt
fyibt he was asked where the man could be found that had said so.
68B. The transposed order occurs in exclamatory sentences (577) :
tuie fc^iin pe ift ! how beautiful she is ! \oa.i ©ie M too^l einbillieii !
what an idea / Here the order is accounted for by the omission of
a governing word or phrase, as look ! see ! strange ! odd I
S89. For BubsUntive clauses omitting bag, see 574 ; for conditioiial cltiusee
omitting luenn or ob, see 670.
6». Notes on the Transposed Order. (1) The examples in 687
show that when the subject is not itself the first element in a
dependent clause, it follows this element immediately; but if an
unempbatic adverb or pronoun (581) also occurs, the subject (unless
it be a personal pronoun) may be separated fvom the first element
by such adverb or pronoun : ic^ \o%\% nic^t, up^in unS bet ^nttge, or
iDP^in ber ^nnge unS, fii^ren tciU I do not know whiiher the hoy is
going to lead vs, but iDotjtn er unS (not „uni er") fil^ten toiC ; ©ie
t^ateit eS, obgleiii^ bamals ba§ ©elb, or D&gleic^ baS @e(b bamals, nod^t
nid)t and etointneil ^^^ V"^ '^'^ ^'^ although at that time the money had
S91. (2) In dependent clauses introduced by a suboidinating
element and containing an infinitive used for a past participle (346,
348), the personal part of the verb stands regularly before the non-
personal verb-forms, and often also before a modifying adverb: man
fagte, ba^ bie ^^rujitjen bie [J^f^wQ i'"^* ^itttn ne^men tiinntn U was
OBDEK OF WORDS 119
said that the troops had not been able to take the fortress ; Wetin ic^
il)n ^itte fnfort, or fofort ^aitt, tmnmen laffen, fo 'mhxt eg ni(i)t gefc^e^en
*/ / had sent for him at once, it would not have happened.
098. (3) Personal forms of the auxiliaries l^aben and [ein may be
omitted at tlie end of a dependent clanae, provided that no misun-
derstanding can arise : e# ^iefe, bfl|! man i^n in ban 33DOte gefe^en
[^abe] it was said that he had been seen in the boat ; oXi loit ftagfen,
ob bet Saifet geftotben [f«i], ontwortete fie nic^t when we asked whether
the emperor had died, she did not answer.
693, (4) If several coordinate dependent clauses have the same
auxiliary, this is commonly omitted in all but the last ; fie fragte.
Wo i(^ i^n gettoffen unto ob id} mit i^m gefprot^en ijatti she inquired
where I had met him and whether I had spoken with him.
B94. (5) If several co&rdinate dependent clauses are introduced
by the same element and also have the same subject, the introduc-
tory element with the subject is sometimes omitted in all but the
first clause, since the position of the verb in the others sufficiently
indicates that they are de pendent : ©ie fragen mii^ laarum? 3iun,
hteil er fc^loudj ift, [roeit ct] !ein Oelb oerbient unb [lueil er] Vet^ngem
mu^, toenn toit i^m nit^t ^elfen you ask me why ? Well, because he is
feeble, [because Ae] ia earning no money and [because Ae] will have
to starve if we do not help him.
Note. Similarly, it U easy to distinguish by the order of wordfl employed an
indepecdent construction from a dependent one introduced by the same or a
similar word ; for example, compare ba bffafti (indep.) itx ®tntta\, bis @tal)t (u
bef(f)le6cn, unft bit ffinnio^ner lamen ^eroue then the general command^ the ttmm
to be bombarded, and the inhabitarUs came out and ba ber @kiiera1 befall (dep.), bic
Stctbt ju bcft^tefien, famtn Ue Sinroo^ncr ^trauS since the general commanded etc. ;
fo langt blftbt (indep.) (r nt^t he v)iU i\ot stay aa long as thai and foInnHe ei nitbt
bUiit [dep.),bldbc tc^ oud) niifit as long as he does not stay I th^l not aUiy either ;
\a Rut fingl (indep.) fie aui^ ttloit, mit ii)rt S^ratfter I admii, >he does not sing so
aeil as her sister and fo flut fic autfi (inat (dep.), i^nr @(Sni(|ier ©tinimt fieffiUt
mtir btffec homeeer welt she sings, J like her sister's voice bdter. See also 170.
S96. (6) In longer sentences, dependent clauses of all three orders may occur
in conjunction : er f(t)Tieb, bag ec in ^aris bit %lbIiot^eI benu^t ^abc (asT), er fti
(574) ober mit gtau a. nii^l bttanni gtmotbeit unb ^b* oui^ alift \itx\niit, ft ttn-
nen ju l*tnen, b*nn ^8tte er (576) ju uttfe Sdaiinttifiatten Bemai^t, (o ratlrtw ts Ibni
an iitil n«tebH babtn etc. he wrote thcU he had made uae of the library in Paris,
bid thai he had not met Mrs. A., nor had he tried to become acquainted with her,
for had he made too many acqitainiances, he teoutd not have had time enough etc.
B. Order op the Adjuncts op Verb and Subject
B86, The arrangement of the subordinate elements of a sentence
— adjuncts of verb and subject — ia substantially the same in all
three Orders.
D:,t.:f:k«Ck>0^1c
ORDBlt OP WOEDS
Abjuncts of the Vekb
697. General Principle of Arrangement. Verbal adjuncts —
non- personal parts of the verb, objects, adverbs — are usually so
arranged tbat the more iropoitant or emphatic element stands
nearer tha end of the sentence than the less important or emphatic.
Hence a non-personal part of the verb — participle, infinitive,
separated prefix — if the sentence contain such, stands at the end.
Objects and adverbs vary more in their relative importance, and
therefore in their relative position. Examples: a) {i^ fc^rielt ben
Srief ntd^t I did not write the letter; b) i^ ft^tieb m(|t ben Srief, fon=
bern bie 9liifga6e I wrote the exereise, not the letter ; c) id) ^atte ben
Stief nit^t gefc^rieben I have not written the letter i d) '\ij ^a6e ni(^t
ben Srief, fonbern bie Slufgabe gefc^rieben / have written the exer-
cise, not the letter. Examples in the inverted and transposed
orders; e) ba (then) ^be M) nic^t ben Srief, fonbern bie ^tufgabe
gefifirieben ; f) ba (since or as) \i} ntc^t ben Stief, fonbern bie Slufgabe
gefi^rieben ^abe.
S88. Non-Personal Parts of the Verb. (1) For the position of
separable prefixes of the simplest form, see 442. — When the non-
personal element of the verb consists of several parts and these are
arranged according to 697, they often stand in the reverse order of
their English equivalents (321). Examples : a) ic^ fc^tetbe ben
Srief ab lam copying the letter; b) ic^ i/abt ben Srief abgefi^rieben
/ have copied etc, ; c) ii$ tijiirbe ben jtrief abgefi^rieben tjaben I should
have copied etc. ; d) i^ Werbe ben Srief abfi^reiben taffen / shall have
the letter copied; e) id) ^attt ben Srief nbfc^reiben fiinnen I might
have copied the letter. Examples in the inverted and transposed
order ; f) gem (gladly) Wiirbe {6) ben Srief attgeftljrieben (laben ; g)
er fragt, ob id^ ben Srief abt(^retben luerbe he asks whether I shall
copy etc., but ii$ luei^, ba^ i(^ ben Srief f)atte (591) abfi^reibenI6nnen
I know that I might have copied the letter.
689. (2) Adjectives, adverbs, nouns or phrases that are as in-
timately associated with the personal verb as its non-personal parts
are, so that they form one verbal idea with it, also stand nearest the
end, according to 697 : a) it^ bin mit eineS folcfe fiijtreitic^en a3erbre=
d^ienS nic^t betoufet I am not conscious of so terrHile a crime ; here the
predicate beloufet stands, virtually, in the same relation to bin as
ab in 598 a to fc^tribe, so that bin behmfit may be regarded as the
1. sing, pi-es. ind. of an infinitive belDu^f=frin ; b) er ift feinem
(Jttrffen irnmer treu geblieben he always remained faithful to his
sovereign; here tteu and geblieben, though not written as one word,
are related to each other as ob and geft^rieben in 598 b, and ift treu
geblieben might be called the 3. sing. perf. ind. of treu=bleiben. Other
examples (in all tliree orders) : fie fragf i^n oft um SHat she often
asks his advice; bann (then) ftagt fie i^n oft um 31at ; id^ toeift, bafe
ORDER OF WORDS 121
itjn aud} anbece um 3lQt gefragt ^abm I know that others have also
asked his advice ; here the verbal idea is utitsiRatsfragen.
600. Objects. (1) Of two objects, one indirect and the other
direct, and both uouns, the direct is the more important and usually
follows the indirect : a) it^ fd^ieibf meinem SBater «inen SSrief / am,
writing a letter to mt/ father. Of two objects, one a pronoun and
the other a noun, the pronoun, whether it be the direct object or
the indirect, is the less emphatic and therefore precedes ; b) bet
£e^tet flab i^m baS Suc^ the teacher gave htm the book ; c) bet St^rev
gab eS bem Snaben the teacher gave U to the hoy.
601. But a prepositional phrase taking the place of the indirect
object regularly follows the direct ; it^ fc^teibe einen ©rief an (to)
meinen SBatet ; er f^irfte eS an ben ilnaben ; tx ft^idtte eS an i^n.
602. (2) Among pronouns, a personal pronoun precedes a demon-
strative; a reflexive, being least emphatic, usually precedes all;
aud of two personal pronouns, the shorter precedes the longer or
the one having the fuller sound : a) n ^ab ii bem ba he gave it to
that one there ; b) id^ na^tette mit^ iljm / approached him ; c) er X\t\
ft(^'« (603) flefaden he pvt up with it ; d) bet g^tembe ftettte fic^ mir
i)ot the stranger introduced himself to me ; e) bet Stater gab eS mir
or itjr or iljnen the teacher gave it to me or to her or to them. ; f)
man gab fie bit they gave them to you. Examples in the inverted
and transposed orders : g) borauf {thereupon) nS^erfe ic^ mid) i^m ;
h) barauf ^obe lAt mii^ i^m genaftert ; i) barauf tuiitbe \iit mij Vcj-m ge=
naijert ^aben ; t) ii^ lori^, ba6 ber Secret e§ i^r gegeben ^at / know
that the teacher gave it to her ; 1) i^ ftagt«, ob ber Sebter eS i^t ^abe
(591) geb«n IDoCen I asked if the teacher m,eant to give it to her.
603. The djfierence in emphaaiB between «e aud a monoayllabic pronomi,
EM \vii, mir, mic^, bir, bid), ia ofUu so sli^t that either may precede ; (t lleg te
ftA (instead of file's, 602 c) gcfaUtii. In easy colloquial language, ti after an-
other pronoun often becomes '%; thus, ii^ ^ab mir'e gcbat^t J thought so; fie
^abtn l^rt gnioninHn Viey took it away from her.
604. (3) With verbs that take two accusatives, or an accusative
and a genitive, the more direct object precedes the remoter ; er
(e^rte bie Unaben Watbematil he taught the boys mathematics ; fte
tlagle ben Settler beS 35iebftd&lS an she accused the beggar of stealing.
Here the order of objects, though contrary to 600, is in accord
with the more general principle that those complements of the per-
sonal verb which are moat closely connected with it come last ; thus,
the complete verbal notions above are aRat^emati(=lebten and be«i
2)iebpabfe-an«agen(699).
605. That the order of objects among themselves, as well as the order of
object and adverb (697), may easily vary under the influence of special stress
appears from the foLowing examples ; ber Eeljrer gab bai S3u(^ bem Snoben, niiH
6em SHobt^en the teacher gave the book to the bog, not to the girl ; ber Sflirtr nail
bae Su^ btm Snaben, ber am ffetgigfien geaibtlttt ftattt the teacher gave the book
to the boy that had worked moat diltgeni^y.
122 OEDBB OF WOEDS
606. Adverbs. (1) For the position of sucli adverbs and adverbial
phrases as come under the head of separable prefixes, see 442, 599.
607. (2) Adverbs of negation, as nic^t, nie, niemalS, leineSWegS,
are apt to rank next in importance to the non-personal elements of
the verb, and then stand immediately before these, or, if there is
uo such verbal element, last among the adjuncts ; a) tx gab bem
Knaben ba§ 93ui$ ntc^t he did not give the book to the hoy ; b) er toirb
bem Snaben baS Sud) nie geben he will never give the book to the boy ;
o) '\<ij \^aiit ^b"^n baS leinegwegS gefagt / told you no such thing.
Examples in the inverted and transposed orders : d) alfo Witb ereS
bem IBJanne nie Wiebetgeben? and so he unll never return it to the
man? e) fie be^aupten, baft er ilinen ben Srief nie flejeigt fiabe they
maintain that he never showed them the letter.
608. So also when the non-personal part of the verb is complex : er (agt, (ir
tfabt e8 niffit tljun !bnncn or ni^t t^un lojffti he says that he ibos not oWe to do « or
did not order it to be done ; man tagi, (it ifait bnS fitnb nie (liielen lafftn wotten
they aay she was never viiilii\g U> let the chUd play; ft* (i^«iBt, baft er idnsm
^(trn nttftt (599) treu aebliiben (et aft* writes that he did not remain faithfxd to
hid lord; er cntt^^tcg fii^, boS §aue ntc^t in ®tonb ju fefeen or nic^t in ©tanb
teljen }U laf(en he concluded not to put the hovae in order or not to hatie it pvi in
609. (3) An adverb of manner is ordinarily more emphatic than
one of place ; and an adverb of place, more emphatic than one of
time. The usual order is therefore : time, place, manner : a) er
atbeitet bott gem he likes to work there; b) tx loat immer bott he was
always there ; er fabrt immet fc^neH he always drives fast ; c) « ar=
bettet immer gem he always likes to work; A) bit ^ferbe inurben
geftem in ber ©tabt bittig berlauft the horses were sold yesterday in
town at a low price.
610. Of seieral adverbs of time, as of several adverbs of place, the more
specific are more emphatic tlian the more general, and therefore stand nearer
the end : ii^ •mat g(|)(m SCbenb uni 8 It^r bel bir I coiled on you last night at 8
o'clock; fie ^nben i^n ^ier ini ®orten auf b(r Sonf gefunben they found him here
in the garden on the bench.
611. Of several adverbs of manner, the one modifying the verb most directly
is the most emphatic and stands nearest the end : i^ rnHtht i^n gem fieunblii^
eni))fangen / should be glad to receive him kindly. If, however, one of such ad-
verbs modifies another directly, the modifier stands before the modified word :
i(^ niiirbe t^n ft^r gem freunbltd) empfangeu I should be very glad to receive kirn
kindly.
612. (4) But much more important than any special rule is the
observance of the principle stated in 597. How easily and natur-
ally, under this principle, the order may vary appears from the
following examples : a) \^ toerbc mcrgen boit aniommen Ishall arrive
there to-tnorrow, but i^ luerbe bcrt morgen antommen, ntcbt beute /
shall not arrive there to-day, bitt to-morrow ; b) er lam oft fe^r gem
he often took great pleasure in coming, but er tarn feljr gem oft Ac
took great pleasure in coming often; c) bet Sange fonnte in bem Sette
taum auSgeftteift liegen, not^ biel loeniger fi^Iafen the tall fellow could
ORDER OF WORDS 128
scarcely stretch himself out in the bed, much less sleep in it, but bet
Sange Inniite taum in bem 33ette auSgeftraft Itegen, nodj oiel meniger auf
bem @ofa the tallfellov! could scarcely stretch himself out in the bed,
much less on the sofa.
618. The podtJon of an adverb may, however, often be varied without auy
change in emphasiB. Thus, ii^ mtxtt inorgen bort aii(oinm(n and ii^ wnbt bort
motgcn antommen may be eatiiely equivalent as to emphaeis and meanii^.
614. (5) According to 681, au unemphatic adverb may ataud
between the verb aud the subject in tlie inverted order, but in the
normal order an adverb that strictly modifies the verb is not allowed
to stand between the subjectand the verb. Thus, he nmehere found
rest is in German, not „tx nitgenbS fanb dtuift," but er fanb nirgenbS
9lu^e. Adverbs and phrases that do appear between subject and
verb in the normal order either modify the subject alone, as bort in
ber 33aum bort ift griin the free yonder is green, or they are conjunc-
tive adverbs in a post-positive position, joining sentences rather
than modifying the verb. Such adverbs are chiefly alter, aljo, bas
gegeit, inbe((en, lebod^, nomU(^, Examples : bet §ett fcefa^jl, bet 3)ienet
aber ge^ocd)te ni(^t the master commanded, the servant, however, did
■not obey ; bet §ett befall, ber SJienet alfo (therefore) getiotrfjte ; iii} fnn
alt, Sie bagegen Jinb jung 2 am old, you on tlie other hand are young.
ADjuNCTa OF THE Subject
616. Attributives. The number of attributive modifiers allowed
to stand before a noun-aubject, or before a noun in general, is
greater in GJerman than in English ; tliey are arranged ao that the
modifier precedes the word it modifies : ber freunblic^ auSfe^enbe alte
^fiann \9iix^ the kind-looking old man said; baS auf bem 3:tf^e lie=
genbe rote SllC^ ge&firt mit the red hook lying on the fahle belongs to
me; bann tam bet Bon feiiiS ^fetben g^gene SBagen beS ^iinigg then
came the king's carriage drawn by six horses; et ftagte, ob (te bie im
3Rufeuin auSgeftelltten Silbet gefe^en ^abe he asked if she had seen the
pictures which were on exhibition in the museum.
816. Appositives usually follow their noun ; if they precede the
noun-subject, they are regarded as separate elements and cause
inversion, as in 566. 13, 14. The words constituting a complex
appositive are arranged like those of an attributive modifier (616),
with this exception — that a past participle sometimes precedes its
modifiers ; thus r betraten uon feinem 9Ieff en unb Betlajyen ijoii betn
©tafen, etgab fti^ ber fliJnig (instead of oon feinem 3leffen benaten
etc.) betrayed by his n^hew and deserted by the count, the king sur-
rendered himself.
617. For the position of an adverb used to modi^ the subject, as bott In 6(t
S9aum tort ifl ariitt, see 6H.
D.n.iized by Google
OBDBB OF WORDS
61S, Dependent Clauses have the value of nouns, adjectives ot
adverbs ; toer fteifeig ift, tomtnt meiter he that is diiii/ent tjets on ; fte
jejgte mir ben Srief, ben fie gefd&rieben ^tte s/ie showed me the letter
that she had written ; wir lamen, ate bie Sonne unterging we came at
sunset. Regarding their position, the following points should be
noted :
619. (1) An adverbial clause (like an adverb, 614) should not
stand between subject and veib in the normal order, as it often does
in English. Henoe a sentence like this man, although he is very
rich, never gives money to the poor becomes in German biefer ^flnn
giebt ben Sfrmen niemalS ®elb, obglei^ et fe&t tei(^ ift.
031. (2) !:^'>pendent clauses are sometimes incorporated in the
main sentenc.:, but not if the end of the latter is thereby made to
drag : b«r ffn.-''c Uef. fo fd&neU er fonnte, ben Setg ^inauf the boy ran
as quickly as h" • , np the hill ; but er fling auf ben 3)iann ju, ber
oor bem Sabeu ftanb unb fwfe bie SJaren befa^t he went up to the man
who was standing before the shop and looking at the wares. Here
the dependent clause would hardly be incorporated unless the
sentence were continued in some such way aa follows : et ging auf
ben 5llann, bet Dot bem 2aben ftanb unb fu^ bie Sffiaten befal), ju, flopfte
ifjm auf bie Sc^ultet unb fagte etc, . . . slapped him on the shoulder
and said etc.
62S. Infinitive Phrases have the value of nouns or of comple-
ments of nouns, adjectives or verbs. The words constituting a
complex infinitive phrase are arranged so that the modifier precedes
the word'it modifies (615), the infinitive therefore standing last:
einen fo tjid^tigen unb ^attiotifc(ien @taat§mann ju betbannen, ift etn
^erbtec^en to banish so able and patriotic a statesman is a crime ; et
Voax ftets beteit, ben Strmen unb unft^ulbig ©etfotgten ju (lelfen he was
ever ready to help the poor and those that were unjustly persecuted ;
see further 564. 10 and 565. id-
623. A short infinitive phrase (like a dependent clause, 621) is
often incorporated in the main sentence : ba§ Jttnb fangt fi^on JU
fpted^en an or bdS fiinb ffingt fd^on on ju fpteti^en the child is already
beginning to talk.
3t.z.dcy Google
WORDS OP FREQUENT OCCURRENCE
An Alphabetical List of the Commonest Nouns
6S4. The following lisb contains about 270 of the commonest
nouns. Those in heavy-faced type occur most frequently. Of 14
masculine and neuter nouns whose plural is rare or not in use, the
genitive singular, in { ), is given instead of the nominative plural.
bcrabcHb
bit Sbcnbe
evening
bie.erietn
bn «n(ang
bie anfanfle
iai Snbe S4
bie Ignben
end
bi* antroort
bie antmotlcn oiwwct-
bei Chigel
bie <Sngel
angel
b« «pfel
bie aipfel
apple
biterbe
bte Srbeii
earth
bit alfcit
bie atbeiten
work
ber ffifel
bte etti
donkey
Ut am
bit »nMc
bie ^rjle
arm
physician
bie gebtr
bie gtbetii
i feather
[pen
bag ange 84
: bit»ngtti
eye
bet geinb
bie geinbe
enemy
hetaugenbltd bieaugeiiblld
't moment
bae gelb
bie gelbet
>W
ber ©auH 84 bit Soiitni
peeaard
bet ge!8 83
bie gelfen
roek
hcTeanw
bie SBiiMe
tne
bas geujlet
bie JSenjlet
window
m »(<n
bie Seine
kg
bte getne
bie getnen
distance
btrVerg
bit S«9t
mountain
bas geuet
bie geuet
fire
bafl «ett 8*
bie SBetlen
bed ■
ber ginflet
bit ginger
finger
bae mb
bie eirbet
pklure
bet glue
bie glit(!e
finer
boe Slatt
bie emtttc
leaf
bie gtage
bie gtagen
itufsHon
b« Slid
bl( ©lutnt
bie ©tide
bie Blumeii
look
bie^an
bit ^Mn
\^fe
bas Slut
{bee Slutee)
bfood
bae gtaultin
bie gtoulein
young lads
ber «obtn
bie SBben
grottnd
bie gteiVit
bie gtei^eiten I3>erty
b« Srief
bie ®riefe
klter
bie gteube
bie gteuben
joy
baS STOt
bie ®[ole
bread
bcTgicemb
bte Stemtbt
friend
bit Stflrfc
bie iStaden
bridge
bte gteunbiii
btr »fiibMr
bit SrMbc):
brother
nen
in SBrunnen
bie «(uin«n
weU
bet gttebe 82
: (bcegtiebenS) peace
bie Stuft
bie iBrujle
breast
bet gu<^
bie gfl^te
fox
bueSni^
bit »ftl^CT
book
bet gUtp
bie giit)leii
pri^
bfT SiiTflei:
bie Siirger
eitietn
btrSnJi
bit %m
fool
bae Satft
bie m<i)n
roof
bet @atten
bie ®atten
garden
bet Dictinr
bie 'Dieiier
bet ®a|» ■
bie ®ajie
guest
bre 3)l(n|l
bie :I)ienfle
service
bas ®eb«ube
bie ®fbSube
building
bas Sing
bie ®inge
thing
bos Oebitge
bie ©ebitge
mountains
ber 3>oltor 8i bie JJohoten
doctor
bet®ebanle82bie ®ebanten
He 3)iicf
bit 3)iirfn
viOage
bie (^genb
bie ®«genben
region
bte e^re
bie e^ren
honor
bet @eill
bie ©eijlet
spirit
baa Si
bie @ieT
m
baS^lb
bte ^tbet
k't^C
THE COMMONEST NODNS
bet ©eittral
bit ®enerale
general
basmt
WeSalJK
year
bit ®t\iimt
blt®e((^id)ttt
letory
{kiatory
bit 3uBenb
bet Sunge
bit SuiiBeii
youth
boy
bit ©(lefl^oft bit ®im^a\
bei aiingling
bit aiinglinae young ma
ttn
btr fioiftr
bit fiaifcr
emperor
baa ®(fi^t
bit ®i[tiiittx
faoe.
bie «altt
cold
bU ®tftalt
bU ®tfla1ten
btt Samtiab
btt fiampf
bie fflampft fight
ble ®twa\t
pOlMT
baemNb
Ht ftiKber
chad
bae mai
bit ©lafet
fflo*.
bit Siri^t
hit »iri^n
eh«Tch
bit @lodt
bit @lodtn
beH
bae filelb
bie Sleibet
dre»K
ue msa
{its QIHifee) fortum
bcc ftiiabt
bit Snabea
bos,
bit ®nabe
mercy
btt Sntdifi
bie Snt^^te
atrvant
baa @o1b
(bee &o\bti)
gold
in Sinia
btt ftanigc
kmg
Ux &m
bit (SMtt
god
bie SSniBiK
bit fiiBiflia^
queen
bai @irab
bit ®tobet
HCK
bet @raf
ble ®tafen
count
b.r«o».f
bit ABtft
head
ber ®(unb
bie ®ittnbe
(=
bit Stafl
btrflrieg
bit ftraftt
bie Sritge
force
tror
bas eooc
bit ^aait
A«ir
bit Atone
bie Stonen
cramn
btr^^n
. ble mnt
eoek
blt^^
bit Sliitt
cow
btt ^ale .
bit eaiit
net*
bit Sunji
bit fiUii^e
art
bit $anb
btrS«it
bie^tibc
bit ^altn
Aare
iaS £aitb
bie fiinbet
[countrg
btt ^laiiftn 82 bit ^aufen
fteap
ba« Stbcn
[its fitbeni)
life
bae eai.pi
bit ^iiupttt
head
btt I't^ttt
bit Pc^tct
teacher
iaa ^au»
bie«aiii«
house
bet Eeib
hie i'eibet
body
bas^t"
bit §ttte
army
ble Seule
people
bit ^libt
bit ^tben
kealk
bae Si*l
bie Slt^ler
light
btt^tft
bie eelben
hero
bit f Itbt
love
btr $en 75
bit $er«»
bae Sitb
bie Stebet
eong
bad $ec3 86
bit ^trjen
heart
bet SBwe
bie iimtn
lion
ber^rj»B
bfe ^riB9t
duke.
bie ^fl
bit £iifte
air
bit eilft
bn ^ixamtl
bit eimmri
help
blteufi
bie 2Ra(^t
btt ttijle
bit WaSitt
1 delight
{deMre
might
ber ©of
btt eaft
\couri
bad ffiibc^tt
bae mal
1 bie aRabi^cn
bit a)(alE
girl
time.
bU eoffnunfl
bie§offnun.
hope
bet 3Ranit
bie asanntr
man
B'n
ble Waan
bie anautni
leall
ble 9B^t
ble ee^tn
height
bag metr
bie aileere
aea
ba« eolj
bie esijet
vood
ber Sl^eiflcr
bit aneijttt
master
btt ©agel
bie eOBtl
hia
btr aRcafd)
bie5BIe»f«t«
1 man
ber §uiib
bit O'lnbe
dog
ber anittag
bit Hiittaee
noon
btt ^ut
ble eiile
hat
bie aKittt
middle
bie 3n(el
bit 3nlelii
ialand
bet Tlo'nat
bie ano'nale.
, )OQ IC
THE COMMONEST NOUNS
in gjlonb
ble aHonbe
moon
btr ©c^mtr.j
bit ©i^nterjen
pain
bn anorgen
bie ^toreen
mominst
bit ©i^rift
ble Si^rifteii
wriliny
bU miute
ble aKU^n
\j«»w
bet ©iliritt
ble ®cf|ule
ble ©divilte
ble ©(^ultii
8(q.
school
btt 3)lut
{bee fflunbte)
(beS 9Rule«)
niou£A
Cfnerage
ber @d)il(tr
bie ®^fller
lacholar
[pupil
kit SKntttt
bie wattct
mother
bai ©^lutrt
bit @d)iu(rtet
eword
tarSlloc^bQtSiMeffla^barn
ble ©t^roefitt
bit ©dimeilf rr
isiAter
bit «a<l)(
bit »ad)te
night
bet @te
bit ©et(e)n
lake
ber 91innt 82 bJc WaMtn
nome
bit ®ef
bit ©ee<e)ii
bir Watut
bie 9IatuTen
nature
hie ®ttle
ble ©telen
sml
bit 91ot
bit 5B6tt
distreaa
bieiSeite
bitStittn
side.
baS O^r 84
bit O^ren
ear
btr eitg
ble ©itgt
itictory
btr CrnUl
bit Onlel
uncle.
baS etlber
(btS ©i(bct«)
Mlver
brtCirt
bitOtle,i!)rte
ble «aart
pair
btr ©inn
ble ©Innt
\meamng
bi( ¥«1on
bie ^trfonen
person
betSB^ii
bit @i*B(
son
bo«¥M
bie¥ftrbe
horee
btr ©olbol
bit ©olbattR
soldier
bet 9|Jla6
bit ^lofee
place
ber ©Dintntr
bte ©ommer
summer
bet *rini
ble^rhijeii
pHnee
bie @>nne
bie ©mBtn
svn
bie ^prinjrinti
: bit ^itiujtifin
' prin^xse
btr ©oiintflfl
bte ©onntagt
SjOiday
ntn
bas @piel
bi't ®ple(t
piay, game
bo8 ^t!t\t
hie atecfite
HgU
bie ®pra(^e
ble ©pradifii
language
bit Siebe
bte Sfteben
speech
ber ©tont 84
bit ©taalen
stale
bQ8 fflcl(^
bit Stii^t
realm
bie etabi
bie ®tabte
cUs. town
bU atdfe
bit Seifen
jowraey
btr ©latnm
ble ©tatnnie
aUm, tribe
btr aitittr
bie Sltiter
horseman
bet Srtin
bie eteiue
etone
btr Sine
bCT Sitter
bie 9tinge
ring
knight
ble ©tttte
ble ©ttUtii
(pta^e
\spot
bttSod
bie mac
coat
ble ©timtnt
bit ©linimtn
b)e Kofc
bit m\m
«*«
bit ®tirn
bit ©tlnitn
forehead
ba9«o6
bet naden
bie fflofft
bit Milrfeii
horae
b<Kk, ridge
hie Strafe
bit ©traftn
Ipuniah-
{ment
bit atufit
reBt,quiel
bit ettpgt
bit ettagtti
street
btr ©aal
bie ®aie (on
e haU
bie ©tube
ble ©tuben
room
a)
bog ©tflll
bit Sffiife
piece
bit @a*e
bie ©ai^tti
thing, affair bee ®tu^l
bit ©tiiljle
chair
(oppear-
bit ©tunbt
bie ©hiuben
hour
bet ©i^tin
(be* ©(^eineS) \ ance, sAoio, btr ©tunii
bte ©tilrme
storm
laemblana
! bet lag
bie Xagt
day
m @<^lf[
bit ©djlffe
ship
bielaitte'
ble Xaattn
aunt
ber @*i1b
bit ©i^ilbc
ahieid
ble ta\ijc
ble Safi^tn
pocket
bit @i^lai^t
bit @d)lad)trn baUle
bet lell
bie leilt
part
ber ©djlaf
{bee®d)lafe9)8fcq< ,
boBSM
ble Scaler
.Mitey
bet mn
bie ©d)iafle
6(010, Btroke bie 2^1
bit S^attit
deed
iaS&t,m
bjeedjinifci
easOe
baS E^or
biej^ore .
gi^.
THE COMMONEST ADJECTIVES
hie X^t
bie Sliiteu
door
bag SSaffer
bit Kafftt
tealer
bus Xitt
ble liere
oninuil
ber SStg
bit aSeee
way, road
bit XtifUt
bit Sifdje
Me £lif|ttr
daaglUfr
m Seib
bit aStiber
I woman
btr Xo%
(beS tOnS)
death
btr aStin
bit Setnt
v>in«
btr Zen
bit IBnt
tone
bit «Se(t
bie man
uwrld
bet ZoU
bit Xottn
(fcodmon
bae tEBtrt
bit SBtttt
work
btt lurm
bU Iflnnt
tower
bae ffitjeii
bit Scten
being
He \lt)x
bit U^rtn
{clock
\walek
btr %}ia( 82
ber fflJtnb
(beeauiUtne) will
bit «Ginbe v>i«d
bae Unfliad
(btSUnfllfide) misforlune
; betSJlnttr
bit SBlRter
winter
btr fSattt bit eater
bae ^aterlonb (bfS »attr.
father
(father-
ber SJirt
bit fflJirte
(ho.t
{landlord
Imbi)
[land
bit £!B«*e
bit SGJo*tn
week
bcc Ssgtl
bit »iaei
bird
bpg »pet
bie Siprte
word
US SoR
bit »Slter
jpeopk
\«atUm
bai aUuiiber
bit ©unbtr
{=S
bit SJaffe
bttSSafftit
tieapon
ber aUunW
bit asanfi^t
wish
btr fflJaeen
bit SSoBen
wagon
bae 3ei<^n
bit 3ttd,en
mgn
bit SEBa^r^ctt
bit SBa^t^tl^
tnM,
bit3tit
bit Stiitu
Ume
ttn
bae 3immer
bit aimmer
bcrSSalb
bie 39}anb
bit XBMber
bit aiBaiibe
forest
vail
ber 3u9
bit BHt
rirain
An Alphabetical List of the Commonest Adjectives
631. The following list contains about 120 of the cotamonest
adjectives. Those in heavy-faced type occur moat frequently.
Those which are marked adv. occur more frequently as adverbs
than S3 adjectives. Those with the sign ' take the umlaut in
comparison. None of the pronominal adjectives are repeated here.
•Keiit
alone
(injlg
BingU, only, unique
ilt-
old
tnfl ■
narrow, close
wm'
poor
erft
first
belannt
tlDlfl
eternal
b!a6
pale
|au(
U^y
blau
blue
fern
far, diataiU
bofe
e«I, bad. wictoid, oMjry
ftrttfl
ready, done
brell
broad
ftp
firm
bid
thick, big
fltifiifl
diligent
bumm
etupid, duU
fret
free
bunTd
dark
fretnb
strange, foreign
tbel
Twble
freunbli*
kind, pleasant, friendly
t^rlit^
hofie»l
friid)
fresh, brisk, livels
elfltii
©wn, jiecwKor
fro^
giad, pleased
THE COMMONEST ADJECTTVES
mm
(jlod, cheerful
imitifl
eourageoua
fromm
pious, good
ml, -, 246
near
fTu^tbar
fertile
natittli^
natural, adv. o/cour«
frflft
earlg
■ea
new
\nxmax
UrribU, dreadful
offm
open
fUrt^terlic^
terrible
pIBBll*, adv
. sudden
fur^tfam
timid
ptSiiftig
em SOS
tehole, entire, aU
ra(4
quick, eiDifl. rapid
seniifl
enough
redjt
right
«<"!§
certain, aure
te^
rieh
Qcnb^nlii^
vein
clean, pure
fltd.5
like, eimOar, egual
rot"
red
glfiiflid)
happy, foHimaU, iMlcy
ru^lfl
quiet, calm
gnabifl
merciful, gracioita
*d,kd)t
bad, poor
aolben
golden, gold
f*iiel(
guiek. swift
flrut -, 2*6
great, large, big
fdjBn
griin
green
Wterflit^
frightful, terrible
Bnt 246
good
fc^mavj '
black
Salb 208
half
(i^ratt
kea^. diffieuU
Dart-
hard
(elttn, adv.
rare, geldom
^tilifl
holy, sacred
fid,ar
safe, sure, ccrtofti
^(16
hot
fpat, adv.
UUe. recent
IjeU
briglU, ligU, clear
fhtti"
eU-ong
^err(id)
glorious, magn^eeia
fKH
stiU, quiet
^B^»,230,24GAtsfi
m
proud, haughty
^ObW
pretty
tapffr
brate
i"ii8'
young
ttuer
fall"
cold
«ef
deep
rrat
clear, evident
tot
dead
ntiR
small, liUU
ttauttfl
aad, dismal
nufl-
prudml, clever, wfge
tHU
faiPifui, loyal, tve
IraiiC
side, iU
llBda
remaining, other, rest
mi
cool
wa
fuU
tm-
brief
Bonit^m
eminent, aristocratic
im-
long
tDQ^T
true
lansfam
slmn
lout
loud
»(mii"
vmrm
IMT
empty
111(16
whiU
Iciest
ligM. «x8j,
Urit
wide, extended, far
le^f 249
laat. latest
■tint
viorthy, worth
lieb
dear, previous
iDilb
leild, »atage
luftifl
merry, jolly
mitnti^
real, actual
tnadfttg
mighty, pouierful
iDfitbiB
raSgllt^
possible
jufritbtn
content. aaO^ed
3.n.iized by Google
130 thk commonest wkak verbs
The Commonest Weak Verbs
696. The following list coiitains about 70 of the commonest weak
verbs, simple and comiwiind. Those in heavy-faced type occur
most frequently, ■Of the irregular verbs (337, 338) none are re-
peated here. Reflexive verba are given with fni^ after the infini-
tive. Verbs which form the perfect tepsea (324) with fein are
given with ift before the past pj«ticiple and should be so learned.
anMiiirtcii
orbeiten
bffreieit
begegntn
I)vaiid)fii
banim
biniMi
Mrbttnen
.(rm
nlaubtu
fatten
f.i)i«n
folgfn
frruin, fii^
faiirtn
ffir(^tcn, ltd)
llflttbcn
^ffm
auf^aten
ju^ren
tctnnttn, fic^
tStnttfrn
taufen
ttectaufen
lail^fn
tttCK
um
lelttn
bfglelttn
<ntRiinlete
arbeitctf
befrdle
- btfltgnctt
btaui^tc
banlte
bitntr
unbUnte
erlaiibte
fafitt
WU
folgh
Btrfolgte
frogtt ((rug)
fiirdjtftt
fflt(^tftc
glanblt
^angtt
^offte
^dlte
^ane
^brle an
^arti auf
gefiortt
^Brt( jii
etinnerte
rampftf
tauftt
uettaufle
lat^tf
UUt
legtf
rtiletf
begleltete
gnnhnsrltl
gearbeilet
btfreil
Ifl brgegntt
SfbTaudit
gebanft
gebitnt
Mrbitnt
gee^rt
Eirlanbt
atWt
i|i gffoigt
utrfolgt
8«fr«flt
Btfrtut
gcfflljrt
gefilrifilet
gefiitd)tel
geglavbl
ge^dngt
ge^offt
geftDlt
geljirt
■ ange^Brl
aufgt^brl
juge^btt
ertnnttt
geMmpfl
getaufl-
Btrtauft
gelai^l
grlrbt
S'Ht
QtUittt
btgttittt
free. deUver
parane, persecide
oak, inquire
rejoice
feel
lead, gmde
fear
be afraid
believe, think
hang up, aaepend
fdch, gel
helong
Jtghi
bug
THE COMMONEST WEAK VKRB8
ttoHn
lernte
StUmt
team
lirben
lieUt
flditU
tone
iDben
iDbK
fldobt
jiraiee
inad)»
madjtt
Se»ad|t
«uUce,do
mcintn
meiiitf
gimtint
think, remark, mean
merten
merttt
gtmtrtt
notice. feeHmark)
bcmtrfen
btmtrtK
btmtrtt
notice, remark
af|n«n
Bffnde
gOffnet
open
pflegen
vmtt
B'pP'at
be accmlomed (to do)
xtbta
teMi
gciebct
talk, apeak
relt^eit
teldjtt
gttfic^t
reach, extend
meid|*n
trreit^lt
(tr(td)t
reack. arHTO at
telfen
«l(te
i(l Bfcdfl
travel
m»n
rU^rtc
gerfl^rt
slir. Ujuck
anni^Ttn
ra^ttc an
angcTu^rt
tmieh
berfl&ttn
betfl^tte
btcflfirt
touch
fageii
("8te
uefait
my, tell
^atn«n, fid)
t^amte
getdjaml
beMhaiHCd
fd)irf«i
fdjlctte
itWdt
send
ftlKH
\tm
9»feKt
set {set, set), plare, put
(eKe«, m
fttftt
UeftDt
aadown
DerieUen
Wfiff^le
Bfrfeljt
retort, rtjily
fptelen
fpifllf
fleltiidt
v^y
PeUtn
flfUtt
flfftrUt
pla<x,pai
fni^B
fnifjle
atfn*
seek, look for
6elu<^n
betudflr
bdm^l
■BiaU
ottfui^m ,
Mcfudftt
wrlutftt
try, o/(empi
ma^tn
maifU
flema^l
be awake, watch
aulma^tn
li.a*tt auf
ifi aufeewflt^t
awake
tmaiitn
' erniad)tt
ifi «mad,t
awaJce
loatten
roartett
gfitxirtft
eriBorten
ertDarhte
expeti. VMilfor
luerfm
toectte
genndft
awake, arovee
iDdntn
iDcintt
gdncint
weep, cry
iBD^nen
IDD^ntC
geroo^nt
' dweU, reside, Uw
n)[infc^«i
maW
eeroUnfi^t
wish, desire
jfi^Im
imu
fl'jafilt
count, number
etsaijltii
Rja^itc
(tjaijit
Idl, narrate
jtigtn
ifigt*
fl'j'tflt
ahme
jiinldtc^ren
uw juvfitf
iP jutiidgete^rt
return
The Commonest Strong Vbebs in Gkoui-s Aooording
TO Vowel-Change
827. The Eol'.owing list coiitaina about 200 of the commonest
strong verbs, simple and compound, ©ein and merben and the
182
THE COMMONEST STRONG VERBS
modal auxiliaries are omitted from the list; also compounds whose
meanings can easily be made out from those of the simple verb and ■
the prefix. See also 626.
6SB. fangcn finn S'fonS'" catch, capbm
mtfiiitgtn fiag an angefaitgen be^m
(iiiplangcn empfinB etnp|anBtn receive
qangeit ( ^(^^ ge^aifltn hang, be suspended
829.
blaffn
bliee
efblafcn
blow
faUeii
pel
ift flefaHen
faa.drop
anffaUen
Pdouf
iji oufgefoHen
strike, attract attentU
diifallm
fid (In
tft eingelallen
occur, comt to mind
e«faU(n
gtPel
flefaUei.
please, aial
^alKn
l,idt
flfftaltm
hold,taxp
Qiiffioltm
^ttlt auf
auffleftalteit
slop, cheek, haU
^i*lt aiif
aufsf^oltm
nqjoam, slay
b(6aUm
bt^itlt
I)(l)aUfn
keep, retain
ffit^allen
(nt^ttlt
tntijaUm
contain
tr^alt*n
tr^irit
er^olttn
obtain, receive
(affcn
m
Sehff»
let, came, to
vnta^tn
BHliel
MTtaffCH
leave, deaeH
ralen
rid
B«ateii
advise, gueaH
fletattn(tii,aii
f) fl«td
If! fl«at(n
get into, come upon
otrcattn
uetrltt
Bcrtatfu
betray
f*(<tfcil
Wlitf
gefi^Uftii
Bleep
dniiDlafen
fiDlltf tin
ijl (iiiBefi^lofen
fall asleep
eso' fnlireii
f«ft»
Sefa^wn
drive, go, pass
*r(u^t
nfa^reu
experience, learn
fortfa&Mi.
tul,t fort
fortflffabrtn
conHmte, goon
gtabtn
grub
gteiaben
dig
btgraben
bcflntb
begtabeit
bury
kten
hib
gdabtn
load
laben
lub
geloben
imrite, nummon
tinlQbtn
lub ein
(Ingtlobtn
invite
fdjtagtn
(«l«8
gef^Usen
strike, beat, d^eat
crfi^lnflen
tm^n
frfi^laBeii
slay, kUl
ttouw
ttiia
itttastti
carry, 5«ar, wear
.Pa*(€n
wutfta
ift Hfiufldjlen
grotB. teax
m^tn
IBUfd,
gmaWen
«KMfc
631.
flfbfim
Bfbar
geboteu
bear, give birik to
6S2.
^uen
^i<b
atttantn
Kent, cut, slash
(aufw
lief
ijl getaiifeB
run
633.
^^en
ftaub
Btftanben
sttmd
OLfflfV"
floiib miT
ift niifgtftanbtn
Tis6,gaup
.«Ck>o^lc
THE COMMONEST STRONG VERBS
^
k(lfl)(n
6(fia.ib
bcjlanhen
exiat
6eft*l|en(au«,in)bfjianb
kftanben
eanaiat {of, in)
btm<« Cuf)
btpanb
be|ianb(n
mstei(»»)
befbljen
btjlanb
Uflanbtn
tutpfl^n
(ntjlanti
oitflanbfn
Btfieftfn
aeflnni
B«jlanben
eonfens, admit
MrfteDtii
becDaKk
VerRanbtB
understoMt
mibtrfiCDm
lolbetftati'bfH
The past Bnbj. BomeUn
les has il : flQnbt, i
Milfiaiibe etc.
884. Bc6ea
9«6
B«Brt"
j?i«e
i'^ btiibtn. fid)
begnb
befleboi
ftetote one's «(f
6(906
begebtti
take place, oeeur
mtitn, m
trgab
erBeben
give ime's self wp
umit'bta
umflflb'
umge'beu
mtn
f>t
8*f«^eii
we, Jooh
i am*n
io^an
msm^n
looft ai or upon
a»m'«
laft due
aueflcfeftm
loot, appeor
umft^tn, f^
faUm
umaefe^n
loofc roimd or abort
tmt%tn
fl«f<))«*
ill Be^e^en
ftappen, taftepfcicB
tntt*
Itat
jfi Bctftltn
step, ireod
Wen
lae
Btteftti
raid
effe»
06
Beaeffcn
eal, dine
(M(f(n
frae
effreffen
tfewour, eae
mtfftu
mag
aemeffen
«»9eff«ii
Bergnl
«»fl(fftii
/orffd
ess. fetft^lCH
6tfa1)I
6efp1,fe«
J empfdtai
emflfoljl
fnipfo^Itn
recotnmetui
: C • (i.6rm
(in^l
fltpoliltn
steal
'^ trci^CR
■ l.»4
BtfctPifttti
ftrtafc
>r unt«6H'd,(n
unleibrai^'
unttTbio'i^m
inferrupl
° mbrfdjeu
wrbrat^
utcbrDt^tn
comintf u crime
f)irtd)»
fprndj
flef^.«eii
speak
Mrfpr((^«n
Ddlprai^
uettptof^tii
promiee
jlai^tn
fladi
Bfllo(^m
prick, «ting
erff^terfM
eilc^ral
t|l et!«ro(t(n
beeome frightened
•telMCN
•ra«»
genomMtn
lake
anne^mtii
nafiin an
aeeept, aamime
c.ufn.l,mfn
iial)ni auf
take up, receive
Deme^mtn
ucima^m
perceive, hear
fleltm
eatt
aeaolKn
be vorth, be valid
Ijelfeti
*■«
BtltPlfen
help
Irtfftn
trof
flttrpfftH
hit. strike, meet
antoffm
tiaf (in
ijl einflftrofftn
dome to pass, arrive
b«fl.n
im
gebotgen
cover, shelter, conceal
wrbtrBtn
iKrbarg
uttbotacii
hm,etm(xal
THE COMMONEST STRONG VERBS
trinttben
(tmatb
ttioorbtn
acquire
ftet6e«
port
Ift Btflorteii
die
Dtrbdrben
uerbatb
ifl Bftbotbtn
be HpoUed. ruined
tMcfen
»ntf
fltttorfw
thr(ni>,caat
The past subj. of ^Ifcn, fltrben, ntrbttbeii, mcrftn is formed with fl instead ol
d : ^iilfe, ftitrbt, uetbiiirbe, milTfe ; that of btft^Itn, etnpfe^hn, qetttn, with B in-
Blead of ii ; befS^lt, enipfol)ft, Qiitt.
688. st^en
«iitfl
i|t BtBOBfl*"
go, walk
obfle^fn
fllnfi ab
ift abB*Baiiflm
go off, start, leam
angffifn
fline on
begin, (concern)
oufatfttn
Bins auf
iji auffl«eanBen
rfae, inoun*; open
Xoiqtkett
Btitg 108
go off, start, begin
Mtatiin
netfliig
ip oetgaaflen
po8S away, elapse
iUflt^n
fllna J"
come aixnd, come to pass
eiT. Itdjten
|o*t
9«fD(^ttn
fght, struggle
iKbtii
IJDb
B*l|oben
lift
auf^fbtn
^Db auf
aufflf^Dbm
lift up, preserve, keep
frl,ebfn
etl,ob
et^obm
lift up, raise, etevaie
«l,(b(n, p*
ttiioi
cr^obtn
rise, reeoU
638. greifen
flriff
fieBrtfffH
grasp, readi afler
anstdftn
fldfl an
angfadffeit
attack
btgrfiftn
bfariff
btaiiffm
trfltttfen
ergtlff
wgrlfftn
seixe upon, lay hold of
Icihcn
(Ut
gelitten
suffer
(cfindbm
ftftnitl
gc{(^n)tKn
cut
celteH
titt
ifl geritttn
ride, (tereeftacft)
fil)reitm
fdltiit
Ifi 0«f<^till«n
stride, step
lireiKn
jltiit
flcfttltKlt
alHve. quarrel, fight
mdc^m
ft^lic^
ifl flefdilic^en
llrett^in
m<ii
fleftridien
stroke
nwi(^«n
nidi
Ifl fletol^fii
yield, give leay
bEifetn
big
gebiffeii
bile
ttigtn
nS
B'viffffl
tear, rend, puZI
tnlreigeii
mltlg
tnttlfteti
snatch away, deprive
jemi6*n
jertte
jerrilfen
teoftopieoea
688. m^«
i)»e
Ht^aem
be ojUed.be named
ifttfitn
i,i«e
Btljetfien
eaU,name
^de«i
m
BtDfifitu
hid, command
640. tttibtu
bliek
tfl stilhUn
remain, stay
■: f*etb(n
(«i*l.
ifl amitbta
paH, depart
f<t)eibea
Mirt
B(l*l(beu
separate
«ntf(fi«tben
, entfdjieb
(nlfdjUhm
decide
utUtrttSet'boi
unttrfi^ieb'
untevf^le'ben
dielif>gaiah,diaoriminate
D.n.iized by Google
THE COMM0NE8T STRONG VERBS
f^tiacK
fdiitn
flefdjiencK
«eem, appeor
Wmtn
i<t)i(n
eri^ieufn
aftine, pteom
trf(i)(tnen
(rldjien
ip etl^Unen
appmr
Mteittn
f*T«b
flefdttiebex
lorifc
bctdirtibcn
bcldirteb
b(f(^tirten
&8«-»e
fi4»i»
Wrie
flefdtrlten
cry out, acream
(i^redgfn
f(Dw>ifB
gefcfiraifgm
besOenl
ftdgen
(iiee
ifl gefHegeii
rise, mount
btjttigcn
bfftieg
befticgen
mount, climb
ttdkta
ttleb
gctritbtn
drive, impei
Weiitn
iDitB
fl(»ifi(n
sftow, point out
SfiDtiten
bewieS
bctutdni
prove
(TUKlfm
emtee
ttwielen
afttWB, prove
Brtj(it)(n
oerjKI,
otqle^n
pardon, tjicaee
641. Wtten
but
sebeteu
beg, request
("ft"
("6
gefeffet.
ail, iMl. sot)
iep^w
6tfa6
SefeffeB
poaaeas
6«. bfflinnen
beeann
btBonnen
geiDinnen
aeitmnn
vnn,gain
■ f.nn*n
fann
flefonnen
ponder, think
t'' btfinntn, r»^
balann
befonnen
reflect, recoUed,
Q fpinntn
ipnnn
Briponnen
«pi™
^ (d,mimmm
IdjTOflmm
swim
The past subj. is u
sually formed with o instead oi
a : beflbiine, geivbniit etc.
643. binbtn
banb
gebunbm
bind, tie
uecbinben
uecbanb
uetbunben
unite, connect
, , |i"fc"
faiib
gcfnnbeit
find
' befinbtn, p<^
bcfanb
b(Funb«n
be,beaBtoheaUk,feel
V tmpfinben
ftnpfanb
feel
f^iviiiben
Wroanb
ifl eeli^lDunbtii
vanish, dudjidle
uerfi^rolnbm
uerft^manb
i|t tier|<4niuiibeu
vanish, disappear..
bcingtii
btang
i|) gebrungen
press into, penetroie
gtlingen
e'loifl
ti) gdungin
succeed
tltnfltn
Raiifl
fltdungeu
ring, sowid
tingtn
rana
Beiungen
wrestk, druggie
[i^roinatn
fc^Wnng
airing, brandish
fii<9«
f«»fl
aefttHBM
eing
mnm
ffWHg
ift gefpninBEii
leap, jump, spring
jmtnaen
jtuanB
gejiBungcii
force, compel
finbn
fnnf
gefunFen
Bink
triHlen
twiiil
getrnnlcn
drink
644. (icgcn
las
fleleflen
lie (_lay. lain), be site-
atoJ
D,„t,zsd by Google
THE COMMONEST STEONG VERBS
645.
bitten
bot
flebohu
bid, offer
anbUtcn
bDtau
angeboten
offer
'<%
hatbitttn
bDt bar
offer, present
H (bitten
fl.bol
gtbolen
"o
Detbteten
verbot
Derbotin
forbid
fiitm
flofl
ift gtltoB"
JlS Ulev>.floym)
flie^tn
ftol,
ifi fleflo^en
jU6(Jed,JUd)
aie|«
JOfl
9ea»«e»
draxD, pnll
jie^tii
m
Ifi fl^aofltn
march, go, mote
anjle^n
jogan
angfjDflen
put on, dreas
anjie^en
JOB ail
angfjoaeu
attrad
ausjte^en
jofl an8
auSflejogeit
put off, undress
crjlt^
"JOB
erjogen
bring up, educate
uotji*l|cn
jofl Dor
»ovBe}OB(n
prefer
ttitd)tn
trod,
If! fletroi^en
creep, oravil
uerlicreit
Mulpr
OMloten
lose
fliefitn
floe
ip a'flolf'n
Jlo«,
ettfitn
flDfi
fl'Boff"'
pour
Beniefeen
Btnog
gmofjen
enjoy
fdfitfiei,
ft^ofi
B<fcI)o(Ten
shoot
Wi««"
fd)f»6
uefdjloffen
ehut,eU>»e
wmt*
f1fl»6
uefdjtofftii
oonc/ude, infer
bej^liteen
b'f^ioe
bed^toffen
determine, resolve
taWm'i'«.
fid) entfdjlog
entti^loflen
Derbciegtn
Werbiog
Derbtoffen
vex, grieve
640.
iDMmeti
loin
ift gcIPKDttn
come
antommtn
lam an
ill anflttommm
arrive
UUmmn
Mam
belOMMCH
get, come by, receive
umlomnKn
lam urn
perish, die
BotfommHt
fam vox
appear, occur
647.
Hofien
pieS
flEfioe«i
puah.tlmtst
648.
rtlBl^Hl
trtotd)
id erio(d,en
fdjniBmi
IdimDt, Midi
ir gett^moren
voic,awear
In tie paat Ind.
(*U)ot is mor
a common than '
fc^lDUt; in the past subj.
((^reUrt
ie more common thiui It^mitte.
649.
tfinit
t«at
ittl^n
do
660.
mfeu
rirf
gentftn
caU
661.
betttta*"
btttog
bttroBm
deceive, cheat '
■ lagen
lofl
fltloflfn
lie (lied, lied), speak
The Commohest Prepositions
3.n.iized by Google'
THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS 137
^atbcn on account of, for the sake tto^ in spite of, notwithstanding
of urn . . . Wiflen for the sake of
jenfeitS on the other side of, be- wS^ftenb duHng
yond h)egen on account of, because of
ftall, anfiatt instead of (for a fuller list see 450)
Examples : jenfeitS beS 31uf(e« beyond the river ; ftatt nteineS
SnibetS instead of my brother, see also 548; tro^ beS fc^U<^ten 5BJet=
terS (also bem f^Uc^ten ^Better) in spite of the bad weather ; um beS
§tmine[S toiUcn for heaven's sake; h)a(reenb beS JtriegeS during the
war ; toegetl beS JFttgmS (w occowwi of the, rain; loegen often follows
its case : ber ^inbei toegen on account of the children ; contractions :
beStocgen on that account, for that reason ; toeSluegen on account of
which, what for.
648, §al&en, Wegen, Witttn are appended to cei-tain pronominal
forms derived from the genitive stems of the personal pronouns;
meinet(?fllben, meinetloegen, um meinetWiKen on my account or behalf,
for my sake; beinet^lben, beinetoegen, um beinetWtKen on your account
or behalf , for your sake etc, ; unfert^alben, unfertWegen, um unfertlDiDen
on our account or behalf, for our sake etc. ^einet^fllben, meinettregen,
(um) meinettpiKen, in colloquial language, frequently mean for aught
I eare, as far as I am concerned, I don't care.
004. Dative. The commonest prepositions governing the dative,
and their commonest meanings, both arranged in the order of fi'e-
quency (for full list see 461) :
M6. 3Rit with ; sometimes on ; mit 33otf a^ on purpose.
666. SBon, (a) of: einw bun eu(^ one of you; eine fitlte Bon ©olb
a chain of gold. — (b) from, off: eg fiel bom Sift^e it fell off the
table ; bom erft*n Slugcnblid an Jrom the first moment (on), from the
very first ; Bon ^ugenb auf from youth up ; Bom ^utm ^erab down
from the tower ; et lam bom 3)otf e ijtx he was coming along from the
village ; Bon neuent anew, again, de novo. — (c) by, chiefly with the
passive: «S tmirbe bon einem Hnaben gebradit it was brought by a boy;
Don (SotteS ®nab«n by the grace of God ; id^ lennc fie bon Slnfeljn I know
her by sight. — (d) with : bte ffiege Wimmelten bon ijjilgern the roads
swarmed with pilgrims; bcr Sffialb ertbnte bom ©efang ber SJiiget the
woods resounded with the song! of birds ; bon §ftjen gem with all
on^s heart.
667. 3"* {^) '"' *™*'' ■' i^"^ fiiit^e, or jur ©diule, getien go to church
or to school; ju meinem Evftaunen to my astonishment; ber ©c^nee
tmirbe Ju (470) SBaflet the anmo turned into water. — (b) for, as, for
the puipoae of, in order to : ber Saum ift gut ju einem ^afl the tree
will do for a mast ; jur Selo^nung Qab er i^m eine Wait as a reward
he gave him a mark ; auS Siebe JU feinen @Itetn out of love for his
parents ; jum legten aJtale for the last time. — (c) at, in : ju §aufe
1?4
ftttbcn
wrfterbm
W*rf«t
The past mibj. of !),■
&:m\
f, Mtb(, Dctbiii
stead of d ; btfb^le, m
ese.
«e«tH
abgfDw
anflclieii
aufflfltcn
Io8g(6«i
ucrgcfjea
auefl)en
687.
f.<Sten
Ijebeit
nufljeben
(tljeben
et^e&fn, fitfl
638.
greifen
anaretfen
btflrelfm
cTBTcifen
Ictbca
li^ndbfii
tftten
\i,ttim
fttelKn
Wtiiftn
■()Ki(%En
mcii^en
btigen
rclfitn
(ntreigeu
jerrtigen
686.
ijeieet.
liafifli
^ttSen
6M.
tltibcH
-i
ld)dben
fdieiUn
tntli^etben
unterti^d'bcn
3.n.iized by Google
THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS
i^o
flfj^ i/ f'eardl b« ©eile legen lay aside. — (d) to: „je§t," bod^te er bei
Ibl^tk "^'"*'' '"^ obreifen" 'now,' Ae tlvought to himadf,' I can start'; ^
s£ae- ^*' '^*'"' '°''* '*^ ■flffeS* ^"^^ Istwk to what I said. — (e) con-
fgi^ ^^'^fft in cojuequence of, notwithstanding, in spite of, with ; 6ei
>fe^ ^"^ ef ifet^e foKte er me^r lutjfen considering, or wt(A, ftw diligence,
^g ■ °'^^^ to hmw more ; bei fetner ©(^lau^eit himbe et balb rrii^, obet
n.ess ^^*"*^'" ©tit's ft>t et "il^t gludltl^ tw (wweg-wewce of his shrewd-
I ' ^^ ^con. grew rich, but notwithstanding, or with, all his money
*"«« no£ hcLppy ; btl aHebeilt notwithstanding all that.
-"ote. Observe that, although bei in aome of the examples above
meaBs ^^ j^^ the sense of nearness or proximity, ihe'Engliaii by with
the pasBi-«^e> is not bei, but wn, as in 656 c.
■ ^]k* ®*** »i^e, for: feit bem Kri«fle since the war; i^ ^abe iljn
(■{{t ttt^t ^d-^eti ni(bt flefefeen /Aore nti( seen Aim/or a weeA; {«it tuc^
***■***• fee*r outside of, out of, without, beside, besides, except, but :
Civ^" ®*ro.]^-c out of danger; au|er (= aufeer^olb) b«r ©tabt outside
of '***''*«'»^ J,- au|er Blugen ow* of sight ; e« War niemanb ba Qufeer mit
^^e« ica^ "^^oiiody there but me ; tx Wax auftet jt^ Ae was beside kinv-
5^^', ?"&**"*>«« besides that, apart from that; ou|etbein no<^ ettoOS?
6fl*> iltel&ft together with .■ bie SItetn nebft ben Kinbem theparenta
fogetl^ ^^^^ the children.
gfl*. A-ccixisative. The commoDest prepositions governing the
^ci*** i^^» a-nd their commonest meanings, both arranged in the
^rde' "* **'^<iuency (for full list see 462) :
e^- ^'*'- (a) Before an infinitive : in order to, see 648 ; — (b)
fiT^j-igJ^ ^<*-ke of, concerning, aiout, on account of, in behalf of : er
^(jt """'^T-ot he asked for the bread; e« t^vX mt leib um beinen
eQ-c^^^ '^'*^t' _aorry for your brother; jie Written p^ um bo* @elb they
^e gwct^^ei-i^^ about the money; je^t ift'^ um bid^ 0ef(^e(»cn now you
af^ -hZiir ' *^ ^anbeU ft(^ um unfete ^ei^eit {the question is about
^jjvT tw^^iO o^r liberty is at stake. For um . . . Witten, see 663. —
y0') V'^V' ' ^Tound, aiout, round about: ringS um "oak ©(^(ofi all
\^t£n» *^® ^^a^tle. Often with ^erum : um ben Saum ^etum round
^TlfS^^'Li "****" "' * quarter past six ; um biefe 3eit about this time.
T^ (^e) ^1'i^lenoting degree of difference, iisually with a comparative :
lift V** Bu^ [dnger longer by six feet ; um fo biel me^ iy so much
0O6. Pr. fa-j y^. ^(,p bu'S fiir mi<^ ge%n? did you do it for
e ? ".^'^r^ «n« Dff^iete far \\i>, he had all the officers on his side
X *'" ^"■'r""^ i Wit nabmen ^artri fflt bie atuSlflnber we took the part
o oi- ^^ ^ith, the fiyreigners ; t<^ ^alte iljn fat e^rlit^ {I take him
138 THE COMMONEST I'RBPOSITIONS
at home; px ©ttaputfi at, or in,S.; id) fo^ )um ^enftet ^inauS /
looked out of the window (i.e. out at, or out by way of, the window);
Jtt ®nbe fein be at an end, be over; jur ©rite oMe ; mit jur ©rile at
my side ; rinem ju gilfien at ont^s feet, below ; jut beftimmten Stunbe at
the appointed hour. — (d) certain idiomatic uses not to be translated
literally : fie marten itjn jum (494) Sprflfibenten they made him
president ; tx pel mit jUt Saft he heeame a burden to me ; ba« SBoH
griff JU ben 5Baffen the people took up arms. — (e) on : ju ^ufe on
foot ; JU ^fetb ore horseback ; bie §aare panben mtr ju Serge my hair
stood on end. — (f) towards, in the direction of, generally after its
case : (ie ritten bem SfBalbe ju they rode towards the forest. So also
adverbially after prepositional phrases : fie ritten nai} bent Sialbe ju,
S68. 9Iai^. (a) to, toward and other equivalents denoting direc-
tion in space or time : tt^ trife naU) Iieutfc^Ianb / am going to Ger-
many ; bag Sc^ff fatjrt nac^ Stmerila the vessel sails for America ;
no(^ oUen Seiten in all directions ,- often before adverbs : nad^ oben
upward, nati^ unten downward. — (b) after, for, at, with words of
inquiring, asking, searching, striving, aiming: nad^ 20 ^oljren afier
SO years; jie fragten na.^ ^Ifnen they inquired for you; na^ SKit^m
begietig eager for ghry ; SEeH f c^o^ na(^ bent St^jf el Tell shot at the
apple ; bet §unb fi$naj)))te na(^ mtr the dog snapped at me. — (c)
according to, judging from or by, sometimes following its case r eS
geft^ol! oHeS nat^ feineiu SBunft^ everything was done according to his
wish ; nat^ frinem StuSfetien, or feinem 3luSfe^en naU), ift er ftarl
judging by his appearance, he is strong ; ber Saitge nat^ lengthwise.
M9. StfcS. (a) out of, from: ii} tarn gerabc au3 bem §aufe J was
jttst coming out of the house; au^ Qi^tx\uilt from jealousy. ~ (h) of:
bie fjeber tft auS ®olb gemadfit the pen is made of gold. — (c) for .- axii
h)elc|em ©runbe? /tw what reason? — (d) with.- bet 33ogel fong au8
aQen Sriiften the bird sang with all his might.
860. Sei. (a) at, during, in, amidst, at the same time with, along
with : beim SaHflJtel at, during, the ball game ; er tft bei ©ett^butfl
gef afleii he fell at G. ; bei f c^tec^tem 5Better in bad weather ; bei
meinet 3rit iaax er noi^ ba at, or during, my time, or in my day, he
was still there; ber %lit trat bei gutem junior the old m^n was in
good humor; be« SBnigS Sinjug fanb bei ber gro^ten 3tu^e ftatt the
king's entrance took place amidst the greatest quiet; bei S^oge by day,
during tlie day; bri 3ltDnbenf^etn by moonlight; bei biefen SJorten
ftanb et auf with these words, or so saying, he rose. ~ (b) at the
house of, with, among : i^ too^m bei nwtnem SSruber / live with my
brother ; bei ben @ngl&nbetn ift baS Wo^I Wobe that may be tlte fashion
among the English ; bei eui^ ^ungen, fagte et, mu^ man fireng fein
with you boys, he said, one must be strict. — (c) near, close by, by, at
the side of, beside : fte fa^ bei ber @rdfin she sat beside the countess ;
er na^m mic^ bei ber §anb he took me by the hand ; bei nteinem Sart !
THE COMMONEST PRBP08ITIONS 139
bymijbeardi bei ©eile Ugen layaside. — (d) to; „i(^t," bo(^te et bei
ji^, „fann xi) abreifen" ' now,' he thought to himself, ' I can start '; id}
Uabe bet bent, ioaS \(Sf -gefagt Ijabe I stick to what I said. — (e) con-
sideHnff, in consequence of, notwithstanding, in spite of, with ; bei
feinem jjleifie fottte « me^r tmjfen considering, or with, his diligence,
he ought to know more; bri feintr 6c^lau^<tt Icurbe ev batb reic^, oibu
bei all feinem @e(be h)at er ni(^t glMlit^ m consequence of his shrewd-
ness, he soon grew rich, but notwithstanding, or with, all his vnoney
he was not happy ; bei aHebem notwithstanding all that.
Note. Observe that, althougli bei in some of the eiamplea above
means by in the sense of nearness or proximity, the English by with
the passive is not bei, but mow, as in 656 c.
661. ®«U since, for: feil bent Sriege siiux the war; \i) \jobt iljn
feit aifX %<x%m ni(^t gefe^en / have not seen him for a week ; [eil Iur=
jem recently.
663. Kn^t outside of, out of, without, beside, besides, except, but :
aufeer ©efa^r »m( of danger; aufeet {= au^er^alb) ber Stabt outside
of the town; aufeer Slugen out of sight; eS Ittat niemanb ba au^er ntir
there was nobody there but me ; er Wat au%tx ft(^ he was beside him-
self ; augetbent besides that, apart from that; au^erbem nod^ etWaS?
anything besides (^else) ?
668. ^ibft together with: bie (Sltent nebft ben fiinbem the parents
together with the children.
664. Accusative. The commonest prepositions governing the
accusative, and their commonest meanings, both arranged in the
order of frequency (for full list see 452) :
668. Mm. (a) Before an infinitive : in order to, ae^ 6A& ; — (b)
for, for the sake of, concerning, about, on account of, in behalf of ; er
bat um« ©rot he asked for the bread; eS tfful mir (eib um beinen
©ruber I am sorry for your brothei-; fie ftritten fi(^ um baS ®elb they
were quarreling about the money ; je|t ift'S um bi^ gefl^e^en now you
are done for ; eS ^anb«(t flc() um Ultfete J^tei^ett {the question is about
our liberty) our liberty is at stake. For um . . . MtKen, see 653. —
(c) round, around, about, round about: riltflS um baS ©^toft all
round the castle. Often with ^erum : um ben Saum ^erum round
about the (ree. — (d) at or about (« certain time) i um fecfjS U^t
fiin^e^n 3Sinuten at a quarter past six ; um biefe 3eit about this time.
— (e) by, denoting degree of difference, usually with a comparative :
um fet^g 3^U^ longer longer by six feet ; um fo biel me^ by so much
the more.
666. ^iir. (a) for: (jaft bu'S fiir mi^ get^an? did you do it for
me? er ^atte alle Dfftjiere fUr ftt^ ^^ ^^^ "^^ '^^ officers on his side
or in his favor; toir na^men ^attei ftir bie StuSliinber we took the part
of, or sided with, the foreigners ; i<^ ^alte i^ filr e^rlii$ {I take him
140 THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS
for an honest man) I regard him o« honest. — (b) by: jie ftanb gailj
aHetn fiir fic^ she stood all by herself; fiir f"? (a stage direction)
aside ; ©4"'* ^^ ©d&ntt step by atep.
667. ^ri^. (a) through : buri^S SBafler through the water. — (b)
by, by means of: tx bttoni ti ^uxij bie I^Qt he proved it by his action ;
We SlatlCT tDurben burt^ eine 9iabel jufantmengetialten the leaves were
held together by means of a pin.
6M. Qtegeit. (a) agaiTist, contrary to: fie jogen gegen ben ^einb
they marched against the enemy ; tx ^anbelte gegen ben Sefe^I b*«
©ennalii he acted contrary to the generaPs order. — (b) towards, in
the direction of, to: ^(iflic^ gegen g^rembe polite towards strangers;
gegen (or gen) ©iiben towards the south. — Notice also : id^ ^a6e nid^te
bagegen / have no objection {to it) ; ein SRann gegen Btetjig a man
getting on towards forty ; WaS pnb taufenb 3;^a(ei gegen ein 5Renfc^en=
leben ! what's a thousand dollars compared with a human life /
ees. C^ne wUAout: oi^ne mic^ without me; see also 548 ; tx lam,
D^ne bafe er mir gef^rieben ^atte he eame without having written to me
(540).
870. Sis is soinetimea a preposition governing its case directly :
Don 9ieu=Dott bi« Sffiaf^ington from N. ¥. to W., big Diet ViXfX until
four o'clock ; but more frequently an adverb modifying a preposi-
tional phrase : bis an bie Sirc^e up to, or «* far as, the church, or a
conjunction meaning till, until : bleib ^ier, biS et tommt stay here till
671. Dative or Accusative. Broadly speaking, the prepositions
an, auf, ^inUx, in, neben, Ubet, unlet, bot and jwifc^en govern the dative
in answer to the questions where? and when? i.e. with verbs de-
noting either rest or else motion within certain limits, e.g. motion
in a circle or motion to and fro. They govern tiie accusative in
answer to the questions whither? and how long? i.e. with verbs
denoting motion toward an object or toward a limit in genetaJ,
They are here given in the order of their frequency. Under each
preposition, the dative is treated before the accusative, and under
each case the different meanings are also arranged according to
frequency.
673. 3ii, much oftener with the dative than with the accusative.
Dative : in, at, within: er Wo^nt in btefem §aufe he lives in this
house ; jie gefjt im ^albe fpajieten she is taking a walk in, or within,
the woods ; im ^a^re 1896 in the year 1895 ; et (am tn aBet gru^e he
came at daybreak or very early ; in einem 3))onQt toirb alleS fettig fein
in, or within, a month all will be ready.
673. AccusATrvE : into, to : er ging in baS §auS (^inein) he went
into the house / fie ge^t in ben SBalb she is going into the woods ;
THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS 141
6i« in ben S^ob ««'" death ; in bte @(^ule, or in bie flitt^e, ge^ien pc
to school or fo church.
674. 9[uf, somewhat oftener with t]ie accuaative than with the
dative. Dative, (a) on, upon, on top of (676) : bag ®«Ib tiegt auf
b«m 3^if<^* the money lies on the tahle ; et ftgtlte Quf bem See um^er
or ^in unb f)cv he was sailing around, or to and fro, on the lake ; 'mt
finb fc^on auf bem SBege we are already on the way; auf bet IRautX
Yoilifi ©rflS oM top of the wall grass was growing. — (b) at, in :
toa% ift auf bem ©(^IcRe bDtgefaCen ? what happened at, or t», the
castle? auf bem JFtat^aufe toar all«3 ruffig at the town-hall all was
quiet ; auf bet Uniberfitat (jat «t nidjtS gelenit at the university he did
not learn anything; je^t Wo^nt fie auf bem Sanbe she is now living in
the country; aufberHai^el in the pulpit; auf bem ©ijifel feinet UKa^t
at the height of his power ; et folflte mtr auf bem 9^^e he followed
at my heels (ju (Ju^ ^ on foot, 657 e).
676. Accusative, (a) on, up, upon, on top of: lege baS ®elb auf
ben 3^if(^ ^*y ^A* money on the table; tmr fegelten auf ben ©ee IjinauS
we sailed out upon the lake; h)tr ma(^ten unS fd^neD Quf ben SIBeg (we
yo( ourselves quickly upon the way, i.e.') we set out quickly ; tx legte
bag eine Bud& auf baS anbere he laid the one hook on top of the other.
— (b) to, toward, at, in the direction of, up to : (ie jeigle auf ben
2:urm »he pointed at the tower ; oHeS beutet auf ijrieben everything
points toward peace ; ad^tc auf baS, lKa4 i^ fage mind tvhat I say ;
man mat^te mi^ auf baS SSoot aufmeiffam they called my attention to
the boat ; er berief ji(^ auf mi(^ he appealed (or r^erred) to me ; \ij
Irinte auf 3^k ©efunb^eit / dHnk to your health ; fte {amen auf mi)
JU they eanhe toward me; %t)i jielte auf ben 3Ipf«l T. took aim at the
apple; er traf i^n Quf ^unbert Sc^ritte he hit it at a hundred paces.
— (c) at, in consequence of, in response to, at the risk of: auf meine
Sitte atmyrequ^t; ouf floften bet Siabt at the expense of the town ;
auf einen ©i^Iag at one blow or stroke; auf ben erften Slid at first
sight, at mice; auf Seben unb ©terben at the risk of one's life. — (d)
in: auf biefe SSeife (but in biefer 23etfe) in this way, manner or fash-
ion ; auf3 fi^Bnfte or 6efle in the finest, or beat, manner (264), — (e)
for : auf fct^S !KDnate for six months {to come) ; geben ®ie mit ein
Sett auf bie 9Ia^t give me a bed fiyr the night; auf bie 3!)auer in the
long run ; auf Se6enS(ang for life. — (f) auf einmal all at once, sud-
denly. — (g) into, to : bann ma fte aufS 2anb (IfinauS) then she moved
(out) into the country; lomm aufS MatifauS come to the toton-hall ;
auf bie SBelt tommen to come into the world, be bom. — (h) for, to,
toward, with verbs of expecting, hoping etc. : luarte auf mi^ wait for
me; n ^offt auf ^efotbetung he hopes for promotion ; fie tiiften fi^ ouf
bie ©^lac^t they are preparing for Hule ; fie freut fi(^ auf baS (Jeft
she is looking forward to the festival. — Notice also : aHe tamen, biS
auf meinen ©tuber all came, except my brother ; f ein §a& auf bie i^an=
142 THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS
jofen k-U hatred of the French; tz tft neibifi^, or joimig, Quf mii$ he ts
jealous of, or angry with, me ; auf S neue antw, de novo.
676. %n, much ofteser with the dative than with the accusative.
Dative, (a) at, near, close by, along : tx ji^t am %\^d} he is sitting
at the table ; bi« SSflume am 2Bege the trees along the road ; fie fjielt
fi(^ an i^*m Srubet fe(i she heW. on to her broths- — (b) on, upon,
but wot on top of, which is expressed by auf, 674 : ba3 S5ui$ lag an
ber @rbe the book lay on the ground or floor ; baS ©ilb ^ngt an bet
^anb the picture is hanging on the wall ; also of time r an jenem
%a%t on that day ; am je^t«n 3Bii« on the tenth of March (see d
below). — (c) am + auperl., see 260. — (d) in, often with derived
and figiitative meanings ; an feineS Sntberi ©tabt in his brother's
place; bie ©onne (tanb Ijo^ am $immel the sun stood high in the
heavens; mein 3JD(t tiDctnete luieber an ber Sonne my coat got dry
again in the sun ; am ^IRorgen in the morning ; am Slbenb in the
evening ; am lage in, or during, the day, by day ; \i} Betline tiiel an
i^ / lose a great deal in (losing) him ; ^ift 3^eil an bem ©tege tft
grofe your share in the victory is great ; am @nbe in the end, ^finally,
after all. — (e) in respect to, with regard to, in, of, sometimes not
rendered literally : fie ftetjt i^tet Sc^ioe^er an ©d^Bn^eit na^ she is
inferior to her sister in beauty ; rei<^ an ©iegen HcA in victories ;
Wai fie an ®elb ober an Sanb befafjtn, gaben fte ber Sir^e whatever
they had of money or land they gave to the church; quS Mangel an
®eU) for lack of money. — (f) by : tc^ erfannte @ie an S^tet ©timme /
recognized you by your voice ; man fte^t eS an feinen Slugen, baft et
miibe iji one can tell by hia eyes that he is tired. — Notice also : am
Sefien fein to be living; am J^eber, an ber S^olera fterbcn to die of a
feeer, of the cholera ; eS liegt an bit felfcft, ba^ bu nit^t gliitfli^ bift it
■ M your own fault that you are not happy ; t% iff nic()tS an i^m (there
is nothing to him) he is a worthless fellow ; ie|t jft bie Mei^e an mit
now it is my turti.
677. Accusative, (a) to: et tarn an eine 3)Hi^Ie he came to a
mill ; fie fc^eb an i^te ©(^tcefter she wrote to her sister. — (b) of:
li^ bente an bii^ / am thinking of you. — (c) at : et fejte fi^ on ben
%\\^ he seated himself at tJte table. — (d) on, upon (but not on top
of, which is expressed by auf, WIS), against: bie ffieUen toarfen baS
©(^iff ani Sanb the waves cast the ship upon the shore or ashore; ii)
UffnU mid) an ben Saum / leaned against the tre^. — Notice also : ic^
glaube an einen @ott I believe in a God; bie ©olbaten fiiiloffen ftd^ an
iljre Bametabcn an the soldiers joined their comrades.
678. Sot, much ofteper with the dative than with the accusative.
Dative, (a) before, in front of, in the presence of, at, near: uor
bem §aufe in front of the house; bag fagte et Dot 5t^nen? did he say
that in your presence? et ftel Uot 9li(^monb he fell at the siege of M. ;
box bem 3^Dte outside of the city gate. — (b) ago, before ,- er jp Dor
THE COMMONEST PREPOSITIONS 148
3iQ^r«n geftDtfeen he died years atjo ; er tear Bor 5S«&i^*n fleftorben he
had died years before (that time) ; Dor 3^''*'* " ^^3 time ago or
before; Dor ber 3ett {before the proper time) prematurely ; Dor alterS
of old, of yore. — (c) for or with, i.e. on account of: \\t fonnle Bor
^«lbe n\i)i f^Jted^en she could not speak for joy ; tot Bet ^om ral
wUh anger ; Bor §unfler ftct&en to starve. — (d) from, against: ©ott
betoa^re un3 toot unferen Scinben God protect tis from our enemies; \^
Watnte ilin bor bem 3Kenf^en I warned him against the fellow. — (e)
of: bie 3:urc^t Bor bem S^obe the fear of death; fie toat fcange Bor bem
§unbe she was afraid of the dog. — (f) aiove, in preference to, before :
Bor olllen Tlingen or Bot aHem above all things, before everything else.
6T8. AccuaATivE, before, in front of, opposite: fteCte ben %\\ii Bot
baS 2f*"ft''^ place the table before the window ; et ttat Bot ben Siid^et;
f4>tan{ he stuped before, or ivp to, the bookcase.
680. nbct, much, oftener with, the accusative than with the
dative. Dative, over, above, beyond : eine fi^ioarje 3Bo[te ftanb uber
bem 93erge a black cloud hung over the mountain ; ein Slblet Iteifte
iibet bem SBafJer an eagle was circling over the water ; fetn uber bet
©ee lebte eine SBnigin far beyond the sea there lived a queen.
esi. Accusative, (a) over, across, beyond: et fu^t ttbet ba§ 3Heer
he went across the sea ; bet ®arten ge^t biS abet ben ^lu^ ^inauS the
garden extends beyond the Hver ; iibetS ^a^t a year from note or from
then ; et ift tibet ein '^aift alt he is more than a year old; iibet bie
Wa^en (beyond measure) exceedingly, extremely. — (b) about, con-
cerning, on, upon, over, at : man flptat^ iibet bag ^ettei they talked
about the weather ; bet ©tteit ttbet bad ®elb the dispute concerning the
money ; bie ^eube iibet bag Silb the joy over thepicture; etetftaunte
iibet i^ten ^leife he was astonished at her diligence. — (c) witli many
words denoting authority or control : Wet foH iibet biefeS Soit befei)=
len? who shall command this people? @ebietet iibet Sanb unb See
lord of land and sea ; ®ranl Betfilgte iibet ein §eet bon 100,000 KKann
G. had at his disposal an army of 100,000 men.
eBB. Uuter, much oftener with the dative than with the accusa-
tive. Dative, (a) under, below, beneath : fte lagen unlet bem
Saume th^y were lying under the tree; untet fetnet SUtttbe beneath
his dignity. — (b) among, amid, amidst, between, along with, with :
untet anbent 35ingen or untet anbetm ajnonj/ other things ; untet bem
filange ber (Sloden amid the ringing of bells ; unlet unS between our-
selves, between us, among us; untet Biet Stugen between ourselves,
privately; untet bem Seiftanbe ber @ngianber with the help of the
English. — Notice also : untet biefet SSebiugung on this condition ;
unlet feinet SJegietung in, or during, his reign; toaS Betfte^en ©ie
untet einem 3^etel5^on? what do you mean by a telephone?
663. Accusative; (a) under: aU baS Soot untet bie Srude lam
144 COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
when the boat came vnder the bridge. — (b) er ge(tt felteil unttr giteinbe
he seldom, goes avtong strangers.
6S4. ^inler, much oftener with the dative than with the accusa-
tive. Dative, behind, beyond : b«r ©torf ftanb Winter ber I^iit the
cane stood behind the door; bie Slabt Uegt fjinter bem ©ebirge the
town lies beyond the Toountains ,■ tx lam ^inttv bem 33uf^e ^eittoi he
came forth from behind the bush; Wir ritten ^inlet l^nn ^l« u>e rode
along behind him.
Accusative : behind: « fteflte ben ©tod ^inlet bie %i)iix he put the
cane behind the door.
6Sl. ^tnifii^ett, much oftener with the dative than with the accu-
sative. Dative aiid Accusative, between, betwixt, amidst, among :
jlBif<^en ben beiben ©tdbten tiegen br«i ^Svfer between the two towns
lie three villages ; tX trat jlDifc^en bie beiben he stuped between the
686. SIctitti, much oftener with the dative than with the accusa-
tive. Dative, 6y the side of, close by, beside, besides : n fa| neben
mit he was sitting beside me; hiǤ tft er neben (einem SBater ! what is
he by the side of, in comparison with, his father/
Accusative, beside, close to, next to: er fef^te |ii^ neben ntii^ he
sat down beside vie.
An Alphabetical List op the Commonest Adverbs and
conjcnctions, with the meanings of each in the
Order of Frequency
wt. 9[ber, but, however. — Use of ober but and fonbem but: a)
abei niay follow a positive or a negative statement ; fonbem follows
a negative statement only ; b) aber limits a preceding statement by
opposition only ; fonbem introduces a substitute statement or else
augments and enhances the original one. In other words, aber ■=
but yet ; (onbern ■= but on the contrary or but even, rather. Thus,
er ift ret($, aber er '\\i ungltidlicb he is rich, but yet he w unhappy ; tx
ift nic^t arm, aber er ift unglUtflii^ he is not poor,but yet he is unhappy ;
eS ift je|t nitbt ©ommer, aber eS ift Warm it is not summer now, but yet
U is warm ; eS ift je^t ni^t ©ommer, fonbern aSinter it is not summer
now, bxtt on the contrary it isunnter or it is winter now, not summer ;
er ift nii^t reic^ {i.e. ni^t rair, or ni<^l bluS, reii^), fonbern ein URiDio^
nar (i.e. er ift Uielme^r, or fogar, ein fOliUiondr) he is not rich (i.e. not
only, or tiot merely, rich), but a millionaire (i.e. rather, he is a mil-
lionaire.
6BS. %l§, (a) when, as, used only with past tenses or, rarely, with
the historical present, never with the ordinary present or with the
COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS 145
future : a(S '\6) tarn, 'max tx fort when I came, he was gone ; aU i$ (o
fl^e unb |tt)reibe, Hojlft eg an bit X^iXx as I was thus sitting and writ-
ing, there was a knock at the door. — SllS refers to only one occa-
sion in the past and, therefore, is not used for when in the sense of
whenever, which ia tnenn : whenever I catne, he was gone Wenn \if
(am, toat et fort. — When, referring to an action in the present or
future, is likewise Menn ; when I ctyme, you are, or will be, gone
toenn i^ tomme, bift bu fort or mirft bu fort fein. — (b) than : er ift
grBfeer at« id^ he is taller than S. — (c) as : ix ift ^ier alg ®aft he is
here as guest ; itf) laniltt i^tl alS Bnaben / knew him when he was a
boy. — (d) als ob or als Wtnit as if: et fttrac^, als tb, or als toenn,
et teic^ ioate, or a(§ toSre «r (576) r«i<^ he talked as if he were rich.
— (e) et ift fo gro^ alS (or \ok) if^ he is as tall as I. — (f ) but, except,
after nii^tS, niemanb, t«in and similar woi-ds : nid^tS otS SBorie noth-
ing but words. — (g) fohjotjl alS as well as ; er fotOD^it atS ic^ he as
well as 1 01 both he and I. ~ Notice also : tie ^tfube tear befto fltB=
^er, als ii$ ©ie ni(^t wtpartele niyjoy was all the greater as I did not
expect you; fie tear ju orm, al8 baf; fie uni ®elb ^atte geben IBnnen
she was too poor (to be able) to give us money.
689. Stit^. (a) also, too, moreover, besides. — (b) even, often after
loenn or with the inverted order ^ even if, although (573) : affe
ai^teten i(»n, aii<^ feine ®egner all rejected him, even his opponents ;
i($ getfe au8, menn «« au^ regnd (also tuxi) Wenn e§ reflnet) / shall go
out even if it rains; lommt er au<^ ^ettte nic^t, fo lommt et bo(^ mots
gen though he may not come to-day, he will surely come to-morrow ;
fo atm, ba^ fie au(| lein ©tfldf ©rot ju effen Ijatten so poor that they
hadn't a mouthful of bread to eat. — (c) aud& ni{^t, OUC^ lein nor, nor
. . . either, neither: li} ati}t Itii^t, unb bu aui} mc^t I shall not go, nor
will you ; id) ^abt lein ©elb, unb er ^Qt aut^ leinS / have no money,
neither has he. — (d) aud^ after loet, ioai, Wie eto. =- -ever, see
180. — (e) aui) sometimes ^ accordingly, as one might expect,
naturally, really, actually or too (with emphasis) : manberutteiitt t^n
unb lie^ i^n aud^ ^iingen they sentenced him, and (accordingly hanged
him) they hanged him too; iH} fa^ mic^ um, ob er mir auH) folgte I
looked round to see if he was really, or actually, following me (as I
ea^ected Mm to do ot as he had promised to do) ; „©ie fetjen bla^
auS," fagte fie, „3t^ &'" """^ ^«"I geWefen," antWortete et " You look
pale," she said. " Naturally, or / do, or of course," he replied, " /
have been ill."
690. SJalb. (a) soon, forthwith, presently. — (b) easily: ba3 ift
balb gefagt, abet nid^t fo batb get^an thafs easily said, but not so
easily rfowe. — (e) nearly, almost: {^ ^atte balb meinen ©dfeitm »et=
geffen I came near forgetting my umbrella. — (d) balb . , , balb now
. . . then, at one time . . . at another : balb tooUte et bieS, balb boS
now he wanted this, then that.
D.3«ized by Google
146 COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
691. 3)ix. (a) then (now): ba rief er: Eomm! then he cried:
come .' Sometimes not translated : aU et fo ^pxa^, ba (594) fing ed
an JU tegnen while he was thus speaking, it began to rain. — (b)
there, the original meaning. — (c) causal conj. with transp. order
(594), since, as: ba iH) ©ie nic^t fanb, fling ic^ hKfl as I did not find
you, I went away. — (d) conj. of time with tranap. order t when,
while, that: an bem lage, bo er ben (Jetnb fi^Iug on the day when
he defeated the enemy ; je^t, ba i^ gefunb bin now that I am well.
Sometimes an independent clause introduced by ba may be made
dependent in English : ({^on iODitt i^ fort, ba tarn ber ©enetat I was
about to go when tJie general came. — (d) ba + frin be at hand, be
present, be here, have come : je^t fmb Inir aUe ba now we are all here ;
bte ©titnbe ber 3(bteife war ba the hour of departure had come. ~ (i)
ba under those circumstajices, in that case, such being the case, so,
and so, hence : ti tegnet ni)(^, unb ba bleift' i^ liebet tf\n it is still
raining and (that being the ettse) so I would rather stay here. — (g)
ba in that respect, in that point : inie fttjalt er immer ! ba tear fein
Sater bot^ ganj anberiS how he used to scold/ I must say, in that re-
spect his father was very different.
698. ^abei, never = thereby in the sense of by means of it or in
consequence of this, which is babiiri^ (693). ®abet may be thereby
in the sense of near it, close to U, dose by if, e.g. bort ipar etne
DueUe, unb babei ftanb ein S8aum there was a spring and (thereby, i.e.)
near it stood a tree; but generally its rendering has to be adjusted
to the context, and then its commonest equivalents are at it, in it,
in doing so, in saying so, with it, at the same time, along with it, in
addit/ion, too, meanwhile and other phrases expressing simultaneous
action : er laS, unb babei tarn et an ein neueS 3Bott he was reading
and (while doing so) tw the course of his reading he came -upon a new
word; er la*, unb babet trant er feinen Jlaffee he was reading and at
the same time drinking his coffee; ber atlle ift reii^, unb bafwi flut the
old man is rich and good too ; „Uben ©ie Wo^ft", foflte er, unb babei
na^m et feinen §ut unb ging ^'farewell," he said and (saying so) with
these words he took his hat and went ; fie Ijatten nut Wenig ®elb, unb
babei Waten fie immer frB^lii^ they had but little m^mey, hut (at the
same time) for all that they tvere always cheerful ; fie ftanb babei unb
fagte lein ©ort she stood by and didn't say a word; toenn ©ie f^telen
hJOlIen, fo bin ii$ babei if you wish to play, Til join you. — Sabei may
anticipate a phrase or clause : ber Knabe tear etfrig babei, ^eutfd^ lu
lemen (the boy was eagerly at it, namely : learning German) the
boy was eagerly engaged in learning German; er blobl babei, fettt
IJreunb fei ba getoefen he sticks to it (namely : the statement that)
his friend was there.
698. ^aburc^ thereby, by this means, through it : toir retften jufam:
men, unb baburd) Inurbe i{^ mit ibm belannt we travelled together and
(thereby) in that way I became acquainted with him. Often antici-
r.jt,:=:i.« Google
COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS 147
pating a clause with ba^ : Wie (am t^, boft (ie fiel ? SJaburd^ baf; [ie
ju fc^ned lief Aow came it that she/ell? It came from her running
too fast.
694. ^ffit (a) not therefore^ but therefor', for it or them, for
that : gieb mir beine aSlume, \^ ge6e fcir meinen aipfel bafilr ffive me
your Jlower, I'll give you my apple for it. Often anticipating a
clause witli bafe : x^ Wetbe bii^ bafttr belo^nen, bafe bu \o f(^nell 9e»e=
fen bift I shall reward you for having been so quick. — (b) in the
place, or instead, of it : er ^Qtte gWat (eiiten Siibel, bafiiv abtx IjQtte et
eine ^ipole it is true, he had no swoi-d, but he had a pistol instead.
— (c) to make up for it, to offset it : Wenn et aui^ ben ganjen SBonnit:
tag f^Kef, fo feat et ^lac^mtttagS bafiir befto flei^iger though he used to
sleep all the forenoon, he made up for it by working all the harder in
the afternoon.
696. ^Dgegcn against it or them, on the other hand, however, in
comparison with (668) : bie 3:f)ur iDQt offen, unb er rannte bagegen the
door was open, and he ran against it; i(^ Ijabe tlili^tS bagegen I have
no objection; iH} ^abt nic(itS bagegen, bafe bu tommft / have wo o^ec--
tion to your coming ; er ift alt, ii) bagegen bin Jung he is old, I on the
other hand am young ; bent' an baS SoS ber ©efangenen, finb Wit nic^l
gluilic^ bagegen ? think of the lot of the prisoners, are we not happy
compared with them ?
698. ^amit. (a) adv. therewith, with it or them, with these
words, go saying, by it, thereby {ef. babei, 692) : et na^m baS Sud^
unb ging bamit ^inauS he took the book and went out with it;
„Iommt !" fagte er, unb bamit fing er an ju laufen " come / " he said,
and with that (so saying) he began to run; loaS httdft bu bamit fagen
what do you mean to say by that? — Often anticipating a clause or
phrase : fie entfi^ulbigte M bamit, baft fie §eimWe^ ^obe she excused
herself (with this, namely :) saying that she was homesick ; et be=
guiigte ftc^ bamit, i^n gefe^en ju %o!a%'iK he was satisfied with having
seen him. — (b) eonj. with transp. order, oftener with subj. than
with ind., in order that, in order to, so that: et lief, bamit et nif^t gu
fpat i&mt he ran that he might not arrive too late ; gieb e§ mir, bamit
\ii eS f efen lamt give it to me so that I may read it.
697. ^atan (bran), (a) of it, about it; 0} bente eben baton lam
just thinking of it. — (b) on it : m §elm mit einet g^ber baran a
helmet with a plume on it. — (c) at it, against it : ^icif baton pull at
it ; fto| bil^ nic^t batan don't knock, or run, against it, also take no
offense at it ; fie ging fogleid^i baton, bo8 3i™'ner (u teinigen she began
at once to clean the room. — (d) by it: baran erfannte ic^ i^n by that
/recognized hitn. — {^) for it: bu bift fd^ulb baran you are to blamie
for it; bu bift fd&ulb baran, ba§ \^ Otm bin you are to blame for my
being poor. ^ (i) in it : ic^ toor baran betetfigt I took part in it ; eS ift
nit^tS SBa^reS baton there is no truth in it.
148 COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
•88. Saratif (brauf). (a) thereupon, then, afterwards, after that:
6alb batauf soon after that ; ben S^ag barauf on the following day. —
(b) on it or t}iem: bcrt ftanb ein ©tu^t, unb bavauf fa|i ein ^anit
there stood a chair, and on it sat a man. Often anticipating a
clause or phrase : ret^ne nic^t batauf, bafe ii$ tomtne don^t count on (it,
that leorae) my coming ; « toar batauf bcbai^t, mir ju f^aben he was
bent on liarming me. — (c) to it : ai}U m(^t barauf pay no attention
to it ; tx mac^te miii} bntauf aufmertfam, bafe e« tegnete he called m.y
attention to the fact that it was raining,
•99. 1ba% conj. with transp. order, (a) that, so that in order
that; with a negative often lest: |«i bor(i(^tig, bafe bu ni(^t falleft or
fdUft be careful lest you fall. — (b) of}nt bafl ^ without followed by
prea, part. : fte (am nie, oljne baft fte unS ethiaS mildiac^te shs never
came without bringing something for us. — (c) al5 baft rather than :
er ftirbt Ktber, aU baft er mic& berrdt Ae vnll die rather than betray
me ; see also 688, last example.
TOO. Sajn thereto, for it, with it, in addition, besides, more than
that, and that : xi) ttani ^ild^ unb oft 33cot baju I was drinking milk
and eating bread with it ; bc^U Brau^ft bu ein 3Jlejyet you need a knife
for that ; Kiii iDiinff^e bit Oliia bajU, ba^ bu geiua^it bift I congratulate
you on having been elected; ein ^ieb, unb bo)U rin ff^loutt a thief,
and a sly one at that ; fie ift f(^Wa^_, unb baju Icmmt, baft fie arm ift she
is feeble and, what is more, she is poor (or add to that that she is
poor) ; aKeS biti tnifl baju bei, bie SJeife tntereffant ju mac^en all these
things contributed towards making the trip interesting ; frtl^er tDflr er
irit^t f<^le($t, abet feine jtameraben |fl6en i^n baju gemai^t (494) he was
not bad formerly, but his eoinrades have mude him so.
701. ^tnn. (a) conj. with norm, order (562) for. — (b) adv.
corresponding to an unemphatic then, not standing at the beginning
of a clause ; also ^ please, pray, tell me, why ! : Wenn er ba§ nt^t
h)iH, »a§ will et benn ? if he doesn't want that, what (then or) pray,
does he want ? bu ^let ? Wc lomntft bu benn ^er ? you here ? why, where
do you come from? — (e) adv. = then, in the sense of afterward or
in the ordinary course of events, hence =■ subsequently, consequently,
of course, atid so : er gab Die! ©elb ioeg, ippbur(^ benn mani^em ge^olfen
toiirbe he gave away much money whereby, of course, many were
relieved; nrit ivu|ten, baft er ^ungrig toax ; eS bauerte benn a\i^ nif^l
lange, fo bat er unS urn ferot we knew that he was hungry; and so,
be/ore long he did asA its for some bread.
702. Xefto, see 717.
703. 2)0^, adv. conj. (583). (a) yet, still, for all that, after all
(sometimes though, which is etymologically the same word) et ^fltte
Biel gelernt, hod) auc^ Diet bergeffen he had learned much, but also
forgotten much ; aber baS befte ift bc^, bafe er toieber gefunb ift but the
COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJONCTIONS 149
best thing, after all, w that he is well again; fie gab fi<^ gtP^e SRft^e,
unb bo^ tni^Iang (S i^r she took great pains and yet she failed. — (b)
surely, really, I am sure, I dare say, I hope : bu bift ©olbQt unb ioirft
iod} ntc^t iDSfllaufen you are a soldier, and surely you won't run away ;
je^t lafe \mi au^fje^en, bu trip bo^ fettig ? now let i« i/o out, you are
rMdy, I hope ? or ymt are ready, are you not ? t($ m6(^te boi$ toijfen, too
er ift I should really like to know where he is. — (c) bod^ adds urgency
to the im^eia.tive, pray, please, do : jit^ boc^, ba ift eS do look, or look,
please, there it is ; eijii^le bc^ tell u», pray. — (d) at any rate, any-
way : er mag ge^en, benn « atbeitet bod^ nit^t he may go, for he does
not work anyway. — (e) at least: f^ide mit ntotgen Wieber ben jiin=
gern, bet ^Qt bO(| 3Jet(tonb to-morrow send tub the younger one again,
he has at least some common sense. — (f ) for bO(^ + subj., expressing
a wish, see 671.
704. ^^t» just, just now, just then ; precisely, exactly : id^ lomme
eBen baljer lam just coming from, there; et mai^it eS ebenfo wiei(l(i he
did just as I did; baS ift eS eben, ba| er fo oft troni ift that's just it,
{that} he is so often ill; i)abtn Sie ^aifn'ait^^ 3)aS eben nit^t, abet
iH) bin eilallet have you the tooth-ache? Not exactly that, but I have
706. Sitimal (mal). (*) <"'"«. *'"'« '"■pon a time. — (b) nD(^ einntal
once more, again: t^uft bu baS nod^ einmal, ft) beftrafe i<^ bi^ if you
do that again, I shall punish you; less often tvnee: er ^fll no(^ ein=
mal fo biel ®elb ali i^ he has twice as much money as I. — (e) auf
einmal all at once, suddemly. — (d) einmat for once, for once at least,
once for all, anyway : et (»at e8 einmal get^an, unb ti la^ fi(^ ni^t me^t
anbetn anyway, he has dime it and there is no help for it now ; \ij
WiM eS einmal nii^t / dor^t want to, that's all about it ; foK ic^ einmal
fterben, f o la^t eS balb f ein if I am to die anyway, let it be soon ; barf
\i) au^ einmal teben? (ironical) may I too say a word {for once at
leasf) ? — (e) einmal may refer to the future t er toirb einmal ein ed&tet
Solbat h^ll be a genuine soldier some day. — (f ) einmal just, only :
lomm einmal (mal) Ijet, gti$ just come Aere, Fred. — (g) nit^t einmal
not even : er lann ni(^l einmal lefen he cannot even read.
706. (Jrft, adv. (a) now for the first time, only just now, not until,
not before: etft fllS er f))tad&, ffl^ itt) i^n not until he spoke did I see
him ; feit geftem etft ^ilft et mir ifs only since yesterday that he has
been helping me. Similarly ; bu fprtt^ft fiel bom !01i(!giganfee, bu foUtcft
aber erft ben Decan fe|en you have a great deal to say aioul Lake
Michigan, but you just ought to see the Ocean. — (b) first : erfl bie
^Iten, bann bie 3ungen first the old people, then the young. — (c) erft
re^t all the more : i^ rief i^m ju, et foffe jutiicEIommen, aber ba lief et
erft red^t / shouted to him to come back, hut theu he ran all the faster.
— (d) once, as soon as: bin id^ erft Solbat, fo jie^e it^ in ben Srieg
once a soldier {as soon as I am a soldier'), I shall go to thfi loar.
150 COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
70T. ®ar, adv. (a) adding the meaiiiug of at all to negatives :
gai !ein Srot no bread at all ; gar nic^t noi at all. — (b) wery, quite,
especially: ein flOr tteuei Iiienet a very (right) faithful servant; gar
mantles quite a number of things. — (c) gar (= jogar) even : man
f(^(ug i^n gar they even beat him; roarum ni(^t gar ! (ironical) why
not even that/ o yes.' of course/ — ■ (d) gar ju biti or wenig entirely
too much or little. — (e) ganj unb gar entirely, totally, aitog^her.
708. Qknifet, adv. jtut, exactly, straight : i(^ ging gtrabe Quf fie loS
or ju I went straight up to them ; gerabe flUS ! straight ahead ! eSift
getabe jtoei tV m yiMf (wo o'clock. Often rendered by happen : bie
I^r toar gerabe offen the door happened to he open.
709. @erii. (a) gladly, with pleasure, willingly : er t^t eS (felft)
gem Ae rfwi it (very) gladly. — (b) gem with an indie, often he fond
of, like to: §unbe ejlen gem '^UV\i) dogs are fond of meat. — (c) gtm
with a sub]., especially with ntBi^te (376), often would fain, should
like to: ii^ mBt^te gem teifen I should like to travel; er ijittte gem ein
@ebt<^t gefc^tieben he would fain have written a poem. See also 362,
710. @)(eii4 (= fogleif^) at once, immediately ; less often presently,
before long: t^n eS gleif^ ^ »"* **' once; gUi((l batauf immediately
afterward ; g(ri(^ om 3(nfang at the very beginning, — ©let(^ and
fogleit^ should be carefully distinguished from jug(ei<^ at the same
time, simultaneously.
711. §er, see 439. Add : (a) ein ^emto^i &er ! rief er hand me a
spyglass / he cried ; too ift baS ®etb ? ^er bamit ! where is the money ?
out with it ! — - (b) bag ift lange ^er that was a long time ago ; ton
2tnfang ^er from the very beginning.
718. ^in, see 439. Add ; (a) gef(^t»inb ^in unb rette i^n ! quick,
rtm and save Mm! et ift ft^on ^in unb (lolt eS he m gone to get it;
atteS ift ^in all is gone or lost. — (b) boS ift nDi$ lange &tn that's a
long way off yet. — (c) ^in unb toteber now and then.
718. ^tncr. (a) always, all the time, every time. — _ (b) immet
with a comparative more and more or less and less : jte ft)rad[i immer
feltenet button she spoke m,ore and more rarely, or less and less frC'
quently, ofit; ber eine »irb immer reid^er, ber anbete immet armet the
one is getting richer and richer, the other poorer atid poorer i er ging
immer Weitet he went on and on; immet be([er! (often ironical)
better still! — (c) no(^ immei even now, even then, still: manfanni^n
nj)(^ immer Jung nennen one may still call him young. — (d) immer
ever : auf, or filr, immer for ever, for good ; mit immet emeutet SBut
tcith ever renmoed rage. Also ^ -ever: htet eS immer (180) fei who-
ever it may be. — (e) immer ioieber again and again. — (f) immer =
immettiin anyway, at all events, after all: Wat er aud) grob, et War
immer ein guter fieri though he was gruff, he was a good fellow after
all I fage i^m, er mitge tmmer teifen tell him he may go at all events.'
COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS 151
714. ^bctn, conj. with transp. order, while, as, the verb usually
rendered by the pres. part, : inbem er fidfi umbrc()te, fiel er wkUe
turning round he fell ; fie bat uni um 5Btcl, inbem [ie fagte ; ii) bin
^ungtig she asked us for bread saying : I ant hungry.
718. ^Dcnb, adv., addiug to the following word the notion of
any, at all, ever, soever : xt^va'b etWQ^ anything at all, something ;
itgenb Wer or irgenb einer or ii{|enb jemanb any one soever, somebod;/
or other; irgenbtDD anywhere at all, somewhere, in some place or
other ; irgenbivoirin to some place or other ; irgenbtoie in some way, in
any way, anyhow. Its negative is nirgenb(S) nowhere and occurs
in nirgenbWO nowhere (at all).
116. 13*' (*) y^' — " (P) ''ohy, indeed, you know, don't you see ?
don't you hear ? don't you know ? ^ier ift er ja why, here he is f bleib
ju §Qufe, bu bift ja nodi) trant, stay at home, you are not well yet, you
know. — (c) nay, even, yes, nay more: bie iauben auf bem JlQc^ie, bie
{fliegen on ber 9Banb, ja, boS ^euer auf bem §erbe fi^Iief tin the pigeons
on the roof, the flies on the wall, even the fire on the hearth went to
sleep. — ■ (d) ja (emphatic) by all means, with a negative by no
means, on no account : tommen ©ie ja motgen by all means come to-
morrow ; lommcn Sie ja nii^t morgen on no account come to-morrow.
— (e) jatDO^I, in answer to a question, yes indeed, o yes, certainly,
but very often corresponding to a simple distinct yes or / have, I
do etc. : ^btn ©ie eS i^im gefagt? ^atDo^l have you told him? Yes
or / liave, or did you tell him ? I did.
717. 3if, adv. conj. (a) eve^, at any time in the past or fut. — (b)
je . . . j«, more common in shorter sentences, or je . . . befto and
je . . . umfo, more common in longer sentences, the . . . the : je
frti^et, je btffer the earlier, the better ; je linger man ti anfaff, bcfto
jne^r, or umfo me^r, gefiel eS einem the longer one looked at it, the
more it pleased him, also : e§ gefiel einem umfo meEjr, je longer man ti
an\a1). — (c) Uon je^et from the beginning, always.
718. 3e^t and SKnit, two adverbs difficult to distinguish and
sometimes interchangeable. Though both meaning now and both
referring either to an absolute or to a relative present, je§t more
frequently marks a present as detached from the past and corres-
ponds to at present, whereas nun marks a present aa connected
with, or growing out of, the past, and therefore reaches a more or
less clearly defined consecutive force : and now, but now or and so,
then : tannft bu mir nic^t ^elfen ? 3«^t ("ot „nun") ni(^t, iHf ^abt no*
JU ((^teiben ean't you help me ? Not now, I have some writing to do
yet ; but after the writing, one is more likely to say ; fo, ber 33nef
ift fertig, nun !ann id^ bir ^elfen there, the letter is done, and now
I can help you ; bie ©teuetleule , . , pnb beS j^o^r*"* ^^^i foW ^^'
rid^tet — ?lun (not „je^t") aber ifl ber ieK ein ftatler 3)lann unb toeife
tin ©(^iff JU fteuern. 9Bie, Wenn wir fein je^t btaut^ten in ber Slot ?
152 COMMOSB8T ADVEBBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
(Ae men at the helm are poor sailors, but Tell now is a strong man and
knows how to steer a vessel. What if we should make use of him in
this our present need? ein So^n foD feinen SJatet tijxtn . . . Sin ic^i
nun (not „}t^t") ^Jatet, too ift meine G^re ^ a son honoreth his father
, . , i if then I he a father where is mine honor? — 9iun is aome-
times clearly a coujunction : nun (for nun, ba) ei rei(^ ifl, fie^t er
ntt^ nidlt me^r an now that he is rich, he no longer looks at me.
Sluntne^r tmw, at or by this time is a stronger nun : ba nun biele 3«it
Uergangen Xoax, unb nunmc^v geffi^tlit^ toar ju fc^iffen, barum, baf; au(^
bit gaflen fcfion BorUbet war, uerraa^nete fie ^PauIuS now wfien much
time was spent, and when sailing was now dangerous, because the fast
was now already paM, Paul admonished them.
718. £ieber, am litliptn, comp. and super), of gem (709), see 362.
780. 80S, adj. adT., loose, released, free, unrestrained. Notice
especially (a) (cS fein + ace. (also with gen.) be or get rid of: je|t
bin lit i^n lo* now I am rid of him ,- \oi toetben + aco, get rid of,
i<^ lonnte i^n nit^t loS toerben I could not get rid of him. — (b) toaS
ift toS ? what is up ? whales the viatter ? — - (c) loS, as separable pre-
fix of verbs, eBpecially in CoSge^en go off (e.g. of a gun), start ; auf
einen lo^ge^en go, or rush, up to one, make for one ; loStaffen lU
hose, let go, set free ; toSmac^en loosen, untie ; auf einen lodftUljen rush
upon one. As in the last phrase, log often adds to the simple
verb the notion that the action is violent or unrestrained : fie ^ieBen
(tuf etnanbei lo3 they slashed away at each other.
781. SWit. (a) prepoa., see 655. — (b) adv. or prefix, altmg with ;
in conjunction, company or cooperation with ; at the same time with ;
CO-; likewise; also; along: miteffen eat or dine with another;
mitge^en go along with, accompany; ber 3HitQvbeiter coworker; et
lann (SHI) nic^t mit he cannot go along (e.g. with us).
782. SRitten, adv., usually modifying a prepositional phraae, mid,
midst ; mitten am 3^age in the middle of the day, in broad daylight ;
mitten unter ^einben in the midst of enemies.
788. 9t&ntlit^r *'^''- '^onj., namely, thai is to say, you must knew,
to wit, sometimes for : ba er nii^t antWortete — er ^atte ndm(i(^ meine
(^tage ni(^t ge^ort — fo }pxai) i(^ no(& lautei as he did not answer —
for he had not heard my question — I spoke still louder. — Stdmlii^
must be distinguished from the less frequent namentlii^ especially,
particularly.
784. 9l0(^. (a) still, yet ; nO(^ nii^t not yet. — (b) nD(^ einmat,
see 705. — (c) no^ immet or immet no(^, see 713. — (d) noc^ ein
another—^ one mare (196) : gieb mit n»^ einen 3lpfel give me another
apple. — (e) nodjt yet, in the future: ber loirb noi) ge^ngt Werben
he'll he hanged yet. — (f) no(^ tift or e^ie no(^ before, even before. • —
(s) Weber . . . nD<^ neither . . . nor. — Notice also : toenn et noc^
COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS 153
e^xlifi) Watt if he were at least honest ; « fei nod& fo xni) let him be
never so rich ; noc() baju or noc^ obenbtein *» addition, besides, to boot,
over and above.
7S6. 3ixM. (a) now, and now, see 718. — (b) nun, usually be-
ginning a sentence and followed by a conima, well, very well, I
admit : hjie geljt e« biv ? 9lun, jiemtii^ f^let^t how do you do ? Well,
rather poorly.
726. 91ut. (a) only, but. — (b) just, please, pray, you had better :
fommt nur tjerein just come in; mac^' nuv ein @nbe batoon you had
better, or please, make an end ofit; bflS lafi nur ^iibfii) (bleikn) you
had better let it alone. — (e) possibly, in any way, at all, even, ever
(180) : t»ie tann man fo ett»a8 nur fagen? how can one possibly say
suchathing? er lief Itiad er nut fonnte heranas fast as he {possibly)
could; n ^iitete fii$, nur baS minbefte ju Beranbem he refrained from
making even the slightest change; toer nur ge^en lEonnte, fling aa&
whoever could go went out.
727. €1^011. (a) already, even now, even then, often rendered by
a special turn of the Eiiglisli sentence : ii ift fc^ion ^JJiittag it is noon
already; \^ tooifnt (508) (i^on je^n '^O.ijXt ^ier I have been living here
these ten years ; tx \oMi bflS f(^Dn tange get^ian he had done that a
good while before; fc^on im ^fl^re 1830 even in 1830, as early as
1830; ft^on nac^ loenigen 3)linutcn only a few minutes later ; fc^on am
Slnfang bet 3teife at the very beginning of the journey ; fi^on bo5 jeigt,
bafe tx i^xWii ift {that already is enough to show i.e.) that alone shows
that he is honest. — (b) surely, easily, indeed, no doubt, I dare say,
never mind : bet ift xnif, bet tann f^pn mit Sieren fasten he is rick, he
can easily drive a four-in-hand ; e^ iDttb fc^otl flHeS gut ge^etl I im,
sure, or wever mind, ail will go well ; fd^on gut, id^ Wei|, loaS bu meinft
v&ry well, or all right, or never mind, I know what you mean.
728. Sfrtft. (a) ton (elbft of itself, of himself etc., of one's own
accord. — (b) even : felbft feine gteunbe Betlie^en itjn even his friends
deserted him.
729. So. (a) adu. of degree, so : e8 Wat fo buntel, baft man i^n
nid^it fa^ it was so dark that one did not see him. — (b) conj., sum-
ming up OP suggesting a preceding clause or phrase and introducing
the principal clause (579) ; commonly not translated, sometimes =.
then, when .■ ftjenn bu tommft, or tommft bu, fo ge^e it^ mit if you come,
I shall go with you; laum ^atte et xniif gefe^en, fo lief er Weg hardly
had he seen me when he ran away. — (e) adv. of manner, so, thus,
<M follows, in this way, in that way : i(i(| jeige bit, tote man eS ma<^t :
fo I'll show you how to do it : this way or thus or so ; fie^ft bu ? fo
ifoX ti bamafe ^iet auSgefe^en do you see ? thafs the way things looked
here then ; fo? is that so? realty? — (d) conj. adv., often ^ alfo,
so, and so, hence, so then, then : fo ^Bte JU listen, then. — (e) correl-
ative of a[S or t»ie so, as : fo grofe alS ic& as tall as I; without alS
154 COMMONEST ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS
or wie : er ift flto^, abn ti^ bin eben (o (j'lwi as) gro^. — (f) cin fo or
fp ein such a, so . . . a: ntt]o ffco^ti ©d^lo^, bafi . . . so large a castle
that . . . ; fo einen §unb ^atte er noc^ nie gefe^en «mcA a dog he had
never seen before ; (p eintt such a man or /e«ow ; et ift fo oner Bon
beiien, tie aUcS tsiffen he is one of those fellows that know everything;
\e ettvaS such a thing ; ober fonp [o ethjaS («■ *wie smcA thing. — (g)
adv., sometimes implying a manner that has only been sug^sted or
is supposed to be known : thus, as you may imagine, after a fashion,
as is natural, as ia wont to be the ease, you know : atS iiSf nun fo lad
now, as I was thus reading (i.e. as one is accustomed to do his reading
or as you may easily iTnagine) \ Wie ge&t eS? 9iun, Wie e« fo ge^t,
Wenn man nii^t aaxii gefunb ift how goes it ? Well, as things are wont
to go when one w not quite well ; baS ift fo ber 2auf (pm, course) ber
2Be[t tha^B the way the world goes, you. know. — (li) fohiie (^ foloo^I
ate) as well as : feiite SUf^er, fotoie 'eine filetbei Am books as well as
his clothes.
780. ®onbern, see aUx, 687.
781. SScnn, conj. (a) if. — (b) uihen, whenever, see ali, 688. —
(c) Wtm aud^ even if, though, see 689.
798. SJie, adv. conj. (a) how,' sometimes what : ex tou^tc nid^t.
Wit i^m gef^t!)en Wat he did not know what had happened to him. —
(b) as, when, just as, as well as : Wie fte lamen, ging ii^ Weg as they
came, I went away ; eS ift fo ^ei^, wie geftern it is as hot as it was
yesterday (see fo, 729 e) ; bte §erren, Wie bie SJienet masters as well
as servants. — (c) like, as if: bie fc^en nic^t quS WlE Solboien they
do not look like soldiers ; qQeS tlang toie QuSWenbiggetemt it all sounded
as if it had been learned by heart. — (d) what ? Wie ? bu Wdreft ba 0e=
toefen? what? you mean to say that you were there? — (e) such as,
the like of which : 3)[ufil, tote iii} ^e no^ "'e ge&ijrt ^atie music, such
as I had never heard before. — (i) Wie awi), see 180.
7S8. SB», adv. oouj. (a) where, wherever; tuo aud^ wherevm; see
180. — (b) when : jur 3*it/ *" o eS nod) teine @ifenbai)nen gab at a
time when there were no railroads.
784. SS'bei, adT, conj., never whereby in the sense of by means
of which; this is Wobur(^, see 173, also babei, 692. SSobei =- at
which, in which, during which, and in doing so, and at the same time :
ein ©piel, Wobei man immer Berliert a game in whi^h one always loses ;
er jeigte auf ben altar, Wobei er fogte : ba ftanb er he pointed to the
altar and, in doing so, said : he stood there.
785. ^o^tr whence and Up^in whither often have their compo-
nent parts separated : fage mir, Wp bu ^er tommft unb Wo bu ^in ge^ft
t^l m.e where you comejrom and where you are going to.
786. SSoH ^'^j- ^^'- 0*) weH.- mil ift Wo^I / am, or feel, well;
leb Wo^l! farewell/ too(fI bem, bet ein Siaterlanb ^at happy he who
STEM-GEOUPS
166
has a fatherland, — (b) perhaps, probaLly, I preswme, possibly, I
should say, I dare say; in questions sometimes / wonder: fte fa^
Wo^l, bafl efi jU fpdt war she probably saw that it was too late ; top^l
no^ eine Shtnbe perhaps, ov I should say, one hour more ; lute biel \\t
eS IBO^I Wert? how much, do you think, is U worth? lennft bu mid^
tPD^t nod&S do you remember me, I wonder? fie ift too^I f{in>n fott? she
is gone, I presume ; tx ftflfltC, Wer iDO^t bet 3^'^embe fei he asked who
the stranyer could possibly he or who I thouyht the stranger was. —
(c) concesBLve, it is true, indeed, I admit : fte ftngt luotjl, sber m(^t
fe^t gut she sings indeed, but not very well. — (d) in ballads, untrans-
lated or = it chanced: eS jogen btei Sutft^e Woljl libex ben S^ein it
chanced that three lads went over the Rhine. — - (ei) sometimes uxmld
or used to + infin, : fie bta^te unS and) Wo^( sLf^tl she would also
bring us apples, Or also used to bring us apples.
T3T. S*"*"* ^^- <^i>j' (^ ^ ^^ ^1"^ ^ ^ '''U^i though: jtoat
langfam, a&et fitter slow, it is true, but sure. — (b) unb jWat and
that : tin $U(^, unb gwai ein guteS a book, and that a good one.
Stbm-Groups
7SB. Kinship of German and English is usually indicated only
once in every group in which it occurs ; thus : biegen bow (739) ;
Binben bind (741).
T39.
bitBtn "1
b« SoBtn 1. ftoio (weapon)
boB BOW, Send, cur^e
2, ore, arch
art.fl.nj
3.>heet<ifpaper
btnsen ™u« to 6end, fwto
bit StrbeuBune bow, curtsj/
miMm stoop
740.
6Uttn
baS@tbUt dominion
6Dt ■ BID, <aftr
b«r ®tbittfc master, lord
Brtotw,
grtltten Md, command
B«6itten forbid, proAiWt
bat Sniot proiamm
741.
btnbtn
banb k bind
-X}".*-
flrtunhmj
SSI}--'-
::;£;} --■^-■-
bi< Sanbe T . . ,^
bl.Sanb.nj*"'^'^
banbistn tame, restrain
taseflnbtl bundle
ba»uiib leoipie
boeCitnbnlS oUtonM
neiMnben unile, connect
Mt Sirbinbnnfl union, eonw
156
8TBM-G HOOPS
748. btnlm I
bOl^tC y THINK
8«lw*t J
btbtntrn thWc over, comider
gtbtnttn think of, remember
nat^btnltn Mini upon, r^ect
ber Strbai^t auipicion
bllnlen, teem,, appear
bat SDtnhnat monument
baS flnbcnbn memorial, aouvenb-
bcbat^tig thaaghiful, cartful
bebcnlllt^ aertous, critical
bas @cb3<^lnte memorj/
b(r ©tbantc (Aou^At, idea
itad^btitnii^ tAougftt^, serimu
bfTbfi^tig «u«pici«u4
te bSnH mt^ mOKiala
penetraie, pierce,
preii, be urgent
748. brinatn in
btang
Btbrungfn
IxbiJingtn opprcst, di«treM
bur^'brinflfn preM tftrou^A
tHcbTSngni ctoukI out, ditplaee
brtngtnb presaing, urgent
brdngra tr. preit, cromA, thraag
hat ©(biangt crowd, trboho
bte 83(bTdngni8 oppreiaion, distress
burt^btln'gm permeofa, perDOde
jubcinglii^ oUru«ii><!
744. btltdtn preet, iqueeze btfidtnb vppretiive
I. <T,_ a f 1- I>''eMtire bnutnt print
'^^^ is. print, printing
auterildfn exiprese btr Suebnid
bet Sinbrucf impression ber Slai^brud stress,
untcTbrildtn suppress, oppress btr UnttibrQctung
746. tigen owx, proper, peeutiar bit ISlgtnfi^fl property, ^tuitity
iaS Signitiim property, pone*- bet Sigtntitmtr ounter, prcprtetor
lions b(t Qigtnrmn obstinacy
tigtntamH^ peculiar eigmtlU^ proper, real, true, in reoli
propertv speoJfcinir
746, tin OHB, tinmal once
ttnlg united, at one
btrtlnlgtn units, combine
tinfat^ simple, plain
tlnfant lonesome, ionel^, solitary
tinjtln Hngle, sole, separate(ly)
bit @ln^elt unit, unity
bit ffilntfltelt union, harmony
bit Scteinlgung union, oJIian^e
elnfaitig simple, siJIy
bit einfatnttit londiness, solitude
tinjig oniv, sin^rie, tote, unique
747. fasten
fuHt
erf Q^ ten eBpfrimce, leom
fortfa^Ttn continue
btr gu^nnann driuer
bit f^^tt journey, voyage
ber SSotfa^t ancestor
bet @efSt|tU companion, comrade
bit Crfalltunfl eajterience
Wlbtrfa^'Ttn dat. b^aU
baB gu^rnittl vehicle
STEM-GROUPS
7«. faUm ]
fid \ .-ALL
BtfoHen J
ber CelfaH appUaue
bn UnfaO accident, cosuaOv
etnfaKcn dat. ocowr to one
gtfaQtn dat. /aU in loiM one't
notions, please
fibetfal'len turprUe, attack
Uorfallcn occur, Aoppen
ber gatt /oU, aue
bit gaUe pitroU, trap
«6«ifat(8 1 ,., .
Sttic^faUB /
jufantg accidental
auffntttn dat. striie one, attract a
attention
bcc StnfaH idea, vihim
b(t ®€falltn pleasure, faw>T
BffaHlg pleosinff, Miging
btr ii'btrfaH sutprise, ottocjfc
btr SiorfaU occurrence, incident
74e. fangm
fine
fltfanflen J
ble ©ffanginfi^aft ct^tinity
ber anfang beginning
emufanflen receive, accept
ber Umfana size, extent
ber ®cfattBen( captive, priaoner
bae ®e(ananl8 prison
anfang en begin
anfangS in the beginning
ber ffiinpfang reception
7M. fllegen
gepogen .
baS ©(fiagcl /owls, Wrds
bi( glUge fiv
ber gtug flight (of birds)
ber giagel vring
761. flte^en
flo^
geflo^en .
fiaifilq fugitive, hurried{ly)
bie ^U(^t /iffAt, escape
bn 3m<^tltng fugitive
751. flUgen
ftofi
B*flo(Ten
bae g(og >>at, rf^fl
b(T flbnflug otiundance
Derfllegeii easpire, pass
ber g(u6 riuer
ber <Slnf[ug inAii«nce
bit glotte ;teet
bleglUt FLOOD
itbeiflflffig supeiflJioua
7»8. folgen follow
folgH(^ conae^uenlitf
(rfolgen foUow front, result
na^folgen folUno after, succeed
verfolgen pursue, persecute
ber Strfolfler pursuer, persecutor
tie golge conseguence, result
bae ®efotge followers, retinue
ber firfotg result, success
ber Slad^folger successor
bit Serfolgung persecution
folgenbcrntagen os/ollow?
158
STBM-GBOUPS
TB4. Bfbftt
gah
aufgtbtn give up, aesign at tatk
fu^ b(B(btn 1. betakt one's se(/'
2. come topoM, occur
umgrbfn turround
Ottflttitn forgive, pardon
Ottgti<nt in vain
T6B, BfB'i iOiiwsT (opposite)
bU Umgtgtnb the eomUry artmnd,
enoiron*
bafl (8<0enttll opposUe, contrary
btr Stgnn; oppOTi«nt
nitBestn agaitut, in fact of, to
786. ttiftn 1
glng ^ oo, uoU;
BfflonBtn J
btr aue^ang exit
Wige^ni pa*» aviay, elopte
M MtfltW tratucrreM
767. B't*^^" 1 eometopast,
gtfi^^ni J A(^)pen
ft^ldcn (caute to hempen, Mng
aixtut) dispatch, tend
l^tdlil^ Jtiting, suitable, proper
has ®c^idfal \ faU, dettiny,
bofl ©((*!(( J lU
bai ®t\<lild optneM, dexlerHi/
7M. gtelftn
Brlff
fl«B»iff«"
btgretfen (mup,
selte, anotcA,
gripe
7Be. ^Ittn
Btiwlttn
be^lttn retain, l^eep
unttt^Iten tnlertain, maintain
fUf Wr^ltMl fie related or pro-
tUQabt pifl
bttoM giflei
bU Stufgabe toil, leuon
bit ^Qthmt)tit occurrence, e«enl
bit UmBtbunB furroundfnff*
bU BtrBtbuitB /oro'itwnesi, pardon
«rfl(Wii^ «*eieM, vain
bit (Stgnb {vluU lies oppotUe one)
region, country
bet @CBOi^Kt> otiiect
bit StB^f'"^ presence, present
bcgtgntn come againtl, meet
tntgtBntn (say against, in nplj/)
T^ly, retort
bcT StnganB entrance
bit StcgatiBtn^tit pa»t
baS Sttgt^n tronsfn'estion, qlfenM
bit .@tfi^ti^h (tpfeot taJ:u plau)
Aistory, ttory
^d) (i^idtn ifit in) beJUting, proper,
euitable
bit SSc^idtii^hit propriety
ba« aNigBct<l|'d mi^ortum
gdi^iitt eleoer, opt, adroit
angrtiftn attack
btrattgiiff ottocl;
ngnlFtn teise upon, lay hold of
bre SBtgrifl cwweption, idea
bit ^altung carriage, bearing
ft(t^alttn hotdfatt
ft^alttn receiue, mointain, preserw
bit Uitttr&altung entertainment, coti-
Dertation
bae SStr^SttniS relation, proportion.
.opgic
STEM-GB0TJP8
760. bl( 5onb HAin)
b(r §aiitii^u^ glove, miOen
b(t 5anb»trl« mtchanic
^anbeln {haruiie goodg) (rode,
trtiffic; act, do
Ux Q&niUt trader, dealer
btfyxnbtln treat, handle-
hit Oanbfdirift Aandttrrittng, rnanu-
bai ^nbmtrl handicraft, trade
btfjiabt (/taytdy) nimUe, quick
bn ^nbel trade, trqffk, bargain
bit ^nbliing action, deed, shop, store
bie ^c^anblung treatment
761. bQ8 ©aupt HEAD, chi^
bit ^uprtoi^e main or principoi
bU ^U|)t|}fibt Capitol
bt^Utittn maintain, aatert
ber ^Suptltng chi^, chieftain
iiaapt\S(ifliii mainlv, principaUj/
QtKC^Upt in fA« main, tm the whole,
in general
bit Qt^uptung (
gc^ Brett bdong
flt^orfant ^ledient
imauf^Bcm t(neea*in{7, tncesnint
0t^9rlg h^ongiTig to, due
ba Qlt^ocfatn obedience
innig /elt uvitUn, inti?na^ cUTec-
tionate, warm
ItttK nwtbdi + ffen- tote into one's
mind, ftscome aware of
Imie^alten hold or teg* in, ieep
or sftcjt to; atop
intui inner, internal
tnntr^alb witAin
tnncTlii^ internal, inurord
bit (hinittnlns reminiscence, re-
collection, memory
innt^abtit have in one's power, hold,
pogaeta
iRRtlDo^nen dat. be inherent in
baB Snnect Acarf, spirit, conscience
titntrfi inmost
fli^ ccinium ke^ in mind, remember.
^tmft^rtn return home
iimle^itn turn round
iimgtTt^Tt ftdv. trice verso, the o(Aer
way, the opposiie
Btrklirett turn rownd, pervert
DeTtt^Tttt mit otwciotewitA, have
to do witA
Wltbtrte^ttii return
jurflrfhSwn return
tinle^rtn turn into or put up at an ini
bit (Slaltifx putting up at an inn
bit ^timle^v return home
bit Umltftr turning round, change, con
Uttte^tt peruerted, vtrong
btl ^ttttifc intercourse, truffle, com-
bit Sltbtrtt^r retam, recurrence
bit 9tiiifte&ir return
STEM-GROUPS
766. (rnnm -i know, 5e
lannte > acqcaintbii
gffonnt J mth
bet ©elanntt acquaintance
«t((nnen recognixe
766. lommtn i
tarn [ come
ittemmtn J
nnlommoi arrive
iftHommtn come along fiom
naf^tonimtn come after, later
jufcmm*n eome to, tomard
tflnfttfl to come, future
bit SuBlunft (mean* of geUing o
coming out of) ex
pedieiU, remedy, in
formation
767. lajTtii 1
lleg f leave, let, let he
flflafftn J
atila{f«n leave off
erlalfcii let go, release, remit,
send forth, proclaim
iU ^adfia\[tg;1tlt negligence
uttanlajleu oeeation, eau*e
bit fttnntniS knotatedge
Uttnntn acknowledge
bttanni known, acquainted
bie Sttannrti^oft acquaintance
bi( ffiiftnntitlB knowledge, ineigM
itv SItiTBmmling r
bti; 9nTBtn inline >
bi( Siltunft arriuoi
bU ^Ttunft coming hither, descent
Ul 9Ifl(^tommE deacendatU, off»pring
Me 3''''"if' '*"'* *" come, future
julitnftlfl to came, future
bae Qintommen \ income,
bit (SinKnftf plur. J revenue
gelaffen cmnpoaed, calm
nnablafpfl witkoiU leaving off,
inregsant
in ©ttafi proclamation
nat^iaffta negligent
Otcnaf^iafriBtn neffled
bit l^etanlafTung
ber 9n(ag
788. le^icn leach Qtlt^rt i
btc@ele^irle ieariwd man, scftoJor bit ®(lc^ir(amreit leaming
bit ittfct iTOtruction, apprentice- bet itffxcx teacher
ship, doetriTie btr Pearling apprentice
768. lelben
f s^ffe^, endure, 6ear
gdttttn
eS t^ut mit l(ib I am sorry
baS Celb suffering, affUction
mitleibig compassionate
beletbtgeu offend, insult
T70, lelten lbi.d, ^ide
finteittn inlrod-ace
geltittn etcort
begleittn accompany
ba8 ileibtn suffering, ailment
bte S!ciben|(^aft passion
leibenWoft(i(§ passi^tnate
leibei ui^ortunotely, otos/
baS SRtttetb ctmposstoi, sympathy
bte ^detbigung ■if'ense, inauU
btf feilung guidance, direction
ble Sinleltuna infroductitm
bae®(tdt eacort
ttx Stgltittt companion
blc SSfBlfitung company, accompani-
3.n.iized by Google
STEM-GROUPS
771. tlegcn
lag (- LIE, be situated
gelegm _
gelegenttif^ occasionally
^Mi) etnas angt= 'I bestout great
Itgen (dn lafffii J care upon
Oetlegen embarrassed, perplexed
bit fage situation, condition
gtlegtn situated, convenieTit, opportune
tit @(l(gen^it opportunity, occasion
o6gdegcn lying off, out of Ike way,
remote
angelffleit^fit affair, concern
bic JS(irlegtn^*it embarrassment
bos Soger camp, coueft, bed
bit Selagerung siege
772. mcvlen mahk, Tiotice, mind, feel
mtxniH) noticeoMe
antnerfrn perceive, note
au|nternam aUejiti-ae
btrnttftn notice, obserte, remark
mertwfltblg remarkable
utitennerh unnoticed, imper-
ceptible, gradually
anmEifunfl note
mtxtbat noticeable
aufmfrttn pay attention, listen
bit auflntrflomteit attention
bit SBtmntung remark
bit SR(t(niflrbig(elt remarkable thing,
euriosUji
773. bit 3Bitte middle, midst
ber anttluioi^ Wednesday
iec 3?oirmlttag forenoon
bit SRithrnai^t midnight
bag 3)l!tte[alter the middle ages
mitteffior (by means) indirect,
(mediate)
ttcrmittrin medicde
mlttlcr adj. middle, middling,
average
mlttltxvitlU meanwhile
intttrn ady. in the midst (722)
btr 3Jiittag midday, noon
itt 9ta^mtttag ajlemoon
baS SDtittel means, medium, may, r
source, remedy
unmitlelbai (Ttot l^ means) direct,
immediate
bet $ennitrieT mediator
tin 3Nann uon mitlleni: ®i3ge a nu
(/ medium height
mitul« 1 , ,
mlttelftl^"'^'""'^
r potoei
774. miSgen
moi^lc ,
, , power
gemooit J
bit aJio^t might, power
bit D^nniQ(t)t impoteTiee, weot-
bie Ubtrmad^t wtperior power or
forces
pd) bemSifttiBen + gen. takepos-
seasion of
iitnn6geii be able, can
mBgllifi possible
bit SWaglli^Itit pOiMiMIity
mSf^tlg mighty, potoerfid, potent
o^timSi^tlg impotent, uiedk, swooning
itWUm&iitl^t plenipoteniiaTy
baS fStnnilgtn abil%, power, /ortune,
■jt.:?:l.« Google
162
8TBM-GROUF8
778, b«r 3HMt eouroje, tpirit, hood,
humor
tmittolttis wanton, pert, mi»-
chirnxnis
baS (Stm&t Kytd, Jieart, diapo-
bfT ^oi^mut haaghtineM, pride
litr flbtitnut arrogance, pre-
vermuttn presume, ruppose, ww-
blt S^^mut sodneu, metancAoIy
jumiitm (tinrai etWaS) expect
(■ometAinj; of louteone),
thxTtk one capable eif
mutlg cQuroj/eou*, 6o2d
anmutig grac^iti, charming, pleamitt
grmQtllt^ Crood-nolured, ^eniai,- fosy,
coT^cirtaUe
QbfnnOtig arrogant, presumptuoui
BtrmutUi^ pre*uma6Ie, probable
bit S^tmtutung presumption, aupposi-
iDt^mfltig »ad, melancholy
bit 3untutung erpecttni? or askijig of
one, demand, regueat.
7T6. ml) I
nS^ r NEAR, moH
fii^ nO^tm opproaeA, draw near
fk^ na^tn approacA, draw near
bcT Sla^bai neighbor
benat^boit neighboring
b*r SRSd^jlf neijjMor (biblical)
n6(^fl(n8 in(Aenaire*(/uiure,Ber^gooi
. jnnS<^^ in. Oi« next place, nert, flTit
tie SRo^t neameaa, neiffAborAood
belnat)( nearf;/, oZniost
bit Slad^fiotft^aft neiuAborAood
na^bailti^ neighborly
m. btrStomt HAMB
niliiilli^ namely, that is to say,
adj. telf-tame, identical
foBcnannt to-eaOed
iiainnitltt^ espedoMy, particularly
ncnnfn 1
nanntt V name, caU, mention
genannt J
bentnneu give a name to, name
nominate, appoint
77S. nt^ntm
M^m f- take, si
genDtnintn J
auBne^tncn eavept
{t(^ btnt^men bdiave, bear one's
self
Mrnt^tntn perceire, Aear, (earn
(understand)
tifinttnftig rational, reasonable
DOnH^m (exertional) distiri-
gtiished, eminent, aris-
tocratic
angou^m occ^foble, pleasant, agree-
bU SuSna^me ea^eption
bo8 SenE^mtn behavior, conduct
bit Stimunft reason, rationality, un^
derstandinj;
fii^ (twae Bonw^nMit set a task b^ore
one's sdf, purpose, resolve
IBfl^nw^mtn become aware of, per-
ceive, feel
3.n.iized by Google
8TBH-OBOUP8
"»■ "7 \ I. advise,. o^yoel
\ 2. gaea, tolve a riddle
iex 91at 1, advice, coansel
2. council
3. councilor
gcraten with In, an, auf, ubn
+ Etcc. 0e< inio, happen upcn,
ber Sorrat provitioni, store.
fair
7M. t^^tji--^'-"^
' L 2. real, gettutne
aufct^l upri[7Al, standing
unTM^t wrong
bai UnrtC^t vmmg
Ti^ten aet ri^Al, direct, Judffe,
bet Mii^tre judi7«
tiditjg eorreet, rig?il, proper,
6ttl(^ttn rqwrt, (eU
tlntti^t(R intlitute, arrange
bivaAxiijUn 1 . ,
b«wd|rl?tlgen.| *'*^'^'"
unttrdt^ttn inKrud
TSl. ba Hfldtn duel:, rear, mdoe
rfldwattB 6ac*ioord«
bUSfldte^t wfttm
bit dlQdfu^l regard, eoTttidera-
7«3. bit ©odjc Ca*«B) ttiwff: (tfair,
bit I^Qrtai^t matter o//ac(, /(k(
bit Urfai^t cauge, reo«m
7B3. fammtln gather, colled
rerfammdn gaiAcr, asaemftJe
[ami prep. dat. together with
InSetfamt tdv. all, one and oU
btifamnien together, beside one
another, in company
baB SlJitftl RIDDLE, (nvriay
rdtftl^fl mytterioaa
tnattn ^ueu, di«fn«
Dtrrattn (muodEise) betraj/
bet aJenral betrayal, trea*on
btt BtnrSIet traitor
baS @tri!t implement, vieastl, tool
bai 3)t(^t right, justice, law ; claim,
prioi^c
jurti^t to-rt^Ats, aright, in order
ble ©trt^tigtttl ^uttfce
bie Ungmi^tigltil irt^ice
bae Sont^t privilege
We Sli^tuna <ifrecti<m
bat @(Ci<^t judgment, tribunal, court
auftii^tlg i^right, sincere
btr SSetli^t repor*, occount
bit Qtntit^tnng institution.
bit Mad^tidit neuis, in/ttrmotton
btr Unttrrit^t inatrwcfion
jUTQd back, backviard
cildllngB firorn behijid
btr SfldBtB the wav back, return
vflrfpc^tSlDe regar^eas, ineontideraie
bit ^uptfat^e prineipaJ thing or con-
btf 5Ifbtn(ai^e matter o/ secondary iin-
portance
tKnirffK^en cause
bit ^ammlunQ coUecCton
bit Seryajnmluna trotfierinp, aaeemNy
gtfamt adj. combined, >int, total
tammtlitft adj. ail, (^together
jufamnttn together, jointly, in all
3.n.iized by Google
164
STEM-GROUPS
Tg4, fdiautn look, behold, tee
bat ©(^aufmjltt thoa-alndotr!
baS ©i^aufpirl drama, ipeetaeU:,
onti^ull^ maiin make clear to
the ej/e oipereeplwa
juf^auen took on, watch
V look at, examine
7M. td^tibtn 1
separate, divide;
separate, depart, jiarl
Derabli^Ubtn diamitt
befc^clben apporftonoroUof;
order, iVorm
bcfi^iben adj. moderate, tnodeet
«nt((f)tibtn decide, determine
txit\iijititn decided, determine,
regolute,firm
untctfe^ti'ben diatinffuiah, dis-
criminaU
litir|i^ltb«i di^erent, varioaa,
aeoerai, diverse
blf @(^au sBow, dleplav
bH @c^ut>Ia^ ecene
txr ®i4aufpu((i actor, player
bit anfi^auung perception, poioer of
perception or odterralion
bit 91n[<!^uli4t(it deamess, vividTieas
b(t 3uI(^autT, looker-on, spectator
b«9bf(^f(1) dq>aTlure, farewell; dis-
charge
fit^ Derabf^iebtn toA^ one's lease
[tif beti^etCKn limit one'* se{(^, be
bet ©(Ic^fib information, aiwioer
bit ©tfi^tibenlldt modesty
entfi^tbtnb decitine
btt ffintJi^lbunB decision
bit entf^lfbHi^tit determination, firm-
btr Un'lfcli^ifb diifinetion, deference
786. Wlogm
(i^IUfl !• rfrile, 6eat, (si
fltj^laBtrt J
tintm ttmai ab\itia%ta refuse
an((^Iagttt strtle up (a tune),
Striite or knock aj7atnst
auff^fagtn, bit Sugtii open one's
eyes
aufff^lagen, tin 3''t P't^^ " '^"^
»otf(^ta9(ii propose
787. Mlitfitn
9t!<^lofft
bcT @d^lag strode, &tou>
bie B^laiit batOe '
{^fod^ttn slaughter
btt %ttiii}\aq design, plot
fcf^lagni blat, kOl
tDtfcCilagtii alay, kill
btt ^orf^Iag projjoaal
sAut, close, lock
2. caatle, palace
btr @4tof|ei; loctsmitft
b<ir ®41ug conclusion btt @d^lQffe{ key
Quft^liefeen untoct, open, disciose b(t Sufti^lufi discloture, explanation,
information
auB(c^li«6"i exclude auBlcfttiegtit^ exclusive
befi^lieS'" conclude upon, deter- ber Stf^lug resolution
mine, decide
3.n.iized by Google
8TBM-QROUP9
ttnmufien enclose
fi4 entt^ltegtn resolve, make up
umt^Ut'gen enctoae
Berj^fitBtn hok up
788. f*Ki6en 1
(tfiritfi f write
a*fc(|rtt&«n J
baS ®(^t(t6j(ug writing mataials
b«r ©t^tlftfifffer aiOhar, writer
6eltf|ttibeii desert
utitet((^Ml'()«n subscribe, sign
789. (e^en' l
gefe^Mi J
bit 3tbfic^t intention
onfe^tn look at, regard
bit %ift<^t view, opinion
ber Slufft^er overseer, superin-
tendent
aue|t^en look out, look, appear
We 3tU6fiit|t view, proepect
tinUfftn see, -understand
Beffften look at, examijie
baH Stfi^t face, look, sight
nat^fe^en Jooft up ( tntiestiirafe )
ttium ttwaS nadife^cn lie indui^ent
loitA, be fenien! with
fi(^ um'leftfn look round
etlPoS ller(et|(n oeerioot, do amiss
(ti^ ttevfe^en malre a mistake
fii) mit etrooB Ueite^tn provide
one's selfwitk
fiifl Dotjifien be cautious, be oh
one's guard
bit 3!oc(eI)uiig dimne Providence
iDie'bttfeVn see, or meet, again
790. (tin 1 be,
fletDffen J
iDtFentlii^ essential
aElmtfenb absent
oniotfMib present
tint^Iteglicfi inclusive
cntfditoffen resoZuCe, determined
b(c Sntfrf|(u§ resolution, determimKion
DerJrf|tofT«i reaemed, uneommuntcatioe
baS ®d|teifi(n writing, manuscript,
letter
btr ©if(Mt6er amanuensis, ciert
bit @(^rift handwriting, characters,
manuscript, the Scriptures
fcStiftlid^ in writing, wriHea
bit Stf(^rei6ung descripfton
bit Un'ttrfiticift signature
in ®i<^l in »iOHi
fic^tbar visible
abfic^tlii^ infenttenaZ
bOB 9n\titn looks, appearance, regard,
reelect, distinction, authority
bit Suffic^t onersiifAe, superinlentlence
baS SluSft^n Iooi», appearance
bit einric^t insight
buri^fi^ttg (ronsparent
bas 3tnfle(l^t face, feature*, eounte-
tie Sftat^fii^t indulgence, lenienq/
bie fflUdTictit regard, consideration
bit Umfii^t circumspection, caution
baS Sttft^n mistftfte, error
fi^ tintr ©at^t bedeften expect, look for
unWrfefttnS uneipecteiij/
bit 3ut'erfii^t confidence, expectation
faith
bie Votfic^t caviion, guard
uocri^tig cautious
oiif SIBte'bertt^n adieu, untiZ we meti
again, goodie
tn.% ©afetn existence, being
bn9 SQJeJfn 1. being, creature
2. essence, substance, char-
bit a6ipt(tn(ieit a6se?ice
bit SniDtftntitit presence
o^lc
166
8TBH-G ROUPS
7>1. fta«n 1 ^^
gtfomwn J
gtfonntn or "l 6fl minded or
gffinntftln J di^oied
ii« (Sifltnfinn ( mind of one's
own) obilmaev
bn Unfinn notaente
fU) it[mnm r^lect, recoBeet, re-
cover one's pretence <tf mind
btx @tnn »en*e, reflection, meanini;,
intention, mind, disponfion
bU ®«ftimiing diviosition, mood, eon-
bn ^(t^tfinn ligAt-mmdedneM, lenity,
friwtiti/
tm SSa^ftnn (naanity
btfonnni UwaglUfiU, calm, ditereet
bit S<finnuiiB contcionaneta, seiae, re-
.^ectioti, presence of nttnd
TM. fi^n
ta6
btfigcn poweu
b(r SStpCfr
b<f(|ftii puMesied, mod
fii^ anfitbdn settle
bit 9nfitb!unB aeOlemsiit
((^en iBT
fu^(e6<n »eat one's eetf
mtft|cn depose, deprive of, remove
fid) nitfc^n be terr^ed, thocted
etft^ replace
fOTtffllcn corUinue
baS @iff^ tato
verft^tn reply, r^rt
btr Sorgtft^tf miperior qfflcial
pd) Uibtrfc'Qni oppose, resist
iXrSH! 8BAT
btr @(|f(l (settle) eoay^Aair
bCTScfie 1 _,
bU&llBunB J"^
brc anftebler «etUer
b« Sinliibttr flermit
tm ®a|} propoiiCion, sentence
abftfi*" depo»e
bit Stfaljung garrison
bae Sntft^n terror, dread
(ntf(Qlt4 ilrea(Vul, (erriUe
btr ISrfa^ amend*, compen«a(ion
bit {^ortft^nng conlinuation
bcr @tft|fltb(r law-giver
Mrftfttn place biifare or above
btc Socfag purjwse, aim
798. (prtc^en
fprad,
gttpnx^tn
auefprti^tn frortounce, utter
DtrfpKi^tn promtae
nilbttfptt'i^tii conXradict
bit ®prad|t speecA, [anfruo^re
baS ®e(prQ(^ contiersirfion, lalt
btr ©pcuf^ sayinjj, pftroee, proverb
bit SCujfpiai^t i)ronunciation
baS $ttf)irt4tn promiee
bet St'bcifpiui!^ contradiction
794. bit Slott BTBiD, place
flattflnbtn taJ^ place
bet ®tatt(|a[teT ^^oMholder, gov-
bit Stcibt city, town
iiatt, an|)att (gen.) iiuteadof
grfiotltn {five place to, aUoto, permit
jlottlt^ stately, handsome
bit ©tiSttt stead, place, spot
bit Sotjiabt suburb .. ,
STBM-GROTTPS
786. fteOftn ] pride,
ftod, [ .T,-o,
flfPod^tn J pierce
Uftiftn bribe
ttf^tijtn ttaib
Pedm STICK, be Bbtck
Berfl(rfen hide, conceal
iel @tt)5 ttiiig, prick
IHdtn enAroider
bU @ti(ffWi em&roWery
(tpWtn cftofte
bit iSttitnabtl jiin
bet 1
Snrfled AWiii{f-jjIaee
. \tt\,tn
panb
gt^anlxn ,
ber 11n(ioilb decoram, propriety
anfidnbtg decoroui, decent
beftc^cn auS cortsitt of
btfte^Eit bear, endure, stand
tntfic^tn arise, originate
frp(^n arise, me
oufttfle^en rise from the dead
eingtjltqfn
juflcfle^n
Mtfle^en uiuleratand
UnflSnbig intelligent, sensible
mi^t)(Tfli^(n misunderstarul
alberpc'^tn resist
untDlb(if|)c61ii!^ irreiistible
r admit
in ®tanb sta?id, potition
(tanbfKifl fi'nn, staunch
auf{t(^n rise, ^et vp
btr Sufltanb risini7-u]i, rnuUnv
beiflt^n oMift
bcc Sfljlanb ossistance
beMenouf i-uisiOT
bejlt^cn In co7tsi»t in
ble gntfit^una origin
bit 9ufti:flt(|ung resurrection
btc ©tgtn^anb o^ect
bae @cftiSnbni8 cortfe»tion
in Umflonb circumstance
fid^ unterfle'^en dare, oeniure
btv Serjlanb understanding, inteifect
OerlianliHc^ inieHiffibie
baS anifiOevjlSnbnt* miaunderstandin^
btr aBt'bcrjlanb resijtonce
bet ^uftnnb condition, stale
T97, bit ®ttllt place, spot, position
bit ©tetlung position, post, office
bit SlnPalt instituiiim, arranpe-
Mt Sitranftaltung arraagement.
auBjltlltn (set or place oxtt), ez.
h&M
bejietteu arrange /or, tyrder
barjieUen set/ortft, eaiAibii, pre-
Bttpttten (put out of place or
shape) di^gure
uotfitllen place b^ore, present,
represent
pill (Hoae totfttllfn imagine
fltQen ptace, put, «et
anptUtn put in place, arrange, tfp-
poiTit, in^itute
DtranPalttn arrange, prepare
ble ®tpnlt fiffia-e, shape, form
bit auePeHung exhlbititM, exposition
bie BtfteDung order, errartd
bie 3)orP((lunB setting forth, presen-
tation
bit ^ttjIeUung diMimutotitm, disguise
fti^ uetfltllen diwenible
bit SorpeKung 1. preaentotion (qf a
person or a play)
2. idea, conception
3.n.iized by Google
STEM-GROUPS
T88. bU@tiinni( voice, (tune) vote
fUmmtn gine voiet, sound, voU,
tune, agree
hti^xmmtn oMent, agree
bit Btftiininung dettinatUm.
cinfllmmtii Join fn, consent to,
OttjlimniEn put out <if tune oi
harmony or Aumw
799. flH^n SBBK, tool: /or
btr a((u4 viaU, vitUors
^Imfui^tn Diait, afflict
UtrjIK^cn try, atUmpt, tempt
bie 3U(cfu(^ung temptation
bit ©Hmmuna mood, frame etf vtind
onjlimmen begin to sing OTplay, strike
up
befilmmfn arrange, (Ie(ermine,_ftc, ap-
point, deaignate, destine for
tlR|)tintnig -nanimous
«v(ltinmt out of tune, ilUiuniored
tit Stfucfier Pisitor
unttrfu't^en investigate
bte Unttr{u'(^uiig innettifrotion
ber Serlitd^ attempt, tritU, experiment
, tougtii beJU or good for, be of btr 2^ug«nic^te good-f or-nothing f el-
bit Sugtnb virtue, valor, excel- tfli^tifl 1. cap<Me, clever, good
le/iee 2. serviceable, real, genuine
tauglii^ good, fit 3. adv. thoroughly, hard,
bie Jauglii^hit fitness heartily
901. bet ZtM (deal) part
boB Iei( share, portion
telltotife in part
btr amtU siore or iitteresl in
baS ffirbtell inAeritanee, potri-
QtogenteilS in large part or m
gragttntetis for the most part,
mostly
ItWta deal, ^vtre, divide
(Inleilen divide, distrUnde
mittttltn (sAare wttft)
UEtttileii diatriftufe
•«" U,
fletlian J
t^atlg active
bet^Stigtn prove or aAou Ify
deeds, manifest
unttTt^dniQ submissive, hu-mble
leile . . . teilfl partly . . . partly
ttltnt^m«n an take part in
bie Ueiliia^me participation, interest
bae a>ritte( 1 „ ._, , _,.
ba9 3)rilteiir''''^t^''^
baS @CQentclI (counterpart) contrary,
opposite
bcr Slai^teil dimdnanto^e
ber Sotteil oduanfage
bie £tilung dicijion, partitiun
bit Sinttilung dttiiaion, cla«s{ric<i^iun
bie Snilteilung c<mimv^ication
bit ^rteilung dittributiim
baS £(|un one's doin;;s, actions, conduct
bie %\fi,i DEED
bie I^otfoc^e maUer nffact, fwA
bie £^atigteit activity
URtettI)aR su^ect
btv Untett^an siitgeet
3.n.iized by Google
STEM-GROUPS
169
aos. tcafltlt carry,
trug ! wear,
gtttagtn J hear
OUftCOflwi, baS Cffnl scttic dinner
beiUnflen confriftute
beliogcn amount to
fi(^ Bdtagen deAooe
fu^ Ucclraecn mit gel along viilh,
maJie a compact or Ojrree wttA
state, ddiver
fi^ jutroflen come to pat*
S04. DoK FtiLL, complete
volthiinmen adj. per/ecC
bit SoOmaf^t ./wH pouier, auHutr-
itU
fflUm PILL
trfoam Ai/lU
ftbetfUat' (_owr^Uied) crowded
805. 0OT BKPORE
DorauS in advance
oorbec front, fare-
Bot^et 6fl/ore, previously, before
Vonl tn/ront, a( t/te Ae<ul
BomifirtB forward., ahead
g06. TOoi^en intr. he awakb, loofcA
beivfK^ctt tr. viatch, guard
bit Sai^e UKUch, guard
bUBat^t uo/c^
ber SBo(f|t(i watchman, keeper
metftn tr. WAKE, awake, rouse
bit %iaiit costume, dress
bit Sintra^t agreement, harmony
bit 3i'''*troc^t discord, strife
tintm tttBa% aufttagcn charge or eom-
mission one with
brr Sllftmg cammisHon, order
brc Seilrag eorttrHmtion
bee Setrog orfwuTit
bae ^tiagrn hehavior
bn SStrtrag compact, Oigreement
unrtragtn bear, stand, put up with
btv ^ortrag delivery, lecture, recital
DDttbcin'gni accompiith, finish
VoUtn'btn complete, finish, carry out
UoOfliinbig compld^
bit gOU( fulness, plenty
bit Scffillung fii^llment
Doran ahead, ait?ie front, first
Borbei past, over, ended
bti SJotbevgrutib foreground
BOCig preceding, previous, last, form:
CorflbEt past, over
juuor b^ore, preDioit*!^, earlier
auftDail^en intr. wake, awake
tTiDaii|tn intr. awoMe, wake up
Iva4|ain watchful
in S&aiifimti^tc »ergeant-major
erWfrfen tr. rouse, arou»c
807. toaijitn
geiDoi^ftn
aufuaififtn 1
t^^^\t^ \^'^^^
808. bte Sofff WBAPON, onii
maffnen 1
6f waffnen /
fi(4 nappncn arm one's
bae @en)£(^e plant, i/rou^
ber SSSuiiS growth, form, figure
ber SSoff«n(itlJ|latib
tnttooffnen disarm
bae SI3a))))en escut^^heon, coat of arms
D.n.iized by Google
170
8TBM-OROUP8
BW. toatix, true, genuine, real
bitmairijtit truth
btroii^rtn sftow to be true, prove,
approve
f iirroafir truly, forsoctk
Wfl^t^aftlB true, getmine, reoi,
aainUdi truly, I awure you
bit SfUa^rl^elnUi^tdt probabUUi/
fii^ (wmtt^ten approve one'« scy
bemfi^rt approced, tested, tried
810, nwlttn WIELD, manage, rule vnmaitett administer
bU ®tn)0(t pomer, force, violerKe ttv Stvmaltet administToloT, mawtger
ttbtnoaittflen overpovier getnalitB powerful
flemaltfam violent, forced
811. Wttl (while) because
bit aStilt while, time
Wtttttt tcgoum, tarry
SIS. n»l[cn
Uiet
gODitttn
btlotiftn prove, demonstrate
(WBND), ca^
turn, turn
■IS. mlnben
gctwunbtn
ntntwn
iDonbU
HtiponM ^
(inui<nbtn object
Ottmtttbtn employ, make use of,
apply to
bit SetTOonbtft^aft rtiationship,
reUUives
oovwenbtn use aaprelext
814. Wetftn "j
Watf I tAroio, ^tnij, cast
Bcmorftn J
(ntlDfirfen pno'eet, design
untertOfv'fen sutgect, subjugate
unlcrniiTfig submissive, humble
ftnem fttoaS uonDnfcn cast up
h^ore one, rgtroocft one with
816, bas ajetl woBK, act, deed
bai SStrtjcug tool
Wtrftii^ real, actual
mlt[[ani ^ective
jAite,
biSmeitm "1 once in a i
jnmelfcn J wmettmes
DftWfilfn tarry, stay
kit SSStifuna direciion, instruction
abtoetfen r^/use, send away
btt ©elDtia proof, demonstration
bai ®tmaxti garment, dress,
flttoanbt agUe, clever, skUfiil
bit aScnbung turn, change
anroenben apply, make use of
bit StnntnbuitB
b«r einiDonb
Derroanbt related to, allied to
ba '
bit .
I objeetioi
BeriDonbtt relatim
bev Sorroanb preteit
btr SBuvf tkrov), thrjiat
bcrfflUrfel die
roflrfelti play at dice
bit ffinttDurf project, design
bitUnttnDtr'funa suiyectionjsuttjugatiott
ble UnteriDflrfieltit submissiveness
ber Sorrourj reproach
bit ffitrtflntt workshop
Iflicftn wort, take ^ect
bit SJtcItit^Wt Tealitv
bit ^iTtiing effect
D.n.iized by Google
8TBM-fl ROUPS
171
lal(^tl(t meighttf, importajit
bit SJlt^ltghtt importajiee
bit SBagt balance, »cale
Ivagtn (pvtinthebaiance), Kazard, risk
tn. mlfTtn
iDUgtf
flftDUgt
Btmifi certain, sure
beiDugt
lj«aBll3 vnjoke
Wii
iffni knowledge, learning
ffenl^oft tcience, learning
bit ®<nl&itil cerlaint]/
grniiffcn^aft conscientious
baS Sctnuglfein c
818. loo^nrn dwell, reside
kinio^iini beprmentat
btx einWO^ncT inhabUant
getiia^tfdn be worn to, be ac-
cuatomed
bie @«Doipn^tU cugtom, habit
819. IddHcii be teilling
ralUig wUling
beroiUlHtn {front, concede
uiQIomDitii welcome
nitltatUc^ orMtrarv, eopricioua,
wHwntary
W SBo^nung dwtUing
btnio^nen inhabit, occupy
bcr ^roa|n«r inA«bitan(, dwMer, oc-
cupant
ft(^ an ttmat gelvS^nen ge^ used or ac-
customed to
g(ni3^nli4 customary, u»ua[, common,
ordinary
Ui aUiltf WILL
uin , , . TOiHtn /or (fte soie of
einniOtgtn consent, agree
blc SJtttWt arWtrariTies*, caprice
unrotlltflclt<f| involuntary
BSO. baS 33nnlitr wondsb, mirocie,
monei
liiunber(l(^ atranpe, odd, wAim-
IDunberf^bn of mameUous beautj/
fic^ wunbtni wonder, rruvn^
bcrouiibcmemcrt admiroUe
fti^ Dtrffiunbcni be surprised,
wonder
Inunbitbat wonderful, uoTidrout
iDnnberfam Toondrous, strange
nmnbtiUoU toonder/W.'morveUous
beiDuntwni admire, wonder at
bU ^Wunbtrung oimiratiQn
bte Somunbeiuna surprise, astonishr
821. bit 30^1 \ (talk)
bic anjo^f J numder
jfi^lcn count, number
erj3[)ltn teti, relate, narrate
unjH^lig innumerable
beja^ltn pay /or
oufjn^Ien count up, enumerate
bit (Sijii^luiiB TILE, ntory, narr«tiM
172
STEM-GROUPS
8S9. itit*n ihow, point (oul)
)ttli)n(n mart, sign, dtrngn,
»ketch, dravi
auejrti^ntn (mark out) duffn-
bit 9Cuei«id)nung dutinction
unttrjeic^'nen undertign, tign
has 3^''^*'' ^'^"i ^^fn^i *n<tfi^> token
bet 3<i<4n'i^ designer, draughtsman
bit 3'i(^iii"S drawing, sketch
QuSgejetttinet distinguished, remark-
able, excellent
bejei^nen mark out, point out, designate
baS SetjdcljniB list, register
, )i(^en 1 tr. dram, ptUt
jOg f intr. marcft, 50, jour-
abjie^tn aithdraiB tr. and intr.
auf}t<^al draw up, raise, rear
ficS 6«jle^(n oii( + aoc. ftaoe ref-
erence to, be related to
ciiiji((|«i motie in, enter
trfiifitn educate
uotjicfien pr^er
BOtjUflenitite preferably, espeeially
hvc 3ufl 1- train, [i?ie, proeessiort,
2. feature, characteris-
tic, characters in
wrtfinj7
8. expedition, journey
4. draught in drirtking
ing, breathing or
smoking
bit 3*'^' (raining, discipline
jflc^tlgtil ditcipline, chastise
jucf tn intr. move quickly, fiash,
ipilver, twitch
tntjiiden enra^re, transport,
delight, charm
onjif^ll draw on, attract, put on
bie StnjitfiHna attraction
ber anjufl cOtire, svU of clothes
bti JluFjUg {drataing up the curtain)
act of a play, show, pageant
bit S3«jlt(iung relation, reference
mlt StjUB Quf with reference to
btr IStnjug enirance, entry
bit Etjte^unH education
btt Sorjug pr^erence
UotjQgliifi excellent
btt gtlbjug ~1 campaign
ber ftciegBjug J Kcpedififfn
bet 30B«I tridfe, rein
jSgellDS unresfraiTted, wanton
jBgccn Ae«itote, detav
DtrjBfltni delay, put off
bit SSnjSgtrung delay
jflt^tig (disciplined, trained) modest,
bie 3il(^tigui1fl cAortisement
jflcfen tr. drom (the sword)
bit Strjflffung rapture, ecstasy
baS Cntjiidtn rapture, driisrAt, (rans-
8S4. smtl TWO
jiDcifttn doubt
MrjlDtifeln dcispair
btt SccatPtiflung detpai
bfr3H)eifeI douM
jlDtifet^ft dovbifid
jipeifetCoS dmibtless
Dttjioelfcll I
3.n.iized by Google
GERMAN SCRIPT
-^^ -=. ^ ^ ^ ^
■^ -J- ^ ^ .^^^ ^
^
J cy Google
GEBUAH 3CKIPT
/l^x^ O-€**'^a:^-Z^^^-0'*f*^*f'^fj/^Xi^^ft^M-' C€^i^
■'fft..€iV'**"^*-f*^^'*»iO'»^*'f*^ ■'**-^-T7t-**'
-i«fe3l»^;*5^^1-- -^^O'^f'-^^of.--^-*^'*^^*^
^i-^^-i^^^P^. ^^i€^^C^C^-*^ .'*i^:i-^7t**'C-*-*'£^ff^ -^^^»*^"
ff -^^^'f^'C'*'*^-
i
jlizedbyGoOgIC
THE BBHTERENCES
ARE TO SECTIONS
aiet. 887.
hat,899;omiBrionof,B74.
dallTD, 46, SS-S7 i u>e of, 486 a. ; with pwpoa.,
■beol. superl, Kl ft.
«1, 6Mir.
day, bouraor, 280; da; of tbe moDth, 282.
>«»BaUT«, uM of, 4M tr.
uMns ioltn. with pug. meaniDg, S4S, M».
48-50 ; noiiiiB, SI ff, ; proo., 102 If.
■ddKH,c>Bear(YOCtitlye),46; nworproDouni
defBctl.eandlngiofadJ.,180.
in, 108.
definite article, 48, 49 ; use of, 461 ; before
HdjecUve, 10! ; u mdverb, 208, 210 ; comparl-
139.
iSl; BOer p«r9. prun., 227; with gen.,
478; -fthdal.,4M.
.CTb. 150, 170,687, B94.
adTerta, 2*6, 210, 451; plue of ad-., «l»;
bnw, 701.
mgdlBerof nouD, M4; ordlnBl «iT., MB;
adverbtalcUu»e8,618ff.
order, 887 (f.
kD, lSS-189 ; nOn beTon Buperl., 2S1.
bit, art., 18, 49 ; demonatr., 149-151 ; lelal.
aadn, 209, 602.
l66-no;b.c|(niB<, Ktfilttisa.
alt, a[i Ob, al« IHnn, 088, 670.
t.flo, 717.
Hit, tieltr, 182.
BppMlllon, appwltlve, 46S, 472, OIB.
bo«, 703.
uliclsa, 48-60 ; UBea at, 481 ff.
brrfer, 278.
ai4, 889, 180.
MUfm, 339 HI. 578.
t In eerlain Terb-torma, 893 IT.
BiiilllaTi«9ariiliiod,339ir.; orteaH,2SS,3D»IT.
tbm'.^()i.
bald, 890.
(in, an., GO; otber forms and umi, 267 IT. ;
b.-, 428, 433.
(tnonbct, m; tfltlfl-, 186, 190; itaaul.
b(fltg«(n, 487.
708.
MU, m. 197. 218, 22S.
(IRV-, 427.
cBpllsl letters of ptoa., 106, 107; of subal.
endings, at nouna, 61 IT. ; of adj., 126 (f. ; of
BdJ., 231 a.
ierta,297ir.
«BS«. 46 ;d»« of, 489 IT.
(Hi-, 426, 434.
-((en. nouna in, 88.
<rfl,176,7(16;«vftta»,288.
callectlre Douns, 497.
colors, namea of, 238.
compariaaDofadi-tlOir.
.tloai, IM.
ffltlolMSfOe, 162.
conjueation, general forma of, 283 IT.
conjuncUona, 485 IT.
connecting vowel t in Totba, 293 If.
eonnectiTee, general, 458, 662.
coantries, Damea of, 87, 88.
ia, 691, also lOB ; batti, 692 ; babunf, 698 ; ba>
fllr, 894; bogtgin, 895; bnnilt, 696; Mean
697 ; banuf, 698; koju, TOO.
Mnltn, 487.
fltcubi, 708.
gtm, 709, 362.
gitbl «(). 422.
r:,t.:f:^"G00l^Ic
^Ri, inflectkia. 310, Sie ; ■
tSS ; omitted, 102.
^elttn, 348, MB, KQ.
-t)M, T*.
^t<n. M«, MS
^(C, *3». 440, Til.
(In, 433, 440, 712.
Iwnr or Uie dij, 3B0.
hypoUisticl] cisiues, SI»-S29.
-icifli, lerbg In, S3S.
I^t, In adding, IDG ; In letlen, :
Immci, 71S.
Indicil
iDdef. subject
4 «„ 61
ff. ; with )u, 548 IT. ; u»d for put |
346, 3tS ; Inflnltlve phraaei, 0Z2.
Iqeepwable prefixes, 426 K
iDlerjectloiu, 584.
InteETOgHtlTa pronouDB, 156 (T. ; Loter,
Intransitl'B lerbs, nujll. with, S24; In
InTDTted order, GOaV. ; ET8 IT.
3S8 ; Iirag. comiiBilsan 24e-24S.
Iterntlte numerali, 274.
1'. "'■
itbn, 101. 1»3; tcMnmnMlSl; Itiaanb, II
ItncT 163.
Idt, 719.
-!(«, 74.'
Iciintn, 337, 3S3.
teBimfn, wllh p»af part,, 5S8.
19,224.
-Itin, 03.
Itncn, 348, 546.
Itft-, 249.
H<b(c. Il^l-, 301.
.-ii«a, 04.
nm^tn, 348, 546.
man. 183, 412.
Bon^, 186, IM.
Bl,(ir,240,247,241;».^.
inltttB, 7X2.
diodal»uilltariM.SS»ff.
modes, 2S3 ; see iDdlcativ
mJgtn, 839 IT. 376 IT., 381.
moDtlu, nsmes at, 100.
mafltn, 339 ff, 372 ff„ 381.
namea, proper, 87 ff.
nSEiflitllit. nUiiillit, 723.
i«mi«n,33J,493.
nl*l, 807.
nii^tt, 184, 232.
nKmanb, 182.
id laBn.,
order of words, H2 ff.
ordlnala, 273 ; ordinal ad. erba,
partlclplea, 562 It.
paaaive Tolee, 407 (T. ; pnoH, n
iaDu., EM, M9.
paat teoae, 288 ff. ; of strong ¥0
of, DOS.
plaee, adverba of, OOS,
pluperfect In Indirect dlsGOune, 530, (
plural of nouqj, 61 If.; plur. lerb
109 IT. ; with Eing. Bubjecla, 497 IT.
pooeuelve case, 40, 53-66 ; poaa. pron.,
potential mode, 618 T
predicate »dj,, 102, 206 ff, ; pred. non
r.:,t,:,:k«Ci00^1c
principal psKs, 2S7; sMnu of pp. of strg. Utlea, Mff
Terbe, S§e tC truiBltiTe Terba with ^otcn, S!3,
pronouuB, 102 ff. Iranepoeed order, SS7 ff
pioDimclstioii, l-». -tun, nouns In, Ta
progressive forms, EOl Itfr, eipresa. of time, 280,
proper names, ST ff Nm wllh Inan., 548.
quantity of Toirel8,S-e, um. . . idWhi. 6fB.
questlani, Inteirog. eentence, 5««, e67 ; use of Umlaut, 16 If., Gl ; In compar., 24E.
do, did, 605. -mq, nouns In, 74.
reciprocal pron,, 122. UK-, 426 ft., 437.
refleiive pron., 118 (f. ; reflex, vb., 114. IIB, verbe, classes of. 288 ; auiU. rba. of tense, 809
414 IT K, of mood, 339 ff. ; Terbal noun, infin.,
regular (normal) order, MS (f II8S IT. ; ibL adj., participles, 652 ff. ; >1».
relstlie pron., IMS. ; order of words In rel. with gen,, 477 ff., with dat, 486 tf ; see
clause, SBT IT. also impers., Intmns., trans., refleiiTe.
-im, M. »U1, 194, 198.
-Wofl, 74. TOCaUre, 48, 189,
fi^on, 727. yowels, 8 ff. ; Towel-oliange Id strong Terbs,
WK lerb, inflection of, 312, 320; auTlliarj, 2S8 0:,M6ff.
3M, 32» J omitted, 692. Iiia«, 167 ff., 175; iiM«fUr,182; for (tnia«. 161.
ftttft (Wbn). 123, 728. "oak endings, 12S ffi ; wk. adj., 211 ff ; wk.
sentence, order of words in, G62 ff. TOrba, 288 IT, ; 328 ff.
separable prefixes, 439 ff. IDClif, 183, 171 ff.
11<(, llSff. WHiig, IM, 199, »».
(0,729. lott, lS7ff.,176ff.
(ol*. 164, 160. Wtvtni, 814, 320, 32e ; WtcKlt Ju. 470.
foUcn, 339ff. 3e7ff.,881. Ii>t«, 158.
lonbtni, BST. loK, 7S2.
ftott, anftntt, vtUi Into., B48. Inifltn, 384, 383.
stem-groups of common words, 788 ff loD, 783 ; toobtl, 734,
stems of iffine. pull. Me D: lio^fi, 786.
strong adj., 211 ff. ; strong verbs, S8S ff., 627 ff. no^l, 73S.
subject ace wltii Infin., 642-544, li]»IItn,389ff. Sftl ff.,381.
subjunctive, 316, 614 ff, IDDrbtn, for gdoorboi, 407.
subordinating conjuncUous, 459. words, order of, 662 ff.
3.n.iized by Google
by Google
EXERCISES
Pronunciation: 1-46*, especially 18, 19, 26, 3ft-38, 41, 44, 45.
Additional practice on Exercise 2 or 3. — Bead 46, 47 and leain
the inflection of the Articles in 48, 60.
Nouns ; classification and general rules for the formation of
cases : 61, 63, 54, 66, 67. — Verba : 286-292. The past indicattve
of strong verbs : ic^ W« 312, i^ fa^ 403, t^ tom 406.
VOCABULABT f
bet ®arten bie®arten gardmt bie ^Rad^t bieSJod&te night
ber ajogel bie ^Bgel bird bet ^ann bie ^dnnet man
ber Sruber bie SrUber brother baS gelb bie Selber field
bet Siater bie asater father ba3 Sinb bie Rinber child
bie 3}tutter bie 3Kiitter mother baS §au3 bie $dufcr home
ba8 3Jiab(^en bieSliSbi^en girl baSSanb biefiSitbet land, country
baS 3Saf(et bie 9Ban<t wa(er bet Jtnabe bie jlnaben boy
ber &im\% bie fti)ntge ftmsr bet ^tinj bie ^linjeit prince
bet guft bie^Ufee foot bie ^au bie^auen i
fleben, (ja6, gegeben sri««
fel^en, fo^, gefe^en see, look
fein, loat, ift fletoefen ie
gel^en, ging, ift gegangen jio, waZA
tommen, !am, ift flefommen come
ott old; gcD^ ^eat, tall, large
f^Hn hartdsome, beautiful, fine
abtx but, however; unb and
aui with dat. owi o/, from
bei with dat. ai, by, beside, near,
with, at the house of gu $aufe at home
mit with dat. with, in the com- in with dat. in
pany of in with ace. into
• llu numbers retbrhtieotlans of the Qrunniu,ual€«otharwl»lnillcatsd.
t Tlie dBfiiilM *rtlcl* Bboutd nlwajg be ugocistod wltb the nona, and the noml
Ur End nomlniUve plural should be leuned together. When the student kno
cus, he knawi the olus to which the uckiu belongs, and a little practice
\i,I
ttfit
we
bu thou, you i^t
you
et he, it
fie
they
fie she, it
Was
what
e« it
benn for conj.
ba there;
nic^t 7wt
me^r fnor
nit^t me^i
no more, ;
no longer
ju with dat. to
J«Su6 on
'.foot
D:,t.:J?SvCk>0^1c
EXEECISE 2
Part I
The following plan of going over tie Exercises is suggested as the best ; take
Fart I of Exercises 2-19 (in separate leeaons, if neceBsary, according to the
lettered Bubsections ) ; read the stOTj in ExerciBe 20 ; and then, while continuing
the translation of Gennan in Borne other book, take up the English Farts of the
exercises, Dofore beginning an English exercise, the student should review
the special vocabular; ; and in tranBlaCing he should let the preceding German
sentenceB serve him as models. — This plan may of course be varied and
adapted b; the teacher to the needs of his students. Thus, in Exercises 2-14,
Part II may be substituted for Part I, since both cover the same vocabulary ;
or sections of Part II may be used for practice at sight in the class room ; or
translation into German may be taken up before finishing all the German
exercises, although il tbis is done too soon, it is apt to prove a mechanical and
unprofitable task.
1. ^H) gtng mit itm 3Jattr in baS $au«, unb tc^ fa^ bie ^Dtuttet, aba
bit SStiiber ioatett nii^t ba. 2. aSii fa^tn iai Sanb nid^t me^t, benn tS
ioat tWai^t. 3. aiie Jtnabeti toaten bei bem SSatet. 4. f)ie M&b^m
lainett }u ber 3]lluttei. 5. ^ei R'im^ unb bie ^rinictt gingen )u gu^.
6. ©ie fa^en ben ilflnig, er war olf, obet grofe unb fi^iJn. 7. 2Ba« gab
bad 3Raiil)tn ben SSitgeln? ®ie tarn aud bem $aufe unb ga6 ben 93iigelK
im (= in bem, 49) ©arten Si8ai|er. 8. ^it SUianner toaren im JJelbe,
bie t^^auen unb Jtinber aber Waten ju ^au(t. 9. 3)er jlnabe ging inS
(= in bag, 49) §au« jut (— )u bet, 49) Siutter. 10. ffiit (a^en
einen Wann bei bem $nn;en, abet e8 toat nii^t bet JtBnig, eS Wax beS
JtenigS ^tubei. II. Jtamft bti nii^t aui bem ©arten unb gabft bu nid^t
bem ftnaben einen 3}ogeI? 34 I*)^ ^^^^ "ud ^<"t ®aiten, abet i^ gab
bem jtnaben einen SJogel.
Part II
1. 3)u toat^ gu §auft bei bet 3Rutter, obw xi) torn im t^tlbc bei bem
aiater. 3. 3)er flnabe ging mit ben SKannerB ju gufe ins 3e(b. 3. ^i)
]aff bie ^It&bi^tn, benn jie famen mit bet aWutter ani bem ©atten. 4.
'X)ai Sanb be§ flSnigfl toar gro^ unb ft^iin, unb ber RSnig Wax alt. 5.
9Bar bag HJltibc^en nic^t im ©atten? @ie Wat im §aufe, abet nic^t im
©atten. 6, 3)er SHann tarn mit bem flinbe in baS §au« gur OTutter,
unb bie ^uttei gob bem Kinbe me^c SSaffec. 7. @3 Wat ?tai$t, unb i^t
toatt ju $aufe bei ben jtinbent. 8. ^ei bem §aufe Wat ein ©atten,
ffto% unb fc^iin, unb in bem ©atten Waten SJi^gel. 9. <Sine ^rau tarn
to reeogaiie and lo form the obUque citts sccordlDg to es-SS. — Verbn ihould llkewtse be
lenined u glTau la the loobnlulea, I.e. b; their piinclpil parts, ulth !t) beTare tha put pu-
tlctple of eT«7 Twb thHt isk« flin for lis suilllar^. — Words In the Tooibularlet precedlog
Gxerolde 5 are emitted In the vooabularlefl at the end of the book ; the^ sbonld tlHrcJon be
learned with Bpecdal eare. -« .
D.n.iized by Google
BXBR0I8B a 181
auS bem ©arten unb ging in baS $auS, ti tear bie ilKuttw bet jlinber.
10. Som bet ^rinj ju ^6? @t lam ju %a% abtv n ging mift in bafi
§aug, beitit ber flijnig loac ni(^t me^t ba ; et Wat bei bem Srubet beS
^riiqin tm ®arten. 11. SSaS gobeii bie flnaben bem aJifib^en? ©ie
Qabttt bem aWcibc^en einen SBogel. 12. ©ingp bu ni(^t mil bem 3Ramie
inS i^elb ? fiH} ging mit bem Wanne in ben @atten, ntc^t mi ^elb.
PiBT III
A. 1. The father of the boy was in - the • house, but the mother
was no longer there. 2, I saw the brother of the gitl, he came on
foot. 3. The prince went into the garden with the king (with the
king into the garden). f 4. We gave the water to the girl (486),
but not to the boys. 6. It was night, but you (bu) were not at
home. 6. What did he give (gave he, 605) to the birds ? He gave
the birds water. 7. The mothera came out of the garden, with the
children. 8. Father did not go (went not, 605) on foot, for he waa
old. 9. Were you (i^r) not in the house and did you not see (saw
you not, 605) the mother of the children ? We were in the house,
and we saw a woman, but she waa not the mother of the children.
10. Waa the girl handsome ? Phe was tall and handsome. 11. The
king's country was large and beautiful. 12. Were the men not in
-the field? They were in -the garden, but the woman and the
ohildien were in -the field. 13, Did you (i^r) give the water to
the girl f We gave the water to the woman, not to the girl. 14. The
man's field waa not large, but it was beautiful. 15. What did they
see in the garden ? the birds ? They did not see the birds (saw
the birds not), for it was night.
B. 16. I was at father's (bet Sjatet), and I saw the king, with
a prince, 17. Was the garden neat the house ? The garden was
near the house and was large and beautiful, but the fields were
not near the house, 18. Were the princes on foot? They were
on foot and they were going (went, 504) to -the king. 19. The
woman was going into - the field, but the children were going into
the garden, 20. Did yon (bu) come out of the garden ? and was
father there ? I came out of the garden, but father was no longer
there, he was in -the house. 21. The prince waa not tall, but he
was handsome. 22. What did you (i^v) see in -the field? We
lb, but required In Oemiui. BrHckels [ ] ancloee ware
D.n.iized by Google
182 EXERCISE 3
saw men, women and children in -the field. 23. The king gave
the man a house, a garden and more land. 24. We were there, in
the field, and we saw a house, and near the house a garden, targe
and beautifal. In the garden was a man. 25. We saw the chil-
dren come out of the house and walk into -the water (out of the
house come and into-the water walk). 26. The birds were in-the
garden, but not in-the field.
The past indicative of weak verbs : xiH) Ifattt 310, ic^ lobtt 339, ii^
tebete 331, i6} fo[0te 333. Ee-read 289.
Vocabulary
b« Mpfel bie Sjiftl apple bad ftleib bie flieiber dress
iai^tn^tt bie genfter vnndow baS^otf bie 3)6rfer village
. bie loc^tec bie a:Hter da«?A(^ ba« ©Aloft bie SAWffer H'^
ber ^eunb bie gteunbe friend '^ \palaee
ber 3^00 bie iage day ber ®taf bie ©rofnt count
ber %\\i^ bie arif^e taih >,■ re >, [earth
ber Sautn bie ^dume tree , ' ^ \ground
bie ©tabt bie Stable eity, town bie ©tta^e bie @tta|eii street
ftarl Charles bie (Jreitnbin bie g^reunbiii! friend
nen (76)
^at>en, ^atte, ge^ftt have finben, fanb, gefunben find
loben, tobte, gelobt prwlae |inflen, fang, gefungen sing
fofgen, folgte, ift gefolgt foll<nv fallen, ^el, ift gefatten fall
fragen, ftagte, gefrogt ask ffi&lafen, fi&Iief, gefii^lafen sleep
fagen, fagte, gefagt say, tell fte^en, ftanb, geftanben stand
^eren, ^Brte, ge^Brt hear ffrec^en, fprad^, gefpto^en ^eak
maiden, ma^te, gema<^t maA;e, do mfen, rief, gevufen <mH, cm/, «AoMf
Wo^nen, too^nte, getoo^t dwell, fi§en, fa^, gefeffen «»* .
reben, rebete, gerebet talk
anttvorten, anttoortete, geantttortet answer
^ier here ba^ conj. that
mi:) yet, stiU ober or
fc^on already no(^ with dat. (o, after,
too where toward
oIS wAew, (M na(^ §oiife A^nte
.:k«Ck>0^1c
EXBBCI8E 3 183
Bon with dat. af, from,
fttt with ace. for
an with dat. or ace. o^, on, to, up to
ouf with dat. or aec, on, up, upon, on top of, on to
Dor with dat. or aec, b^ore, in front of
Rule. 3ln, auf. Dor, in (Ei. 2) and five other prepositions (463)
goTCTU the dative in answer to the question where? or when? f
the accusatire in answer to the question whUher ? or how long ?
Part I
1 . 3(^ ^Brte, ba^ tie Ainber tebeten (were talking, 504), abet ic§ ^6rte
nic^t, hjQS jie fagtttt. 2. 3)er ®taf ^atte ein ©(^Id^ in bem SDorfe, unb
baa @(i^lo^ Wat gtofe, abet alt. 3. 3i^ fl'^fl ""^ (^ an i"*, 49) gfen^
ft« unb fa^ (looked) auf bie ©trafee, wo bie a:fl<:&ter be8 greutibeS auS
ajetlin ftanbtn. 4. Wn fa^en, ba^ bet Jlflntg iam, et fptac^ mit bem
Otafen, unb bet ©raf folgte bem JlMg nai^ bem ©c^Ioffe. 5. ^^ Wat
nii^t ^iet, ali ber tKann lam, i^ War in bet ©tabt ; abet Satet unb
SWuttet toartn ju J&aufe. ©te tiefeit Sail auS bem ®arten, unb et (jab
bem SPlanne bie Sipfel. 6. @8 Wat f(^on lag, unb bie ajftgel auf ben
aSaumcM tm ©orten fangen ; i^ (lanb tior bem §auf( unb rief : „AatI !
AatI l" abet bu antworteteft nii^t, benn bu fc^Iief^ no^. 7. Wix ^bttcn
bie Sipfel fallen, fie fielew Don bem Saume auf bie 6tbe obet inS SSJaffet,
8. 3Bo fanbet i^t bie ^au? 9ln bem 35otfe, fie too^inte ba bci einer
greunbin. 2Bit ftagten einen Jtnabett auf ber ©ttafte, unb toit fanbeit
bie gtau ju ipaufe ; fie fa^ an einem %\^i}t unb mac^te Sleiber fiii bie
flinbet bet g^teunbin. ^ie ^reunbin bet g^tau aber Wat noc^ auf bem
gelbe. 9. l3ie3J[utter (obte bie 3Rab(^en, abet nit^t ben finaben, benn et
antWottete bet SHuttet nic^l unb lam nid^t na^ §aufe, aU fie rief. 10.
9So Watft bu, ale i<^ tarn? ^i^ ftanb ba, an bem ^aume, aber ^ fa^
nitl&t, ba^ bu tamft, benn i(^ fa^ auf bie Stbe. 11. §atte 58atetfi ^teunb
ni(^t eine ^oi^tn, unb War fie ni^t gtog unb ]d)'6n ? (gt ^atfe eine XoH}'
Ux, unb fie Wat fc^Bn, abet nid^t groft. 12. ^ie Ainber folflten bem
ajlab^en auS bem ©atten auf bie ©tra^e. 13. Jier Rnabe fafe auf bet
®rbe, ba bei bem Saume, unb fang. 14. §ertet i^t ben SRann niii&t
ffjtee^eu, aU et lam? 91itt ^Btten einen !Dtann f})cec^en, aber tvii fa^en
nic^t, wd et ftanb, benn ti Wat fi^on "iSlaift. 15. ®ag et obet ftanb et,
a(« er f^tra^! ©t fa^. 16. 3)ie aWab^en famen noi^ bet aSutter, aber
t>Dt bem itnabett.
3.n.iized by Google
Pakt II
1. ^i} fafe am Jsift" wb fa^ bie Sinber bel ©tafen (or beS ©tofen
ftinbet) auf bet 6tia^«. @ie ^anben b«t bem Saumt ba unb fpia^en
mil ehwin Wanne au3 ber ©tabt, einem g^teunbe bc^ @iaftn. ^d) ^ixtt,
ba^ er fragtc : „3(6er too mart i^t, flinber, an bem ^age, afe ii^ fam ?
3c& fanb ben SBater in bem ©i^loiTe, i^t abtx toarl ni(^t ba." Unb bie
^inber anthjorteteit : „3iBir Waren nii^t metjt gu ^aufe, toir ioattu fi^on
in Serlin, 6ei b«3 2Jater8 SBruber." 2. Ste ging mit ber greunbin in
ben @arteti, aber jte ^bitt« bie SS5gel auf ben ^iiumett nic^t me^t fmgeit,
bemi eS toat fd(ion 9ta(^t unb bie aSBflel fc^Uefeit f^on. 3. 33ie flnaben
folgteit bem 3Ranne in baS ®orf unb flingen nai^ bem ©(^(oRe, too ber
^rinj too^te. ©ie fanben ben ^rinjen in bem ©arten tjor bem ©i$Iof(e-
St fafe an einem li((^e, ba Bei bem Mpfelbaum, unb fa^ ni(^t, ba| fie
tamen; aber ber 3Jiann ging an ben Iif(^ unb ^ptai) mit bem ^prii^en,
unb ber $rinj rief bie ^naben, benn fte toaren ^'^^""be qu§ ber ©tabt.
4, SBaS fagtf bie Jrau, alS bie ^inbft Dor bem §aufe fangen? ©ie
lobte bie ^inber, unb jie gab ben ^naben ^t)fel, unb bem ^iibt^en ein
Jileib. 5. SL So War itarl, als bie aRutter rief? ». ^m ®atten, er
fafe auf einem apfel&aum. «. §Btte er bie SRutter ni^t ? S. gv ^iSrte
bie 3Kuttet tufen unb anttoortete nid&t, aber er ging nac^ §aufe, alS er
fa^, bafe bet SJater (am. 6. SBaren bee 3Hab^en9 3:reunbinneit nii^t
^Bctjter eineS ®rafe«? ©te toaten bie 3:ij(^ter eineS ©taftu 9B., unb ber
®taf loc^nte auf (in) bem ©cfiloffe Jjier in ber ©tobt. 7. 2Bar bie
g^rau auS ber' ©tobt ober aui bem 35orfe ? ©ie toar auS bem ^orfe,
abtx jte ging in bie ©tabt. 8. 5na(^ ben jtinbcrn !am bie IDlutter, aber
ber aSafer toar f(^on tjor ber 3Jluttet unb ben Ainbetu ^ie,r, 9, ®6 Irar
fii^on ^ag, unb id^ fa^ bie IDtdnner f^on :n£ ^elb ge^en.
Part III
A. 1. Where did you (i^r) find the apples? We found the apples
on (auf) the ground in the garden. 2. The friends (fern.) gave the
girl a bird. 3. There stood the castle, large and old, but still
handaome. 4. A. Did the children come when the mother called?
B. The girls came out of the garden, but the boys did not come.
J. Didn't they hear the mother call? (heard they not that the
mother called?) B. They were still sitting on (ouf) the tree;
they heard the mother call and they did not answer, bub they came
home when they saw that the father was coming. 6. The girl
was from (auS) the Tillage, and she was going to (nai^) the city,
where a friend (fern.) of her (the) mother lived. 6. A. I was
D.n.iized by Google
EXERCISE 3 185
standing there, at (an or bei) the tree, and I saw a man in front of
the castle. B. Waa he tall and handsome ? A. He was tall and
handsome, but old. £. The man was not the count, he was a
friend of the count or the count's brother,
B. 7. The prince followed the king (dat.) into the castle, and
they were speaking of (Don) the brothers of the prince. 8. Where
was the bird sitting when it sang ? and waa it large ? It was
sitting on a tree in^ the gaiden ; it was not large. 9. 1 saw the
man. He was talking with a boy, but I did not hear what he
was saying. 10. I asked the girl: "Did the boy's father come
before the boy, or the boy before the father ? " She answered r
"The father came after the boy," but the woman, the girl's mother,
said: "The father was already here when the Ijoy came." 11. I
found the mother of the boys still at home, but the boys were
already in -the field with (6ei) the father. She, the mother, was
sitting at (an) a table and making dresses for the daughters.
12. Charles, the count's boy, had friends in the city, and the
friends came on foot into the village where the castlfe of the count
stood ; but they did not go into - the castle, for they found Charles
in the garden. 13. Did the father praise the boy and the girl?
He praised the girl, but not the boy. 14. I was looking (I saw)
out of the window, and I saw men, women and children in (ouf)
the streets; they were following the princes to (tiadf) the castle
and were singing and crying: "Hurrah!" 15. Were the friends
from the city still here when you (i^r) came ? They were no
longer here, they were already in Berlin. 16. The apples on (auf)
the table in front of the window were for the girls, and not for the
boys; but the boys found the apples and — what did they do with
the apples ?
C. 17. It was already day ; the father and the mother were in
the garden in front of the house; they went up -to -the window
and called : " Children ! don't you (ifjr) hear, children ? " But the
children did not answer, they were still sleeping (slept still). 18.
Where did the man live ? in the town or outside of it (before the
town)? He lived outside, he had a house and a garden there. We
followed the man into the garden, and here were trees, large and
beautiful and old ; and in the trees were birds, and we heard the
birds sing. 19. A. Was it not already night when you (ibt) came
home (home came)? S. It was night, and father and mother were
already asleep (slept already), but not brother Charles (brother
^.^.tized by Google
186
EXERCISE 4
Charles not), A. Where was Charlea ? B. He was standing at
(an) the window and was looking into (auf) the street, and he
saw that we were conaing. 20. An apple fell from (Bon) the tree
there, but it did not fall (fell not) on the ground j it fell into - the
watei. 21. A. What were the girls doing in the garden when the
friends (fetn.) caine ? B. They were speaking about (Bon) dresses.
A. And were they making dresses ? £. Not the girls ; but the
mother was making dresses for the daughters. 22, You (bu) came
on the day when the children came, but she came after the chil-
dren. 23. The boy did not follow the father (followed the father
not) into the garden ; he went into the field there and fell into - the
Exercise 4
The personal pronouns : 103, 106. -r- The
werben : 314.
indicative of
Vocabulary
bet Sffiagen bie 3Bagen wagon,
carriage
ber Sai[er bie Smfet emperor
ber 2lbenb i)WWstn'bt evening
ber 59er9 bie Serge mountain,
hUl
ber 3Seg bie SBege v>ay, road ber 101enf(i&
baS $ferb bie ?|Jferbe horse
bet 6i)(in bie ©6^ne son bie Slume
bie §anb bie^Snbe Itand bie @ltetn
baS5)ac^ bie S)a(tier wo/ bie Seute
bag ^\j.il bie '^iXiftr book
glauben, glaubte, geglaudt believe,
think
fe^en, fe^te, gefe^t set
ftJtelen, fptelte, ge^iett play
jeigen, jetgte, gejeigt show
atbeiten, aibeitete, geatbeitet work
bie SBribet
bie ^iir^eit
ber gUrft
ber §ert (75) bie§erren
pnnce, i
gentle-man,
Mr., master,
bie ^enfd^en man, man-
kind
bie 33(umeit flower
plur. only parents
plur. only people
felbft (emphatic) gut good, I
myself, yourself, adv. wel
himself, herself, reic^ rich
ourselves etc. arm poor
ttogen, trug, getragen carry, wear
trinten, trani, getrunten drink
jie^en, jcg, gejogen draw
reiten, titt, ift geritten ride
roerben, Watb or hjutbe, ift gelDor=
ben become, grow, get
d, roie how, as, like
fo , . . toie (or aU) as ... as
Jonberu but, on the contrary
ant 2lbenb in the evening
EXEKCISB i 187
fic^ (reflexive) him- aut^ a^" ju Ipferbe on horseback
self , herself, itself, Qt^ttxn yesterday burc^ with ace. (ArouyA, iy
themselves ^«ute to-day Winter with dat. or ace. behind
man one, iAey, ^eo- ja yes unter with dat. or ace. under
pie nein no anumg
Voix who oft o/^e/t jtDifc^en with dat. or ace. be-
jWei iwo .fe^r verji, much tween.
fec^S sia; fo so Re-read Euk of Ex. 3.
tUxn little, sntall
Part I
A. 1. aBetgabben9iiJ8elnbasaBaff«jultin!en? ^o8 SUabd&en 906
eS i^nen. 2. 5!<^ ^Srte bie fieute im ©atfen f^tcec^en, aUx trer Waten
|ie ? ii) fa^i fie iiicfit, benn eS loutbe (or iparb) fc^on Vtad^t (lit. j( became
already night, say i( «.'it« already growing, or getting, dark). 3.
©ie iDaten geytern fcei unS, §en; ©,, unb iuit tvaven au^ 6ei 3^n«K/ "''w
©ie fanben unS ni^t ju §aufe, unb loit fanben ©it nidjt. 4. (Ss ipurte
(or tuarb) 9tBenb, unb ic^ Ejorte, baft bet SBagen mit ben §en:en fam,
abet \it \a.ij i^n noi^ m(^t (»o* yei), benn er roar not^ ^lintet ben Siiumen
am Siege. 5. 2Ser tntg bie SSiidjer, Sotl fttbp ober baS tUiabi^en?
fiarl trug fie felbft, xif fa^ e5. fSr ^atte fie in bet {his*) §flnb, aber er
tnig fie nic^t ju ben ©Item, ftiie bu fagteft, fonbem ju tJrau {Mrs.) ©.
6. 9(m 3t6enb lam ber ^veunb aug Berlin ; er War jroei 3:age bet mir,
unb iDir gingen aai^ ju euc^, aber i^r toart ixiiijt me^r ju ^aufe bei ben
filtern, i^r toart ft^on in ber ©tabt, unb Wit fanben eu(i& nic^t.
B. 7. ©Q^en ©ie ben Raifet, alS et tarn ? "^a, i^ \a^ i^n, er ritl abet
nic()t JU ipferbe, fonbem et fafe in einem SBagen. ^Wn Bon ben 5Prinjen
faften bei itjm, fie toaten not^i feijr Ilein, ©e(^§ ^fetbe jogen ben fflJagen
buti^ bie Stabt, unb bie 3)Ienfcben ftanben auf ben ©tta^en, an ben 3^en=
ftetn, ja, auf ben Slaiitern ber §dufer unb riefen §urra^ ! 8. ^c^ ging
oft mit ben UKabc^en in ben @arten unb jeigte i^nen bie Slumen. S)ie
^naben folglen unS, unb ttiir ffiielten mit i^nen unter ben Siiunien. 9.
§ert ©. toat fe&t rei($ unb ^tte ein §auS, fo gro^ unb fcbiJn, teie baS
©^lofc beS gitrften. 581an fa^ ^ fe^t gut auS bem ^enfter ba, roo ii^ faft
unb arbeitete, olS ©ie tamen. @« ftanb jtoift^en bem SBege nac^ ber ©tabt
unb ben g^elbetn am guge be« a3erge8. 10. SJie lam ber Jtnabe na^i
$aufe? ging er ju %v.% burc^ ba^ aSaffet? 3iein, ber ®raf unb be«
©rafen ©b^ne !amen ju $ferbe qu« bem Sorfe. 3)er ®raf fa^ ben
flnaben am ffiiaffer ftetjen ; er rief iljn ju fii^, fe^te i^n tor fit^ auf bag
• OennBD onsQ uses the det art Then Englieb reqniros h foaaeaaite adJeialTS (1S8).
188 BXERCISB 4
^pfetb unit titt mit ii^m buic^ ba« 5Baf(cr. 11. ©ie fragtt m\^ : „5Bat
b« ^onn ni(^t geftern bei bit?" unb i(i& antWortett xifvi „3iein, nic^t
geftent, abet et toax Iftute Bei mir," 12. 3>ie 3)iiitt« fa^ ben ©tuber
hti ^abi^enS auf bet Stta^e vor bem $aufe. @ie tief t^n gu ftd^ inS
J^au# unb fagte i^m, V>ai bu mit fagteft, abei et gtauBte ei noft) n\ii)i.
13. 3)aS SBJeib fa^, bafl baS 3Rab(ien fiel. ©ie (105) gab i^r bie §anb
unb fling mit i^t in baS §au8, tpo bie tDluttet be« ^db^enS Ko^nte.
14. ^ie Seute in bem ©orfe atbeiteten 3:ag unb 3ia^i, abet fie loaten
fe^t atm, benn fie atbeiteten nid&t fiit fii^, (onbetn filr ben ®tafen, ben
$etm bed 3)i)tfed, unb bet ®taf toutbe leic^ bun^ bie Seute.
Pakt II
A. 1. 3BaSgab3t«w (Mrs.) S. eui^^eute? @ie ging mit unS in ben
®atten unb gab un« aHflbt^en ©lumen, unb ben Snaben kp^l 2. 3)aS
^ferb ipar !lein unb Wurbe (was gn/wing or gettinrf) taxii) ft^on alt, abet
e8 jog ben SBagen mit ben Sinbem buri^ ba« SSaffet auf ben ©etg.
3. %a,% Sanb btS ^onigS Wat fo f<^3n unb |o ret($, Ifie baS 2anb beS
SaifetS, abet nid^t fo gto|. 4. 8U 5S!er !am geftent mit eut^ in bem
Sagen, i^r flnaben? ©. SWei §etren avA ©etlin. S. 5Bet luaten
fie ? 8. Sie fagten un# niii^t, luet jie maren, abet (te fjjtai^en oft mit
un3 unb fragten vM nat^ bem 9Bege jum ©d&Iog, unb Wit gingen mit
itjnen buri^ bag Iiorf Dot ba« ©(^log be§ g^titften. St SBJaren fie alt ?
8. 3a, f" Karen fe^r alt, aber au(^ fe^r gtofe unb fd^iin, unb ber g^iitft
tarn felbft auf bie ©trafee unb gab i^nen bie §anb. 5. ©laubten @ie,
was baS SRdbc&en fagte ? 9iein, id) glaubte eS nic^l, benn i($ fa^ ben
^Hiann, afe et lam ; er ging nic^t inS §auS jut SRuttet, Wie bag HHabc^en
fagle, fonbem in ben ®arten. Iiic 3Jluttet abet tam awS bem §aufe, gab
i^m baS SJajfet, unb bet Wann ttanf eS unb ging butt^ ben @arten auf
bag 5elb, Wo bie Seute noc& atbeiteten.
B. 6. @t ^btte SBetbet unb fiinber fjintet fic^i auf bem SBege, [ie tamen
auS bem SJorfe unb trugen ©lumen unb S^fet nac^ bet ©tabt. 7. 35ie
SRuttet fe|te ben Snaben unter ben Saum auf bie ®tbe unb gab tljm
©lumen in bie §anb, unb bet Snabe fpiette mit ben ©lumen, ©ie felbft
ging an ben %\\i) unb arbeitete an einem fiteibe ftit bie lod^ter. 8. M.
SBct riti mit ben Sinbetn? ©. 3^ ritt am 2tbenb felbft mit i^nen in bie
©tttbt. 3)ie ^enfd&en ftanben noi^ ouf ben ©tra|en toot ben ^flufetn
unb tebeten noc^ toon bem Saifet unb ben ^rinjen, be3 iiaiferS ©dl)nen.
^an jeigf e un3 au(^ ben SEBagen unb tie fec^S ipferbe, aber bet Saifet War
nic^t me^t ba, fonbetn et Wat fc^jon bei. bem giirften auf bem ©t^loffe,
unb bie ^rinjen au*. 9. grau ©. tief tie 3:o(^tet ju fu$. SJaS aRSbs
EXERCISE 4 189
<$en folgte i^r hux^ baS §au§ in ben ®arten, wo bn Sater unb bie
^riiber waren. Iier SSater fa^ an einem SEift^ie unb ^atte ein Sut^ in
bee ^anb ; bie ^naben abet fatten ^leunbe auS ber @tabt bei fi<^ unb
fangcn unb fjiielten mit i^en unter ben' Sfiumen. 10. 35ort fiauben
liiir, SatI unb i^ : Winter unS, am ^u^e beg SergeS, fa^en Mir bie
©tabt ; Opc un3 bie gelber, unb auf ben gelbem bie Seute auS bem 3)i)rfe,
ttjo bie Gltern tootinten ; unb in bem 35otfe, j«3if(^en ben Saumen, ba^
2)ac() bcS eitetntiaufeS. 11. Iiie Seute ba bei bem S3aum om Sffiefje
toarm teic^ ; fie fatten ein §aue, einen ©arten, einen SBagen unb ein
^ferb, ja, oft pax ^fetbe, fo fi^iin tme bie 5pferbe beS §etm ©., ob«
fte loutben arm, benn jie arbeiteten nid^t. 12, 3Sit fa^en nocfe in bon
©arten Oor bem §auf« ; ti lourbe fc^on Siac^t, unb bie SBBgel fangen ni(^t
me^r, abet bet 3Bagen mit ben gteunben mi bet ©tabt jeigte jit^ not^
nic^t (woi ye^).
Part III
A. 1. You went with herandl wentwitli them. You went on foot
and we rode on horseback ; but you were there before us, for we
did not find the road (found the road not, 607). 2. The daughter
was as handsome as tiie mother, and the son was growing (became)
as tall as the father. 3. The horses came to (an) a pond (water),
but they did not drink. 4. I heai-d the bird on the tree sing, but it
was so small that I did not see where it sat. 5. We asked the boy r
" Who gave you the apple ? " and he answered us fdat.) : " Mother
gave it to me." 6. One saw the emperor often at a window of
the palace in Berlin. 7. Was he not sitting between you and me ?
!No, he was sitting between her and Charles. 8. The parents called
the children out of the garden and gave them the books, and the
children carried them not to brother Charles, as you thought, but
(fonbem, 687) to Mrs. N., as I thought. 9. Behind him on the road
. walked a woman * ; she was very old, but she was walking as fast
(was as good ou foot) as he himself. She had two children with
her (bei fidf), a boy and a girl, and the children were carrying
apples and flowers to (nai)) the city.
B. 10. A. Did you hear father speak ? B. I heard him speak,
but I did not see where he was. Was he in-the house? A.
No, he was in the garden behind the house ; he was standing
there, between the two trees. B. Under the window ? A. Yes,
under the window. B. And what did he say ? did lie call me ?
.:k«Ck>O^IC
IS^O BXBItCISE 4
A. No, lie did not call you, he was speaking with a gentleman from
the city, but I did not hear what they were saying. B. Did they
come into-the house ? A. Tiiey went through tlie liouse on to (auf)
the road to the city, and I saw them no longer, for it was already
getting dark. 11. Were yon not at our house yesterday (yesterday
at our house, bei unS), Mr. N. ? Yes, Mrs. S., I was at your house,
but I did not find you at home. 12. How did the people in the
village there become so poor ? didn't they work ? They worked
night and day, but for the count, not for themselves, and the count
grew rich through them. 13. The man was going up (auf) the hill.
We went with him, and he showed us a village at-the foot of the
hill, and in the village, between the trees, a roof; it was the roof
of the castle where the count, the lord of the village, lived, 14. The
mother was not yet (yet not) here when the daughters came; she
came in the evening, after them.
C. 15. Did you Ijelieve what the boy said ? Yes, I believed him
(dat.), for I found him and the sons of the gentleman in the garden,
and the boy had an apple in his hand ; the gentleman himself gave
him tlie apple. 16. The horses were drawing a carriage through
the streets of tiie village, and in the carriage sat two princes,
brothers of the emperor ; and the people were following them and
were shouting : " Hurrah ! " 17. A. Had you friends at your
house {bti fi(i&) on the day when I came ? B. Yea, we had friends
from Berlin at our house. A. Who were the friends ? B. Mr. S.
with wife ((^rau) and daughter; they were here six days (six days
here *). 18. The father often set the boy (set the boy often t) be-
fore him (refl.) on -the horse and rode with him through the water.
19. Mrs. S. was very rich and also very good ; she saw the children
in (auf) the street before the bouse, called them to her (refl.) and
gave them dresses and books and apples and flowers; and the
children went home and showed the parents what she gave them
(them gave). 20. How old was the girl ? Slie was six, as old
as brother Charles. 21. The horses came home from -the (Uom)
field, and the men gave them water to drink. 22. It was not yet
dark and I thought Charles was still working. I stepped (went)
under the window and called "Oharles, Charles !" but he did not
show himself. I went into the house and asked Charles's (itatlS,
no apostrophe) mother, and what do you think ? the boy was already
• Adverbial eipreaainns of time ususUy precede thosK of place (609) .
EXERCISE 6 191
asleep. 23. The gentleman came out of the house, went through
the garden with us and showed us the road to (nai$) the village ;
but we did not find you. You were no longer in the village. 24.
He gave the boy a book, but the book was bo large, it fell out of
the boy's hand (fell to the boy out of the haud, 489) on the ground.
Exercise 5
The present indicative of weak verbs : \6} lobe 329, \if tebe 331
i^ folfle 333 ; also t<^ ^be 310, 311.
Vocabulary
bet Seller bie Better teach&r bie ©(^ule bie ©(^uUn school
'oai ^immtx i)\t ^immtx room bie ©c^wefUt bie ©c^weftexn sister
bet Seinb bie g^einbe enemi/ bet ©olbaf bie ©olba'ten soldier
iai ®e(b bie ©elber monei/ bie 'X1)ux bie 3:t!uten door
flt^iren, ftt^rte, gefii^ lead bleiben, blieb, ift geblieben remain,
leben, lebte, getebt live stay
lernen, lemte, geletnt leam, study Kegcn, tag, gelegen lie, be situated
fi^iden, fi^i({te, gefi^iift setid ne^tnen, na^m, genotmnen take
fu^en, fu^te, gefut^t seek, search, ftetben, ftatb, ift gefiotbeit die
look for jie^en, jog, ift gejogen march, move
genug enough bort ^Aere, ywider lange adv. long
jung young immei always nut only
franl sick, ill je^t w>w gegen with ace, against, towards
Part I
A. 1. SBer fii^tte bte ©olbaten gegen ben 5^i"b? %%x fiaifet felBft
fU^tte jie inS J^elb, unb et fanb bie g^einbe tjintet bem Serge ; abet fie
blieben ba nit^t, fonbetn jogen in bie Stabt, alS fie fa^en, ba^ ioer fiaifec
mit ben ©olbaten tarn. 2. ©t^idt bet §ett bit niiiit oft @elb au^ bet
©tabt ? 3", er fc^itft mir immet ®elb, abet et too^nt je^t nic^t mclit in
ber ©tabt, fonbetn Quf {in) bem Sanbe. 3. ^c^ folgte i^m in baS Bim=
met, unb er jeigte mit, too bie S6iic()et Waten ; fie tagen auf bem 'X\\^t,
abet nii^t toot bem 5«nf'f»/ ^ie ba^S SRiibd^en fogte. Bit na^men fie
bom a:if(^e unb fd^iiten \\i an bie gltetn in bet ©tabt. 4. getnt fiati
gut in bet ©c^ule ? %&, bet Septet fagt, bet Snabe tctnt je^t immet gut,
unb er lobt i^n oft, 5. ffiie lange blieben ©ie bei 0etm unb (Jrau ©.
auf bem Sanbe? SEBit blieben fei^S 3^age bei i^nen, unb eS War fe^i
f^Bn ba. 6. a. ©udjen ©ie bie fiinbet? ». %ix, \^ fuc^e (508) fte
192 EXBRCISE 5
ft^on lange. 9t. 3*^ glaube, tc^ ffixt fie ttor bet ^^^tit im ©airten.
9. @J)ieIen ji* ? %. 5Rein, jie lemen, Was fie ju lenten fjabtti fut bie
©c^ule. 8. ®ut, i(i& glaubte, fte fpielten noc^. 6. Det SBogen ftanb
fcljon bor ber %ffiix, ain bie ?Bfetbe Waten noi} nic^t ba, 8. SL SJat
5rau @. nii^t bie ©i^Wefter beS §errn 9t. ? unb lag jie nii^t fd^on Irani,
ols er ftarb ? 8. 3a, fie wai f^on lange Bor iljm Irani, unb jie (ebte
an<if n\^t lange me^r (aud^ nid&t = nor or no( either), benn fie ftaifc
fed&S ^^age nac^ i^m. S. SJie alt tear §err 9i., als er ftatb? fo all,
Wie ^ftau ©. ? 8. D nein, er Mar nic()t me^r fe^ir jung, aber er tear
lange (by far) ni^t fo alt, mie bie ©(^toefUr,
B. 9. tDIan (emt fo lange, Mie man leW. 10. §o6en ©ie ®elb bei
|i(^? 3a, ttber i(^ ^be nic^t ®e[b genug ftir ©ie unb ffir mii$, \^
^abi nur genug ftir micE) felbft. 11. 81. 5Ber too^nt in bem §aufe
jtrifc^en ben Saumen bort auf bem Serge? 8. Sin §en 3H. Wc^nt
je^jt bort. 8C Unb hiD^te bet i^ ni(^t ein g^reunb Son ^ff^n in bem
§oufel 8. 3^, ein §m: ?!., abet er fanb ba« §a«« nic&t me^r gtofe
unb f(l^i5n genug unb jog in bie ©tabt. 12. Sie ^au fU^rte mid^ buri^
ben Otarten in bad §aug unb jeigle mir ein S'^tmet, abet i(| na^m e§
ni(^t, benn eS tear fe^r Ilein unb ^atte auH) nti^t g^enfter genug. 13.
lHai fragt ber Wann ben Slnaben ba auf bet ©ttage ? @r fragt i^ nad)
(inquires for or after) einem §erm 33., unb bet ^nabe fagt, §err 39.
tco^nt in bem §aufe bort Winter ben 8aumen. 14. SL '^6) \oij bie
©B^ne bed 5KanneS ouS bem ©arten tommen unb ^iJrte fie au^ \fxtiiftn.
8. ©prac^en fie nid^t Bon ^ferben ? aL 3a, fie reben tmmer Bon $fer=
ben. 15, ®eS ^flbd^enS ^teunbtn War ju $aufe, abet fie Mar Iran!
unb ging nii^t mit un«. 16. 3;ie Seute im 3)orfe fd^den bie Sinbet
je^t nit^t in bie ©i^ule, fonbetn in bie ©firten ober ^elber, too fie felbft
atbeiten. 17. §abt i^r nci^ Spfel im ©arten? 9iein, je^t nii^t me^r,
18. a>ie Slumen auf bem %\\iii Bot bem ^enftet toaren Ben ^rau 91.,
fie \^\dit fie geftetn an ^Jlutter. 19. §Bren ©ie bie jttnber bort in ber
©d^uie? 3a, i^ ^Bte, bafi bet Sebter ftagt unb baft tie itinber ant=
tootten. 20. 53it fi^idten bem gefiret bie Stiller for fet^S lagen (six
days ayo) but(^ eineii Snaben.
Part II
A. 1. fiam baS 2Kabd&en ni($t geflem ju eu(^? '^a, fie tarn nixi^ ber
©d^ule ju unS, aber fie btieb nii^t lange. 2. 3)ie ©olbaten toaren fi^on
am 9lbenb auf bem Siege nat^ bet ©tabt, unb ber ^ttnj felbft fii^rte fie ;
er ritt Bot i^nen ju i^ferbe. 3. ©t^idt i^t bie Spfel in bie ©tabt? 3a,
toir fd^iden fie immer an bie eitem ; fie too^nen je^t in ber ©tabt.
EXERCISE 6 193
4. %. 5Ba«fu(^ft bu, ©d^Weftet? ». ^ij fu*e RatlS Sui^. St 3(^
gloube, 5tair[ ^at eg felb^ no<^. 6. @a^ft bu i^n mit bem 9u(^e?
9l- S^ fi& '^" "•'* einemSu^t in bet Oanb, unb er ging in ben ©arten,
alS bu !(imft. 5. ®a« 5)tabt^en na^m bie Sl)fel Bon ber ®rbe, trug fte
ini §au« unb %ab fie bet SRuttet. 7. ^i) \atf au« bem Senftet ^iet in
bie 3^en(tet beS ©i^ul^aufeS bott. Die fiinbec Waten in bem 3''"™e'^/
unb i<^ ^Btte jie mit bem Secret ftnfien. 7, „Raxl !" rief bie ©i^hiefter,
„i)'6t^t bu nidit, bafi bet SBatet bii^ ftagt, ioai bu ju lernen ^ft ?" abet
S.atl ■anthJDttete ber ©(^Weftet nii^t, obet et ^6tte nii^t, loag jie fagfe.
B. 8. Sherman ^lalte 2[tlanta je^t Ijintet fi^ ; et fii^rte bie ©olbaten
but(^ba« Sanb unb jog mit i^nen gegen Satoannaf), h)o ber geinb lag; (ic
tvaren lange, lange auf bem SBege, unb bie geinbe blieSen nit^f in bet
©tabt, alg ©tjerman torn, fonbetn jogen nac^ S^arleSton. 9. 3)ie Sltetn
beS Snaben leben ni($t me^r, fie ftatben, aU et noi^ fe^t tiein toat ; abtx
ex ^at jntei Stiibet unb jwei ©^weftetn. 10. ^ir ^tten nic^t @e[b
genug, ali i^t iamt, aber 58ater fi^idfte unS ftl&on m6} jWei Sagen mct»t.
II. i)er SKenfi^ tetnt nic^t nut in bet Si^ule, (onbem fo lange, hiie et
lebt. 12, ^t^ giitften Sanb tear nut tlein, abet ti wax fo teic^ unb
fdfeiin, Wie ba0 Sanb beS ^finig3, 13, ^ie Seute in bem 5Dotfe atbeiten
immer, 3:ag unb 9tad(tt, abet fte ^aben nit^i genufl ju leben, benn fie
arbeiten nut fitt ben ©rafen auf bem ©(^Icffe bort, 14, Sal mai^t ber
§ett ba an bem 3:i|(^e uor bem j^enftet ? ®t ^ot ein 93u(^ Dor (ic^ unb
jeigt eS bem flnaben. 15. 3)ie %xaa tuat teii^, fie natjm ben Anaben ju
fi6} inS §aug, Wie einen ©ofjn, unb fdjiifte i^n in bie St^ule, unb bet
Snabe levnte gut. 16. gg toutbe ft^on 9ta(i^t, abet bie 2ll&nnec unb
SSeibet waren no(^ nit^t ju ^aufe, (ie atbeitefen noc^ auf bem Jelbe.
17. SBot ber X^x be3 §aufeS fafe ein 5Dlann mit einem Su(^e in ber
§anb, eg toot bet Setter ber Sinbet, abet bie iiinbet luaren nii$t me^r bei
i^m, fie f|)telten unb fangen ft^on unter ben S9aumen ^intet bem §aufe.
18. 53ie lange tooljnt (508) ber §etr fi^on ^ier? ^i^ glaube, fo lange
h)ie i<$ felbft ; ober er Wo^nte f^on Uot mir ^ier ; i^ ^orte, bag et {rant
tear, ate i<^ tarn, unb i(^ fal^ i^n nit^t oft. 19. g^rou ©. tiat je^t nut
eine S^oi^ter, aber fie ^ttt au(^ einen So^n ; er lag lange trant unb patb
Dor fei$S lagen ; er tear noi^ fe^r jung.
Pabt III
A. 1. Who is leading the soldiers against the enemy ? The prince
himself ia leading them. 2. Mr, N. sent ns the books from the
city; I think it was six days ago, and we are sending him now the
194 BXBBCISB 6
money for the books. 3. The children are followii^ the teacher
through the streets, and he leads them up (auf) the hill and shows
them from there the town and the villi^s. 4. I went into the
room and I found the book ; it was lying, not, as you said, on the
table, but (fonbem, 687) under the table. 5. Charles studies well
in (the) school, but he does not work enough at home ; Charles's
si8t«r does not study so well in (the) school as he, but slie works
more at home. 6. Are Mr. and Mrs. M. still living? Mrs. M. is
still living, but Mr. M. [is] not. 7. Are the gentlemen there talk-
ing about (toon) books ? Oh no, they always talk (see foot-note tj
page 190) about money or about horses. 8. Was the girl ill very
long {very long ill) ? As long as the boy ; I think she died two
days after him. 9. The rooms in the house were large enough, but
the windows were very small, and the doors too.
B. 10. Did the soldiers lead the horses to-the (anS) water, or did
they ride on them into - the water ? The soldiers led them only to -
the water, but they set the boys of the village upon the horses, and
the horses went with the boys into - the water and drank. Charles's
horse, however, went with him through the water into the fields
yonder, where the people from the village were working. 11. I looked
out of the window of the room, but I saw the woman with the child no
more, for it was already getting dark. 12. The day was fine. The
birds in the trees were ainging, and the children under the trees
were playing ; and between the tree yonder and the door of the
house (§auSt^tir, 52) sat a man behind a table with books; lie was
the teacher of the children. 13. One saw soldiers on horseback in
the village, they were seeking the enemy (plur.), but did not find
them, and the people of the village did not tell them where they
were. 14. Were [there] only two horses before the carriage ? No,
six; it was the king himself, with two of (uon) the princes. He was
Bitting between them; and soldiers on horseback were riding before
and behind the carriage. 16. They send the children to a teacher
in the city, for the school in the village here is not very good and
the teacher is (already) old.
C. 16. The woman lives now in a house on the hill; she has
atill a son, but the daughter was always in poor health (ill)
and died very young. 17. It was in the evening ; we were sitting
under a tree in - the garden and did not see the man come (saw
the man not come). He went into Charles's room and took the
money from - the table. 18. A. What are you looking for, Charles?
D.n.iized by Google
EXERCISE 8 195
B. T am looking for a book. A. The book from the teacher ?
B. Yes. A. Mother lias it; I gave it to lier. B. Was mother
herself in the room ? A. Yes, she was here, but she took the
book and went into the garden. 19. The soldiers stayed only a
day in the town, for the enemy was already in the king's country
and was marching against them. 20. What are the children doing
now ? are they still playing? No, they were playing in (auf) the
street, but I called them into - the house, and they are now working.
21. I think the parents sent them the money by a boy, but the boy
did not give it to them (gave it them not, 607). 22. It was good
of you to come (that you came), Mrs. N., for the boy was very sick
yesterday {yesterday very sick). 23. The soldiers were marching
through the town, but the children did not follow them, for they
were still in (the) school. 24. Father and I were standing on the
hill ; we saw beneath us, on the road at the foot of the hill, two
gentlemen in a carriage. We found the gentlemen were father's
friends from Berlin ; they stayed two days at our house. 25. The
man with the hook in his hand was the teacher of the children,
26. They came upon a road, and it led to the village. 27. The
enemy was outside of (bdt) the village, behind the mountain yonder.
Exercise 6
Pronominal words with strong endings only : 125, 126, 128.
Vocabulary
1
biefrt, biefe, biefeS this, this one jebrt, jebc, jebtS, every, every one,
jeitct, jenc, jenee that, that one each
tselt^er, ioetdic, toetf^eS which,
which one, who
Inflected with the strong endings (see 152) and used as pronouns
or as adjectives (102).
2
meinrr, mcine, mtmtS mine unferrt, unfere, unfereS ours
beiner, brine, beints thine, yours eucrer, euerc, mere* yours
(einer, feint, feineS his i^ter, i^w, i^9 theirs
i^ter, i(»rf, itjrre hers 3t»Wf 3^''r 3^«* J'^'"*
feinft, [eine, feine9 its einer, rine, einefi one
teiner, feint, trintS none
Inflected like the words in 1 aliove, but used only as pronouns.
EXERCISE S
mein, mtinc, mein my «nf«, unfew, mifet your
brin, brim, brin thy, i/our tun, niert, euec your
ftin, (rinr, fdn his i^r, i^rt, i^t tfietr
i^, i^re, i^t her 3^, ^^te, g^r j/ouj-
friit, (rinf, frin i'* rin, rint, rin «, ««, one
Inn, feiiK, Irin no
Inflected like the words in 1 and 2 above, except in the nom.
sing, inasc. ; nom. and ace. sing, neiit., which have no ending; used
only as attributire adjectives (see 137 and also 130). — ©n eine
dn, meaning a or nn, has already been learned as the indefinite
article ; it means one only when emphatic.
ber §unb We $unbc doff bie Srite bie Sritea side, page
bet Srteg bit ^itegt v>ar bi* ^ni bie ^vitn lime
iDorten, iportete, 0eiuartet imiV laufcn, lief, tfl gclaufcn run
ettta^ something, gome iDeil because
vxi^ii nothing tDieber again, back
fiber with dat. or ace. over across, Ex. 3. Rule
Rule. In dependent clauses introduced by a relative or interro-
gative word (as too, tpel(^er) or by a subordinating conjunction (as
ba^, aH, tvril), the personal part of the verb stands last.
Pabt I
A. 1, 2luf h)el(^*r ©ette ber ©trafie flanben euett §dufer? Unfei
§flu^ ftanb ttuf bieftt Seite, unb feiiwS * flanb auf jener, abet man fo^ e8
ni^t fe^i gut bon ^ter, benn Dot feintr 2pr ftanben Saume unb upi un^^
ferer • au^. 2. Wix B'lfl*" fleflem mit S^rem Sotjne in unfeien ©atten
unb fuf^ten Spfel, abet Wit fanben ni(^l eineii. 3. SQJaf^ington fU^rte feint
Sotbaten ant 9(benb jeneS 3;ageS ubet ben SlelaWate, jog mit i^nen geflcn
Itenton, Wo bie j^einbe lagcn, unb na^m bieft ©tabt. 4, "^if (latte jhsei
3immet, aU \i) bei meiner Sc^Weftet in ©etlin Wo^nte, jebeS mit jwet
(Jenftetn, unb ii^ fa^ qu3 jebem genftet nur ©aufet, HKenft^en, aBagcn,
^ferbe unb §unbe, abet leinen Saum, leint Slume, tein gelb unb tein
JUaffer. 5, SBie lara e^, bafe fie bein Su^ naffm unb niijt i^reS ? ©ie
fu(^te lifxti tange, aber fie fanb ti nii^t, unb ii$ q,0.i ifer meinte, Weil fie
(eine ^n\ meljr ^atte ju Warten. 6, 5llein So^n, ti$ ^Bre, bag bet 2eif=
■'erintj — ftin^iu* (nait.),l>E'nco the neuter ending:; united — unlein X^iic (r«iu
EXERCISE e 197
ler beineit ^eunb Jtarl jebctt %aQ IcU ; lute oft aitt loU er bit^ ? ^d^
dtaube, bu arbeiteft nii^t unb lemft ni<^tS in bei @(i^uU.
B. 7. „2e6enbeine eitent noi^, meinSinb?" fragte (J'dw ®- n^Rein
aSater lebt nic^t me^r," ontWorlete baS anabd^en, „atier meine URuttet l«6t
noc^. ®ie ioo^nt in icnctn 2}otfe boit unb arbeitet immei: fin unfeien
§ettn, ben gtitften auf ban Si^lojle, unb fai feint S^iic^ter." „Unb Wa«
Wot bein SBaler, ala et not^ tebte ?" „a)teine abutter fagt, ber Sater luar
au(^ bei unfectm §en;n, aber et jog mit i^m in ben firieg unb !om nit^t
loieber." 5K!ir gaben bem SJiabcfeen ttioai ©etb, unb \u lief nodfi $aufe
ju i^rer 3Jiutter. 8. §aben bie 2eute, ml^t in biefem §aufe Wo^en,
ieine Rinber? 3tein, fie ^aben je§t feine, aber fie tiatten jtoei, einea ©o^n
unb eine S^od^ter. SDet <So^ fiel ira ilriege, unb bie loditer toat lange
Irani unb ftatb au(^ ; fie patb an bem Jage, al8 Sie ju una lamen.
Iiie Seute in jenem §aufe aber ^aben jtoei finoben, unb ber Septet fagt,
bie @[tern fi^iden fie nid^it in bie S^ule. ^ie ^inber ftiielen immer auf
bei @tra|ie unb letnen nii^t^. 9. Unfen Anaben ^aben noc^ leincn §unb,
aber i^r ^reunb Rarl ^at eincn, tvelc^et i^m oft na^ ber ®^u(e ^Igt unb
toot bet Sc^ult^iir auf (for) feinen Oettn toortel. 10. ^u ^atteft lein
®etb, fagft bu? gab idi bit nii^t geftem ettoaS? 3a, aber eg war nii^t
genug. 11. Z^ fn#le ^^ten SBatet in Z'ifxtm 3inimet, aber id^ fanb i^
ba ni(^t ; et ioax in feincnt. 13. 6ie lamtn in einem SSagen mit eincm
iPferbe.
Part II
A. 1, Sir ^ben fet^d 3I))feIbdume in unfercm ®arten, aber h)it ^ben
biefeS 5ia^t nit^t eineit Stpfel. 2. SL §at ber §etr feinen greunb bei
fi(^? ». >. «. aBelc^en? ». gr ^at feinen ^reunb fiatl bei fid^.
3. Unfert $fetbe liefen fo gut, toie euere, abet nic^t fo gut, Wie feine.
4. ^i) loax geftem auf bem Jelbc unb fa^, bofe bie Jtinbet avi bem Iiotfe
auf jener 6eite beS S9etge« fjiet jur ©i^ule gingen. §aben bie Beute bott
feine ©t^ule? D ja, fie ^aben eine ©i^ute, abet ber Scoter in fenem
®otfe toax fianf, unb er fd^irfte feine flinber ju unfertm. 5, Sie naljra
baS @e[b Dom 2^ifc^e, ging in i^r 3immet unb lam nic^t loiebct. 6, ©ein
33atet unb meiner iitaren Sriibet. aJieinet trar arm, feintr mat xexi},
abet ei Wurbe mi) axm, benn bie geinbe famen in unfere Stabt, na^men
i^m (Jram him) fein ®elb unb fti&tten i^n felbft mit \\i) in i^r Sanb, too
er Irani Wurbe unb ftarb. 7. liefer Jtnabe ioax noc^ fe^t Hein unb ging
nod^ nii^t )ut Seville, aU id) ^iet toat, abet jencr War fd^on gto^ unb
arbeitete jebeu lag mit feinen SItetn auf bem gelbe ober in intern ®atten.
B. 8. 5IBo hJD^nt bet SRann, wed^eu Wit t»eule Wiebet mit Storl bei beiner
©d^Weftet fa^en? wo^te et nid[it bei flatl, aii i^ ^iet bei eu(^ Wat?
D.n.iized by Google
198 EXERCISE 6
^a, abtx et hio^nt je^ au^ ^ier in unfettm §aufe ; er Wo^nt iiber mir
unb m ein 3iinmer fo ft^Bn toie bieftS, nur nii^t fo gro^. 9. 9tn jebtr
®(tte bei "Hifiix ftanb nn Saum unb unter iebetn Saume ein ^tfi^, unb
ouf jtbcm ^ifd^e (agen jtuei @<^ulbu(^et ; abet bte jlnaben wartn Ivieber
tti^t bo. S8it fanbcn au(^ teinen Bon i^nen im §aufe ober in bem ©orten
l^intet bem §aufe, unb Irir Warteten nit^t lange auf fte, hjeil roir teine Qnt
tne((t fatten unb unfer Sagen fc^cn Dor bet i^iir ftanb. 10. ©rant unb
©^ennan lamen mit i^ren ©olbalen auS bem flriege unb jogen burt^ bie
Strofeen Bon 3iBaf^ington, abet Sincoln lebte gu (at) jenet ^eit nit^t
me^v. 11. M. SJor ba8 Sudi auf bem lifc^e brines obet feineS, Savl?
S. ea mar nii^t mrineS ; i4) glaubte, e« tear 3£)re«, §err S. 9(. ^Irin,
i<!^ ^atte IrineS bet mir, aber brine St^roefter fud^te itir ^uc^, aU id^ fie
fa^ ; i(^ glaube, ti tvar i^reS. 13. ^ene §erren reben immer nur Don
^ferben cber bon ^unben ober toon @elb ; aber man fagt, eincr Uon t^nen,
jener an bet a:^iir bort, ift (is) fo arm, baf; er lein ^ferb, trineii §unb
unb audi) tein ©elb ^at. 13. 3og nic^t riner uon i^rcn Q6i}ntn mit
unfeitn ©olboten gegen bte gei^be, unb irar e§ nic^t flarl? 9lein, e§
War frin Snibet, benn Karl War noc^ nic^t alt unb gro^ genug.
Pabt III
A. 1. Which book did he give yon, his • or mine * ? 2. A. Does
this road lead (leads this road) to the city ? B. Yes, and that
[one, 272] also. A. And which leads over the liill ? B. That
road yonder leads over the hill. 3. My brother has two horses and
also two carriages, but I have only one horse and one carriage.
4. Did the tree stand on his land or on theirs ? It stood on my
land, which lay between his and theirs. 5. I looked out of every
window of the room, but I saw no mountain. 6. My books were as
old as yours, but mine weve still good and yours not. 7. Wliat did
he answer you when yon asked him ? Xothing, but he took me by
the hand, led me into hia house and gave me some money for the
children of the woman. 8. I have now no time to play, my child,
for I am working at (an) a dress for yon. 9. The dog tan out of
the house and across the street when he saw that his master was
coming home. 10. On which side of the roof did you see the bird ?
On this side.
B. 11, The children were standing in front of the schoolhouse
(@(^ul^u3, 52) and were waiting for (auf with ace.) their teacher.
•au — hli book, tnlfH — mj Ix
.:k«Ck>0^1c
EXEKCI8E 6 199
The teacher did not come, for he was ill ; and the children went
home again (again home). 12. Our father died before yours, as
you say ; but he was not so old as youra. 13. Every dog follows
his mastei'. 14. This man was very rich, but he had not one friend
in the city, because he gave no money to the people who were poor
(gave to the people who were poor no money). 15. I asked the
man ; " How long have you been working (work you already, 508)
for this gentleman ? " and he answered : " I have been working for
him six days now (work already six days for him)." 16. A. Who
was with (bei) the king? B. Only one of (Bon) the princes.
A. Which [one, 272] was it? B. It was Prince Charles; his
brother did not come, because he was ill. 17. I hear that Mrs. N.
is now living with her daughter, and no longer with her son.
18. I saw the boys sitting at -the table (at -the table sit); each
had a book in his hand, but none of them (boti t^nen, 483) was
looking into hia book, for they heard that the soldiers were march-
ing through the streets. 19. His house had more rooms, but it was
not so large as ours, and the room in which he lived and did his
work (worked) was very small and had but one window. 20. "Not
one man from our village fell in the war," said he, but he did not
tell ua that none (plur.) from their village went to the wai' with
our soldiers (with our soldiers into the war marched).
C. 21. A. Who lives now above you ? B. The gentleman of whom
we were speaking yesterday and whom we saw at your sister's.
A. Yes, yes, Mr. S. Isn't he working at a book ? B. Yes, night
and day. 22. My parents were poor, his were rich, but they also
became poor when the war broke out (came). 23. He plays now as
well as his sisters, but not yet so well as his brother. 24. I saw
that she took only one of the books. 25. We have no flowers in
our garden so beautiful as yours, but we have more trees. 26. Was
the money on Charles's table his or yours ? It was mine, but I
gave it to him because he had none or because he had not enough.
27. This man was poor and already old, but that [one] was rich
and still young. 28. Have you [any] money with you? No, I
hav'n't any (202). 29. A. One of his sons went (marched) with
our soldiers to (into) the war. B. Which [one, 272] was it ? A. I
think it was Charles. 30. Didn't she give the man some money ?
Yes, she gave him some, for he was old and very poor. 31. Which
of the girls was the friend of your sister ? The girl at your side
of the table. 32. The gentleman whom we saw at father's yester-
200 EXERCISE 7
day (see foot-note " on p. 190) was a friend of the count. 33. Their
teacher came eveiy evening and played with their brother ; he also
sang with their sister. 34. She gave the man nothing, because she
herself had nothing. 35- These dresses are for your children, and
those for ours. 36. I took my brother's horses because mine were
still working in - the field. 37. The girl showed me the house in
which Mrs. S. is now living, but I did not find Mrs. S. at home ;
she was in the city, at her sister's, 38. I did not stay so long as
her friends (fern.), because I had no time, 39. How poor he was !
he had only money — no friends.
Exercise 7
Pronominal words with strong endings only (continued in the
vocabulary below). — The present indicative of strong verbs : ii^
fe^e 403 (see 393), \^ lomnte 405 ; also the present indicative of feiti
312, and of Joetben 314 (see 392).
Vocabulary
1
aU- all einig- some, a, few fcli^- such, sttch a
anber- other man^- -mani/, many a biel- much, mant/
beib- both me^Tet- several wenig- few, little
These words are used as pronouns and as adjectives. They are
here given in their atem-fotma and, up to Ex. 9, will occur with the
strong endings only.
2
ber Srunnen bie Sninnen well hai 3;ier bie %Hxt animal, beast
tier 6fe( bie @fel donkey bie Hirt^e bie ^iii^eit church
bet UJloigeit bie 3)totflen morning bie Sonne bie ©onnen sun
ber Slwf; bie gltifif river bie Stunbe bie ©tunben hour
bie Su^ bie Sii^e mw §anS John or Jack
laufen, laufte, gefttlift b-uy ^elfen, ^alf, ge^olfen help
effen, a.%, gegelfen eat, dine treten, trat, ift getreten tread, step
bumm stupid, dull, fd^Ie^t bad, poor oben above, up-stairs
foolish fd^neU quick, fast unten below, down-stairs
faul lazy (jjflt late ^eute^orgen thismom-
flet|ig diligent, in- ftiff still, quiet ing
dustrious bamit therewith, ictih ^eute SlBenb to-night
frii^ early it, with thvm tuenn if when, whenever
^i\% hot nun wow, well barum why
mtibe tired Dor einer ©tunbe aw hour ago
BXBKC1815 7 201
Part I
A. 1. Sein Anabe iDiti) fi^on ft^i gro^, meiner ^leibt fo flein, Wie er
ift ; abet fie finb Iteibe f(eigtg, unb bet 2e^er lo&t fie oft. 2. aWan fagt,
bie Seute in jeiiem §aufe finb fe^r arm. 3iie %tau ift immer Irani, ber
UKann Wirb alt unb arbeitet je^t nid&t me^r, unb leiner Ijitft (392) il^men.
3Barum geben ©ie i^en ni^t etWaS ®elb ? ober glauben @ie, baft fie
ni(^t fo arm fmb, Wie man fagt? 3, SBit tauften nit^t affe feine SSuc^et,
fonbetn nuc Wenige, benii toit fatten nit^t ®elb genug, unb manrfjf tnaren
aui^ fc^on fe^r alt unb f(^Ie(^t, 4. ^irau ©. geljt oft mit ben aUdbdien
in ben ©arten, jeigt i^en bie Slumen unb giebt (393) i^nen einigc fur
i^re 5Kutter. 5. ©inige Don ben ©olbaten, loelt^e mit unfetem ^prinjen
in ben Srieg jogen, fielen ; anbere tourben Irani unb ftatben im Sanbe
ber fjeinbe, abet biete lomen Wieber nai) Oaufe unb arbeiten je^t loieber
unlet (amotiff) ung im ^orfe. 6. 2)et dfel trat nun an ben Stunnen
unb fa^ fid), unb bie ©onne aui), im SJaffer. „9Bie grofe unb loie fd^on
i^ bin !" ^pvad) et ju feinem ^reunbe, bem $ferbe, „unb loie Ilein bie
©onne ift !" ©in ©fel ift ein Sfel unb Bleibt immet fo bumm, Wie er ift.
7. aBie biele Siri^en ^t euete ©tabt ? 'St^i, abet nii^t aHe ftnb fo
gro^ unb fo reid^, toie unfere ^ier ; einige finb fe^r Ilein unb otm, 8. Sftn=
bete §erren ^ben ou(^ ^ferbe, §ert ©., aber leinet ^at foli^c loie ^^xt.
SBie finned fie laufen unb toie f(^bn fie finb ! 9. 3nan((icr inabe ge^t in
bie <S^nU unb letnt nit^tg, hjeil er faul ift unb nic^t genug ju Oaufe
atbeitet. ^Senige Anaben finb fo bumm, ba^ fie nic^tS lernen, loenn fie
nut flei^ifl finb.
B. 10, ^d) ftagte ^eute SKorgen einen Snaben, ioeli^et mit me^tereit
DXab^en auf ber ©trafee \f\tlU, na6} (about) SongfeHoloS ^au&, unb et
jeigte ti mit. 6^ jle^it an ber Srott[e= Strode unb ift fe^t att, aber gtofe
unb ft^ttn. 3Han \\tift oben aui ben ^enftem, ober aui^ loenn man unten
Dot bem §aute fte^ft, iibn ben S^arleSsglufe nai^ Sroottine, unb bie 2eute
fagen, ba^ ^aftnngton aut^ in biefem §Qufe too^nte, al5 er in (Sambribge
mat. 11. ffiie biele Kinbet ^at ber giirft, toeHer bort in bem ©i^Ioffe
ioo^nt ? ®r ^at me^rere ©ij^ne, abet leine a:ftd^ter. ^if glaube, er ^t
fec^S SB^ne. 3iur jtuei Don iffnm finb je^t bei iljm ju §aufe. aSon
fie^it fie oft beibe burii) unfer ®orf reiten, unb man ^Ott fie ]^on, Wenn
fie auS bem ©d^Ioffe auf bem Serge lommen, benn jeber ijat immet me^s
retf §unbe bei fit^. 12. ®S wirb je^t 9tbenb. 9Bir Ijeren bie SSBgel auf
ben SSdumen ni((it meljt fingen ; Wit ^lOren nur not^, Wie bie Seute ]p&t
mit i^ren 23agen unb ^fetben unb Jtii^en »om Jlfelbe (ommen, SlQe fmb
miibe, ^enft^en unb Here, benn eS War om 3:age fe^r ^ei| in ber ©onne.
33ie ^augftauen Worten f(^Dn Dot bet %^iix auf i^te 3)iannet (husbands)
202 EXERCISE 7
unb Sii^e, ^ie I6i$ter atbeiten not^ ^er unb ba im Oaufe. 3>ie
Kinbet fi^en f^on am lif^ unb ef(en, ober fte fcfilafen fc^on. 9io(i^ eine
(lit. i/e( one, i.e. awofAw) ©htnbe, unb baS 33orf ift ftiH. 13. §ang
ftanb geftem 5Rorgen fc^on frii^ oben ouf bein Serge unb rief eud^, als i^r
noi) unten am gulte fa^et, @r tatn tciebet }u eu(^ unb ^alf eui^ auf (u;>)
ben Serg, abet t^c luart atte (o miibe, alS i^r oben Wart, ba^ i^t nii^t
fa^t, Wie bie ©otbaten au6 bet Stabt !omen unb titer ben [Jluft in un(et
3)orf jogen, bet SSnig mit beiben ^prinjen ju *Pfetbe »ot ilmen, 14. ©t
nal^m ba^ @elb, toelcEteS fein ^atet i^m geftem Stbenb gab, ritt bamit
na^ bet ©tabt unb (aufte fii$ bie fed^S SBtidjet, Don toel^en fetn Septet
Dot einiger ^t\i mit i^im fptat^. 15. ©ie fe^en {will see, present for
future, 607) bie Sonne no^ jWif^en ben Saumen bort unb bem 'Siaijt
jeneS §aufe«, Wenn 6ie fi^nell (iilO) am f^*"!'**^ tteten ; an biefeS ^iet,
ni(^t an ieneS, abet fc^neU 1
Part II
A. 1. 5E3o ift flarl? Er figt f(i&on loiebet auf bem 9tl)fe(baum unb \%i
Sljfel. 2. «. @e^p (sAa?; yow go, 507) bu ^eute jut ilitt^e ? ». 5Benn
bu mit mit ge^tft. SL 3n njeld^e ? ©. ^n jene bott o6en auf bem Setge,
9L @ut, id^ ge^e mit bit, unb meine Si^weftet au(l(i. 3. @t fe^te ^ang
auf ben @fel, unb §anS ritt auf bem @fel in bie @tabt. ^e^teie Knaben,
toeli^e auf bet ©tta|e ft'i^'^^^ii/ fa^en ^ani lommen ; einigt Don i^nen
riefen ; „§urtal), bo lommt §anS mit feinem Gfel !" anbett abet riefen :
„ba lommt bet Efcl mit feinem §anS !" 4. 5Bei bet ©^e|)atb=Sit^e in
gambribge fte^t noc^ einet Bon ben Saumen, unter loetiiten bie Solbaten
an jenem 2:age auf SGJaf^ington toatteten. @t fam mit See unb Sdfiu^Iet
Don ^tiilabel(at»ia unb fu((rte bie ©olbaten gegen bie (Jeinbe nai^ Soften,
5. aSei fang bott gefletn 3lbenb in jenem §aufe ? k% War bie aToc^let
meiner gteunbin ^ftau ©,, fie fingt fe^r ft^on, unb i^r Sruber ftiielt fo
gut, wie fie fingt. 33it geljen ^eute 3tbenb beibe ju itinen, Wenn ©ie
3eil genug Ijabeii. 6. 91 ^c^ glaube, §an« ift fe^t bumm. 9. SSatum ?
81. %i) fragte i(»n Ijeute : „@a^ bet fiaifet jwifijen ben ^rinjen ?" unb er
antwortete mir : „!Rein, bet Raifer (a^ in einem SBagen, Bot Welc^em fei^s
^ferbe waren, unb beibt ^rinjen Jaften bei ilim, eiiier an jebet ©eite.
7. 3(nno. ^(^ fuc()e mein Sut^, unb i* finbe eS nic^t. §on8. §ier ift
meineS. Slniw. Satum giebft (393) bu mir beineS, §anS, Watum nid^t
itatlS aSuc^? er atbeitet je^t ntt^t meljr. §on8. ©eineS ift fc^on alt unb
fi^lec^t. 9(ber WaS &aft bu nod) ju letnen ^eule Stbenb, ©t^Wefter?
9Ittna. ^c^ ^abe no(i& me^irere Seiten ju lemen ; e^ ift \^ai, unb xi) bin fo
miibe. $ane. ^a, ja, fo ge^t ti, ©c^Wefter, SJarum lemteft bu nit^t
D.n.iized by Google
EXERCISE 7 203
^eute IKorflcn friiEj, a(5 ic^ bii^ ttef ; obex bu ^Brteft nii^t, ober bu ijbrteft
mi(^ unb anttBorteteft nii^t. ^(^ gfaube, bu fc&liefft not^, «(« eS fctjon
3eit tear, jur @c^ul« ju ge^en.
B, 8. 3)et fi&nis felfeft War &et une unb fU^rte unS. @r fd&Wte einen
Don ben ^rinjen mit Icenigcn Sotbaten ttbet ben glu^. Sem«r fa^, ba^
bie Jeinbe ft^n ^tntet bem Serge an jener Seite beS fluffed ftanben, unb
leiner glau&te, bag i^nt (103) fo Btelf loaren, ol§ fie fi(^ jeiaten- 3)er
$rin), jung unb fd^nett, Wic « War, rief : „SEJer folgt mir, gi^eunbe ?"
unb jog gegen fie. 2t(If folgten il&m, unb aHe fielen in bie ^Snbe ber
geinbe. 9. 91. 'iSlan fagt, bag Biefe Seute in euerem 3)otfe arm finbunb
nit^tS, rber nic^t genug, ju ejjcn ^abtn. SBie foimnt e«? 8. ginige,
nal^t im Sriege Waren, arbeiten noi^ nid^t wieber, toeil fte nD(^ trani
finb ; anbere finb alt unb Ijaben !eine gireunbe me^r, »eli^e i^en ^elfen ;
aber mantle arbeiten aui} nii^t, hjeil (ie faul finb, unb tetnet ^Ift folc^n
geulen, toel*e ftt^ ni^t fetfcer (= felbft) ^etfen. 10. gs tuirb je^t lag.
3)ie 3Renf(i^en unb bie 3:iere im 3;orfe ft^lafen nic^t me^r, SJian fte^t
auf ben SQJegen ft^on 9Ranner, J^auen, ^Pferbe, flufic unb §unbe, tcel^e
aHe \ni j^elb jielien, ober Sinbet, Wetc^e na^ ber Sf^ule ge^en, MUe
fmb fleifiig unb arbeiten. Mud^ bie SSogel fi^en fc^on auf ben i)ac^etn in
ber Sonne unb fingen. 3Iur ber @fel ift faul unb jeigt fii^ nodi nii^t.
@r liegt (tilt unter einem Saum Winter bem §aufe unb fpri^l, ioie alle
efet (pred^en : „'^^ bin nod& (e^r mabe von geftem, unb id) ^abt audf
no(^ 3*it fleiwfl J" fc^lafen-" 3tbet bie ftnaben tommen in einigtn ©tun=
ben toiebet auS ber ®d^ule unb jie^en i^n auf bie Sttafie, unb bet 6fel,
faul cber fleigig, atbeitet nun avd). 6r tragi feine §erren, bie Snaben,
inS gelb, buri$ baS SBaffer, oben auf ben Serg unb loiebet in^ Iicrf, unb
oft reiten fie jtoei jur (at a) ^eit auf bem 3:iere. 11. ^(^ fab, baft Rarl
eineS ober me^reie Bon ben Siic^etn, Weli^e auf bem S^ifc^e lagen, in bie
§anb nabm unb bamit in ben ©atten ging. 3^r finbet ibn bort je^t no(^,
toenn ibr ibn nur fucfet, benn er ge(it bor 3tb«nb nidit toieber naU) §aufe.
12. ,5lft «^ "'*'&' 0"''" "'f "^ "^"t i^*'*'^ ^<>9 f*'"*" Stbenb ^al unb bafi
man bie 6onne ni^t aud^ in ber 9iac^t fiebt ?"
Pakt III
A. 1. It is evening, and we are all tired ; for it wag very hot in
the sun to-day (to-day very hot in the sun). 2. All my friends are
here in this city, I have none in the city of which you (bu, 392)
are speaking. 3. Some say that the king is already here; others,
that he is still in his palace in the city. 4. I give such people
something to eat, hut no money, 5. Jack is very diligent : he
204 EXERCISE 7
works early and late, but does not learn anything (184), because
he is very dull ; and the teacher does not praise him, because he
thinks that Jack is also lazy. Charles, however, is very lazy, but
he is quick to learn (learns quickly, 210) ; and the teacher always
praises him, because he thinks that Charles is also diligent. 6.
A. Don't you (bu, 393) see a w^on on the road ? B. On which
road ? A. On that [one, 272] yonder. B. Yea, I see something
like (loie) a wagon between the trees, but no horses, and I think'
the wagon is standing still. A. No, it is not standing still ; it is
coming from the city. 7. Several churches in this city are very
large and also very rich ; some are very small, but rich ; and none
are poor. 8. How long have you had this cow (have you this cow
already, 608) ? I bought her a few days i^o when I wag in (the)
town. 9. It is getting hot here in the sun, why don't we go into -
the house or to (an) the river ? 10. The people in (auf) the coun-
try are already at work (work already) early in -the morning when
(Wenn, 688) the people in the city are still asleep.
B. 11. You (bu, 393) do not see the mountains from here (see
the mountains not from here), but you see them very well if you *
step up to that window there, where John is sitting. 12. There
comes Charles with several friends, but my brother is not among
them. 13. He was here an hour ago, he took one of the books
from the table yonder and went into the garden with it (therewith
into the garden). 14. I do not believe what such people tell me.
15. One is not always poor if one has no money ; biit one is always
poor if one has only money and no friends. 16. How many hours
has a day ? Only few if one sleeps (396) as late as you. 17. It
was very still in-the house, in-the garden and in-the village; for
it was already late in the night ; but I was still sitting at my table
and was working. 18. Many a soldier fell in that war. 19. A.
How many books did you buy? B. Six. A. Only six? why
didn't you buy more ? B. Because I hadn't any more money (hail
no money more). 20. Are your rooms up-stairs or down-stairs?
The room inwhich I sleep is up-stairs, but the room in which I do
my work is down-stairs. 21. A. Where are John and Charles?
B. In - the village or in ■ the field, I think (think I). A. On foot ?
B. No, they are riding on the donkey. A. But not both? B.
Not in the village, when (loenn, 688) they have all [the] boys be-
hind them (red.) ; but I found them both on the donkey when (atS,
688) I saw them on the road to the city yesterday. A. Now I
D.n.llzedbyGOOgIC
EXERCISE 7 205
aee (see I) what makes the heaat always so tired and lazy. 22. He
led us tlirougli the house into his garden, which was not large, but
very beautiful. 23. A. Where do you (bu) goto (the jur) church?
B. In a village which lies beyond (behind) the mountain there.
A. Have you no church in your village ? B. No, we hav'n't any.
C. 24. Men (use Slloifrft preceded by the def. art., 462) have
bauds and feet, but (the) animals have no hauda. 25. A. Both
boys are tall, and both are— £. Lazy? A. No, I do not say
lazy, but not very diKgent. 26. How did you get (eome) across
the river, my son ? A gentleman on horseback came when (688) I
was standing on that side of the river. He set me before him
(refl.) on hia horse and rode through the water with me. 27. A.
The woman asked me who the gentlemen were that went through
our village an hour ago. B. And what did you tell her? A. The
king and two of the princea. But she did not believe me. B.
Why not ? A. Becauae they were on foot, and not on horseback
or in a carriage with six horaes, and because they walked and
spoke like (wie) other men (use ^Henft^). 28. Every [one, 272]
helps his friends (dat.) when they are poor, but few men (use
9K«nf^) help also their enemies. 29. The parents of this man
were very industrious and grew rich. They had a house, a garden
as large as yours, two horses, six cows, and several fields below at
the river, where the land is very good. But he does not work and
is becoming poor, I think ; for I hear that he has no more money,
and that other people are already buying his land, hia cows, and
his horses. 30. Several of (Bon, 482) the men from our village
who went to the war fell, others died after the war, and only few
of them are still living. 31. Did she eome before you or after you ?
She came after me, this morning ; I came yesterday evening. 32.
Here is the well to (an) which our cows come every evening and
drink. 33. I saw him sitting at -the table (at -the table sit) when
I entered the room (into- the room stepped), and before him on the
table lay some books.
Exercise 8
The demonstrative pronoun ber bie ba§ that, that one, the one;
he, she, it: 150. — The relative pronoun bet bie bag who, which,
that; 167. — The interrogative and relative pronouns Wtr loho, he
who, whoever and lua^ what, whatever, that which: 157, 175, —
The perfect indicative : a) of verbs taking fatten as auxiliary :
319, 330, 332, 404 ; b) of verbs taking fein as auxiliary : 320, 334,
406.
Vocabulary
btt Dntel bieDntel uncle ber3)eutfc^e tie 33eutf d&ei German
bet S(^iiletbie©(^ttletpiy)i/, ber^rat^cfe bie^ai^ofen French-
ttudent man
bet a3ri«f bie Srieff letter bie fiiinigin bie JCiinsinnen queen
ber ^ittag bie ^ittagr no(m bie ^prii^effin bie $rinjef|innen princess
baS ^a^r bie So^r* year bit ^a^tljeit bie 2iBa^tt»«tfii truth
bet ®ott bie ©Btter god bie U^r bie U^tcn clock, watch
5ti^ Fred ; 3Karie Mary urn fed^S UEjt a^ «ir o'chck
banten, banEle, gebanft thank kitten, iai. gebeten beg, ask
reifen, tetfte, ip fleteift (roveZ, go fi^reiSeii, f((itieb, gefc^rieben ioW(e
fltieg fti^ren mage war fa^iren, fu^t, ift gefa^ien i/Wue, yo
gtfluben on with ace. belieue in ^an9en| ^^ ^ ^^
^aitflen J
jetnanb somfhody getoi^ sure, certain bafftt {therefor) for it
niemanb nobody alS after compar, than or (Aem
einanber e<wA other nie wercr bauon {thereof) of it or
beRet Setter Wann wAew, a( wfAtrf itme them, about it o'y them
Wa^t (rue tOD^er whence, from where je^n («M
feit with dat, since
Rule. In independent sentences, the non-personal part of the
verb (participle or infinitive) stands last.
Part I
A. 1. aSer fein ^fetb Ejat, reitet m*t (or ber reitet nii^t, 176), fon=
bem ge^t ju gufe, loie {like) anbete Seute. 3. SRoric. ^r tnen macfift
bu baS fiteib, 9Sutter, an bem (or loelrfjem) bu je^t otbeiteft? 2)ie
SKntter. ^ut bic^, tneine arcn^fer. SBarie. SSaS ift fd)6n ; ic^ ^abe
meineS [(^on fo tange gettagen, baft eS fctjle^t toitb. 3. @S giebt ^en=
fi^en, luelt^e an feinen ®ott glaufcen, 5Ken(c^en, meldje an biele ©ftttet
fliauben, unb 3Kenfi^en, WettJte nut an einen ®ott glauben. 4, 9. gti$,
toem ^aben Sie bie Spfel gegeben? ». 236% Spfel? bie auf bem
Saume ober bie auf bet (Srbe unlet bem S^aume ? %. ^t^ frage nad^
bcnen, bie (or hjeld^e) untet bem Saume lagen. ». ®ie Woren fe^r
^k^i, aUx ii} itaW fie in« §ou« gettagen unb ^fitet %xa\i {wife) ge=
geben. Siie, bie (or melcfie) Ij^ufe ^Worgen nodi auf bem Saume bingen,
EXERCISE 8 207
finb aud^ nid^t fe^t gut (aui} mi}t = nor, heuce transl. nor are those
which etc.) ; fie (te^»en bort auf bem ©artentifi^. 63 giebt biefeS 3o^r
ni(^t Biele $((afel, §err S. 5. S. (tritt inS 3i""ner unb ftnbet feinen
3:rewnb). SBaS |(^e ii^ ! toann bift bu gcfommen, mein g^reunb ? unb
lDo(«t? 8. (giebt i^m bte Oanb). 5S<^ f*'" geftem 9lbenb um fcd^S
U^t auS Serlin gelommen unb 6lei6e jWei 3:006 6ei euc^. S. gtuv gWei
3;a0e? 3!)aS ift ni(^t langf. 2tber (laft bu meine flinbet f^on gefc^en?
9. 9lein, unb beine ^au au(^ no(^ m<^l. %. ^ie ift nod^ nid^t toiebec
ju §aufe, abet bie fiinbet finb im ©arten, gloube ic&, ^inttr bem §au(e.
@ie ^aben bid^ ncd^i nie gefelien, aber fie f^ired^en oft bon bit unb .^aben
nridfi in biefen S^agen oft flefcagt : ,3(inn fonnnt bev Dn!el au3 aSerlin ?"
^c^ fe^e fie fc^on ins ^auS {ommen, fie ^aben gt^iJrt, ba^ jemanb boi
bet %iim tour. §ier, bi«S fmb (109) meine 2^Bd|ter, Slnna unb 3Ratie,
unb bus finb meine ©B^ne, gri^ unb §Qn3. 6. SBer faul ift unb ju
§aufe ni^t arbeitet, bet lernt nic^t^ in bet ©t^ule unb bleibt fo bumm,
nrie et ift, 7, SBJet mat bie '^au, mit bet (or h)el(^er) baS ^dbd^en
fam ? es War i^tre 9JIuttet. 8. Iiu bift in biefem Satire fe^r gto^ ge^
niotben, 9Inna, abet bein ©tuber ip fo Ilein geblieben, Wie et War. 9.
St. SBJet loaten bie §etten, mit benen (or h)el($en) id& bid& geftem 3l6enb
mil fo ft)at auf bet Sttafee fa(( ? 9. @g tuaten (109) meine ^reunbe
fluS g^icago, fut bie (or toelc^e) bu toot einigen itagen bie ffliic^et tauf=
tefl. St- ©tub bie nod^ Ijiet? ®. ©ie Waren geftern niK^ ^ier, a6er fie
fmb Ijeute BUctgen nad^ 1Ren)=Dot( gefa^ren.
B. 10. ®i« ^tanjofen unb bie 33eutf^en ftnb nie greunbe getuefen, fie
^aben biete firiege mit einanbet gefii^rt. U. §ert ©. ift ein 3)iann,
bet'(or tnel^er) irnrnet bie ffla^t^eit fptic^t, unb toaS er 3&"'w gefagi
^at, ba« ift gewig ■mai)x. 12. 3)lit Weffen ^ferben bift bu jur Stabt g«=
Wefen, mit beinen ober mit benen beineS SrubetS? SKit meinen, benn
eineS Bon meineS StubetS ^ferben ift Iranf. 13. SL SJarum tommt il)t
fo fi)at ? 3(| watte (508) fc^on eine Stunbe auf en^. Sei Wem fetb i^t
fo longe geWefen? ©. aSir fmb bei beiner ©c^loefter getoefen. 9Bit
gingen auf unfetem 3Bege ju i^t unb fanben me^tete gteunbinnen auS
^o^on bei i^t, bie (or nieli^e) und baten ju bleiben ; toir fa^en nic^t, bag
e« f(^Dn jWei U^t toot. 14. 9L Seffen §unbe finb bieg (109)? ».
(Sg finb bie beg @rafen auf bem ©dEiloffe. 9. Sie biele ^unbe ^t bet?
3Jlan fagt, feinc fec^ ©e^ne, feine §unbe unb feine ^iferbe maiden i^n
atm. ^aben ©ie aud^ ettoaS babon flet»Brt? S. ^d) glaube ni^t, bag
baS Wa^r.ift, benn ic^ ^be nie folc^e jetbet gefe^en, toie feine bott unten
am t^luffe, fo fd&Bn unb fo grofe, unb autJ) nie foldie ^iitje, wie feine. (Sr
^at gewife norf) ©etb unb gonb genug, unb feine ©aijne finb aut^ nic^t fo
fc^lw^t, ii>i< man (agt. 9Ran^ 2eute reben me^r fiber anbetet Scute
Sinbei, ol3 gut ip. 15. S)« itenifl unb bie ^tiiqtn finb ^eule ((^on
fru^ buT(^ unfer ^oif gefa^itn, unb nitmanb ^ot fie Qtfe^en. 3)ie KDni=
gin mit ben $rin}effinnen ift i^nen nb<^ ni<^t gefolgt. 3Ran [agt, {te
tommen But iLBittag m{^t, abet bie 2eute pe^ ^dfisn feit je^in U^t am
3Begt unb toarten auf jie. 16. ^t^ Ijabe S)ir (107) lange nii^l ()e(c|»ie=
ben, metn ^leunb, benn itb bin oft Irani getvefen, aber 0} bin \t^t ft^rni
tvieber tOoai (a llule) beffer unb ft^ide 35ir btefen Srief buri^ ^einen
®o^n %'n^, mtinen Siguier. @i bat mir bag %ud^ gcgeben, Don bem (or
toelf^em) 3)u Dor mebrcren ftagen fi^riebfl ; ii^ banle 5)ir febr (very
much) bafiir. gri^ ift in biefem ^a^xt fe^r fJei^ig geioorben. 3Reine
^au ift mit unfeien ^ft^tem ju meinen (SItetn geieift, tomnit aber in
einigen lagen hiieber. 33ein 31. 31. 17. SL 5BaS ip auS (o/) bem
©Dt»ne bei ^rau geioorben, bie (or ipelt^e) ^ier im ^aufe uber eui^ tool^nt ?
3cb (e^e i^n je^l nie me^r. 8J. 3)er ift mit unferen ©olbaten in ben
Jlri«g g«ii>g«n unb ift *>or einigen 3;ttg(n bei 3t. gefoDen. 18. %ai ip
ber 3)tann, beffen £anb bein Sruber gelauft ^t unb mit beffen 5Pferben er
^eute in ber ©tabt getvefen ift. 19. Notice the position of the per-
sonal part of the verb in the following aentences : a) ^ener Knabe
ip ein ©^liter, ber (demonstr. and he) nmlint bei beinem Dntel ; b)
Sener Snabe ip ein ©tinier, ber (relat. who) bei beinem ^nU\ Mo^nt.
Part II
A. 1. ©er ni^tS (emi, tnenn er notb Jung ip, ber lemt aud^ nii^ts,
toenn et alt hiitb. 2. ©eine Sibhjeper fingt beffer ate er, aber er f)jiett
beffer alS fie. 3. 3Kan fagt — unb ba3 ift getoi^ iDO^r — toer ©ott
fucfet, ber finbet i^n auib ; unb dJott bilft benen, bie (or weli^e) ftcb felber
^elfen. 4. %. aSen fanben ©ie unten bov ber Stbiir ? S. @inen 3)tann,
ber (or toeli^er) fe(ir alt unb a\xii Irani unb arm Icar. S. SBer fogte
^bnei, fea& ber 3Kann arm toor? ©. gr fagte e3 felbfl, unb xii) gab i(im
etiuaS ®elb ; er banlte mir auc^ bafiir. Ober glauben ©ie, ba^ er mir
nid^t bie aSJabr^eit gefagt bat ? 9. D ja, it^ ^abe fol(^en Seuten aucb
oft ©elb gegekn, aber «§ ift nic^t immer loa^r, toaS fie einem fagen.
3Hein Sniber giebt iljnen nie ®elb, fonbern nur elUtaS ju effen ; er fagt,
bo8 ip beffer. 5. »atl. Seffen SUt^er pnb bie« (109), §ang? finb eS
beine ? ^nS. 3iein, eS finb nii^t meine, fonbern beine. 9ntl. 3Reine ?
Sfber toie lommen bie auf biefen iifi^ ? ©ie lagen Uor einer ©tunbe, al«
i^ n«c^ §aufe tarn, auf jenem bort am genfier. §nn8. SUarie ^at pe
t)Dn bem lifc^e bort genommen, toeit fie ibr im 98ege lagen, benn baS ip
ibr %\\^. ©ie b^tte einen Srief ju fc^reiben an ibre §ieunbin unb fagte :
„'!S>ai ftnb Mieber RaxH ^d^ev, unb auf meinem %\\^ 1 SQater l^at und
jebem einen gegeben, alter flatlS asii^et Uegen immet auf alien iif^en,
nur nii^t auf feinem." Sari. §at fie baS Don mir flefagt? S^and. ga,
icfe ^be e« fetbft Q%^6it. Sotl. ©ut, ©c^toefter SRarie ifcd nod^ ettoaS
ftti bie @(i)ule ;u arbeiten ^eute Stbenb, aber ii^ ^elfe ibi ^tutt getuifi nii^t,
Itieiin fie fo Wi^i tion mir gefptDti^en bat- 6. 6^ giebt bide HRenf^en,
bie (or toelti^e) nur orbeiten, Wenn fte ni(^K me^t ju effen ^ben unb au^
tein ®elb ifte^ir, fi0 etwaS ju laufen. 7. SJa^ ber iptinj geftem flefatlen
ift, baS ift geVoi^ nic^t Wnbr, benn ic^ ^abe i^n ^leute f^on loiebet ju
^ferbe gefeben ; aber son ben ©otbaten, bie mit i^m ttber ben %lii'^ gin=
gen, fmb febt Biele gefaffen. 8. tKein Sruber i|l geftern micber nat^
5pari« geteip. ©r ift feit bem Sriege jhjifcben ben ^anjofen unb ben
ieutfc^en ft^on oft ba geWefen unb ^at fe^r Uiele greunbe in jener 6tabt.
B, 9. 3Bet nic^t aHe {all the) 3eit bie SBa^t^eit fprii^t, fonbmt nur
ju (at) 3eilen, ber finbet balb, bafi bie aWenfcben i^m nii^t me^r glauben,
auc^ (eoen) mm er bie 5IBa&r^(it fpri^t. 10. 5[c^ ^abi ge^iiit, ba^ er
^iet ift, aber idi Ijobe nit^tg baBon gebbrt, tnann er gefommen ift ober luie
(ange et bleibt. 11. *L Sinb ber fiiinig unb bie 5ptinjen fi^on ^i« ge=
Itiefen? 8. 3i$ \)<iit, bafe ^eute SRorgen frii^ jemanb burd^ unfere Stabt
gefa^ten ift, abet niemanb ^»at gefet»en, tner in bem 33ogen fafe, unb aHe
Seute fagen, ba^ nut jtoei tpfetbe Bot bem 5ffiagen Waren. ^i} glaube
nidbt, bafe e« ber fiiinig unb bie ^tinjen geloefen [mt (109), benn bie
fasten an foli^en lagen trie ^eute getoig mil me^ als jWei 5Pferben unb
iommen au<^ nicbt fo ftttb- 3Jlan fagt, bie flBnigin mit ben ^rinjeffmnen
lommt nadfi Sliittag, um jtoei U^r. 9Ji(ine ^tau abet unb meine Stod^ter
toarten fd&on je§t, um je^n U^t, auf fie unb ^aben feit ge^em aMotgen, jo
feit mebreren lagen, nut Don Sleibem unb Slumen gefproc^en. 9. ga,
ja, e« ift bei mir ju §aufe au<^ fo. e« ift nwt gut, baft bie Jifinigin nid&t
oft fommt, benn bie §tauen b^^en an folt^en S^agen ju nid&ts me^t Seit
unb geben uni g^annem oft nii^t genug ju effen. 12. ®8 ijl beffet pit
aKe ajienfcben, toenn fie einanber ^tl^tn, a(« menn jebet nut fiir f"^ fel^ft
arbritet. 13. 5Dein Se^rer b^t mit Dor einigen iagen gefc^tieben, bafi
3)u (107) in biefem 3a^re nidbt fe^r Pei^ig geluefen bift. 3ft ba« hiabr,
mein fSiO^n^ '^i} bibe Deinem 3Jater no^ nic^tS Don bem Sriefe gefagt,
benn et ift nodj Irani, unb eS ift beffer, bafe er je^t nitbtS baton Ij&tt, loenn
2)u nut Wieber fleifeig toitft. ^i} fc^ide Tin burd^ Dniet Sari etWaS @elb
unb einige Spfel ; e« ftnb nur loenige, aber wit baben felbft m<^t Biele
biefeS 3abr. 33eine 5fllutter. 14. 3)ie ^rau, bcten SBb"e S^re Scfeiiler
toaren, ift geftern HKittag geflorben ; einer Bon ibnen tear beute bet mit
unb ^ot mic^ gebeten, eS 3i^"«n S" fafl*"- 1^- Notice the different
D.n.iized by Google
210 EXERCISE 8
position of the personal part of the verb in the following sentences :
a) ^a finlj Wc S[l)fel, bic (demonstr. tkey or those) ^ingtti auf jenetn
Saumc ; b) 2)a finb bit $l))ft(, bit (relat. which) auf jenem ISaume
^ingcn.
Part III
A, 1. We believe only him who always tells the truth. 2. Onr
parents are no longer here, they have gone (use reifen) to* Berlin.
3. A. Is it true that he has written a book ? B. He (demonstr.)?
I have heaiil nothing about it. Who says so (that)? A. One of
tho gentlemen with whom we went home last night. B. I don't
believe it. 4. A. Who are the boys there? B. Which? those in
the carriage? A. No, these here on horseback behind the carriage.
B. They are (it are, 109) the princes. 5. Do you believe that God
helps only those who help themselves? No; I believe he helps
others also. 6. A princess that is not beautiful is no princess, they
say (says one). 7. A. When did you come (perf.), my friend?
B. At ten o'clock this morning. A. And did you drive (perf.) or
(iid you come (perf.) on foot? B. I came (perf.) on foot, for my
horses are both sick. A. How long are you going to stay (pres.)
with us ? B. Only a night and a day. A. That's not very long.
8. A. T saw several women in the garden. Which was the mother
of the girl ? B. The one (demonstr.) with the flowers in her hand.
9. Are these (this, nent. sing., 109) your sisters or his? They (it,
109) are his, mine are not coming. 10. It is true, the Germans
and the French are not at war with each other now (wage now no
war with each other), but I do not believe that they are friends,
for they have never been friends.
B. 11. There was a country — and I think you have all heard
of it — in which the people never worked, and only played and ate
and drank and slept, and where (the) money was lying in the
street and clothes and watclies hung upon the trees, as here among
(bei) us the apples. But that was many, many years ago. There
are still some people who are looking for that country, but they
don't find it, because they are all so lazy and stupid; and those
who are not lazy and stupid, but industrious, have no time to look
for it (for' it to look). 12. A. T hear that your sisters have gone
(use reifen) to Philadelphia. Have they friends (fern.) there ? B.
(brenimHorpenoDB (tsej. '
3.n.llzedbyGt>OJ^IC
EXERCISE 8 211
Who has told jou that? A. Mrs. K. Why? isn't it true? B.
No, it isn't true; but they are going to-day. 13. Whose horse is
this ? It is the couut's (that of the count). 14. He who lias no
money is not always poor, but he who has no friends (he, deinoiistr.)
is certainly poor, 15. A. How long have you been waiting (wait
you already) ? B. I have been waiting here since ten o'clock. Why
do you come so late ? A It isn't so late as you think. But what
do I see? My watch has stopped (ift fteJfeit flefcltefcen). 15. Here,
my child, these (neut. sing., 109) are the books which you have
been looking for so long. 16, He says that our soldiers have
crossed (gone over) the river and we now marching against the
enemy. 17. Who praises students thatare notdiligent? Nobody,
18. A. Of whom did you buy these apples, Mrs. N. ? B. Of your
friend Mr. S. Why do you ask ? A. Because they are better than
ours. Has he still inoie in his garden? B. I think not. There
are not many apples this year (ace, 492). 19. Has uncle Charles
told yon that he has bought you a dog, Fred ? Yes, he has told
(it) me, and I have thanked him for it ; but I liavn't seen the dog
yet.
C. 20. It was noon, and it was very hot in the sun. Some of
(toon, 482) us were lying under the trees by the river and were
sleeping, others were in the house and taking their dinner (were
eating) ; but he (demonstr.) was still sitting at his table and writ-
ing letters, 21, Are there people (use 3Wenfc^) that do not believe
in a God? I do not think that there ai-e such people. 22. I have
not been in so many cities as you, but I have been in several in
which you have not been yet. 23. With whom is she travelling ?
with her mother or with her sister? With both. 24. Whoever
believes that, (he, demonstr.) is certainly very stupid. 25. John
says that he hasn't yet had time to write the letter (has yet no
time had the letter to write) of which we spoke yesterday. 26.
Why don't yon ask my brother (beg you my brother not) if you
have no money? I have asked him, but he says he hasn't any
himself (has himself none). 27. Do you see that [fellow] there
with tlie book in his hand ? Well, that (baS, 178, i) is the boy who
showed us the way to Longfellow's house. 28. A. Whom are you
looking for ? £. I am looking for the gentleman with whom my
brother came (perf,). Have you seen him here to-night? A. Yes,
I have seen him, but I think he is gone (no longer here). 29.
When did he write (perf.) you that ? Some days ago, but he says
D.n.iized by Google
212 EXERCISE 9
he does not believe it liimself. 30. Hasn't the queen come yet ?
No, nor the princesses either (and the princesses also yet not), but
it is not yet six o'clock. 31. Whom did you find at home? No-
body. 32. What she has told you (that) is true, for she always
tells the truth. 33. A. Who were the boys that I saw at your
house yeaterday ? S. Those with whom my son was playing ? A,
Yea, two boys, both very tall and handsome. B. They (it, 109)
were Charles's friends. A. Students from the city ? B. Yes, and
sons of my friend N., who is Charles's teacher.
Pronominal words with strong or weak endings : 127, 129, 131.
The pluperfect indicative : references and rule as in Ex. 8.
1
berjtniec biejenige baSientgc that, bttfelEw bwfeltw bnSfeltw the same
that one; he, she, it bet tint, bit eiiw, b«9 eine the one
btrjenige is used chiefly before relatives
These words are used a.*! pronouns and as adjectives. The first
element of each, the definite article, has the strong endings (128)
throughout ; the second element takes the weak endings, and in
betienige and berfclbe is contracted with the first ; see 153 for the
inflection of beriemge and berfelbe, and 271 for the inflection of ber
ber, bit, bus meinc mine btr, bit, bnS metniee mine
ber, bie, baS beine thine, yours bcr, bie, btt8 beinige thine, yours
ber, bit, bflS feint his btr, bit, baS (einigt his
bet, bit, bo# i^rt hers btr, bit, bnS i^rigt hers
bee, bit, baS feint its btr, bit, bi8 feinigt its
btr, bie, bus unfert ours ber, bie, bnS unferigt ours
btr, bie, bttS eueie yours ber, bie, biS eutrige yours
ber, bit, bnS i^re theirs ber, bie, baS i^rigt theirs
ber, bie, bnS 3^re yours ber, bit, haS ^^n^t yours
These two sets of possessives are used only as pronouns and
often take the place of those with strong endings in Ex. 6. 2. Only
the nominatives of the singular are given here ; their inflection la
EXERCISE S
like that of ber einc above ; see also 142 and 143, and notice that in
inflected forms of unftt- and euer- (whether strong or weak) the t
before the i of the stem is often dropped.
Slnbet-, &eib-, Biel-, and tnenig- (Ex, 7. i), when preceded by a
pronominal woi'd with strong ending take the weak endings, thus :
bet anbere, bie anbete, bnS anbere etc., like btr eine above. — a3ie[-
and toenig-, when not preceded by a pronominal word often have no
ending, as uiel ®elb much money, tvenig 9Baffer little water; thus
also adverbially: n fi^itibt biel or tnenig he writes miick or lOtle.
ber (Sngliinber bie englfinber -Bw^'^wAman bet Jju^fl' ^'^ S^^S*" ^''y
ber dieitet bie SHeitet rider, bie Wlitti middle,
horseman midst
baS ©Itttf (beg ®Iw(te« *) luok, bie 2Bo(^e bie aSoc^en week
happiness
baS ©i^iff bie ©djiiffe ship, vessel fte^en bteiben stop
legen, legte, gelegt lay, place lefen, laS, gelefen read
allein alone neil new botb soon, presently
bveit broad (tolj proud bonn then, thereupon
inteteffanf interesting [ief deep, profound barilt (therein) in it
!ti[)l coo^ tot dead brei ^Aree
lung adj. long toeit wide,far Jtoor to be sure, it is true
ni^t tBfllit lit. Mo( *>*iie.' i.e. o^ne with ace. without
is it not (so) ? was it not ? did bi5 with ace. (670) till, until, up
you not ? etc. to, as far as
Pakt I
A. 1, 31. (5S i(i ^eute Wieber fe^r ^eifi in ber ©onne, ni^t ioa^r?
». ginben Sie bag (do you think so) ? H. ^a, ic(t finbe eS jeijr ^eife
^ter wor ber 2:^ilt. 8. @ut, trdrum fi^en loir tjiet fo lange ? eg ift bort
unten am %la^, unler ben Siiumen, gewi^ tu^l genug ; marum ge^en Wir
nit^t an« SEaffer? a. Unb Irarum nic(tl inS ffiajfer? ». ®eloife, baS
i(t noc^ Biel beRer. 2. ffietdfee Bon biefen Beiben (= two, when pre-
ceded by a pronominal word) Slutiten ^flben Sie in unferem ®arten
gefunben unb toelc^e in ^^tem (o^ in bent ^^ren t or in b«m S^rigen) ?
id of the nnm. plur.
rong nnd the weiik endings are given Id heavy-faced types ooly ir
hey are Identical Id furm, as In bttftn bdbn aboie, CI. IZS, 13'
..Ck>o^lc
214 BXEBCI8S
3(^ fjobt leine Don betben in 3&rem ©arten gefunben, fit !omm<n 6cibe
auS meinem (or auS bera nieineti or aui itm meinigni). 3. 35er Stater
lobt mit biejemgen ©i^ulei;, loelt^e P«i6'0 f>"b, nii^t bieienigen, toeld^re
foul fmb. 4. 3Bann i/atit \\t ben Stief geft^ritben? SSn bemfel6en
Xage, aU i^ an jie fi^titb ; abet (ie ^atti mii niii^ts babon gef(^ne6en,
baft i^t ^ruber Irani Voat ; unb ei tt)at fc^on tot, al§ ifi) nadif etntgen
%a^tn ju i^^ntn lant. 5. §ohie tvar fcfion mit feinen @oCbaten auf bte
©(^iffe gegangen, al3 38af^ington mit feinen (or mit ben feinen or mit
ben feinigen) bon ^ori^cfttt na<^ Soften jog. 6. ^er baS eine 9ud^
gelefen ^tte, b« la« auc^ bna anbere, benn beibe Waten fetjr intereffant
unb (e^t gut gefi^rieben. 7. 23og maiden ©ie (do you do or are you
going to do) mit ben bielen ^pfetn, JJrau ©,, bie biefe« ^a^v auf g^ten
9)aumen ^angen? Qi ftnb ni(i^t fo Btele, line Sie glauben, unb man^e
finb and} \^U6}t. 5E!ir effen bie, luelt^e bom Saume fatten unb gut finb,
felbft, unb trir ft^iiten ciele Don ben anberen in bie Stabt, wo bie Seute,
tvel^e leine ^aben, fie laufen. 8. SRani^et (ui^l [ein ®Itict unb finbet si
nii^t, toeil er eS nur fiir fn^ aHein fut^t ; nur betjenige finbet eS, bet «S
in bem ©[Uif anberer JKenj^en fui^t.
B. 9. 33iele watteten an jenem ^oigen no<^ um fed^ U^ auf
Sincoln, benn fie glaubten nit^t, bafe et ((^on in bet 9iat^t nac^
^af^ingtott gefa^en Von. 10. ®ein $u<^ Mat a(t unb fc^Iec^t, benn
et ^atte ti fd^on Uoi jlvei ^a^ien gelauft, abet meine€ (or baS meine
or biiS meinigt) Mai no(^ neu unb gut, 11. 2)aS finb biefetbtn brei
$enen, bie i^ geftem in bet flirt^e gefe^en fjabe ; Wet finb fie? @3
^nb gteunbe unfereS Se^rerii. ^ene beibfM bott, bie je^t mit i^m
fpte(()en, fmb (jfttmiofen. Set anbere tjiet ift ein ®ngldnbei. 13, Sie
ft^tieb mit bet einen ^anb unb ^atte etn S9u(^ in bet anbettn. 13. 2Bit
gingen ju S^rau <£., alS toii bi^tten, baft ib>^ ®ob" ge^otben tttat, unb fie
ftt^rte unS auf (up to) fein ^itntn^'^' ^i< Menigen Siti^er, bie Irit ne^
borin fanben, Maten jtnat alt, abet noi^ gut, unb tuit fauften fie aHe,
ni^t nur toeil feine gutter arm tvar, fonbem auc^ tceit er unfer g^eunb
geWefen toar- 14. 3*"*' *"'" meinen SSriibem leben ni^t mebr ; einet
mijnt ^ier in tWeftuSjorf, nidfit toeit Don meinet ©t^ioefter, betfelbfu, bet
©ie ba8 BiS}\^ a^J^S* f}iiittn, aU Wit ©ie geftetn mit i^r auf bet ©ttafie
fa^en ; unb bit anbeten beiben Stiibet Wo^nen in Gt)ica0ci, aber fie Iom=
men jebeS ^a^t auf (for) einige ESoc^en ju un« nai^ 3ieW=^i)rI. 15. %
Seibe, baS ^Pferb unb autfi bet Sfel, Waren nocti fetjr jung unb tjatten m^
nitbt oft einen Rnaben getragen, als §ang unb 3^ti$ fie auf bie ©ttafie
jogen. §ang fe^te fic^i auf ben ©fet, unb ^tig fegte fic& auf ba« ^fetb.
9Qie ftol) fie buic|) ba§ Sotf titten ! ©ie lamen balb an einen %l\xi, bet
D.n.iized by Google
BXBKCI8E 9 215
jtnat bteil, aid nic^t ttef tear. 2iie beiixn 3:iere gingen Bon felbft 6i« in
bie 3)litte, blieben ftc^en, tianl«n, leglen (i(^ auf bie ©eile, fo baft i^re
beibtn 3ieitet inS SBaffer fielen, unb Uefen bann fc^neU bflbon {away, off),
o\}ne bie Sw^flen- Unb hio looten ^ferb unb ®fel, als §anS unb 3ti^
fpat am Sbenb ju gitfi unb totmtibe nac^ §aufe lamen unb fie me^tete
Stunben gefu^t fatten? 8. Unlet i^rem SBaume ^intet bem ^aufe,
ni(^t toa^t ? 9. 3"/ ^ii '"gen fie unb ji^liefen. 16, % j^amen Sie nii^t
on bemfelbeii 3:ogc, mie ^Iji greunb 3i. ? S. 3a, aber lange na^ il^m,
am 2lbenb um ittfn Ut»r, benn t^ l?atte ni(^t Jo Diet 3eit, toie er, 81. Unb
feine Eietben ©d^Weftem, Itaren bie nii^t fi^on Uor iijm tjier? S. 9iein,
bie Iiatten aui^ nui Wenig ^iii ; jie Itoten jtoor fi^ion am aJtotgcn beSfeU
btn Stages auS i^iem ^orfe gefa^ten, obet ti ift fefjt ioeit bon bort 6i5
nac^ §ambutg ; fie tamen, glaube i^, um fec^^. 17. ^enet §eri: bott
(»at meiireve Sgtii^er gefd&rieben. Wian fagt, einige ba»on finb fe[)t inte=
reffant, abet i(l(( finbe bnSjenigt, toelc^eS idfc je^t lefe, »iel ju ((oo) lang,
obet eg ift ju tief ftit mi$, eineS Don beiben.
Part II
A. 1, Sag mai^t ber ^un^t mit ben Uielen Sui^etn, bie auf feincm
'3^\\6}t liegen ? lieft tx fie aUe ? ^a, abet e3 9e(»t i^m (-i^ is with him),
n>ie manttjen Seuten, bJe Diet lefen ; et bleibt fo bumm luie et ift. 2, 5Det
3:Qg Wat noc^ immer {even then, lit. still all the time) fe^tt ^ei|, unb
bie beiben (the two) voaten miibe geWotben, benn fie Waren fdfron me^rere
©tunben ju gufe gegangen. Sie legten fiii) unter einen 9aum, bet am
aSege ftanb, unb f(^(tefcn, biS eS 2tbenb tourbe unb tutjl roar, unb gingen
bann iibet ben ^luft in bie 6tabt, Iveld^e auf ber anbetcn 6eile beSfelbtN
lag. 3. 2Belii)e ©i^iilet bbte ber Secret? 9iut bicjenigeti, hjelt^e ftei=
feig gewefen toaren. 4. „SBag fe^e i^ ?" tief bie §auSfrau, al5 ftc au8
bem genfter fat), ,Wa« fe^e td^? e« (111) ift f(i()on ttiiebet eine Su^ in
unfeiem ®atten, biefelbe, bie geftern ^ier Wat, D meine aSlumen ! unb
aUe unfete Spfet liegen noc^ auf ber Srbe unlet ben Siiumen !" 5. 3)ie
toenigen ^teunbe, bie er nocb tjatte, loaren felbft alt unb trant, unb einige
von itinen hjobnten ani^ fe^t toett Bon ifttn ; fo iam e3, bafe me^tete ntii^t«
babon gebott Eiatten, bafe er fi^on tot tour. 6. SJie Englanber finb ftolj
auf {of) ilir Sanb, nid^t loabt ? 9lb«t fmb Wit ntc^t aui^ ftolj auf unfereS
(or auf bus unferc or auf boS unfrigt) ?
B. 7. Sr bat Biel ®elb fiit bie ^ferbe gegeben, abet er ^at Menig
©lucf mit ben beiben 3rieren, benn boS eine Wurbe fe^r balb lEtanf unb
ftarb fcbon nai^ einigen ^Bodfien, unb ba# anbete ift, toie ii^ ^iite, beute
aui^ franE geWotben. 8. 3" bet 5Hitt« unfreS ©attend ift ein Stun:
216 EXERCISE 8
nen, ber ift fe^it tief, unb baS Softer batin ift fe^t tU^l. 9. 3Rit
mtUiftm ®(^iffe torn bein Sniber getommtn? @i tear mit benfelben
griommeit, mit toelf^em beiner (or ber beine or ber beinige) tarn «nb
an bMufelbtn lage, abtx fie fatten einanbtr nii^t gtfe^en, ioeit fo
Uiele SKenfi^en auf bem ©tiitffe toartn. 10, ^(^ ^atte beibe Stid^et
gelefen, aber i<^ [)atte nur bn« eine intetcfiant gefunben ; eS mar bag-
jenigt, glaube tt^, Welches ©ie je|t lefeti. 3Rein ^eunb abei fanb
au^ boS anbere intereRant, loetl eS fo gut gef(^rieben Wat ; eS toar ftit
mi4 Biel ju {'"o) tief- H. 8. ©e^en Sie nic^t jtrei Seifer bort ouf
bem SBege nac^ ber ©tabt? 9. 3a, e3 [xiib jKei §erten, biefelbew,
Welc^e geftem mit bem ffirofen fo ftolj burt^ unfer 3)Drf ritten. 9. 3Bann
War bag ? ffl. Salb nat^ 3Kittag, ate loir bor ^^rer S^iir (afeen. 12.
Unfert Stragen ftnb glcar nit^t fo lang, toie eure (or bte euien or bit
eurigen), a6er jie finb fetjr breit, unb an beiben ®citen fle^en Saume bor
ben §aufern ; eure Strafeen aber finb aHe o^ne 93dume. 13. g^te ©o^ne
unb meine (or bit meinen or bie meinigen) ge^en in biefelbe ©c^uk unb
^ben benfelben Se^rer, aber 3^re (or bit ^^ren or bit; ^^rigcn) lemen
Uiel beffer, al« meine (or bie meinen or bie meinigen). 14. 3" toeld&em
38agen fafi bet 5prinj ? in bem beS flenigg ober in bem ber S6nigtn ? 3"
leinem (neither) Bon beiben. ^er SOnig unb bie fiiinigin faften in bem
einett Sagen, unb ber h)at no(i() neu ; aber ber $rinj unb feine ©<^t»eftet,
bie ^rinjeffm, fu^ren in einem anbertn, ber fd^on alt unb fd^le^t Ipar.
Pakt III
A. 1. A. I had read only one of (bon) the three books when the
teacher asked me. S. Which [one]? A. The [one] which you
were reading yesterday. B. And did you i:iid it interesting ? A.
Yes, interesting enough, but too (ju) long. 2. In the middle of
the room stood a table, and behind the table, on which many books
were lying, sat Fred and Jack. The one was reading, the other
was writing a letter ; but both often Jooked out of the window into
the garfen, where the other children were already playing and
singing. 3. Goethe and Sir Walter Scott died in the same year,
but Scott was not as old as Goethe. 4. A. How much money have
you with you? if. Very little (without ending). A. Enough for
U3 botli ? B. Yes, if we do not stay too long and do not travel too
much. 5. What is a man without friends ? 6. A. But Charles's
brother is still living, isn't he (not true)? B. No, he (demonstr.)
has been dead these ten years (is already ten years dead), A. Ten
|.:,t,:,:k« Google
EXERCISE 9 217
years ? You don't say so (what you say) ? I have heard nothing
about it. How did he die ? S. He fell in the war, soon after
Charles.
B. 7. Who are those girls there in front of the church ? I think
they (it) are the same that we saw on the boat (vessel). .8. Too
late ! he had already gone (use fasten) to the city. 9. A. Whose
book was that which you laid upon Charles's table when we were
upstairs ? it was his (3 forms), wasn't it ? B. No, it was mine
(3 forms), as I told you; liis (3 forms) was still lying on father's
table. 10. A. We stood on the hill yonder and saw two riders on
the road to the village. They (it) were the two Englishmen whom
we saw at {in the) church several weeks ago. B. Were they
(demonstr.) still here ? A. Yes, but they have now gone to Eng-
land. 11. The boy liad always lived in (auf) the country and had
(yet) never seen a ship. 12. We have a well in our garden which
is very deep, but it has been so hot that [there] is no more water
(no water more) in it. 13. A. Had you come before him ? B. Yes.
A. And your brother and (your) sister, when had. they (demonstr.)
come ? B. They had come on the same day, but also long before
me. 14. I had the good fortune (the luck) to find him still at
home (him still at home to find). 16. The house is still new, and
it is also large enough for us all ; but it is so far from there to (biS
ju) our church and Charles's school that I did not buy (petf.) it.
C. 16. A. Has Mv. N. only this one sister ? B. No, he has three.
A. Where do the other two (both) live? B. (The) one in New
York and the other in Philadelphia. 17. Onr soldiers had already
crossed the river when the enemy was still behind the hills on the
other side. 18. An Englishman that does not travel is not an (202)
Englishman. 19. ^. _The donkey and the horse had come home,
and both without their riders ; but the boys were not dead, as some
of (483) us thought. B. But where had they been so long ? A.
Well, they had been looking for the beasts. B. How stupid ! 20.
Your garden is as broad as ours (3 forms), but not so long. 21.
A. What does he do with so many horses ? Has he much (without
ending) land ? B. Land ? No, but he has so many sons ; and each
son has a horse and a dog, and is as proud as a prince when he
rides through the village. Not one of them works, and their father
is getting pooi'. 22. The English have more ships than the Ger-
mans, but the Germans have more soldiers. 23. She had not read
one of the many books which this man has written.
D.n.iized by Google
218 EXERCISB 10
D. 24. Have you seen the plauts (flowers) which Mrs. S. has
sent mother ? Yes, they (it) are the same which she showed
me when I was at her house several days ago. 25. How many
pages have you to learn, Mary ? We have two to learn, but I
have already learned oue. 26. The two (both) had never seen
each other (each other never), but each had heard much of the
other, not only through my father, but also through yours (3
forms). 27. It was now three o'clock and we were uo longer on
the river. Several of my friends who had never been on the
water had heen dining below, and were already getting sick, but
the others who bad staid on deck (above), like myself (as I), were
standing amidships (in the middle of the ship) and were speaking
with some gentleman about the war between the French and
the English. 28. I took what little money (the little money
which) I still had and bought me a house and some land outside
of (Vdi) the village. The bouse was very old and poor, it had
only three rooms, two down-stairs and one up-stairs ; but the land,
a field as large as your garden here, was much better than that
which I had had at home, for it was not far from the river. I
worked and worked from morning till night (evening), and my
wife too; and tlie 2>eople in the village were very kind to (gegcn)
us, and helped us whenever they had time. After some weeks we
Ixiught (bought we) a cow, and after a year [a] horse and wagon.
Itut then came the war — the French, our friends, on the one side,
and the Germans, our enemies, on the other. What the former
(those) had not already taken, that the tatter were sure to take
(took these certainly).
Kxerclse lO
Adjectives: 206, 211, 213 and 216, 214 and 217, 221, 222.—
The future indicative : references and rule as in Ex. 8.
bet §immel bie §itnmtl ski/, bet 3BaIb bie 9BSIber forest
heaven baS Stlb bie Sttber picture
hai ^wn bie g^euet Jire bie Albeit bie Strbetttn work,
baS Seben (bcS 2e6en3) life task
baS ©egel bie ©egel sail bie ^a^t bie^ragen question
ber Siorben (beS SloibenS) nartk bie 9teife bieSleifen joumeij
ber (General bie ©enetale general bie 5DSte(e bieSBiefen meorfw
ber §erb bie §erbe hearth bie ©t^Iac^t bie ©i^la^ltn battle
baS ^eer bie SPteere sea, ocean bie 2iBeU bie 2BeIteit world
EXERCISE 10
219
biennen, Eirannte, gebrannt bum
fettnen, tannte, gelannt know
nennen, nannte, genannt call
bringen, iycaiftt, gebra^t fin'njf
benten, baiftte, gebactit think
fatten, ^ieft, ge^alten hold, keep
blou blue
bunl«l dark
e^tli(^ !u>nest
grun g^reen
Hiell bright, light
fern far, distant
f reunbUt^ friendly, pleasant, kind
frut^tbar fertile
ganj entire, whole
ganj adv. entirely, quite, all
glii^lid^ happy, fortunate
fttHuet heavy, difficult, hard
%n%m, l|ie^, getjei^en be called
fc^einen, fi^ien, gefc^ienen shine,
seem
fd)lagen, (c^lug, gejc^fogen strike,
^errlifi^l magnificent, grand
pari strong
tapfer firawe
Hug deoer.
t^un, t^at, getfian do
leit^t ^i^A(, easy
lieb dear
offen oi^en
rot rerf
banim therefore, for this reason
morgen to-morrow
neultc^ recently, the other day
jufantmeit together
urn with ace. round, about
um un§ ^er round about us
Part I
A. 1. §atte er bie neutn ^ii^tt noi) ntd^t gefc^idt, alS id) gefitern Bei
^^nen Wat ? 3tein, bie alten Iraten jloar fdfmn getommen, unb btr Ileine
^nabe, bet fie bxa^tt, fogte ju meiner ©^loeftet : „^4) metbe bie neuen
motgen btingen ;" abet baS tear bot btet logen, unb ct [jat fte je^t noc^
nid^t gebtai^t. 2. Unglanb ift cin reic^eS. Sanb, abet e« giebt and) bott,
roie in anbeven tei(^en Sanbcm bcr ®rbe, fe^r avme geute. 3. 5Btt flan=
ben je^t auf einem ^o^ea {high, 230) 39etge unb faljcn iibet un§ ben
blauen §immel ; um unS ^er ben ^errlic^cn, buntelen (220) SQJatb ; unlet
una, am g^u^e beS SetgeS, ben breiten glu^, gtiine SSJtefen unb fruditbaie
(Jelbet ; Ijiet unb ba ou(^ cin freunblic^eS 2)Dtf mil (einen toten SJadjetn ;
unb fern im ^iorten fctiien bie Sonne auf bn8 blaut 9)Jeer unb auf bie
lueifien ©egel bet ©dfiiffe : e§ reat cin ft^t&nejB Silb, tt)ie i^ eS in meincm
ganjeii Seben norf) nie gefeljen tjatte. 4. Stlle'fieute fptec^en oft Bon bem,
toaS (that which, lit. that vihat) fte gefeljen unb gctljan ^aben ; junge
Seute bon bem, toaS jie nod^ feljen unb t^un Iretben. ^enc (jalten (re-
jard) bie aSelt oft fur (as) frfjled^t unb nut barum, toeil fte ntc^it me^r fo
ift, iDte fte War ; biefe abet ^flUen fie oft fiir fii)Ie($t, Weil fte noc^ nit^t fo
ift, toie fie fein hiirb ; beibe ben!en oft nic^t genug on bie 3^**/ i" b*' f"
leben, fonbetn nut ju oft an bie, loelc^e fi^on ^intet i^nen obet not^ Bot
i^nen liegt.
D.n.iized by Google
220 EXERCISE 10
B. 5, jtannten Sie ben tai)fet«n ©eneral 31., ber neulicd in b«
St^lai^t bei ^. gefaffen ift? unto tear er nic^t au3 ^^xtt Stabt ^iet? O
\a, ben i)abt i(^ fei)t gut gelannt ; er tvar bei @o^ jener alttn ^xau, t>on
bet meine *Dluttet geftern fjitac^ unb quS beten ^dufe fte tarn, aU itiir [te
fa^en. l!ie arme ^tau ift je^t ganj affein, unb jie ift Jo irant, baft f»e
nici)t lange me^T leben toirb, gtaube i<^. 6. @d toar ftl^on bun!ele Dtad^t,
aii mix aud bem ^albe tiaten unb uor unS tin Ileincd §aud fa^en. ^ie
2l|ttt ftanb toeit offen. 3tuf bem §erbe brannte ein ^eHeS ^euet, unb
ttor biefem faft, gang ollein, Wie «8 W^n, ein junger, grower 3Jienf(^,
Weli^ft ein SSuc^ in bet §anb ^ielt unb barin laS. „©till," fagte id}
ju bem SJianne, bet mid^ ftt^reie, unb blieb fte^ien, „fennen ©ie bie
Seute, bie ^iev toofinen?" „3i^ lenne fie nic^t aCe," anitoottete et
mit, „abet jebet lennt ben, bet bott ft^t unb liett." „3Bet ift eg, unb
Wie ^ei^t et (what is his name'}?" ftagte xi) Wiebet. ,llt ^ei|t
^hvafjam Sincoln, abet man nennt i^n ^iet unlet feinen ^eunben nut
ben e^itid^en 9lbe," aSJie oft battle i^ na(^ Btelen, Biekn S**^"^*^" *"'
bet an biefen 9lbenb ! unb loie oft tjabe id} auc^ feit jenet ^tit ba9:
felbe asilb in SUiftetn gefe^en ! lite ganje SBelt lennt eS je§t, biefeS
Stib : boS tieDc geuer auf btm $erbe unb box bem §etbe ben et)tli(^en
St be mit bem @uc^e in bet $anb.
C. Siebe 3)luttet ! OnlEel flatt ift geftetn Jiet geWefen unb (jat mit
3>einen 99iief mit bem Oetbe gebrat^t unb aui} bie ft^ijneii ^pfel. ^i)
banle 15it fetjt bofitt unb toerbe meinem ^reunbe §onS einige baton
ge(>en. 3(bei ^u tennft meinen neuen ^reunb noi^ ntd^t. @r ^ei^t
§an3 SBeife, ift fo alt unb flu(^ fo gtofe, Wie ii^, a&et m(^t fo ^arl.
^it Wo^nen ntd^t weit bon einanbet unb getien immet jufammen nad^
bet ©(^ule. §anS SBeife ift fe^t flug unb flei^ig unb &tlft mtr oft,
Wenn \iS} atbeile, unb ic^ ^elfe i^m Wiebet, Wenn Wit Solbaten fl)iel€n
unb fltteg ftititen gegen bie anbeten ^ungen. @ie tiaben mic^ nculi<^
jum (494) @enetal gemad&t, unb §anS ift einer Don meinen Solbaten.
Slbet toai bet 2ti)vtx 3)ir gefc^irieben ^ot, ba^ iH) biefeS 3a^t faul
gewotben bin, baS ift gettiife ni^t loo^t, liebe aJiuttet, 3<^ (•"£'« i*''^"
%aQ meine attbeiten gemad^tt (done), abet bet 2e[)t« ftagt mii^ eft
fet)t fd^Wete [^''agen in bet ©((tule, auf bie leinet bon unS fo leic^l
antWottet, nut §an3 9Bet^. §an* fagt au^, ba^ ii} Pet^ig geroefen
bin. @S ift abei gut tton Six, bag ^u bem Siatet ni(^t§ Don bent .
Sriefe unfeteS Setters gefagt f)a% ^(^ \jabt mit fut bag @elb cinen
iungen §unb getauft. ^anS ^at aui^ einen, bet ift abet fi^on gtofi.
5ft aSatet f(^on loiebet beffet? unb toie ge^t c5 meinem (Sfel? 9Jur
noi^ brei SBoi^en, unb id& bin bei Qui} ! §ang lonrnit auc(), wit wet=
EXERCISE 10 221
ben bann auf bem aUttt ©fel teiten. 3)u wirft mtr noi^ etiuag ©elb
jur Seife ((^iden, ni(^t loa^t, tiebe 2Rutter? Sber id^ ^abe je^t teine
3eit me^t ju fc^iteibeii. tKeine tajjfeten ©olbaten toatten auf mtc^.
3(^ gloube, cS Icirb ^eute ju eincc giogen ©c^tac^t tommen. 5Bir
fmb bie 3)eutf(^eii, unb bit onb«ten fmb bie gtanjofen, unb ii^ bente,
toit toetben bie geinbe luieber (lijlagen. 3)ein ftei^iger Solfn %n%.
Part TI
A. 1, @s giebt fe^r wiele £eut«, Wclc^e tn intern ganjcit Seben nocb
Eeinen ^o^en (AiyA, 230) Slerg gefe^en ^aben, unb ncdj oiel me^t
2tutt, bie bnS blaue 3lie« unb bie ©(^iffe awf bem gjieete mit i^ren
Iceifeen ©egeln nut auS Siii^em obet Silbem lennen. 2. 3luf bem
§etbe bronnte ein Qxo^tS ^evn, fo ba^ eS in bem ganjen gro^en
(220) 3immer ^ett titat. 3. ^ie SSelt nennt oft nut ben ftatlen
3Jlann ta^jfet, tuelcttet in offenet ©i^Iac^t ben geinb fc^ilaflt ; ahtt auH)
bfcjenige (teifet tapfet tot ©ott, wcli^et ftill ttiigt, ioai bet §immel
t()m f<^i<ft unb Bon a:ag ju 3:09 feine 9(tbeit t^t.
B. 3JIein liebet ^teunb ! e« ift 3eit, ba^ ii^ auf 3^ren langen
Srief anttODtte unb ^b"*" fdferei&e, toie tS biefeS '^a^x mit unfrer JReife
ju Si^nen, obet befler mit ^ifxet 3)etfe ju un^, loerben tcitb, Sie ^aben
getoil f^on gelffitt ober gelefen, bag in unftet Slabt neuli^ ein
g[o|tS ^euet gctoefen ift unb bafe aa^ mein §au« oben unb an ber
einen ©eite ettooS gebiannt bat. ^^ Wax abet fo gludli^ getoefen,
einige 5tage toot bem j^euet ein anbetciS ju laufen ; e^ ift bag be@
atteti ©enetal* 91., bet Dot mebteten SBD(^en geftotben ift, unb in
biefem Wo^nen Wit je^t. ©ie hierben baS §au§, glaube tc^, noi^
fennen, benn i(^ Ijabe eS ^^ntn gejeigt unb ©ie b^ben fetn roteS '^bai}
jhiifii^cn ben Ifoljen Sdumen oft auS bem 9iorbfenfter ^iftH Q,\mmixi gc
feben, aU ©ie bei un§ Waren. di fte^tt in bet 5Borftabt (suburb) unb
gan) alletn, nic^t feljt Weit Don bet tleinen ^ixUft, hield&e bie Seute ^itx
immet bie Wei^e flitd&e nennen. Um boS ganjt §au8 i}tv ift ein
fd^ener, gto^tt ©atten, unb auf oUen ©eiten beS ©attenS liegen
fteunbliibe, gtiinc SEBiefen. Slud^ bet jjluf; ift niiijt fetn, unb eS ift
leii^t, in ben bett(id&en, bunlelen SBalb auf ber anbettn ©eite beSfelbcn
JU tommen.
C. 5Keine gtau unb itt) fatten ti batum ftit beffer, ba^ toit in bie=
fem 3a(»re niibt ju '^^ntn leifen, fonbern ba^ ©ie ia unS !ommen unb
aui5 bit Ueben fltnbet bringen, ©ie toetben |eb«i, baft toit nun auc^
auf (ire) bem Sanbe ttjobnen, fo gut loie ©ie. 3($ b^ibe bei mcinet
alten Slluttet einen Srief Bon meinem Stubet in Snglanb gelejen ; er
222 KXERCI8E 10
toitb balb lommen, abtx nut Wenige ^a^t Mtibtn. Qv 1)at fe^t biel
ju l^un, benn tin xa^tx §«tt in Sonbon Ijot [eiti Silb toon ber
©t^larfit bei ©raoetctte grfauft, unb mein Srubev ^al baS ©liirf ge^iaBt,
burt^ benfelben ^eirn aut^ neue 9lrbeit pi pnben, me^r, gtau^e it^,
ate itjm in btefen lagen lieb ift (auiis 4tm), Unfer tleiner ^^ (i^t
bei mil am Itifc^ie unb feine oieltn S^^agcn, bie oft feEit Hug unb oft
fe^r bumm f^einen, tine bie ^lagen aHw Rinber, mac^en ti mir fi^hiet,
me^r ju f^toben, SIber mttne ^au toitb mocgen audfe noti^ an bie
S^tige fd&reiben, unb ic^ bente mir (lit. think to myself, i.e. imagine),
Sie toerben alte lommen, tnenn tUiann unb g^rau jufammen ©ie bitten,
nicfct »a^? 3br alter ^reunb 9i. tR.
Pakt III
A. 1. Who gave (perf.) you this beautiful picture, Marj ?
One of my friends (fern.) brought (perf.) it to me tbe other
day. 2. ^Ve have no very rich churches in our little town, but
also no poor [ones, 272] . 3. I sliall buy the child a new book
with many beautiful pictures in it. 4. Our vessel is still far
from (- the) laud ; we see only the blue sea beneath us and
about us. 5. The teacher will praise only the diligent students,
not the lazy [ones]. 6. My dear brother : Why don't you (107)
write ? Have you so much to do or are you ill ? I shall soon
go (use Teifen) home, and mother asks again in her letter of
yesterday: "Will John come with you or shall you come alone?"
I shall write her that I am coming alone if I hear nothing from
you. Your sister Mary, 7. Rich people are not always happy,
and strong people do not always grow old. 8. He was a friend
of all honest men. 9. We were both sitting before the bright
fire that was burning on the hearth, and were thinking of (an
-}- ace.) the happy times that lay behind us.
B. 10. Do you think that the enemy will follow our soldiers
(dat.) across the broad river? No, I don't think so (believe it
not). 11. I was so hot that we sat all (the whole) day with
(bei) open windows. 12. Many a brave soldier fell in that fierce
(hot) battle. 13. You have begged him to do it (it to do), but
will he do it? that is the question. 14. Is that little girl her
daughter. No, it is her brother's daughter. 15. A. Where shall
you dine to-morrow, Charles ? .B. I shall dine at home. Why
do you ask ? A. Because our old friend S. will come to-night,
and we shall dine together at my sister's. She will ask (beg)
EXERCISE 10 223
you to come too. B. That is very kind of lier. I shall certainly
come. At (urn) what time? A. At aix o'clock. 16. What is
the boy's name (how is the boy called) ? His name is John,
and his friend's name is also John ; but we call this [one] (the)
long John, because he is so tall. 17. Father has gone to the city,
my dear child. 18. Our teacher knows the parents of every
new student. 19. Not all broad rivers are deep. 20. I have
never seen a high (230) mountain or a big ship, 21. I was
thinking of (an + ace.) the poor parents whose (btren, 172)
sons had gone (use jiel^en with in) to the war.
C. 22. A. How long have you known him (know you him
already) ? B. Two years. A. Does he seem to be honest (seems
he honest to be) ? B. Yes, all who know him say that he is
an honest man. 23. We shall see many [a] fine church on our
long journey. 24. " All our (our whole) life is one great school,"
said the old man, " and God alone is the true teaclier." 25. A
tall man is not always a strong man. 26. A. Is that the same
gentleman whose (beffen, 172) house was on fire (burned)? B.
Yea. A. Where does he live now? B. Outside of the city; in
the large white house with the red roof which you see from
your window. A. But that is the house of (the) Count N.,
isn't it? B. It was his (3 forms); but Count N. died a year
ago, and this gentleman had bought the house and also the
beautiful garden (already) before the fire. 27. Shall you all go
(use teifen) together, Mrs. N. ? No, the girls and I are going
to-morrow, and my husband will follow us with the boys in a
day or two (in some days). 28. He had seen much of the
world and knew men (use 2)Ienfi^ preceded by the def. art. 461)
better than I. 29. The little girl was holding a red flower in
(the) one hand and a white [one] in the other. 30. Some regard
(use (»alten with ftit) all people who are rich as happy.
D. 31. Do you know that pleasant old gentleman there who
is now speaking with the young girl in the white dress? Yea,
I know him quite well. His name is N., and he is the brother
of the old general N. who fell in the battle of (bei) G. 32.
Every good son helps hia parents (dat.) if they are poor. 33.
There are no good schools in that large city. 34. She will
bring ua hot water if you only wait long enough. 35. With which
old soldier was the prince speaking when you came? with this
[one] here? No, with the other. 36. Every good l>ook is a good
D.n.iized by Google
224 EXERCISE 10
friend. 37. Poor child, what have they done to you ? 38. We
saw before us a beautiful green meadow and a little river, and
on tlie other aide of the river a grand forest. 39. One of ray
dear old friends died on his journey to that distant coimtry.
40. Yoii will find that they are all honest people. 41. It won't
come to a great battle if the enemy stays in the mountains.
42. I shall give her this blue dress, for I shall wear it no
longer. 43. It was a bright beautiful morning when we saw
land.
E. 44. He will give us his new book because his old fone] is
no longer good enough. 45. We saw the little ship only now
and then (fi-oin time to time), when the sun shone upon the
white sail. 46. I>o rich people always give their childi-eu (their
children always) so much money ? 47. What is an easy ques-
tion for foolish people is often a very difficult question for wise
people, 48, 1 shall write him to-morrow that I have no such
work for him. But will he believe you (dat,)? 49. We have
lived long enough in these dark rooms where we never see the
sun. Why do we not move [out] into -the (auf^) country? 50.
Certainly, our brave soldiers will defeat the enemy, 51. A. What
is the name of this young man ? B. His name is Fred S., but
everybody calls him the prince. A. Why? B. Because he is
so proud. 52. Those (neut. sing.) are small trees, but they
bear big apples. 53. You will find poor people in every large city
of the world. 54. His old father was not only a brave man, he
was also good and honest. 55. I know the country of which
you speak; it is only a small country, but a vei'y fertile [one],
and the jieople who live there are all very rich and proud. 56.
Old books are often better than new [ones],
Exercise 11
Adjectives (continued) : 224, 226, Comparison : 240, 245, 246,
250. — Order of words (normal and inverted) ; 562, 663, 564. i-s,
665. \-%.
VoCABUtAKY
ber JRitter bie JRitter hnigU bet Oetjcg bie ^etjBge duhe
baaSitber (be«®tI6etS) silver b« a:Db (be6a:DbeS) deo4.h
baa ®olb (beS @olb«S) goU baS 5Bort bie Sortt word
ber 9Irm bie 9(rme arm. bag aSolE bie SJiJlter people,
ber ^o'nat bie ^Ro'nate month nation
3(meriffl America 2>eut(*lanb Germany
>.700'
>glc
EXERCISE 11 225
Iteben, liebte, geliebt love biei^en, bta$, ge6tO((ien break
XomS^tn, Wiinfcfete, gelplinfc^t wisA lajfen, lie^, gelaffen ie(
ebel noble ftemb strange, unknown tteu faithful, true
eigen o«»t Snfibig gracious fap almost, nearly
et(t /*■«! iifl(!& "ear (nari, 246) jiiruif Siwft
ba conj. si«ee, as
Part I
A. 1. 3)ie a93ume ttor eurem Jgaufe jinb »iel ^ft^iet, al^ bie Bor
bcm unfrigtn. 2. 3fie \}ahe id) Idngfte, breitere wnb f(t»en«i:e ©ttafeen
gefe^en, aU bie Don $anS. 3. §aii€ ift btr Ilitgl'te S^iiUr in bet
ganjtn <£d)ule, at)et et ift and) btr faulftt von alien (or bee aller=
fouEfte, 251). .4. 5>ie Spfel auf biefem aSaume fmb jWar fetir Ilein,
abit eS fmb bie beften in bem ganjen @act<n. 5. ^ai Werben @ie
t(»un, Ipenn ©ie raorgen naU) §au(e fommen? Sd^ gtoube, ii^ toerbe
bie( ju fdjreiben Ijoben, benn ic() Voartt auf melfrere SBriefe au«
atmerifa ; abn toenn bie noc^ nit^t ba finb, fo (729 b) werbe i($
meinem 93niber ^«Ifen. @t arbcitet an einem SBu(^e, unb ba et fid)
(139) neulii^ ben 3(tm gebrod^en ^at, fo laffe i(^ i^n nod) nict)t loieber
f^ireiben. 6. Sbele ^enf^en, bie nic^t attein an fi^ felbft, fonbern
aucfe on anbere benlen, jinb gliidlicfeer, aii biejenigen, Weld)e nur i^r
'eigeneS ©liict ^udjtn. 7. 31. „©ilber unb ©otb l^abe ic^ nid^t, toaS i6}
aber tfobe, iai gebe ii) bit." 3Set ^at baS gefagt? unb in Weldjem
^u^e finbet man bie(e Sffiorte gej^rieben? ». ^n ^« »i6el (5i6^e),
niii)t loa^t? 91. ^a; abet Iper flJrac^ bie SJorte? unb ju Wem? 8.
2Ji( gtij^ten Seute fmb nit^t immer bie ftartften, unb bie teii^ften nit^t
immer bit gladlidtfttn. 9. SBefi^eS toon beiben ift fi^toeter, ©il&er
ober ©olb?
B, 10. fiatt tear btr grB^ert Hon ben beiben Snaben, abet gri^
War bei Weitem (h/ far) ber ftatfere. 11. Wlan^ ebeten unb tal)feten
SRitter ^atte ber ^erjog bei fid), alS ct in ben Srieg jog, abet nut
lotnige Bon bitfen famen mit i^m juriid in§ 5Batertanb. 9?iele ^atttn
ben S^ob in bet <S>i}iafi}t gefunben ; mel)rere toaren Irani getootben unb
in bem ftemben, femen gnnbe geftotben ; unb einige Inaten auc^ ben
g^einben in bie §anbe gefaffen. 12. 2)a er nid^t fommt, toetbe i^ (or
fo toetbe i(^) nidfit langer auf it)n toarten, 13. 93or einigen 3Boi^en
obet einem ^Ronat war biefet alte §etr nodft ber teic^fte 3Rann in btr
ganjen ©tabt, jegt ift er faft einer ber atmften. 14. 3)leinen ftlteften
aSrubet, bet in ^metilo lebt, ba&« ^ >" i^^" Sabren nitbt gefe^en-.
226 EXERCISE 11
ober « fi^rieb mit neulid^, ha% er nftc^fteS 3a^t auf me^tete 9Jtonafe
)u unS na(^ Seutfc^lanb {ommen Icirb. 15. Kiinig Stlfieb toar einei
b« eiften unb aut^ einev b*r ebelftfii RBnige, bie Snglanb getfabt Ijat.
16. 3)er Raifer jrigte ji^ fe^t gnabig gegen b« e^tlic^en Seute, bie
er am SSege ftetien fa^ ; faft mit jebem \pxa^ er einige freunblic^e
Storte, unb bann tvlinfd^te er oQen bii8 befte ®IM ju i^rcr langcn
Seife. 17. ^afe bie Solbaten in biefem Rriege bem ffBntg felb(l treu
Ibleiben Werben, glauBe id^ gnnj geWife, benn ju jeber 3eit ^ct er i^nen
gejeigt, Wie ftclj er auf fie ift unb toie fe^r er fein Suit Ii«6t ; aUein
{Init) ber Riinig ift alt unb trant, unb toenn er ftirbt, fo irirb fein
aitefter ©o^, btr ftolje ^prinj Rar(, Siinig, unb bafe fie bem folgen,
toie bem SBater, ba3 glaube \^ nii^t. 3^n, ben ^rinjen, liebt leiner,
unb bo er pi lange in onberen fidnbem bei frembcn gurften geWefen
ift, fo glaubt ou(^ teiner, bafe er fein SBaterknb noi^ (ieb i&at (lieb
ffobtn =■ lieben) unb feine £anb«Ieute gut genug tennt. 18, §elfen
Sie mir ^eute (= Ipenn Sie rair ^eute Ijelfen, 576), fo toerbe iH)
S^nen morgen ani} ^elfen ; aber laffen ©ie mic^ (jeute aUein arbeiten
(= aber luenn Bit mi(^ ^eute aUein aibeiten laffen), fo bobe ii) mor^
gen noi^ fo biel i« t^un, ba^ ic^ leine 3*'* ^abtn Werbe, '^^fjnm ju
^elfen.
Paet II
A. 1. gin freunblid^ee Sort ift oft ftar!er, al3 ber ftSrlfte arm.
2. SBann tamen fie juriidt? 2(m erften (Stage) biefeS ^PionatS; aKein
(but) lange blieben fie ni(^t, fagte man mir, unb Warum fie fo fc^neH
hneber nad^ @nglanb reiften, baS hterben loir morgen Bon beinem ©ruber
l^iJren ; bet t}ai fie gefe^ien unb gefproi^en (yyoken with them), aber
anberen Seuten fagten fie tein 3Bort babon. 3. ®er 3iitter batte bem
§erjo9 fein SEBort gegeben, i^m ju \)iV{tn. Da er ahti fein Siort
btac^ unb feinen §etm aHein gegen bie g^einbe jieben (iefe, fo na^m
biefer {the latter) baS Sanb unb au^ baS ©(^lofe beS 3litter« toieber
an fid^. 4, 3# lPtinf(^e mir ein gtiS^ertS, aber lein ^e^ereS §auS,
unb ein(e)S, toelt^eS na^er bei bet ©tabt ift, al8 ba9 beinige. 5.
Singt fie morgen Wieber fo f<^Ied)t (= toenn fie morgen Wieber fo
fdjlei^t fmgt, 576), fo toirb niemanb in ber ganjen 6tabt glauben,
bafe §en S. ibr Secret geWefen ift. 6. Sir fagen: ,3Hanc() ta|)feixr
9iitter ift in jener ^i\%tvt {fierce) ©tblac^t gefaHen" ober au(t» : „3Kan=
^er ta^jfere fitter ift in jener ^eigen ©ctjlacbt gefaHen," baS ift ganj
boSfelbe. 7. aSenn Sinber auf ettoaS loarten, fo fc^eint i^nen eine
©tunbe oft biel (anger a.{% un8 ein gamer 'Xaa. ,- ,
EXEBCI8E 11 227
B. 8. 3ft baS OauS, in toel^em 6ie iBo^nen, ^f)x eifleneS ? 3t«n,
a -ift baS §auS eineS 3Kanneg, ber mit faft (janj ftemb ift unb f(^on
feit 3a^ren niiftt metjr in SJeittJ^lanb, fonbetn in SEmerita lebt, 9.
S)ie tjSc^ftfn a^jfetbaume tragen ni<^t immer bie beftrn SlJfel, mein
lieber $iuiige, unb bie St^iffe mit ben fltiJfeten Segeln (inb nii^t immer
bie l^nettfttn ; baS lemt man oft fc^on in bev Sc^ule, im £e6en abtx
lemt man eS gang gelDife, unb oft ju fpfit. 10. 2)et alte ©etjofl hjor
cinet ber ebelften unb gniibigPen §enen, bie baS Snnb Qti>abt ^atte,
unb fein treueS SBoIl (iebte i^n toie einen SSater ; gegen jebennann tear
er gut ; unb Inm jemnnb, ber arm mat, ju if>m (= unb hienn jemanb,
ber arm War, ju i^m lam, 576), fo ^If er i^m geioi^, benn niemanb
lie^ er Uon ftc^ ge^en o^ne ein freunblid^e^ SSoit. 11. ^ur bad eine
Bon meinen beiben S'lnmem, bo8 Ifingere, fiegt gegen 5Worben, unb in
biefem too^ine Dber arbeite i^i nur an ben ^ei^eften lagen. 12. ^m
niii^ften ^onat toerben »iele Don ben ftdrtpen jungen ^Snnem biefer
Stabt nac^ bem femen 9iorben an ben filonbile:^!"! jie^en unb @olb
fu^en, aber manner Bon i^nen luirb bort ioenig GJolb, fonbem nut
Diet fc^Were arbeit, ober felbft (even) ben a:Db finben. 13. ©cotter
luar je^n 3a^e jiinger ats fein (Jreunb ®o(t[)e, attein er ftarb f^on
biele ^a^re Dot i^m.
Part III
A. 1. A. That 13 the highest tree in out garden, and you see
now that it is much higher than our bouse, don't you ? S. Yes, I
see now that it is almost as high as the church. 2. Many a brave
(give two forms) soldier did not come back. 3. First we asked the
older of the two boys, and when we found that he did not know
the gentleman, we asked the younger, and he showed us a fine old
house with a large garden and said : " He lives there " * 4. Since
he does not wish to stay (not to stay wishes), I shall (fo Werbe id(i
etc. 729 b) let him go nest week. B. I know the house very well,
it has larger windows than ours, but smaller rooms. 6. This is
the longest day of the year. 7. la the vessel your own ? No, it
is my youngest brother's (that of my youngest brother). Mine is
now in England. 8. He ia the rieheat prince (tJttrft) who has the
most faithful people, not he who has much gold and ailver or the
most fertile country. 9. If T die, (729 b) you will find other good
friends who will help you.
B. 10. I have heard tJiat he is ill, but I have heard nothing of
his death. 11. The girl will soon come with some (etWoS) hot
• Pl»ce iUliqized words Bt th* head of the Benlence or cUub« In German. (>i >g |c
228 EXERCISE 11
water. 12. A. Those are his own words, and what he tells me I
believe. B. Always? A. Yes, for he always tells the truth. 13. 1
had never seen such (without ending) high mountains. 14. No
noble man breaks his word. 15. " Hack ! back ! " cried one of the
soldiers on horseback, " the king is coming ! " and then we saw a
magnificent carriage with six handsome horses, and in it sat the
king all alone. 16. We found more bad apples on this tree than
good ones. 17. All men are brothers, for all are the children of
God. 18. I saw her yesterday ; she is not so tall as her younger
sister, but much handsomer. 19. We have several long and broad
streets in our city, but none that are longer and broader than those
of Paris. 20. Mr. U, is certainly the richest man in the city, but
is he also the most honest? That is the question. 21. The biggest
and heaviest horses I have seen in Liverpool. 22. We shall find
many strangers (strange gentlemen) at your brother's. 23, Ger-
many is much smaller than this country. 24. Many of these stu-
dents are children of poor parents. 25. Have you no hotter water
than this ?
C. 26. The longest voyage from Germany to America of which
I have read is that which Johann Gottfried Beume made. He was
twenty-two {jWeiiintijItianjig) weeks on the ocean between Bremen
and Halifax ; but he came back in twenty-three days. 27. It is a
nation which has had but few great men. 28. John, yon will fall
from the tree and break your arm (to you the arm, 139) if you do
that. 29. What mother does not love her own child ? 30. When
shall you go to England, sir (my gentleman)? I shall go next
month. 31. A, And he is rich, you say ? B. Very rich, one of
the richest men in (the) town. He keeps (holds) the best and
fastest horses. But he will not give you one cent (gent, masc.) if
you tell him that I (have) sent you. 32. Never had the old duke
had a more faithful knight than this one ; and that is why (there-
fore) he loved the knight's son so much (fcfir). 33. I shall buy the
girl some good books or pictures ; that will make her much happier
than if I give her money. 34. This is the hottest day of the whole
year, I believe. 36. The river is very broad, as you say; but
(aHein) the water is often not deep enough for the largest vessels.
D. 36. He who loves God loves also the truth. 37. A better
friend you will not easily find. 38. There is no church in this
little village ; the nearest is that in S., almost an hour from here
if one goes on foot. But the school is in M., another village,
EXERCISE 12 229
and is much nearer. 39. Ten long years he had worked at his
great book. 40. On the next morning tliey found the old king
dead on the battlefield, and round about him lay some of his
bravest generals and soldiers. 41. That ia a much more difficult
question than the other. 42. He was the son of one of the poorest
women of this little village, but now all the world knows him as
(alS) one of the greatest men of our nation. 43. Several months
ago when I was travelling in England, Gladstone waa still living,
and Bismarck also; now they are both dead. 44. On the first
moniing, the sun shone bright, but on the next it was so dark in
my little room that I slept almost till noon. 45. America is one
of the richest countries of the world. 40. I have known other
strong men who died when they were much younger than he.
47. Yesterday, when the soldiers marched through the street, the
teacher let us go to the window, and we saw them all. 48. I have
notliing to do u-ith such, people, I know them only too well ; they do
not keep their word.
Exercise 12
Modal auxiliaries : principal parts 339 ; inflection of the preseut
indicative and past indicative 340 ; consult also 342-345.
VocABUiAKY
baS ©ebirge bie ©etitge Jimun- bet ©nnntag bie ©onntage Sunday
tains bet Stein bie ©teine stone
ber ©ommer bie ©ommer summer berleil bieS^eile part
bet aSintet bie ©inter winter baS^etr bie§eei:e armtj
ber Saben (beS ©UbenS) south boSJ^al bie j^jitler vallei/
bev ainfang bie SInfange be^in- bie ©efc^it^te bie ©efc^ic^teii stot-i/,
niny history
ber 3lrjt bie Srjte physician bie 3^ruj)pen plural troops
ber Spf f bie iloCfe kead
c&ten, efjrte, gee&rt honor fliegen, flog, ift geflogen fiy
fu^ten, fii^lte, gefiiljlt fed piemen, flo^, ift geflotjen flee
^nffen, ^offte, ge^offt hope leiben, litt, gelitten suffer
^olen, ^olte, ge^clt fetch, get treiSen, ttieb, gctneben drive
ftiafen, ftrofte, geftraft punish toerfen, iporf, gttaiotfen throw
r.jt.:?:i.« Google
280 EXERCISE 12
frif(^ freak, new gai lein- itone at all fubttc^ sovihem
gtctc^ equal gat ni(^t Tiot at ail tvann warm
!alt coH getn (709) ghdly liebet rather
gat efcn, eery ni}lb(i<^ northern ba (Ae»
botan «( I/, o/ it
eben or getabc jiist,Jitst then bci^ conj. sfif^, ye(, hut, for all that
ebenfo jim* ae nai^bem conj. afier
mttuntei at times tH)nt JU + infin. without + pres, part,
jutec^t to rights, in order urn ju + infin. in order to + infin.
BuLE. Ill infinitive phrases, the infinitive is preceded (not, as
in English, followed) by the words depending on it (622),
Part I
A. 1. %a lag bci ainte Xogel unttr bem Saumt unb {onnte vxi^t
me^T fliefien, tiKil bet Anabe i^n mit eincm @teine gemocfen {hit) ^atte.
a, „3)u barfft morflen wieber mit ben Jtinbmi im ®arten fpieten," fagte
btr Slijt ^eute, „benn xi^ \ii)t, bu Hft mi)i me^t tiani, abec bu barfft
noi^ leine Sl))fel toitbet effen, ^&irft bu, mein Uebet Sunge?" 3. 35u
foUft beinen SSatet unb beine SHutttr t^ren, ^eifet «g (»( m said or
written) in ber Sibil. 4. 2;«t ©Dntmet, Wenn e« toarm i|l, tragt man
liebet (wears rather, i.e. prefers to wear) ^eHe Sleiber, boc& im ffljinter,
Wenn e3 latt ift, lieber buutele. 5. %. ^c^ ^abe Biele bet beften Oie=^
fi^ii^ten gelefen, abet in meinem ganjen 2eben feine tnteteffantere o.U
biefe ^iet, unb i^ glaube ani) ni(i)t, ba^ Sie tine beffere lennen : aut^
{moreover or besides) ift fie ni(I)t longer, al8 eine gu(e ©efd^idfite fein
barf, i(^ ^abe baS ganje Sui$ in ettpaS toeniget {less) at§ brei Stun^
ben gelefen. ®. SBenn baS iDo^r ift, fo mufe i(^ ti am^ lefen, aber
^eute ^obe xif teine 3eit metjr, ii^ loetbe fciS morgen obet abetmotgen
(dai/ after to-morrow) bamit toatten, bann ^abe iH} nut toenig ju t^un.
a. ®ut, @ie titnnen ba* Sucfe f(^on jegt mit (along) noc^ §aufe ne^=
men ; unb Wenn ©ie e3 ebenfo gem lefen, loie id), fo mBgen ©ie ti
3^ter S(^H)«ftet geben.
B. 5. 3^ti$ fcttte ben Srief geftem fd&teiben, itiatum Ijat er ba« ni^t
get^n? 6t iDoUte iljn auc^ f(^reiben, abtx er Eonnte e5 nit^t, benn
feine ^uttet Wutbe fran!, unb et mu&te fii^neH mi} bet ©tabt fasten,
um ben Xltjt ju ^olen. 6. 91. .©g ift nii^i ebel, Wenn man anbcte
leiben lafet, o^ne i^inen ju ^lelfen. ^^•1'^'^ (formerhj) toax bicftr
9)iann reif^ter alS mir, unb ba ^at er unS oft geEjolfen ; je^t abet ^at
et nit^ts me&r auf (in) bet ^elt, «nb Wit tootlen i^m ^elfen, mift
EXERCISE 12 231
Walft? $. 3a, fletii; ioi) loitb et unS baS t^uti loffen? ift et nii^t
ju flolj? 21. Ser )u ftotj? SBon mem fatten ©ie ba3 ge^Brt? ®ie
Seute, bie ^tjnen bo8 gefagt ^6enj !&nnen i£)n niti^t fe^r gut lennen,
^Wat mu^ ic|i (elber fageti, bafe ev mitunter ettoaS talt gegen frembe Seute
ju fein Weint, abet ftolj ift er (564.9; 565.9) in 5Bo£)t^eit (in
realUy) gar ni(^t. 7. 8(. ^Rai^ften ©Dtnmer foil t(i& in« ®e6irge vei^
fen unb biel ju %m% geEjen, fagt mein 9(i^, aber i(^ mag gar niti^t
attein reifen. SEenn ©ie nid)t mil mir faljirtn iooHen, pbet nicitt tiJn;
nen, fo Witt xi) 3^ren ©ruber bitten, mit mir ju g«()«n, unb id^ Ijoffe,
et wirb eS t^un. S. 3)q« mag fein, benn mein Sruber ge^t gem )u
55ufi, aber mit geljt e3 je^t fo fc^Iei^t {I am, now in such poor health),
ba^ i<^ an eine Meife 'm% ©ebirge nidftt benten barf.
C. 8. fflenn ein ^ungc Hug ift unb leitfjt lemt, fo fagt man oft
in 3)eutfc^Ianb Bon iljm : »ber ^at einen offenen fiopf" ; aber Wenn
einet bumm ift unb iiic()t gut lemen tann, fo tjei^t e« {it is said or
they say) Bon i^m : „er ift ttuf ben Sopf gefatlen." Unb ioenn ein
Knabe etlDa« t^un toiH, Wa^ er ni(i()t tljun bsrf, fo fagt bet SGoter obet
bie ^fJuttet mitunter : „bu mu^t bit baS au^ bem fiopf ftfjlagen," boS
^ri^t (means) fo Biel als : „bu batfft ni($t me^r baton benfen" obet
„bu foOft eg nic^t ttiun, benn i(^ toitt e§ nid)t (»aben." Unb Ioenn bet
3iunge bann boc^ t^un toill, tooS bie Sltetn nii^t hjoffen, fo fann eS
loramen, bofe bet 5Batet „ibm ben S.ep\ jurei^t fe^t," ba§ l^eifit, ba^
er i(»n ftraft obet gor fi^Iagt ; unb bann fagt man : „h)et nic^t tioten
(listen, obey) toilt, bet mufe fu^iten" obet teiben ; "tai ift ein atteS,
iDO^re^ 9Bott (saying). 9. 9In jenem ^ei^en Sonntage tour 3Rc23o:
loeH, ber ©eneral beS nijrblit^en ©eere«, mit feinen ©olbaten ii6et
einen Eleinen ^lu^ gegen iStiben gejogen unb ^atte fd^on einen gtogen
2:eil beS fublic^ien §eereS untet Seautegatb gefc^jlagen. 3)ann aber
tarn ©eneral ^o^nfton mit frif(f»en a:tupi)en auS bem 3:^le be3
©tiennnboat) unb ttieb bie g^einbe nai^ ^Rotben juriicE, fo baf; fie fi^
nid)t liinger Iialten !onnten unb na<^ 2SiafI)ington flieben mu^ten.
%a.i toar bie erfte ©d^lad^t am SBuII 91un, Wie man ben tteinen gtu^
nennt, 3(m 9lnfang Wnren bie beiben ^eere einanbet gleidfi ; bot^
nacfebem ^o^nfton tam. War ba§ fUblii^ie ftartet ats bag nijtblii^e.
2lm naiiiften %ix^xi — eS iuar aud& im ©ommet, aber einen 9)lonat
fjj&tet — ft^fugen bie fiiblicfeen Ituppen unter ^o^nfton bie nijrbtit^en
uttter ^Dpe loiebet, auf bemfelben Sc^ilad^lfelbe, unb au^ bann fto^ baS
nBtbUi^e §eei toieber narfi SBaftiington. 10. %^ lootlte eben, or
gerabe, in baS anbete 3''''"**'^ 9«^^it. !"> {then) tam er in bie SE^ttt
(^ atS er in bie ^^I^ut fam). 3iater ging gu i^m, gab i^m bie
I , .1 . G(.)0^lc
232 EXERCISE 12
§anb unb.ftagte f«unbli(^ : ,9Iun {welt), ffa\l bu bie §etren ju §aufe
gefunben ?" ei aber antiportete tall : „3a, bci^ fein 5Kenf(t( tttoUte mir
^etfen, unb ba ii^ ntt^t Idnger bitten moi)tt, Bin it^ Wieber }u eu^
eefommen."
Part II
A. 1. 3Bit lelben nii^t urn ju ef{m, fcnbein loir effen urn ju leben.
2. 2Me InHipen beS ©iiben* !onnten fic^ geg*" bie beS 9IotbenS nid^t
(dngei &aUen unb mufiten auS bem %}}ai<:, mo bie ©d^itai^t i^ten 2Cn=
fang na^m, ind ©ebirgc flietjen. ^ann aber !onnte i^nen baS n6rb=
licfie §eer nii^t raeitei folgen. 3, ^ioc^bem bet alte 5Kann tange ftitt
ba gefeRen (latte, oljne ein 9Sort ya fptetfjcn, fragte i^ einer Don unS ;
„§aUcn Sie bie ©efd&ic^te nic^l fiit Wa^v? @« fc^eint, ba^ Sie fie
nit^t glauben." „2iebei Will i^ glauben," rief jener (iAe former),
„ba^ balb eine ^tit tommen toirb, in bee aui} bie 3))enf<^en fliegen
{jinnen !" „9lun (well)," fagte einev ton ben iiingeren §en:en, „au{^
b i e (emphatic : (Ao.() ^t\t tann nid&t melir fern fein, man ^pnd)t
je|t fi^on Bon 9iefti=2)orf bt3 nat^ S^icaflO, Wanim foK man ni^lt auc^
batbfo hieit fliegen iBnnen?" 4. g^rii^ ntDtgenS (adverbial genitive,
in the inoming), Wenn i^r 3""g*i ^""^ i" tier ©tabt noc^ f(^[afen
burft, mttffen bie auf bem Iiorfe oft frfton bie Kii^e auf bie Siefen
treiben ober tnit i^ren @Item auf^ §elb ge^en unb arbeiten.
B. 5. @§ mag aUeg fo fein, trie bu fagft, lieber O^reunb, ba^ nur
tvir ^iei auf ben ^gen fte^en unb bie 3ilenfd()en in @^ina auf bem
Sopfe. S**) Bi" f*IB*r i*'* ^ort geWefen unb barf barum nid^t fagen,
ba^ eg nic^t fo ift, botti fjaSe i(i) Oiete fieute auS jenem fremben Sanbe
gefannt, hjelcfje ni^t fo fe^r auf ben fiopf gefoDen TOoren, Wie geJciffe
Seute in unferm (136) lieben ajotetfanbe. 6. SL 9lad&ften SBinter
^offt ^err Stiinig mit me^ireren alien Scfeulfreunben eine Ifingete 9teife
naiii bem marmen ©uben ju mac(ien, S. SBoDte et biefe Steife nii^l .
fc^on bor einem Sa^re affein ma(t»en? 31. 3a, abet fein alter Sater
ftarb gerabe, al« et reifen tnoUte, unb batum blieb et ju §aufe. 7.
3n jebem Sanbe giebt e« SRenf^en, toet(t»e iljt 3iaterlanb nicf)t lieben.
@oli^e Seute tann man nid^t ebenfo ftrafen, mie anbere fd^tec^te 9)Ien^
ft^ien, bod^ roer fli^It nic()t,* ba^ man fte bennccf) fttaft, benn tetner e^rt
fie. 8. 3)a« Heine SRabc^en WoIIte ben ©tetn tnS SlBaffet toerfen,
aber fe Watf i^in bem finaten an ben ^opf. 9. 3)ie Glefct)id&te Bon
2iabib unb feinem treuen ^reunbe ^onat^n, bie il&r auf morgen [emen
mttfet, ift eine ber fc()i)nften in bet ganjen Sibel ; aud^ ii^ Will f" g«n
wieber mit eud) lefen, ■ ,-• i
BXEBCISB 12 233
C. 10. ®dC[ i^ ^(men tin ^eHeteS jtleib maiden aU bag ^^rei
jUngften Si^lDeftet, ober etn bitnnereg (243)? Sin ^eDereg, Wenn xdf
tiitteti batf, benn eg foil pit ben ©omraet fdn, ttitb im ©ommer trage
i(^ tit($t gem bunfle ^[eiber. 11. 3n b«m nerbHt^ften 3^ei[e jeneS gw^en
SanbeS mwfe man fiel Bon bem fatten Winter leiben ; in bent fttbU(i(i=
ften biel Bon bem ^ei^en ©ommer ; unb in ber 31iitie beSfel&en ift ein
i}of}ti ©ebitge, too faft gat tetne 3Renf(^en Wo&nen iBnnen. 12. „@g
ij't bem §erm niilit fc^luer, butc() »iel ober toenig ju ^elfen," fagt bie
Sibel, unb Wenn bu bag erfte Suet) Samue'Ug, bag ^ei^t {thai is) Bon
Samuel, tefen toittft, fo toirft bu finben, ba^ eS gonot^on, ber Jfrewnb
SaBibg, tear, ber biefe SBorte fijradfi. 13. 3Bie eft ^tte i$ bit fc^on
gefagt: „bu fottft bag nic()t tljun," boc^ i^ fa(( ganj gut, bu tooHteft
ni(^t ^Sten; nun mu^t bu bafiir fii^ten (leiben), 14. 3iBit ^ahtn je^t
einen ber beften Srjte in unferm tleinen 35otfe, unb toit ^offen, ba&
et noi$ lange bleiben Wirb. HJiitunter lapfen i^n gar bie 2eute aug
ber ©tabt pi fii) ^olen (cause to be fetched = - ./for). 15. SBer
nut fut bie ©c^ute temt, o^ne -baran ju benteii- .a, ■ ette " fiir baS
gonje 2eben ju lemen, fiir ben ift eg faft e it, ba^ et gar
nid)tg lemt unb fo bumm bfeilit, toie er ift.
Part III
iew carefully the different
A. 1. A. Can the little girl read and write ? S. She can read,
but she cannot write yet, A. How long has she been going (goes
she already) to school ? B. Only (first) a few months. 2. A good
physician is also a good friend. 3. When shall John send you the
money, Mary? On the first day of every month. 4. What we
suffered (pert) in that long war I cannot tell you. 5. Since
no bod y has heard anything from him, he must be still in England.
^ Af the beginning of the battle, our ai-my and that of the enemy
were equally strong, but (bo(^) soon one of their generals came with
fresh troops from the other side of the river and drove a part of
our army back into the mountains. 7. My children are not allowed
to play with these boys, 8. (The) summer is coming; it is grow-
ing warmer from day to day, and the trees are already getting
green. 9. 1 hope to see you in Germany next year (ace., 492),
10. He may be older than his friend, but (bo(^) it cannot be much.
11. That is another question, and a much more difficult one than
the first. 12. They let him go without punishing him.
284 EXERCISE 12
B. 13, I waa just about to go to Berlin when he came (in order)
to get his books, 14. A. May I ask who told (perf.) you this ?
B. Certainly. Your own brother told (perf.) me the whole story
A. When waa that? B. It was on (-the) Sunday; after (the)
cburcli, I think. 15, I must say the first part of his letter is very
interesting. 16. Do you feel (yourself) strong enough to drive to
(the) town ? Yes, if you are willing to drive with me. 17, What
beautiful valleys and what high mountains we shall see on our
journey ! 18. Not all birds can fly. 19. A. Have you read the
story of the dog with three heads, John? B. Tes, we read (perf.)
the story in school. A. And can you tell me what the dog's name
waa ? B. His name was Cerberus. 20. One must eat in order to
live, still one must not live in order to eat. 21. A. Isn't it wanner
in the other room ? B. In which room ? A. Up-stairs, in the
room over us. B. I think not. An hour ago it was just as cold
there as here. 22. I will rather die than live among such people.
23. It was winter, but at (ju) times' it waa ao warm that we sat
with (bei) open windows. 24. A bird flies faster than a horse or a
dog can run.
C< 25. Germany has a much larger army than England, but net
so many men-of-war (Jt[i{{|Sf(f)iff, 52). 26. He was like a child, he
did not care to be alone in a dark room. 27. She writes so badly
that I cannot read her letters. 28. I could not but buy the pic-
tures ; they were so much more beautiful than those which he
showed me yeaterday. 29. Every nation honors its great men.
30. If he says that I shall do it, I must do it. 31. As he was not
able to find a horse in the village, he had to go on foot. 32. The
men were to work in the held, the women in the garden. 33. That
may be so as you say, but I cannot yet believe it. 34. Which army
do you think is the stronger, the southern or the northern ? The
northern, but you will find that the southern has much better
generals. 35. In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was
with God, and the Word was God (Go<:I was the Word). 36. You
shall not go to school, children, for you are both ill. I will get the
physician. 37. The boy intended to throw the stone into the tree,
but he threw it into the open window. 38. Shall I go with you (in
order) to show you the big ship? Yes, if you will be so kind.
39. When my little boy saw the big dog in front of the door, he
did not like to go into the house,
D.n.iized by Google
EXERCISE 12 235
D. 40. Without saying a word, he took one of the best books
from the table and went Into his room with it (therewith Into his
room). 41. After we had dined, we all went into the forest nearby
(near forest), lay down (laid us) under one of the bi^eat trees and
slept till it grew cooler. 42. The fire on the hearth was burning
so brightly that one could read in the whole large room. 43. I
cannot give her any easier work. 44. A, Won't you drive with
me ? I don't like to drive alone. B. I will gladly drive with you
if you will wait till I have written this letter. 46. A. How many
books did you buy (pert) 7 B. None at all. A. Why not ? B.
Because some rich gentlemen who were there before us had bought
them all. 46. When it was (became) evening, Fred drove hia cows
home. 47. Icarus, the son of (the) Iteedalua, tried (uae WoUeil, 347)
to fly, but he fell into-the sea. 48. I will tell you which (neut.)
is the highest mountain in the world if you tell me which (neut.)
is the largest river. 49. You must not do that, my child. 50. A.
When were you to bring me the book? B. Yesterday. A. And
when did you bring (perf.) it ? B.- To-day. I was unable to bring
it yesterday, for my brother was very ill and he begged me to
drive to (the) town and (to) get the physician. 61. Children, you
may go into the garden and play, but you must not eat any apples,
do you hear ?
E. 52. As John had no time, I let Mary go to Mrs. F. 63. The
valley of the Bode (fem.), a little river in (- the) northern Germany,
is one of the finest in that country. 54. A prouder man I have
never seen. 65. Shall I get you some hotter water ? No, I thank
you, this is hot enough. 66. The enemy was coming nearer and
nearer, and all (the) women and children were obliged to flee from
the city into the woods on the other side of the river. 57. He did
not like to travel alone, and therefore he asked his friend to go
with him. 58. I cannot believe that your house is larger than his.
59. John wanted to play with us, but he was not allowed [to].
60. After the enemy (plural) had fled, our troops followed them
across the river into their own country and took some of their
cities. 61. It was (already) winter, yet he still wore the same
clothes that he had worn all (the whole) summer. 62. In order
to got (come) into the woods yonder, we have to go through the
little village where my sister lives. 63. In the mountains, one
prefers to ride on donkeys rather (rides one rather on donkeys)
than on horses.
D.n.iized by Google
BXBBCI8E 13
Exercise 13
Compound verbs with inseparable prefixes : 425, 426. Inflection
(in the indicative mode only) of the present, past, perfect, plu-
perfect and future of bef^reiben 430, 431 (see also 432).
Voc ABU LAKY
bet 2)iener bie lienct servant ber ©ad bieSdrfe sach
bet ©egen (beS ©egenS) blessing bie Sunft bie Rtinfte art
basiluljftt (be^fimifetS) ciypper ba3®efi^enl '6\tQie\^mtt preseru
bet ^apft bie ^d()fte pope bag ^etj (86) bie §erjen Aeart
fenben
fanbte
gefanbt
send
tmVdfOi
etreic^'te
etreic^f
reach, attain,
ettoat'ten
evttct'tete
etloat'tet
expect
etjfi^'Ien
erjti&I'te
etaa^If
tell, relate
flebtau'^ien
gebrnuc^'le
gebtawt^t'
use, make vse of
Betfu'((ten
betfu^'te
berfiK^f
try, attempt
Oetloan'beln
BettoWbelte
Beiivan'belt
change, transform
betorn'men
be!am'
befom'men
yet
et^al'ten
et^ielf
ettial'ten
receive
etfc^ei'nen
etfd&ien'
iii etft^ie'nen appear
flcfaCIen
gefiel'
gefal'len
please
Bettjjte'i^en
wetfptat^'
Betfpto'c^en
promise
berfte'^en
Betftanb'
Betfton'ben
understand
flelin'gen
gelonfi'
ift gefun'ger
1 succeed
eS grfingt' mit / succeed
e« ift mit gel
lin'gen I have aueeeeded
bid (AicA, %
nattitli(^ natural
bennod^ nevertheless
e^t i/enume
natMi^ adv. of course
fogleic^ at once
gemein commoti,
tet^t right, ■
very
too^l well, indeed
ordinary
Boa fuU
jule?t at last
^iibfc^ p/-e«y,
!)unbett (a)
hundred
o6 if, whether
babei in it,
at it
obgleid^ although
leet empty
batauf thereupon,
ftatt with gen. instead
(e$t ?a«*
onit
, toit
tuftifl merryjolly
A. 1. 3^alauf fam et ju mit unb erjfilflte mit, ba^ e« i^t nii^l
gefungen Yoax ju t^uit, h)a« (je unS bet^roi^en ^atte ; boi^ oU « mit
EXERCISE 13 237
iai (agte, war e§ ju fpat, benn eS toot fc^on bet [e§te be§ SHonatS,
2. It«r atte Siiener ^iStt mdfft me^r gut, unb oft Berfte^t er gat nic^t,
toag bie Scule i^n ftagen ; bennodtr anttDoitet et einem immei ettvaS,
ob cS red^t ift ober nidit. 3. 3113 id) ju i^m fam, jeigte er mit (0=
g(eic() bie beiben SBilbet unb frogte raid) : „§alten Sie ni((tt baS Heinere
flit ba« ^ubfc^ere?" 91ber id) mufite i^m fagen, ba^ mit baS gritfiere
beffer gefief. 4, 81. a3iS je^t ift not^ teinet Don i^nen etfdiienen, abet
{ommen Wetben jie alle, bad Meif; ic^ getci^, benn fie ^aben eS mit
Betfptot^en. S. ®at, toir tcoUen nod) eine ©tunbe toarten, abet Wenn
fie bann nii^t Ijiet fmb, fo mitffen ioir betfudten, ba§ nacfifte Iiorf* ju
etreic^en, wnb bort iibet ^iaift bleiben. 5, SI. 5Konn biitfen Wit ©ie
motgen eitoatlen, §ert ©. ? 9. 9Ii($t bor je^n U^t. a. t)ai ift
t«d)t fi)at. SiJnnen ©ie nic^t eine ©tunbe fttt^et lommen? 81, SBenn
ti fein mu^, ja.
B. !Set Glalbmai^eT (Gold-Makrr or Alchtmist)
SBor bielen ^aljten lebte ein gewiffet W<mn, bet ^atte lange Bet=
fud^t, au§ gemeinem Jtu^fet ed)te§ @oIb )u maiden, ©oli^e Seute
nennt man oft ©olbmadjet, obgleii^ eS nod) teinem Bon i^neu gelungen
ift, flupfet in ®olb ju betWanbeln. %u<i) biefet "SHaxtn tonnte ni^ts
bflbei erreic^en ; julegt abn fi^rieb et bennoi^ ein bidteS Suc^ iibw
,.®ie ftunft, ®Dlb jw macfeen" unb fanbte e« nacfe 9Iom (Bome) an ben
*)Japft. @t etWattete natUtlid^, ein ^ti6fc()eS ©efd&eni bafut ju befom:
men ; a&et bet $apft Wat ebenfo ttufl, toie bet ISolbmadiet, ja, nodft
Ilttget, benn alS et baS Sui$ er^ielt, fdiidte er biefem ftatt beS ®e=
fd^enfeS einen gro^en, teeten ©ai mit einem fteunbtidten ©rief, unb
in bem Sriefe ftanb gefi^tie&en : ,3)tein tteuer ©otjn .' 2)ein gto^eS
SBu^i, in Welf^em 2m bet armen aSelt ton Reiner neuen Sunft et=
ja^lft, ^at ntir fe^t gefaHen ; ti ift gar intereffant, unb i^i barf too^l
fagen, ti ift ba§ befte toon affen Sttdfiem, bie in ben le^ten (junbert
^a^ren etfi^ienen ftnb, 35a nun au(^ unfeie (iebe fflitc^e je^t toieber
red)t atm ift unb ©olb gebraud^en fann, unb ba 2iu bie ffiunft ®oIb
JU raac^en gewi^ ft^on »iel beffer Berfte^ft afS ii^, fo mu^t i)u mir
burc^ meinen Diener fogleid^ einen ©ad boll baBon fi^iien. 5t(^ toer=
f»»ted&e ®ir fd^on ie|t meinen ©egen bafiit unb banle 2)ir Bon ganjem
§erjen (with all my heart)." SSaS bet ®olbma($et ju bem luftigen
Sriefe beS $af)fte§ fagte unb ob er i^m batouf antWortete, baS erj£i^a
unfete ©eftiiic^te nid&t. D.n.iizedbyGoOQlc
238 EXERCISE 13
Part II
A. 1. SBir ettoarteten (jeftetn jtori gute alte ^teunbe auS Serliii,
obtt fie fatnen nii^t, unb nac^bem wir me^tete ©tunben grtoattet Ifat=
ten, ei^ielten Wir einen fetief, in iuel(^em f" un^ (c^rieben, ba^ fie
ni^t tommen lonnten, Weil i^re ?lKuHer geftctben tear. 2, ©r na^m
bit ®ef<^ente bom lifiije, unb o^ne unS bofftt ju banten fling tx bamtt
in ben ©arten, too er fte fogleid^ ben Sinbern gab. 3. D^ne ©otteS
Segen fielingt bit feine Stbeit ; mit ®oHe« Segen abet toirb bit aud^
bie Id&wetfte atbeit Uid()t. 4. Sim fe^ten be3 ^DJonaK fanbte bet
©eneral unfem flnaben buvc^ feinen 3)iener einen gatijen 6aif VoU bet
beften Stpfel au« fetnem eigenen ©atten ; auc^ btac^te bet 3)tenet einen
luftigen Ileinen Stief, in iDel^em bet ofte §ert Vit^piai}, balb felbft
mit ^unbett feinet tapfetften Solbaten ju etfdjeinen unb ben Jtnaben
in bet nai^ften ©t^Iat^t gegen i^te Seinbe ju ^etfen. 5. SEBet bie
^erjen bet 9)Ienf(^en !ennt unb bie fiunft Berfte^t, i^nen ju gefaden,
bet lann fie mituntet fa^iteti getabe Wie er WtH ; abet eine eble Itun^
ift eS ni(^t, Ivenn man nut ben %en[c^en ju gefaQen Detfte^t unb fie
ni^t au(^ )u ettoag fgii^^etem unb Seffetem (231) fii^rt.
B. 6. ^an lann tootil gemeineS ftujjfet in ei^teS ©elb bertoanbetn,
biK^ ni4»t in e(^teS ©nib ; baS tft nod^ leinera gelungen. 7. 9BaS
^ei^t {means) e^, toenn man ton jemanb fogt : „3)et ift in ^om fle=
toejen unb ifot ben ^apft nii^t gefe^ten?" 8. Ku^ ein fe^t bummet
SRenfi^ lann ein billed 9ud& fi^teiben; iio^ nur einem Hugen ioitb eS
flelingen, ein guleS }u fi^ieiben. 9. ilennft bu bie ©efc^it^te Hon bem
flugen @oIbmac^et, bei bem $a))ft Bon feinet neuen ^unft ©olb ju
tnac^en erjii^lte? ja, bie fenne ii^ Mob'- '^^^ ®oIbma(^et mat
jtoar tei^t ftug, abet bet ^ap\t toat iioif noi) biel tliiget, benn et
fanbte Jenem fogleic^ einen leeten ©od unb bat t^n, in bemfelben
etWaS toon feinem bielen ®oIbe an bie Ritti^e ju fi^titen. 10. Dbgleic^)
bie ^fetbe fe^t ^iibf^ baten unb aud^ f^neUei (tefen, al^ bie beS
anbeten SHonneS, fo tonnten toit fie bod^ ni(^t gebtau^en, benn fiit
unfete f^toete 9(tbeit auf bem 2anbe mliffen toit ftfitlete 2:iete ^ben ;
barum tauften Wit fte au^ nitbt. 11. ©tatt beS einen gtogen Sui^jeS,
ttielcb*^ « bringen foUte, btai^te er jtoei anbete, Biel tteinete. 5RaHit=
lti$ mu^ten toit i^n toiebet nad^ ^aufe fc^i^en unb eine ganje @tunbe
Watten, big et mit bem tec^ten tarn. 12. 9Bag ©ie ba in bet $anb
tjaben, f^eint jtoot ®oIb )u fein, aber ob eS ec^tca ift, tonn ii^ 3^"*"
ni(^t fogen.
D.n.iized by Google
Part III
A. 1. Although the old man had never gone to school, he
could read and write quite well (good, 210). 2. Sometimes the
gods changed a man into a tree or a bird. 3. When we reached
the well, we found it empty. 4. Those who came too late did
not get anything to eat. 5. In olden times, emperors, kings and
other princes often went (use jie^ien) to Rome and asked the
pope for (am) his blessing. 6. He knows the hearts of men and
understands how one must lead them. 7. Whether he had come
before me or after me (that) I could not tell her (use fagen ;
etja&(en = tell at length, narrate). 8. That was a jolly story
which he told us yesterday, wasn't it ? 9. A genuine English-
man is fond of travelling (travels gladly). 10. I will send the
children a sack full [of] apples ; that will please them bettei .
than many another present, I think. 11. Many dull men have
written very big (thick) books. •
B. 12. If you can use your blue dress no longer, you may give
it to the little daughter of our former (use compar. of [rii(»)
servant ; she is not quite so tall as you and can still wear it.
13. When he went to America, he promised to write me every
month. Kow he has been there a whole year (is already a
whole year there), and I have received only two letters from
him, and those (use ber) are not very long. 14. Instead of the
new books he sent me some old ones which I could not use.
15. He told them a long, long story, but nobody believed a word
of it, 16. Yonder, where you now see the pretty little church,
there stood (perf.) the count's palace; but that was [a] hundred
years a^. 17. You are to go to the physician and ask him to
come at once; do you understand me now? 18. A. Whose
horses are these ? your brother's (those of your brother) ? B.
No, they are mine. Do you like them (please they you) ? A.
This one here I like very much (fetir), but that one there does
not seem to be very strong, B. That only seems so. If you
will take a drive with me, I will show you that he is just as
strong aa the other.
C. 19. At last they led me into a dark little room where I
found the poor woman whose son I had been looking for so
long. 20. A. Next week we expect my youngest brother from
America. B. And how long will he stay here in Germany ?
A. Only a few months, 21. A. When his first book appeared, the
240 EXERCISE 14
people would not read it. B. Why not ? A. Because nobody
knew him. But now everybody buys Lis books without asking
whether they are good or bad. 22. Thereupon the servant took
the two little boys, one under each arm, carried them quickly
through the water and set them under a tree on the other side.
Then he went back and fetched the bag with the money also;
and it was high time, for in less than an hour, just as they
reached the castle, their enemies appeared also. 23. God alone
knows the hearts of all men. 24. She had been ill a long time (a
long time ill) ; and when she tried to walk, she found that she
could not stand on her feet. 25. When we were in Borne, we
tried to see the pope ; but we did not succeed. 26. There are
men who work under the ground all their lives (their whole
life), and these are the people through whose labor we get the
copper and gold and silver, out of which we make our money.
Exercise 14
Compound verbs with separable prefixes : 439, 441, 442. In-
flection (indicative mode only) of the present, past, perfect, plu-
perfect and future of anfaitgeit 443, 444 (see also 445).
Vocabulary
bet (?inger bie ^ngn finger bie §erfe bic fierfen hedge
ber ^of bie §Bfe yard, bie Aammet bie ^annneni chamber
court bie %aabt bie S^auben dove
ber StaD bie StfiHe stable bet ©ctn (84) bie Tiornen thorn,
bet 3:'utni bie 3:iitme tower brier
bet 2Btnb bie ©inbe wind baS Sett (84) bie Sette» bed
We^en, toe^te, geWe^t bhw f))inneii, f))ann, geffionnen »pin
wiffen, tou^e, fleWu|t (384) know fted&en, ft{n$, gefloc^en prkk
tnad^fen, tvui^d, iji getoai^fen grow
an'getii^tt touch
auf Be^iitt eease, atop
begon'nen begin
befe'^en laok at,
i(it auS'gegangen go out
ift ein'gef^Iafen fall asletp
ift ^eim'getDtmnen come horn^
An tfip'^en
tU^tte an'
auft»Bten
^Brte ouf
begin'nen
begann'
Me'^en
UM
QUi'ee^en
ging qu«'
ein fi^Iafen
fc^Iief ein'
^etm'linnmen
tarn ^eim"
BXBECISE 14 241
nie'betfallen pel nie'bet ift nie'bttgefaKen fall down
, Hjnl&et'ge^en ging uint»et' t|i umtiet'gegangen go about
jurfliftileifeen 6lte6 juriid' ift gutiictgeblteben remain behind
bic^t i^^ti, t^if!/: lOOlin wherein \o tVtOOA siwh a thing
toii^renb whUe a\\o hence, so fogar even
fobalb «ssoon(w
Part I
A. ©tifS 3;age8 (adverbial gen. 475, one day) toortn ber ^dnig
unb bie ^onigin jufammen auSgeganoen, unb bie (jiibfi^e ^nnjeffin
tear ganj aUein in bem gro^en @^Io|fe junidgeblieben. 38a^renb fie
nun baiin um^ergtng unb aSn& befa^, tarn {ie obcn in einem Don ben
liirmen be« ©d^IojfeS an tin ganj {leineS S'"""?'^- Worin rine alte,
alte ^rau fa^ unb flei^ig f))ann. So ettoaS ^atte bie jlbniggtod^tei
nD(^ nie gefe^en ; e^ gefieC i^r fo fe^i, bafi fie auc^ Uerfui^te }u f^in=
nen. Sie alte ^lau tvoQte eg jtcar niti^t teiben, benn fie tDugte gar
too^l, bafe bie ^prinjeffm leine ©Jiinbet (spindle) anrtt()ren burfte ;
aber ba« aJtiibi^en tnottte nic^t ^Bren. Sobalb fie alfo bie ©pinbel
in bie $anb na^, ftai$ fte jii$ bamit in ben ^nger, fiel luie tot auf
bad Sett nitber, bad ba in ber hammer ftanb, unb fi^Iief ein.
B. Ser alten ^au ging ti ebenfo, benn ali fie auS bem 3in"ner
ging, um einen 3)iener ju ^olen, tvurbe fie fo niUbe, ba| fie auc^ ein^
fc^Iief. ^ai} etnigen @tunben tamen bie @(tem ^eim unb fingen au(^
an einjufi^lafen, unb affe itjre Dicner fi^Iiefen mit i^nen ein ; [a, bie
^Pferbe im ©tade unb bie §unbe im §ofe unb bie fleinen Iau6en auf
bem 3!la^e — atte, otte f^'Iiff*"- ©ogar baS ^ede %tutx auf bem
§etbe ^flrte auf ju Pacfent {flicker) unb WoUit nt^t me^r brcnnen,
unb (elbjl ber 3Binb toetjte nic^t me^r in ben ^o^en Saumen bor bem
©(^loffe. Um bad ganje, grofie Sc^bg ^er begann aber eine bic^te
^ede ju tvai^fen, bie tear avS S^omen, nic^ts ats (but) Xtomen, unb
tourbe Don ^a^r ju ^a^t ^^et, big bet giclgte tUlann nic^t me^r in
ben $of fe^en Icmnte, unb jule^t, nac^ langer, lunger ^tit, War fit [o
^oi) getvotben, ba^ man aut^ baS @^(og fclbfl nid^rt me^r fa^. 3)a
lag nun bie fi^Bne ^ringeffin mit i^en SItem unb ben 3)ienetn unb
fc^Iief, unb alleS Wat ftitl. (ConUnuedin Bi. 15, Part I).
Pakt II
A. 3^ l^otte neu[i(^ meine ©(^hjefter, bie in einer grS^eren ©tabt
Wo^nt, gebeten, un« iljre brei flnabtn auf me^tete ©oi^en ju fd&iden.
242 ISXEBCISE 14
SUor einigen ^agen lamtn fie auc^, unb nun ]^{ilm fie Don mDigenS
frfl^ bi« afcenbS fpSt nrit unfem btri 3Jliib^en ; unb H) (age S^nen,
liefwt gieunb, meine grau unb ii^ ^oben ttioai ju t^un ntit ben \td}«i
jlinbem. ^ie ^ungen Maren bid je^t nod^r gar niti^t auf bem Sanbe
getoefen. Sobalb fie aui bem S3<tte fommen, fangen jie an, im $aufe,
auf btm $ofe ober in ben BtaHtn um^etjuge^en. 3IIIeg ift itjnen neu,
bie §unbe, bie ^ferbe, bie Sii^e, ber @fel unb bit S^auben. SJKe^
befe^en fie, unb oCeS ru()i;en fte natiiilit^ ntit ben ^dnben an, fogar
bie SlDnien, bie ^ier unb ba in unfeter Glarten^ecte luai^fen, unb gai
oft ftet^en fie [lif babei in bie ^^inger. 3!ie fmb bie finaben aQein ;
bie Mdbc|en finb immet bei i^men, unb ii^ glaube, loenn ti fein mu^,
fo folgen fie i^nen m^ burc^* IJeuer, benu in« SBafJer finb fie fc^ion
jufammen gefaQen, unb auc^ auf bie Sdume ^aben fie Ueifuc^t i^nen gu
folgen. ^iit bie ^ungen aber ift lein Saum ju E)oc^, fo knge fie oben
ni>^ etnen toten Stpfel fetjen litnnen, ober au^ einen giilnen.
B. Unb taenn meine ^lau unb t^ mit aQen [ed^d gufammen aufe
ge^en, inS Dotf obet aufS gelb, fo ^Bren bie ^Sx^fl*" "^f^' '"'f i"
fragen: „OnleI, Wai ift bte«?" ober „a:anle (Auntie), Wai ift baS?
©0 ethiaS ^be i^ in bet Stabt nocti nie gefe^en ; \i) ^abe gat nii^t
gewuft, bafe e« fo eticaS in ber 2Belt giebt" ; unb fo hjeitet (on) unb
fo toeiter. 3a, §einri(^, ber noc^ fo !tein ift, bafe et oft ^tntet «n8
anberen jurudbleibt, fragte mii^ geftern fogar: „Cntel, Wie tommt eS,
bafe ber aUinb »e^t?" mai foO einer nun auf foli^e ^ragen ont=
tvorten ? Unb fo ge^t ti jeben tieben (blessed) %a^ : bom §of in ben
©arten, bom @arten cinS Siiaffet (sa.y: pond), torn SBflffet auf ben
na^en a3erg, unb Bom Serge inS ^elb obet toiebet in« iorf juvtttf.
"Sioi) hjenn e« 3eit ift ju effen, fo lommen fie alle na^ §aufe, unb
toie fte effen tijnnen ! 2(m 2(benb abet, todt»tenb fie einf^lafen, fpte;
(^en fie f^on toiebet Bom nfii^ften 3]iorgen unb etja&ten einanber, toaS
fte bann tt)un tooQen ; unb ti fi^eint, ba| mit jebem neuen OTotgen
ouc| iffx (Sicii Bon neuem beginnt. abet tout e« bei un3 fritter nit^t
au(i fo?
Part III
A. 1. When we reached the village, we found that our friends
had all gone out. 2. He had been ill several mouths (several
months ill) ; hence it was quite natural that he was behind in his
lessons (remained behind in the school). 3. Princess Mary is the
prettiest daughter of the qneen. 4. Whenever the one ceased
playing, the other began again. 6. I heard some one talk in the
garden, but the hedge was so high and so close that I could not see
EXERCISE 14 243
who it was, 6. One day, when I was walking about in the streets
of the city, I found him. 7. As soon as he sends me the books
that he has promised me, I shall send him the money for them ; but
not one day earlier. 8. Although I knew (383) the gentleman for
whom they were looking, I did not know where he lived ; so I was
unable to show them the way to his house. 9. You are not allowed
to go out before next week, says the physician.
B. 10. A. Do you see that large church there on the other side
of the river ? B. The white one ? A. No, the one with the two
big red towers. B. Yes, I see it now. A. Well, that is the
church to (in) which we go every Sunday. 11. You must wait,
my dear boy. I have just come home, and my fingers are so cold
that I cannot write the letter uow, 12. It seems to me that the
little girl has not grown at all this last year (609). 13. Do we not
all believe that a new life will begin after (the) death ? 14. If
you will ouly examine the picture better, you will find that it is
much finer than that which you showed me yesterday. 16. I lay
down on my bed (laid me upon the bed), but I did not succeed in
falling asleep until the clock struck three. It was a long and dark
night for me, and whenever I heard the wind blow through the
trees and hedges under my window, I had to think of our poor
friends who are now on the wide, wide sea.
C. 16. A. How does your sister do (goes it to your sister) to-
day? I hope she is better. S. 1 thank you, much better; she
will soon be going about in the house. 17. Of course, the father
punished him. While the other children were playing in- the
garden, John was not allowed to go out, but (687) had to stay
in -the house and study. But then his brothers and sisters all
came and begged the father to let John play with them ; and when
the boy promised never to say such a thing again (such a thing
never again to say), the father let him go. 18. The pigeons flew
from the yard on to the roof of the house, and from the roof into
the field. 19. The people in that part of the country are bo honest
that you may leave your watch or your money lying (lie) on the
table, and nobody will touch it. 20. In -the farthest (use fern)
north it is almost always winter, and no trees or flowers can grow
there (and there no etc.). 21. The poor little boy had been running
so fast that he could not speak a word.
D. 22. There may be richer men in this town than Mr. N., but
I know that none of them has better and faster horses in his stable
3.n.iized by Google
244
EXERCISE 16
than he. 23. The faithful servant fell down before the king and
begged him to wait a few days or to cast him into the dark, deep
dungeon (tower), instead of his dear lord ; but the king had a heart
of stone and did not listen to (auf + ^'i'^) i-l'^ V^^ man's words.
24. While you were still lying in (in - the) bed, I wag already work-
ing. 26. "Tn the good old times," he said, "every young girl
could spin, but if you now want to £nd a woman that can spin, you
must (use biiifcn) ask none under [a] hundred years." " Yes, yes,"
I said, " the world is getting worse and worse (always worse) " ;
and that seemed to please the good old man. 26. The' poor woman
led us into a little chamber, where her child lay dead on the bed.
27. When I stopped working (to work), it was six o'clock, and then
it was high time to go home. 28. His words sting like thorns.
Exercise IS
Separable compound verbs (continued in the vocabulary below).
Alodai auxiliaries ; compound forms 341, also 346.
VOCABULAKT
ker ^(ftgel bie S'tiflet m'n^
bet ^Qngling bie ^tlnfl'infl' younff
bei @aal
b«r '!£t}ton
bie sate
bie Intone
throne
fteueii(ti^ 114), ftewte, gefreut
rtgoke
^etmten, ^eiratele, ge^eiratel marri/
bai %ifDX bie STtjote gate
bie 2freube bie (Reuben joy
bie 9(ofe bie Stofen rose
ba« 9lufle (84) bie Slugew eye
baS gnbe (84) bie enbeii end
Bffnen, Bffnete, geiiffnet open
bringen, bia»g, gebrungen pene-
6efreten
befreite
befteit
free, deliver
betUlfren
berii^rte
bertt^rt
touch
erhiac^en
ewai^t
ift ertro(^t
awake
auftoai^en
tDa<i^te auf
iff flufflewa(^t
awake
loSmai^en
ma^te Ids
loiQtma^i
loosen, free
abloenben
toanbte af>
obgemanbt
turn away
gef^e^en
gejc^a^
ift geft^e^en
happen
Berftie^en
Berflofe
i(i tocrfhiffen
pass, ellipse
Betgeffen
Bet0«|
Ber0eflen
forget
anfe^en
ffl^n
fltigefe^ien
t.z.d^.Xfo'oglc
EXERCISE 15
245
Quffte^en
[tanb auf
rise, get up
^etuoi^it^m
jog ^erBor
^mtprgejogen .
draw forth, out
^inbuit^lflffm
lieg ^inbun^
let through
^ineinfle^en
0in0 ^tnein
i|l ^ineingegaiiflen
go into, enter
umtommen
tam um
ift umgefommen
perish
um^etfijrinflen
fptonfl um^er
ift um^ergeftirunflen
jump aliout
jufammen^alten
^ielt jufammen
hold together
fed /™
I, fast
einft (Mice, some
time
mutig courageous
enblid) /no%
jufriebcn
contented
Wegen with gen
. on account of
Part I
A. (Continued from Exercise H). Stber Dbfllttt^ man ba§ ©d^Io^
toegen bet ^o^m ^JonKntjecte niift me^r fe^en tonntt, fo ttergafe man
ni^t, tuaS gefc^e^en War ; unb m^ bielen, Bielen ^a^ten etjo^Iten bie
fieute einanbet noc^ oft Don bet f(^8ncn ilBntgStod^ter, bie fo juiig ^atte
^ertien mttffen (346), ©te &ie^ bei i^nen immer nur baS 3)onireSi
i^eit (lit. iiiifo Thomrose, i.e. Sleeping Beauty), unb Btele fagten :
„2)ie ^prinjelfm ift ntc^t tot, fonbetn f(^ISft rail unb Wirb etnft tnieber
auftoa^en, abet etft (first, i.e. tiot until) nai^ ^unbett langen ^alften."
9Iu(^ naien Ucn 3^'* J" -3^^ JtitnigSfe^ne ba geirefen, um bad ^db=
i^en ju Befceien, abet fie I^atten ni^t but^ bie ^ecte btingen liinnen
(346), benn bie 33omen ^ielten fo feft jufammen, ba^ bie 3tt"9''"0«
iiH) nic^t toieber [oSmaj^en tonnten unb barin umlamen. 9Jun aber
Wax getabe bet 3:ag, an toeli^em bie bunbett 3ic^'^« Uetfloffen loaten,
ba lam Wiebet ein ftoljer, junget $tinj, unb baS toat bet relate. 9lls
bet We §eie nut beriilirte, betWanbelten fti^ bie 2)otnen in bie f$iin=
ften SBofen, unb bie ^ede Bjfnete fi$ Don felbft, Wie ein gto^eS 3:^ot,
unb liefe i^n ^inburi^. ^ann ging bet JtSnigSfntin mutig in baS
Sd&loS ^inetn unb ttat in ben ^t>i}m ©aal, too bet %i}xon ftanb unb
mo bet ilBnig unb bie JlDnigin fi^Uefen. I)atauf ging cr immet mU
tet, bui^ fiele anbete S'"""*'^/ ^^^ ^"^ enblid^ an bie Heine Hammer
in bem 3:unn (am, too bag iiotnr5«(i^en lag unb fd^lief. @ie Wat
abet fo f($i}n anjufe^en, ba^ et bie 9(ugen nic^t abtoenben tonnte unb
itjt jule^t einen flu^ (**»») gab. I)a etWac^te baS ft^ilne flinb, unb
mit i^t bie lieben ©ttetn nuf ilftem ^)}mn, unb affe 35ienet loac^ten
auf, unb bie 5|)fetbe im ©taKe ftanben toiebet nuf, unb bie §unbe im
jQofe fprangen um^er, unb bie Ileinen Sauben auf bem Iiat^e jogen
ben ^opf untetm gliiget ^ert)ot unb flogen inS ^eib, getabe toie Dot
24D EXEKCISE 16
l^unbert SJa^ren. 9Iu(^ ba« geiier auf bm §erbe fing htiebet ^eH jn
bnnncn an, unb bann toar gioge |1fteube im ganjen iS(^Id^ ; ja, bad
ganje SSoIt frtute ft{^, bag bie ^rinjeffin unb t^it <£ttem ttiitbet et=
toat^t tDaien. ^er ^ring abn ^eiratete bie fc^one fiSnigStoc^tet, unb
fte lebltn glOdUt^ unb jufrieben mtt etnanber bi§ an iljt (Inbe. —
a)a8 ift tin 3:eil bet ©e^idrte bom ffiomrBSi^en.
B. (Additional sentencM on the compound fomiB of the modal suxjliar-
lo*.) 1. 3i!ir tcerbm i^m baS ®elb ffit bie Sljfel fc|tden maffen, toenn
et nic&t felbet fomnten !ann, 2, 8t fiati fagt, er toid motgen Iom=
men. ©• ilatl? SBie lange ^at b« ft^on tommen tooUen ! 3)er
tomntt bo<^ nic^t (A* won'* otwne anyway). 3, 8C. ®anj re(^t, er
^at ti t^m foDen, abet wenn i^ 3^ntn nun fage, ba$ er e« n»c^
ntt^t getlian ^ot? 9. ^tflen €te baS¥ 9L ^c^ Wei^ ed ganj qu
Wif;. 8. 33onn toirb er eS t^un mttflen, fobalb er naU) §oufe
Iimnnt. 4. 3)er Srjt fagt, gri$ Wirb Dor ndrft^em Sonntag nit^t
au^^e^en burfen. 5. ©ie fagt, fie ^t mii^ nic^t berfttljen iBnnen ;
aba idf glaube, fte l^at mi^ nid)! vertte^en tocQen.
Pakt II
A. 1. We shall be obliged to buy a new borae, for our old
one died (perf.) yesterday. 2. I shall be able to help you to-
morrow, my dear boy, but not to-day (to-day not). 3. Is it true
that the largest animals hare the smallest eyes ? 4. Daedalus
made wings for himself and also for his son, and then the two
tried to fly across the sea ; but only the father reached the
land. 5. She reads too fast for me ; I have never been able to
follow her. 6, To be sure (jluar with inversion), he was not
compelled (perf.) to go, but he went (perf.) nevertheless. 7.
He had not been able to buy all [the] books, because he had
forgotten a part of the money. 8. A. Will you tell us a new
story to-night, dear father? B. I don't know any more new
stories (I know no new stories more), children. I have told
you all (168, 179) I know. A. Then you will have to tell us
one of the old ones. B. But which? A. The one about Dorn-
r&schen, we have almost forgotten it. £. With pleasure. But
I hear mother calling (call) ; so we will first take supper (ju
abenb effen).
B. 9. A. How came it that none of those brave princes suc-
ceeded in freeing the beautiful princess ? B. Because the thorns
in the big, close hedge would not let them through. So the young
EXERCISE IC 247
men remained hanging in them (therein hang) and perished. 10.
A. But why did the last king's - son find it so easy to get (penetrate)
through the hei^ge? was he braver and more courageous than the
others who had tried it before him ? B. No, but he happened to
come (came just, getabe) on the day when the beautiful maiden in
the old castle had been sleeping [a] hundred years ; and therefore
the thorn-hedge opened (itself) of itself, and he entered the castle
and did not perish like the rest. 11. A. And what happened after
Domroschen had got up from the bed ? B. Then the king and the
queen with all their servants awoke too ; and even the horses in
the king's stables got up, and the dogs began to jump about in the
castle-yard (©^lofefiof) ; the pigeons that had been sitting on the
roof, with their heads under their wings, flew into the field again
(again into the field), and one could also see how the fire on the
hearth began to burn again.
C. 12. A. And now one more (yet one) question : the proud
young prince led the king's -daughter to her parents in the large,
beautiful hall, didn't he? B. Yes, and the parents were very glad
(use fic^ fteuen) to see their daughter, and none of them was a day
older than a hundred years before. A. And then, I believe, the
princess gave the young man a handful [of] roses out of the hedge,
and he went home to his parents, didn't he ? B. No, that isn't
right; that wasn't the end of the story. A. Well, how was.it?
B. The prince said to the king and the queen who were again sit-
ting upon the throne : " Will you give me your daughter for my
(jut) wife ? " and both the king and the queen answered : " Cer-
tainly, you shall have her for your wife ; for you have freed her
and us all." And then the princess promised the prince to become
his queen. And on the next morning the joy was still greater, for
all heard what had happened and all came in order to wish them
good-luck. And then the prince married the princess, and they
went (use reifen) together to his own country. A. Well, children,
I see that you have not forgotten the story ; yon know it better
than L
Exercise 16
The imperative : of EjaSen, fetn, Werben 310, 312, 314 ; of loben,
teben, fotflen 329, 331, 333; of fe^en 403 (also 401), lommen 405;
of befd^reiten 430; of anfangen 443. For the use of the pronoun-
subject, see 317 (cf. also 106).
D.q.l,zed by Google
248
BXBRCHE IS
VoCABUI,AKT
bet auflenWirf bie atugenBlide mowieni bet§elb bie§elbeii hero
bflSSf^Wert bit ©(^tterter sword ber^iefe bie9ttefeii giant
bet 3)of tot bie Tipfto'teii (84) doctor
ftttd^ttn, fUt<i^ttte, gefutc^tct fear f)]i^ieren fasten go to drive-
fi(^ fUri^ten toot be afraid of fieigen, ^iefl, ge|liegen climi, rise
begUittn
begUUete
begleitet accompany, escor
befu^en
beftu^te
befui^t p*s/(, Cffl/; ore
etiauben
ttlaubte
eriaubt alUrw, permit
}u^j)ten
^iitte ju
jufle^iirt ^isim
einfaOen
fiel ein
ift einatfoaen + dat. occur to
^inauSlaufm
lief ifiximi
tDegbleiben
blieb nee
ift iDeflfleblieben stay away
toitbeiloininen lorn totebet ift WiebeigeEommen come back
aufmertfam attentive tpilb wOd, fierce
betatint known, acquainted anbnS otherwise, differently
bofe angry, wicked etmnal once, just
laut loud no(i^ etnmal twice
eS t^ut mir leib, bafe /am s-wry (Aai nat^^et afterwards
l-AKT I
A. Second person singular, „@tjii^le mit bod^l (do tell me or («^^
me, please, 703 c) eine ©ef^ic^te, liebet SBatet," bat bet Heine plunge,
„eine ©efcfiiti^te Don tapfeten Stittem obet §elb«n, bie fo ftatf finb, ba|
fogar bie 9tie|en ftc& oot i^nen fiiti^ten," „^ai}l)tx, mein tiebet Swufle,"
anttPDitete bet ^atet, „erft fc^teibe unb letne, toa^ bu auf moigen fiit
bie Si^ule ju t^un ^aft, unb bann toimn Wiebec unb }fige mit beine
Sftbeiten, unb Irenn fie gut gema^t finb, fo ei^ii^U t^ bit bie @ef^i^le
bom jungen SHoIanb, bet ein langeS ©^Wett ^attc, no(^ einmol [o
long alS er felbft, unb ber fo tapfet Wat, ba^ er einen tvilben 9liefen
bamtt tot ft^lufl. ©ei aljo gut, mein ©o^in, unb fle^ (c^neH an bie
atbeit."
B. Second person plural. „©i^t ftiH, i^t toilben jungen," fagte bet
Sel^tet b«wte ^otgen in bet ©i^ule, ,tebet ni(^t fn Biel, feljt in eute
39urf)et, feib aufntetlfom unb ontiooitet laut, Wenn ic^ eui$ fiage."
®et Septet ^pxai} felbfl fet)t laiit ; et fi^ien bilfe ju fein, toeil Biele
toon unS ju fuSt gefommen Waten. 3(ber am ®nbe ber Shmbe, nai$=
bem wit alle gut geantwottet fatten, fptai^ et ganj anbetS unb fagte :
BXBBCI8B 16 249
„9hm ^Brt ju. 0eute in aUft %a^tn (lit. fo-^y in eight days, i.e.
a week from to-day) hjollen toit jufammtn in ben §arj * reifen unb
auf ben SSrotfen peigen. @e^t atfo na^ $aufe unb fraflt eute Eltem,
ob i^r brei S^age tDegbUiben bftrft, unb bittet ^te, eu(^ ®elb ju geben.
©flnn lommt tnotgen toiebet unb eijd^It mir, tons bie ©Item gefagt
^a&en. Unb nun lauft f^nefl ^inauS !"
C. Second person singular or plural. 1. dtlauben ©ie mit, §en
©., ©ie erft mit meinem alien gteunbe, $ettn %olXox 3R., 6etannt ju
maiden. Unb nun tommen ©ie beibe, meine §erren, unb fasten ©ie
fpQjieren mit mir, toenn eS Sljnen gef&Qt. 2, §ijren ©ie ju (addressed
to one or more persona), iii^ toiff 3^nei> foflen. t^ie wn^ fo ©ie ben
§emi flnben lonnen, ben ©ie fo gem befuc^en looHen. 5Bon ^ier
fletjen ©ie geiabe in jene ©tta^e bott ^linein. Sm Snbe berfetben,
ttienn ©ie natje bei ber fiirc^e mit bem Heinen, biden, roten 2^umi
ftnb, fragen ©ie nac^ bem „9[lten Sruniien," ben 3^"^ j^^^^ Slinb
jeigen !ann. ^intet bem aSninnen fieigen ©ie auf ben Setg, unb oben
in bem tveigen $aufe, tveld^ef auf ber ^lorbfeiie ftetjt, iDotjnt ber §err.
Setfte^en ©ie mi^ abet te(^t, auf ber 9iorbfeite. ^oi^ batten ©ie
no(^ einen 3(ugenb(i(!, eS fdMt mit eben ein, ba^ ic^ ein SBilb Don (ei=
nem §aufe Ijabe. §iet ift eS. ©e^en ©ie eS etnmat an ; eS (jot
getabe fol^e %^^t hjie meine^, abet oiel gtBfeete JJenftet. So (there),
nun ge^en ©ie, abet bleiben ©ie ni(^t ju lange Meg. @g tl)ut mit
leib, ba^ xif @ie eben je^t nii^t begleiten tann.
Part II
Translate each sentence of A and B in three ways ; thus : follow
me folge mir, folgt mir, folgen ©ie mit.
A. 1. Show me his sword, 2, Look for him, 3. Wait a moment.
4. Play with the children. 5. Believe me (dat.). 6. Don't call
on me to-morrow. 7. Allow me to show yon the aword. 8. Listen.
9. Try to write better. 10. Stop talking (to talk). 11. Don't touch
(use anrii^ren) the briers. 12. Tell me what has happened to you.
13. Thank him for it. 14. Don't fetch the doctor. 16. Accom-
pany me as far as (6i5 an) the church. 16. Itejoiee. 17. Sit down
(jl(^ fefjen). 18. Don't show me your books. 19. Bring me your
pictures. 20. Don't be afraid of the dog (uot + dat).
B. 1. Look, there he is. 2. Go home. 3- Be still. 4. Come with
me. 6. Don't step into the water. 6. Promiae me to send your
• tKi Sai), Oie Ban Mumtaint la Northern Hermsny ; bit BiHtai, the highest mguDt^n In
D.n.iized by Google
250 EXERCISE IT
picture. 7. Here is the tree, look at it (anfe^en). 8. Dou't strike
your poor dog, 9. Stand firm, 10. Begin to read. 11, Go to sleep.
12, Don't forget it. 13. Carrj the apples into the house. 14. Give
me the money. 16. Kead louder. 16. Let them go. 17. Help your
friends (dat.). 18. Stay here. 19. Take the letters. 20. Don't
go out. 21. Don't stay away too long. 22. Come this way (l^et).
23. Come again soon. 24. Don't get (become) angry. 25. Don't
throw the apples on the ground. 26. Drive a little faster. 27. Lie
still. 28. Don't begin yet.
C. 1. Dr. White has gone to drive and -will not come back before
six o'clock (will before six o'clock not come back). 2. Bobinaon
Crusoe was afraid of wild beasts ; bo he climbed into a tree and
slept there all night. 3. "Now," said the teacher, " I'll just (ein=
mal) see which (ton) of you boys has been the most attentive.
John, tell us the story that I have just (eben) told you." 4. I was
sorry that I could not go to drive with you. 5. What was the
name of the giant whom (the) young David killed (struck dead) ?
His name was Goliath. 6. Then it occurred- to me that I had
forgotten to give him the money for the books. 7. Tell me that
afterwards, when I come back. I have to go out now. 8. Not
every soldier is a hero, and not every hero is a soldier. 9. How
long have you been (are you already) acquainted with this young
gentleman ? 10. The highest tree in our garden is almost twice as
high as this one. 11. I shall not be able to stay away ao long as
you. 12. A. Permit me to escort you home, Miss (JJrauIein) S.
B. You are very kind (friendly), Mr. N. ; but I am expecting my
brother with a carriage, and I have promised him to wait till he
comes. 13, "The Germans," he said, "always speak very loud
when they are angry." Do you think that that is true ? 14. My
sister has been obliged to go (to the) south. 15. I have never been
able to understand (begreifen) how he could say such a thing. 16.
Those who do not believe in (an + ace.) a life after (the) death
say: "Let (laffet) us eat and drink; for to-morrow we shall die
(to-morrow are we dead),"
Exercise 17
The subjunctive of the past and pluperfect and the present
conditional : of ^abm, frin, toerben 310, 312, 314, 319, 320 ; of
(oben, reben, folflen 339-334 ; of fe^en, fommen 403-406 ; of beji^ei=
ben 430, 431 ; of anfang«n 443, 444 ; of the modal auxiliaries
BXERC18B 17
340, 341; of toiUcn 384. For the commonest useof these forms,
namely in conditional sentences (contrary to fact), see 518, 510.
Ui
We
bit
bet
bet
entbeiten
berbienen
^eritbetf^tden
niebei(egen
bttlajTen
audfe^en
^tnau§fa^ten
[ SCmerilanei
«8ein
Steb
^ejlung
9ia^bar (84)
VoCABULABY
bte Sdneiifaner
bie Seine
bie iprei(e ■
bie Stebev
bie {feftungcn
bie Saffett
(bed WlvieB)
bie 3la(i)bani
Ajnerican
leg
prize, price
neighbor
discover
entbectte eirtbedt
Berbiente ttetbient
f^i^e ^eriiber ^erilbergefc&irft send across
leflte nieber nieberflelegt lay down
tterliefe ueila|Ten leave, desert
fa^ av& audgeje^en look, appear
fu^t IjinauS ift ^inaudgefa^ten go, drive or saUf
langfatn slow unbelannt unknown nimmet «*cer
raiJgR^ possible ff^Watj black llberaD everywhere
unmiiglt^ impossible loa^if^einltii^l probable e^e conj, Je/ore
faum scarcely, hardly
Past I
A. 1. ^otte bet Igimmel (576) nii^t \d fd^Waij auSgefe^en, fo tvdre
i^ noi$ nii^t nac^ §aufe gegangen. 3. SBiire bet 3Rann ni^t fo olt,
\o liinnte et nod^ atbetten unb jit^ ettcag berbtenen, aber bad ift je(t
nt(^t me^i miiglic^. 9Iuc^ leibet ei feit bem J^tiege immet am ted^ten
33etn, \o ba^ er nui langfam ge^en fann unb mituntet bag ^auS gat
nid^t metjt oetltifet. 98enn t^m feine teit^eren Siac^barn ni^t oft
ctwaS ®elb gaben, fo Wiivbe et gewife fc&on fe^t ganj atm fein, 3,
^iitte xif ni(^t geWu^t, bag bu tommen tooKteft, fo tviiie i(^ ju bit
gegangen. 4. ^enn id^ ben $tief nid^t fd^on geftem gefi^rieben
^tte, fo ^dtte 11$ ^eute }u ^aufe bleiben nt^ffen (346). 5. @t tvare,
glaube ic^, no(^ @enecal geioorben, toenn et nt($t in jenet ©i^Iat^
gefaden toaxt. 6. 28te bUtfte er e§ t^un, toenn feine @It<tn ed i^m
nii^t eriaubt fatten ? 7. ^enn Solumbug nii^t ben HItut ge^obt ^Stte,
auf bag unbeiannte 3Keet binaufijufa^ten, e^e et wufite, »ie toeit er
v., ..I ,..Ck>o^lc
252 exBBCisE 17
ju fallen fjottt, |o ^tte tx bieje neuc ^ell, Ivelc^e man je^l Slmetila
nennt, Wa^rfc^einticf) nie entbtrft. 8. 8L §ftren @ie ju, Mtte (please),
unb fageti <£te mir, Wad man bort jingt. 9. dS ift dn alteg, tooI)I=
belannteg Sieb, baS bag SioEE iibtiali fmgt ; «S fSngt an : „2B«nn id^
ein BiJgletn toat' unb au(^ jlrei gtiifllein ^o.tt.\ Pbg' ii$ ju bit." 9.
9Bie [eic^t mte et bem armen ffleibe ^elfen fBnnen (346), Icenn cr
mil getDDDt ^tte! Stber bei 3Renf(^ ^at ein ^ei) tuie Stein.
B. 10. „aBiite xij ein 3tmmtaner, Wie id^ ein (Snglfinber 6in, nimmer
Hjurbe i(^ bie SBJaffen niebetlegen, bis ©nfllanb auft)6rte, ftifd^** 3^nH)i)en
^ettiberjiif^iden, nimmet, fage i(^, nimmer, nimmer !" ^alteft bu biefe
gto^en SJotte geflent in ber S^ule fc gut geJiJiitd^en, Icie $itt |ie
Dot ^unbert Satlten in ©ngtanb '{'pxai^, \o ^atteft bu gang getuife ben
erften ^leis ttelommen, mein 3unge. 11. 3m Sommer mBf^te i^
tno^I auf bem ^anbe Inotinen, aber im ffiintet lieber in bet ©tobt.
12, '^if ^offe, bafe et morgen toiebet auSge^en lann ; loenn et abet
ftant iDurbe, \a mu^te i^ 6ei ilim bleiben unb fonnte nii^t teifen. 13.
GS hJiite bem ^einbe taum gelungen, biefe tteine, abet ftarfe geftitng
fo fc^neO JU ne^men ; \a, \^ barf Ho^I fagen, eS Mate unmoglii^ ges
Wefen, toenn bet ®eneral nit^t einen aJionn gefunben ^atte, welc^er i^m
unb feiften ®o(baten ben Seg buT<^ ben ^alb jeigte, e^e eS %a^
Wutbe. 14. 3L Sitte, fe^en ©ie einmal ben §ettn bort an, ben ba
am S^enftei. 3Su|tf ii$ nii^t, bag unfet ^irteunb S.axi nac^ Snglanb
geteift ift, fo WUibe ic| fagen : ,ba fte^t er," nit^t Wa^r ? 8. ^er
3Kann jie^t ebenfo ouS, loie Satl ; baS pnbe xif auc^, nut fc^eint et
mir ein loenig ftatfet (stouter) ju fein, a(S unfet g^teunb. 15. 8L
SSenn f'^ mi^ auc^ (even if or although) baten, liebet g^eunb, in
biefem Stugenblirf totirbe ii$ Sijnen bot^ nii^t ^elfen (onnen ; bad toi(=
fen ©ie ebenfo fo gut, loie it^, nii^t tca^t? 9. ©emife tceife i^ baS,
unb ic^ toiitbe eS 3^nen gat nii^t eriouben, loenn ©ie e3 axij tonnten,
benn '\ij ^abe ^eute tUiotgen meinen Onlel fc^on geftagt, unb er ^at
mit bag ®elb gleic^ (= fogleii^) gegeben ; alfo laffen ©ie unS ni^t
ioeitet babon teben.
Pakt II
A. 1. Do not lose (the) courage, dear friend, 2. That would
hardly have been possible. 3. If the general had known that,
he would not have sent so many troops across. 4. Our neigh-
bor's house would look much better, if it were a little higher.
6. " If I had been Columbus," said the one, " I should not
have sailed forth with such little ships," "But if you had
not done that, you wouldn't have been Columbus," said the
D.n.llzedbyGOOgIC
EXERCISE 18 253
other. 6. Should you show him this letter, if he wanted to see
it? I ahoiUd rather not do it; he might get angry. 7. The
gentleman whom I was to accompany on his journey was an
entire stranger to me (was to me quite unknown).
B. 8. If I were poor, you would send me the money at once;
that I know. 9. I should hardly have discovered it if you
had not told (it to) me. 10. If your sisters were here, we
could now begin to play. 11. A. Pred, show me where the
Black Sea is. B. Here. A. That's right. And where is the
Ked Sea? B. Here, farther to the south; but one can see here
only the northern part of it 12. I should probably not be
allowed to go out if I asked the doctor. 13. He ought not to
be so proud. 14. I have looked for the book everywhere ; and
if it were still in the house, I should certainly have found it.
15. How would it look if we asked our neighbor for (um) mote
money, after he has given us so jnuch I 16. The boy'a parents
were very poor, and he would have been obliged to leave the
school if his teacher had not found a rich man who helped him.
C. 17. The enemy would not have been able to take the
fortress if they had not crossed the river before the water rose
80 high. 18. Mary would have sung this little song better
than her younger sister. 19. When you get (come) home, John,
read the story of Ulysses and the fierce giant who had only
one eye ; and then tell it to me to-morrow, will you ? 20. If
I did not know that you are an American, I should take (hold)
you for an Englishman. 21. Do you believe that you would
have succeeded if they had deserted you? 22. You would get
better prices for your horses if the times were better. 23.
If he were a little older and stronger, he could work in -the
field, like the rest, and earn some money. 24. We should be
sorry not to find hJm at home (him not at home to find). 25.
Had they been genuine soldiers, they would not at once have
laid down their arms. 26. He would have broken his (use
fi(^, 139) leg if he had fallen.
Exercise 18
The subjunctive of the present, perfect and future: references
as in Ex. 17. For the commonest use of these forma, namely in
indirect statement, see 524, 525. /■ t
254 exercise 16
Vocabulary
bet Slic^ttr bie Slii^ter judge bet ®ei[t bie ©et^et ghost
baS ghcMein bie t^ctulein young lady baSSIatt bieSl&ttcr leaf
bie Suft bie Siifte **»• boS@tab bie@tabcr grave
baS^aai bie $aaire AaiV bie Su^e reai
baa Slut (beS 9Iute«) 6^-»d bie ©eele bie ©eelen soul
ba^Ungltid (beS UnfllMS) mw/ortune bie ©titntnebieStimmenwowe
ber Wome (82) bie StaineH name bet Sauer (84) bie Sauetu farmer
metnen, meinte, gemetnt mean, think
t)f(egen, frflegte, geflflegt use (to), he used or aecmstom.ed {to)
tiil^ten {f«^), rii^rte, gerii^rt mom, stir
fc^auen, [<^aute, geft^aut look
tteffen, traf, gettoffen hit, befall, meet
be nterten bemerfte btmtxtt notice, remark
^inauSfi^auen fd^aute ^inauS ^inau^efc^aut look out
Uetlieren betlot Uerloten lose
aniommen fam an ift angelcmmen arrive
ffatt hard ))I>^^li<^ sudden ba^er hence
flat clear tui&ig calm, quiet ettoa adv. about
hitj short f(^tectU<^ terrible n^mli^ namely
Mag ftit ein (162) what kind, or sort, of
bagegen on the other hand, however
Part I
A. 1. ©olon ppegte ju fagen : „aJtQnn foil niemanb Dot jeinem lobe
glfldlic^ nennen, benn man tvei^ nie, mag fitt ein Ungltid ben SItens
f(^en noc^ an @nbe feineg Seben^ tteffen tann." 3. ©oCon ))^egte ju
fogen, man foOe niemanb Dot feinem 3:obe gliidlii^ nennen, benn man
wiffe nie, WaS fiit ein Ungiatf ben SDtenfd^en noc^ am @nbe feineS
SebenS tteffen faiine." 3. KtS i(^ bo« Stfiutein ftagte: „SeBann pub
Sie angefommen ? unb tuie lange nerbeH ©ie Bleiben ?" antioortete fie
mit : „^i$ tin (508) f^on feit a^t STagen ^iet, werbe a6er nut nod^
lui^e 3eit bleiben tBnnen, ba li) etft Dot einigen SSoi^tn meinen SSater
Berloren (nbe unb meine alte UJluttet ni(^t getn lange olfetn laffen
nwg.* 4. aiS i(6 baS jlfraulein ftagte, hiann fie angefommen f*i unb
toie lange fie 6tetBen werbe, antipottete fie mit, fie fet fffion feit ati^t
Xagen ^iei, fie tnerbe aber nur no^ ganj lurje 3^^ lileiben lilnnen.
EXERCISE IS 255
ba fte eift tox einigen Socmen i^ten SSator Unloten ffait unb i{)te alte
Gutter nii^t gem lange tiflctn Ia0en tii3ge.
B. 5. 2)er tine fagte, ber 9iame beS Rnafcen, Welc^en ber Site
(231, 232) In fidfi ^tte, ftt ^ti^ unb et — namlii) bet finabe —
^6c bunfeleg §aar ; ber anbere bagegen eigalilte geftem metnem
Sruber, ber Snabe ^etfte §ang unb fein §aai fei ganj ^efl. SBeU
c^em bon beiben foil man nun glauben? 6, So ft^tetlii^ abet tear
ba§ @nbe beS Witben ©tafen, unb fo ^tt mat fein §etj gegen iebet=
maun geWefen, baft baS Sott meinte, |eine Seele toerbe au^ m
&xabt nD($ teine JRulje finben. 35al)er t»ie^ eS auc^ oft, fein @eip
crfi^etnt jebe Slac^t toieber auf bev Stbe unb ge^e unni^tg unt^et,
bis eS tUiotgen Werbe. 7. 35ovauf lieft ber Sic^ter ben jungen Sauet
erja^len, toaS et Bon bet ©efi^it^te (affair) icuftte. St fei etfi \^&t,
ettoa urn jeljn Uljt, au8 bet na^en ©tabt nac^ §aufe gelommen,
fagte bet ^awr, unb fei gteic^ ju S3ett gegangen. Um 9Hittet=
nai^t tiabc et im §ofe fiB^U^ ttmai n>ie bie @ttmme eineS 1Dlen=
fc^en ge^Htt ; er tftiit fti^netC baS ^^enftet gebffnet unb ^inauSgeft^aut,
abet niemanb gefeE^en ober ge^Srt, unb bod^ ft! bie Suft ganj ^eQ
unb tlar getaefen unb dSti fo \i\U unb tu^ig, baft fii^ tetn SEatt
am 93aum gerii^rt ^abe. ^xix^ am nai^flen ^otgen abet ^abt er auf
einem ©tetne jtoifi^en feinem JQaufe unb feineS 9la(^barS ©arten Slut
demerit : wo^tv bieS getommen fet, Wiffe er je^l nod^ nic^t.
Pakt II
A. Turn each of the following direct statements into an indirect
statement by making it depend on @r fagte. Thus, direct : it^ bin
bet ©o^n jeneS Jpeim ; indirect": et fagte, et fei ber ©o^n jeneS
§ettn, or er fagte, baft et bee ©o^n jeneS §ettn fei,
1. 3(i& fenne ben Sli^tet ni^t. 2. SlaS ^taulein ^at i^te aSuttet
Bettoren. 3, ^et Itnabe bott ^at fi^loai^eS §aat, 4, ©ie meinf i^ren
Stubet. 5. gt ^at ben aSogel ni(^t getroffen. 6. Dloi^ (up till now)
ip bet S9auer nic^t angetommen. 7. ©ie ^t feit gepetn leine 3lu^e
getfabt. 8. Set bbfe SJIenft^ toitb fogat im ©tabe teine SHu^e pnben.
9. ®r win ben fiiJnig feljen. 10. ©ie toitb i^ite gi^eunbin ntc^t me^t
ju §aufe treffen. 11. 2)ie Suft ift m(^t flat genug ; ba^et lann man
ben Setg je^t ni^t gut fef»en. 12. @r toeift ni^t, toaS fUr ein Siet
eg ip. 13. ?01etn Stubet ift nut tui^e ^ni fjitx geWefen, aber er Wirb
batb toieber tommen. 14. ©ie pflegt bag oft ju t^un.
B. Ascertain what the form of the dependent verb was, or
would be, in the direct statement; then use the subjunctive of tlie
256 BSERCISB 19
same tense in the indirect statemeDt. Thus, indirect : he asked if
her brother had come ; direct : he asked " has her brother come ? "
= et fragte : ift i^t Sniber getotnmen ? Heuce, indirect : et ftagte,
ob i^t ©rub« getommen fei. — But if the subjunctive form would
be identical with that of the indicative, substitute for the present
subjunctive the past subjunctive; for the perfect subjunctive the
pluperfect subjunctive ; for the future subjunctive the preseijt con-
ditional- Thus, indirect : he asked me yesterday if you had slept
well ; direct : he asked me yesterday " has he slept well ? " ^ et
fragtt tnii^ geftem ,,^ot er gut gefc^kfen !" Hence, indirect : et ftagte
nti^ gtftera, ob @ie gut gefi^Iafen ^8ttev (instead of ^ben, 532).
1. Suddenly, a soldier on horseback appeared and asked us
where he could find the general, and we answered that the general
had gone to the king. 2. He wanted to know what kind of mis-
fortune had befallen their mother. 3. And now the judge asked
the youngest of the servants if they had heard voices in the room.
i. The good old woman still hoped that her sons would come back.
6. They told us a long story, how they had left the city on account
of their enemies, how long and terrible their journey through those
strange countries had been, how much they bad sufEered, and how
they had finally arrived at the sea. 6. Whether (the) animals also
had souls — that, he said, was a much more dif&cult question. 7.
That she had seen the ghost, he said, was true ; but whether it had
been the ghost of the wicked old farmer, she could not tell.
In the remaining sentences, the aubjiinctive [or conditional) would be used
m the direct statement also ; hence tlie forma are not changed ( &36 ) .
8. Never would they have laid down their arms, they replied, if
the king had not stopped sending (to send) troops across the sea.
9. He would not have noticed the blood, he said, if I had not dis-
covered it. 10. She would come, he wrote, if we would send her
the money before the first of the month.
Gxerciae lO
The passive : 408-412.
^ VOCABOLART
ber Si^ilb bie 6(^ilbe «AWrf bit ©telle bie SteHeu spot, place
bag ^oij bie §&ljer wood bie ©tiafe bie ©traftu punishment
lai^m lact)te gelac^t lauffh
tan J en tanjte gctanjt danee
6«fltafen befttaffe befitaft punUh
EXKRCISE 1» 2.
a^fd^iden fti^ittte ab abgef^idt send off
atxirtnntn bvcbxanntt beibrannt hum, put into the fire
einetlei mA&i].. of one kind, the same fonfi else, otherwise
Itiber unfortunately, I wm sorry to say l)i«llei(^t perhaps
WotaiiS owi of what or which, of what, what . . . of
Part I
I. @r lodre iri<!^t getomtnen, Ivenn er nic^t genifen toorben tofite.
2. SBon Wem ift biefeS SSwd^ gebrad^t Wotben? SBon einem alien
S)itne[, ben ii^ ni<i^t fannte. @i; fagte iceitei nic^tS, alg ba^ ii^ eS
S^men geten folle. 3. SJorauS war bet Sc^ilb beS §elb«n gemo<^t,
SBater, auS §oIj ? 3lein, bet "mat gonj aitS Silbet unb ©otb gemati^t,
tnein ©ol^n. 4, %\i geinbe Wutben Bon unfem ^^lupjien gefd^Eogen
unb batin flber ben %\v.^ jurilcfgelrieben, 5, 9Jm bie flei^igften ©i^u:
lee hietben bon i^ten Setitem gelobt. 6, SBir loaten geftern Slbenb
bei "^i^nx St^hieftet, Qrau 3)1., wnb trafen me^tere gteunbe unb
SJteunbinnen bei i^t, SS toutbe gefungen, gefrielt, getanjt unb gelati^t,
unb Wir gingen etft fi)fit nat^ §au(e. 7, 91. 5S"$ mSc^te toiffen, loer
3(men biefe ©efc^ii^te erjaljit ^at. S. ©ie toutbe mir borgeftem {day
before yesterday) toon einem §ettn erja^It, ben tc^ ntc^t nennen Will.
8. Dec alte Oenetal ift ein 3))ann, toeli^cr toon (einen g^einben eben=
fofe^t gefiicc^tet, loie toon feinen (Jreunben geliebt unb geeljrt toitb, 9.
91- ®er 39ri<f mufe noti^ (leute gef(^rie6en berben, fonp Wtib e8 ju
ffiat, unb mein 33ruber befommt i^n ni<^t me^r jur redfeten ^t\i. 9.
%l)tx bet SRrief ift fi^on gefi^rieben unb lann fogleic^ a6ge(c()t(ft toecben,
toenn ©ie tooUen. 91. Unb toarum ift baS nicfet fdjon gefc^e^en {been
done')? 9. «BeiI ®ie lciilnf(^ten, bafi ber Srief 3^nen erft gejeigt
toetben foHte, SU 2)Ian )^ai mit^ nii^t re(^t uetftanben, benn icfe ^a6e
etWaS gang anbereS gefagt. 10, Saturn toutbe unfete^ 9ia(^6at8 gri^
geftem Don eutm 2e(ftcr befttaft? Itet iiife {wicked or naughty)
3lunge toarf rait ©teinen naU) einem anbtm ©d^iiter (threw with stones
after = threiv stones at) unb ttttf i^n gerabe inS Stuge. 11. 3ffir
toutbe eben gefagt, unfet 9lQd(ibar, ber Sauer, fei plft^Iit^ ju feinem
Stubet in 91. getufen tootben, toeil biefet f(^wer {seriously) txant
liege. aSiffen Sie bieffeicfet, ob eS toa^i ift? (js ift leiber Wa^r, unb
ber arjt meint, bet Stubet Wetbe too^I fterben mtiffen. 19. 5Bec fo
ettoas t^ot, bem toutbe jut (for) ©trafe bie re^te §anb abgef^Iagen.
258 EXERCISE 19
%u^ flcfc^a^ ti in frti^eter 3«>t mihintei;, bag bBfe SRmfc^en unb eft
au^ )Dl^t, bon benen man nut glaubte, ba^ fte b&fe feien, ber&rannt
ober inS ^a^er getvoEfen tBUtben. SDie @<f(^i(^te (history) faft oiler
3tiiIIei unb £dnb«E tvetg genug babon }u ei^d^Ien. 13. 2Sirb er nii^t
balb jum (494) QJeneral gemac^t tDtrben? 5Ran (agt, er (ei c« (112)
neulii^ a'Wotben, toeil er \\if in ber le^len ©c^Iat^t ttiieber fo topfet unb
Hug g^eigt ^obe. 14. 6tatt „geftern ift ©(^iDeTJ 3Racia ©luart
gefpielt tvorben" Eann man aud^ ebenfogiut fagen .ge^em ^at man
Q^i&ai aHaria ©tuoit gefptelt" ; baS ift gang etnertei.
Part II
A. 1. The apples were carried into the house and placed upon
the table. 2. The windows are opened every morning at ten
o'clock. 3. Whether the table was made of atone or of wood I
could not tell. 4. Thereupon the letter was written and at once
sent to the king. 5, After the servant had been punished, he
left hia master's house and ran into tlie forest. 6. When will
Schiller's Maria Stuart be given again? You will probably
liave to wait till next montli. 7. He was told (it was said to
him) that he had to stay at home. 8, There will be dancing
to-night.
B. 9. I saw that the stone was thrown by one of (t)on) the boys,
but I don't know by which one. 10. That our enemies have
been defeated in the last battle is true; but that their general
has fallen is not certain. 11. Fred would not be praised by his
teacher if he had not been much more diligent this year. 12.
On the next morning, he was found dead in his bed, 13. Some-
times the prizes were given to those who had not deserved
them. 14. Goethe's Iphtgenie is not played very often. 15. The
sword was given to the general by his master, the king. 16.
Finally the spot was pointed out (shown) to us by the peasant.
17. I know very well that he does not care to do it; but he
muat do it, else he will be punished. 18. Unfortunately this
was not discovered before the letter was burned. 19. Perhaps
he has been seen by somebody who knew him. 20. How can
he be brought before the judge if he has fled? 21. Wait, chil-
dren, these pictures must (use bUrfen) not be touched (anrti^ien)'
D.n.iized by Google
Exercise 20
For ibe new worde couault the vocabulary at the end of the book.
3>ie 6tef(mtc uont inngett iRoIaiiti
A. Sev groge Kiln'tg jtari ifotU manif ebelen unb ta))feren 9tittei; an
feinem ^ofe, unb einft titten fe(^ toon i^<n in einen gto^en, bunlelen
'jS&ato, in bent «m Mtlber 9liefe Wo^nte. ^er bug in fetttem S^ilbe
einen (Sbelftein, toeld^er fo ^eH fd^ien, Wie bie ©onne. Um IH^en
©tein tooHte jebet trnn biefen Stittetn mit bem 3liefen ISmpfen unb i^n
bann bem flftnig brinflen, 9iun ^otte einet Bon ben fec^S §elben,
^erjog IDlilon, (einen jungen SD^ Stolanb b« fi^ ; bet freute |i^,
bag er beS SUaleiS langen 6i)eei; unb f^Weren ©^ilb ttagen burfte.
aSiec SEage fatten fie ben Siiefen fcfeon gefut^l, abet mtgenbg gefunben ; ba
gef^alf eS, ba^ §etjog ^Rilon ioii^renb bet 3)iittagSfhmbe im Sc^atten
eineS Stc^baumeS lag unb feft fc&Iief ; 9totanb abet loac^te. ^IB^Iic^
fa^ ei in bet %txnt tiioai ()Ii|en, unb balb tou^te et aui^, hio^et eg
Cam ; benn benfe nut, ber toilbe ^iefe titt geiabe auf i^n ju, unb taia#
ba \o tjetl bli^te, baS War ber ISbelftein in beS 9tiefen ©^ilbe. 3Jo=
lonb aber ftit^tete (ic^ nii^t unb bai^te in feinem Sinn : „3)te anberen
Stittet finb jloac Weit Bon ^iet, a6er Wenn id^ je|t meinen SJafer liiectte,
fo teate id^ tein ^elb," Slfo na^m er ©t^toert, @^ilb unb ©peer,
ftieg aufS $fetb unb titt bem SHiefen mutig entgegen, ganj allein, Wti^t
bu. StlS biefet ben Rnaben \ai}, lad^te et laut unb tief : „JQa, ^a !
toa$ tDiKft bu lleinet Retl mit fol<^en SBaffen maiden? bein SifWtxt
i^ \a noc^ einmal (d lang alS bu felbft !" 2)0^ Dfolanb Berlor ben
^ut nid^t unb antwortete :
„@in fleiner 9)Iann, ein gto^eS $fetb.
Sin hither Sltm, ein langeS ©c^toert
21tu^ einS bem anbetn ^elfen."
B. IRun aber Wurbe bet Dliefe tiiife unb fd^lug nac^ bem ^ungen mit
feinem mai^tigen ©peer, ber War fo gto^ unb ft^Wer, Wie ein Saum.
^01^ in bemfelben 3(ugenb(i<{ fprang JRoIanbS $fetb auf bie ©eite,
unb bet ©t^lag ttaf \f)n nii^t. Sd^neH Warf er nun beS SaterS ©peer
gegen ben geinb ; abet Weil bet ©d^ilb be^ Siefen ein 32unbetfc^ilb
War, bet teine SBaffe ^inbutc^Iieg, fo fptang ber ©peer jurlid.
35a8 war ber erpe 3;eil beS SampfeS, unb nun fam ber jWeite.
SHoIanb fa^e fein ©c^toert feft in beibe §anbe, unb bet 9liefe griff
mi) nad^ feinem, mit einet §anb, ber rei^ten ; aber et war Biel ju
langfam fiit ben fi^netten Rnaben, unb etje et na^ i^m tiauen !onnte.
260 EXEIiCISE 20
ifattt biefet i^m bit linle §anb abgeft^laflen, fo bafi fie mtt htm
' ^flJunberfe^ilb auf bet Srbt lag. Iia iief ber bumme SBiefe na«^ bem
®<i^tlbe ^tn, unb tDai^ienb er bag t^t, (tat^ Stolanb t^n inS 33ein,
ha% tx ^tnftel. @t follte abtt ntc^t toiebet auf^e^en, benn Sfolanb
fa^te .i^it \i}niU bei ben §aaien unb fi^lug i^m ben Sopf ab, gerabe
tt)ie ^auib, ttiei^t bu too^I, ein^ bent Sttefen @o[iat^ ben jJo^f ai--
!nun toai; ei aue mit bem gio^en Keel, bei titer ben Ileinen gelac^t
^atte. ^tolanb brac^ ben loftbaren @belflein aug bem ©i^ilbe, ftecfte
tirn unter ftinen Mantel, ging an einen S3a^ unb hjuf^ fic^ tein uirni
99(ute beg ^tiefen. ^ann ritt ec geft^winb gu feinem $ater jurtid unb
legte fi<^ an btffen ©eite unb fc^lief auc^ balb ein.
C. ©egen 9lbenb jogen bie ieiben, ffiatet unb ®o^n, metter unb (amen
au^ an bie ©teOe, Wo Slolanb mit bem Siiefen getamtjft ^atte. ®er
Stopi aber, ber ©(^tlb mit ber linlen §anb, bet Speer unb boS
©i^toett Waren »eg. Iia rief §erjog tDltlon : „2Cet mir ! toatjrenb id^
f(^lief, ^aben bie anberen Stttter ben railben Stiefen erfc^lagen. aSaS
toirb ber iJiJnig baju fagen? ic^ mufe mic^ etoig Bor i^m ft^amen."
^tolanb aber fe^Wieg : lein 93ort. 2)ann ritlen fw an ben
(enigliiiten §of jurtt.,
R&m^ Rati ^atte |u -. . ige bor bem Sc^bfle geftanben unb auf
(eine eblen §elben geloarto' ijnblii^ lorn ber erfte Sitter mit bem 6Iuti=
gen Sojife, bann ber jh).. . mit ber linlen §anb, ber britte mit bem
ma^tigen ©ijcer, ber uierte mit bem gro^en ©t^Wert unb barauf bet
fftn^e mit bem f<^lijeren ©c^ilbe, abet naltitlit^ o^ne ben @belftein.
3ule|t, lange noc^ ben anbeten, fam auc^ ©crjog ^ilon. SJa meinten
bie am ^ofe aQe, bet ^abe getoifi ben ©tein unb iDoQe i^n nut no$
nic^t jeigen, benn ben jungen SRolanb, bet ^inttv feinem SJatet ritt,
fa^en fie taum unb gEaubten aui$ nic^t, bafi bet !leinfle unb jfingfte
§etb bet grSfite unb tajiferfte fein tiinne. ®a abet jog ber Heine fieri
ben fi^iJnen Ebelftein unter feinem tfJlantel ^erBot unb fe^e i^n in be§
SBaterS Sc^ilb, ba^ er bti^te »ie bie liebe ©onne. 2lle bet fiiinig unb
bie flBnigin unb bie Slitter unb bie 3)ienet nun ben (Sbelftein Bon loeitem
bli^en fa^en, ba riefen fie afle : „§urra^, §erjDg SRibn ! Ouna^i,
§erj(ig ^ilon !" 2)er abet fuu^te gar nii^t, toarum (ie aKe fo fc^een,
fa^i fxi) um unb mu^te bie 2tugen abhtenben, fo ^eH fc^ien ber ©tein.
BSftein So^m," fragte er bann Boll SBunber, „fag', toob^': W^ ^^ ^^^
9iief en ebeiflein ?" „£iebet SSater," antoorlete 3tolanb ganj bef(i&eiben,
nfeib nicbt biife ; itb luoKte eui^ nid&t gem Wecfen, batum fd&lug i'i$ ben
hiilben Miefen aHein tot."
D.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARIES
Words given in tlie apeciail Vocatmlariea preceding Exercise 5 are omitted in
both general Vocabularies. — Numbers preceded by Ex. refer to Exercises,
others to BectioDS of Ute Grammar.
abllfUhn, f<6idtc ai, aiqtiibiSt send olf
abf4I<tflcii. W«s 0^ ii6acr<i'oetn cut off
obtnntbtn, nanbtc ai, atigcieanbi turn
an, Ex. 7, fttl, every
alltiH alone; <xinj. only, but
aii when, OB, than; niiiti ali, uothing
but
Attn thus, HCCordingly. and so
tlintTila, neul., America
anbet-, Ex. 7, 9, other, different, the rest
anhtt% otherwise, else, differently
ft Unfaiifl, tit anffingt be^nning
lifangtK, fine i»<> anetfanstn begin
••iTommtn, Um on, i|t angcfDinnien arrive
antft^rcn, tiitrtt an, angetii^rt touch
anfe^R, fn^ an, anncft^tn look at
anflatl with gen. Instead ot
bci IH^F'IbiniRi, bir tSpfeltiumc apple tree
tic 91tb(il, bit 3i&(ittn work, labor, task
bn 9rin, hit Simc arm
ber Slut, bit StJK physician
aii4 also, too, moreover, even ; a, niitl
nor, neither; aui^ Flin- nor any
anf&Bnn, tortt auf, aufntboit cease, stop
aafnmffiun attentive
onfftc^rn, natib auF, i|l aufscllaiibcn rise,
get up
onrina^fii, ma^tt auf, ifl aufgciniiitl intr.
wake up, awoke
but Vtttr, bit Sugtn, M, eye
bn 9(ngtnblld, bit Stugcnbliilc moment
Mi8 ; ta Bat avt mit . . ., Sx. so, U was
all over with . , .
atOftlfttt, eina QUS, in auAetgangen go out
m»re4(*>> faJ "U*. au«fl(ffjtii look, ap-
bir »•*, kit Sii*E brook
balk soon
but 'ee bitten
bcT Kttuti, til Suuctn, M, SA, peasant,
farmer
bcginscn, bigiinn, tcflonnin begin
btiUUttt, hflleitttc, kglrttct accompany
beib-, Ex. 7, S, both, two
bai tBfin, bie Seine leg
bttMwni (well) known, acqnunted
btfDBiBien, Setam, kfummcn get, receive
btnitiliii, 6(met(Ie, txmftft notice, re-
btt&tftta, tctfltttc, bcTu6tt touch
btf^tbtn modest, modestly
btft^K, befub, it\t\itn look at, examine
befftr, 246, better
btftiaftn, tclhaftc, belhoft punish
btrw^tn, btfui^tt, btfu^i visit
bae «««, bie Stlltn, W, bed
baa Wilb, bit Silbtt picture
bis till, unlil, to, as far as
bUhn, kt, grbttin beg, ask
ba« niatt, bit Sldtlcr leaf
blan blue
blfibtn, iliet, ifl flrtlitben stay, remain
bittra. bti^tt, grtliet flash, lighten
ba« «lt», gen. ting. bc« Slult« blood
blnlig bloody
bBf( wicked, bad, angry
bTM^tn, bia<t, flcbtiHtirn break
btcU broad
btmacn, btanntt, gttrannt bum, be on
bet iQrlef. bir Siitft letter
bHsgtK, btnd^tc, gebtailt bring
bn VmnHtit, bie Srunnen well, fountain
,?S.„,c;o.)8ic
VOCABULARY
k«, adu. wttj., tbere, then, unce. as
kotcl at It, In it, near it, in so doing
k«tt( «<« ttnlcn
Mfflt therefoT, for it
hlgcten on the otlier hand, however
i»tftt hence, thereforo, bo
boMll therewith, with it
baalcB, bantK, atitntt thank
k«aB then, thereupon, neit
ftM«a thereat, at it, of it; b. glouttn he-
lieve In it ; b. btnftn think of it
koramf thereupon, on it, npou it ; b. unl'
Mrin therein, in it
batiiM therefore
koHm thereof, of it; away, off
httiu thereto, to it, to this
ftcin, beintt etc., Ex. a, 9
kcuha, bil*l(, flfbmit think; fii^ b. ima-
gine
bninmt neveithelesa, jret
bci, demoTuir. and reiat., Ex. S
ttttm whose, Ex. s
kevlnrigf, Ex. a, that one, he
kcrnrbt, Ex. 9, the same
bcfftn whose, Ex. 8
b(i Scntfitt, bit Dtutri^en German
Xcntfi^lADb, neut., Germany
kti^t ciose, ttiick
bbf thick, big
btr ^Itnn, bit Diencr servant
ktrrtt, Ex. 6, this, the latter
kM^ yet, Btill, but, for all that; b. ni^t
btr 3alt0T, bit EcflDim, i-f, doctor
btr Sara, tit Eorntn, S4, thorn, brier
bit H»wn<n^tilt, bit DDTntnbtden brier
bart there, yonder
kni three
btiBgcn, bime, fltbrunstn penetrate, presa
(through)
kf itt-, ST6, third
kaMM Btupid, dull
kaafd dark
kari^S = bucib bad tlirough the [may
bitvfcD, butfit, gtburft, 339, he allowed,
(ten, adv. JDst
tttnfa Just (so) as; tbcnfcgul just as
wall; tiinfoftbr just as much
n^t genuine
ebcl noble
bti Oclfltia, bit Cbtlfttine preciona
(It, cojtf., before
t^n», (>rJt, flfttit honor
etffllA honeet
bit lElifibaiiRi, bit (Eifttiiiintt oak tree
tigtn, cKfr'.,
, Ex. I
aother, each other
tincTltl, S75, of one kind, the same
(iafallcn, fitl tin, ift tingtfaQtn, withdat.,
etalg-, Ex. 7, some, a few
(inwal once, josC (adv.) ; n»A t. Mice
ttmUtlilt*, ftblitf t'n< tfl tingtfAlaftn fall
etnft once, once upon a time
M 9Utruttmii, tit Eltcinbaufn bouse
of the parcnte, home
but tfak(, tie Enttn, S4, end
eakUA finally
bit Snglilnbtr English-
(canlftR, ciBiifTi ciartffcn seize
»MIic, tibitit, tibnlttn receive
«ri«H6ta, tiliiubtt, trlaubl allow, permit
ttttUltttt, tiitii^tt, trrti^bt reach, attain
ttf^tiata, tTfAien, ift ttfttititen appear
ttfdilagea, cftblufl, itfitlaeen siay, lull
trH first, not untU
(TbHu^cn, (ttiwitt, ift titta*!, i?Mr.,wnke
up, awake [expect
ctwatlcB, tTlDartctt, tcUitittt wait ioi,
(rtfi^lca, triibltt, (r)iibll tell, narrate
btr Bfel, bit CEftl donkey, ass
rffeii, a6. fltflrffiH eat, dine
ttma, adv., about
ttWni something, some, a little; fn t.
such a thing •
HMt, (utet eic., Ex. S, 9
ttats etemal(ly), forever
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULABY
raftcn, faSte, fltfufil selra, grasp
faft almoat, nearly
f«ul lazy
bei Scinft, bit gtinlt enemy
frtn tariff, distant
bit 9timt, bit g^crnrn diatance
fcfl firm, taat, eonnd
bti gt^ng bit StflunBtn (cotresa
baS Ql'ix'i bit SnitT lire
btr Singer, bit %iH" ^ger
flaifciit, flatltrti, BtRatfttl flicker
fltlftlfl diligent, induBtrious
flfcgcn, flei, i|t gtRDetn fly. flew, flown
fUetn, flD^. ift geHDttn flee, fled, fled
b» 91itfl<l, bit Slufltl wing
ba« SlBflletn, bit gliieltin Unie wing
bcr 3l»f(, bie glHlTt river
foIOdt, folflte, i|t fltfotai follow
bit 9rast, bit Stofltn question
btr jtian^alCf bit graniDrtn Frenchman
bit 3tan, bit gtanen woman, wife
baeSrdKldn, bit Jriiiltin young lady,
Miss
frtMb Btrange, foreign; ct i|l mir f. he
is a atranger to me
bit 3tnibt, bif ffitubtn joy
tttuttt ((!*), frtulc, Btficut rejoice
frtnBbli4 pleasaJit, kind, friendly
btr Slltbt, sen. ting. btS gtttbtBS, S2,
frif4 fresh, new
fiHi^lbac fraitfnl, fertile
frill early; ftubtr earlier, formerly
filOlcn. futile, etfutlt feel
tu^ tee fatrni
fi|)reB,fu&ilt, fltfiiiil lead; jtiitaf. wage
fUnft- Sfth
ffiWS«», furitlclt, gtfirdiltt fear; refiex.
Kith Vor be afraid of
) whole, ei
B, all ; adv, quite
nicftt not at all ; g. nifttS nothing at all
btt Sartentifil. bit @lattcntiF4t garden
table
gtittcn see bitttn
k« Srbirgr, bit^tbiTflt mountain range
brinetn
^ta^t^aee
gttcan^tn, gttiquittc, Bttrauifit lue,
make use of
a((aift«, gefitl, etfaQtn please, suit
fltscn iBith ace. against, towards
gtbtn, fling, ift fltflnnfltn go; e« flt^t mir
gut I am well, I am getting on well,
am well oft; ti gell i^tn, wit mir it is
with him as it is with me ; bn alttn
grau fling ti tttnfc, Ex. 24, the same
thing happened to, or befell, the old
flcirf*)! tee leftn
fltlia««n, flclanB, iil gdunfltn, vylth d»t.,
succeed; t* ift mir flitunfltn I (liBTe)
succeeded
gcwtiK common, ordinary
bn tttntral, bit 9enttale or iBtntidIt
general
gmOMHra lee ntbmin
0rang enough
fltmbf just (adv.), exactly, straight
gttm gladly, with pleasure; ii^ lift g. I
like to read or am fond of reading ; [i£
tsDQtt niAt flttn rtifen I did not like to
gir4ttni, fltfi^ab, in flcfd)cbtn happen,
occur, take place
bae Vcfi^ritt, bit Strt^tntt present, gift
bit ttcf^tfttc, bit ®tf(6icb'tn story, his-
gtfiiirlttcii see fd)rejbm
gtMMlab qnick
flcf^toi^ER tee IVrtdttn
scftorbtn see jlirlitn
i<ti«B
e Ibun
gtni^ c
gieW i ti fl. with ace. there is, there are
glng eee gtbtn
fllaabta, fllaubtc, fltflUuCt believe ; think ;
g, on with ace. helieve in
glch^ eqnal; adv. = fogltiit at once, im-
mediately
bai ttlilif, gen. sing, iti (UVUti, happi-
ness, good fortune, luck
gfiiitlltfl happy, fortunate, lucky
gnBbig gracious, merciful, kind
bai ttaflt, gen. ting, bti Qlolbce gold
btr ealb»ai4tc, bit Q<«lbmad)tr gold-
maker, atchymist
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
bn «Dtt, bit mttn god
bii# Vnib, btc @raber grave
gMlfca. arifF. ecgiitftn grasp, seizes g.
niit, £>:■ 20, seize
irttu green
ba0 IMov. bit tiattt hair
tafoK, ftaitt, gttatt have
Mf we t'lF'X
Nlte". bicll. ectalltn hold, keep; i. fur
regard aa, take tor
^■fltB or binecn, ^ine, gebonBtn hang,
be sospended
%att, tartCT, iixu^ hard
^<Mm, bicb, Btftaum hew, cat, strike
bir t>i»iSft«*i, bi( 'fau^frauEa housewKe
bir i^auitliit, bit ^metivxtu door of the
house
tic ^(tft, bir ^idtn hedge
iti ^ci, bit iitrt anny
bclnt»mM*n, law btint, ifl bE>iiiBc'<>D""En
come home, return
^iBilit Heniy
|Hm1c)i, ^[IratMc, ocbchalct marry
IdA hot, fierce
bdftra, bi(^, otbtiltn be called; ti bcifl
it is Bud or written; Mai tti§l td?
what does it mean? what is meant?
bat isi^t that means or signifiee, that
is to say; ti i\ti It waa said
bci 9tlb, bit ^tlilK hero
Qtlftn, bolf, aftolftn help, aaahit
btO bright, light, clear
JttT thlH way; um ba2 fiiinjc firofif ©ctliiS
&(t all oroond the big castle
titx t>rtb, bet ^nit hearth, Qreploce
^ttrli^ glorious, inagoificent, fine
^cfibtrfAhfrn, Wdu itxUn, bcrilbtT-
aertbidt send across (this way), from
the other side, 439, 440
QttHortletca, jog btnior, btnujrfltjOBen
draw out or lorth
iai $tt|, bit $er)tn, 86, heart; van gati'
jem ftrjtn with all one's heart, heart-
ily
btr ^ragoii, bit f tijPBt ^"-^^
ftciOt to-day; i. 3Ri!rBfii this mor
S. Sbtnb this evening
BicR aee btifitn
mnfrom btlftn, *ee 39?
bti ^Imwrl, bit 4iitniiicl sky, heave
Mv along that way, thither
6la«a8t<i»nB, fubr biRau«, jfl ttinandflt'
fabtra drive or sail frath
tinonSlaafM, liif iinaui, tfl VtiWBeet-
laMftn run forth or away
^iMBBfi^BHCH, tiaatt binau«, 6tn<)ii«et.
rd)DUt look out
61nb»t4U|frn, licg Hnbunfe, binbuttbgt-
[alTin let through, let pass
iintinttfttn, fling biaein, ifl bineinetenn-
fltlt KO fa, enter
IttnfaKta, fiti bin, ill ^infltfuHtn toll down
%int see bunecn
blnlaalra, litf Sin, ifl Stnfltlonftn run
olong or toward
fimb, bibcr, b94n. ^30, high
brr ^f, bit t)iU yard, court
»DrF<n, itfflt, etiofft hope
IWlm, b»He, fltSsH te«h, get; beltn lulTtn
cause to be fetched, send for
baS 9al|, bit ^iljtt wood
binn, ^ilTIE, gcb^rt hear, listen, obey
tiBkM pretty
btr ^Mh, bit $unbc d(«
bnnlwrt, ?it7, a hundred
l«r, tbrtt e(c., Ex. «, 9
Innui always; noi$ immtr even now,
even then, still
tatcrcflant interesting
1^1 from tfftn, see 3fl2
jn yes, of course, yon know, why
biie aaftr, bit 3«btt year
jtber, Ex. S, every, each
Itbmamtti everybody
ItManb somebody
ttmtt, Ex. B, that (one), the former
(t^ now, at present
Jons. junfltT, tiinefl young
btr 3nBg(, bit Sunfltn 1>oy, lad
bir 3ansIlRa,btt3i3nBlinec youth, young
btr tlampf, tic Jldm»ft contest, fight
tamp^ttt, Fiiinlific, flcfdmvft contend, flght
tttttiUt »ee (triattt
loBfrn, tttuftt, flrfuuft boy
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
lanm scimiely, harfly
fttn, ftintr etc., £». 6
fmiKB, Fannie, geFannt knov
b« ttnt, bit flerle lellow, churl
bit ftin^c. btc flicitiii church
ttac clear
flag, Iluect, Kugfl prudent, -wise, clever
btc ftSnlflin, kit Aonieinntn qneen
tialfim toyai
ISwat*, fonntt, fltlsnnt, ^99, can, bo able
btr ftot»f, bit ftopfc head
fnfltac coati;, pteciona
(rani, fidnftr, Ftanm sick, lU
b(i ftrleg, bie Stiim ""l fttifB fibitn
wage war
kfl Ant, bie flfl^e cow
I8f|l cool
bit &nnfl, bit ftiinilt art
bafl 0n)rfc(, pen. sinji. bt* JhibfetS copper
fnr), fiiijci, Iiii)i|l short, brief
btr nnft, bit Jtulfr kiss
iaditn, la^tt, eelni^l laugh
lag see litgcn
bit SanbSltitlc countrTiiieii
long, IJngci, lilngl), otf/., long
lanflf, IJngtT, am Idnelten, adv., a long
time; 1. niA< b; fat not
(angtan slow
IkB see Itrcn
laflen, litg, gdairin let, cause to
lanfen, litf, l{t ntluufen ran
Ififtt/rotnlnlftn, »ee3!»5
tout loud
UUm, \tht, etUU live
iai Stbtn, gen. Hng. bed ficbcnd life
Ittr empty
Irgfn. Icgtt, etitgt lay <laid, laid), place
bCT St^itr, bie Secret teacher
ttOft light, easy
Ictb ; ti ttui mir Itib I am sorry
Itibnt. lill, oelitttti suffer, hoar
leibet unfortunately, I am sorry to say
lernra, [trntt, etlrrnt leam
leftn, Ui, fltitftn read
lt«l, (K{r-. last, latest
Iltl dear, precious ; li ill mit Htb it
pleases me, snlta me
ll(l(n, litbie, gtlirbi love
liebev rather; i:^ troet lic&Ei I rather
wear, prefer to wear
bai Stcft, bie Bicbtt song
Ittf tee lauftn
UtgcK, lag, ecltgen ile (lay, l^n), be
situated
lleft/rom Itftn, see 393
lltg«ee lafttR
Itnl, a^., left
labni, lobtc, gtlcbl praise
iae>iMQ(ii, atai^tt M, Utifma.eit loosen,
B I iUDi Central m
'ix.io, I
mai^ltg powerful, huge
manii^, Ex. 7, many <a)
btr Vlaan, bie SRiinner man, husband
btr ananlcl, bit SRiinttl cloak
bae tRtcr, bie SKitre sea, ocean
xatJfttt-, Ez. 7, several
■Kin, mtiner etc., Ex. 6, 9
mtllitK, mcintc, eemitnt mean, think, re-
bn 9lMf4, bit SFtcnfc^tn man, mankind,
aiU, adv., along, with one
bcr WUUtti, bit tKittagi midday, noon
bie SlittagSflnBbt, bit !lRitl<ie«|tunbtn
bit OtttU middle, midst
mXtanttt at dmes, now and then
■iBgtH, mc^fite, etmoiibl, 339, may, can
•nilalti^ pos^ble
ber mv'nat, bie SRu'iiatt month
bciVlvrflfti, bit HKDrgtlt morning:; fflor-
gtn^ in the m.; mDigen, adv., to-moF-
ntttbc sleepy, Ured
nUflcn mugte, gcntugt, 339, must, ho
obliged or compelled
btr Vhil, gen. aiJtg., beS 3>lutrA courage
MuHg courageous
btr Noi^feav, bit SSailiiarn S4, neighbor
tuufibtM, conf,, after
nai^tn atl«rwards, later
nal). ni^er, nittfl, 2ie, near; no^e adv.
na^Dt »ee nc^mcn
ber nunc, bit ?Iam(ti, S2, name
r.:,t,:,:k«Ci00J^lc
VOCABULARY
Biatltdl namel;, that is to a»j
Mtflrlt^ natural, adv. of coune
mttmt», na^m, fltnommtn take
RMtacK itunnti, etnunnt name, call
I, (ttl nkbcr, t{) niibtietfalltn
tall down
■IcbciltttB, Icgic niititi, nEcbciacItet lay
t nobody
■IcgCBftS nowhere
h*4b1i4I not yet
btr K»ibm, gen. »ing. bit JlmttnS north
ba« W»rl>fe«tMr, bit Knbftnilti north.
window
■ivblU) northern
btt K*r»f({t( narthalde
MM now; well
mr only, but
dI tf, wbelhec
•itm above, on top, np-ataiis
•bfllcUl althongh
•tfcw, (u^., opbn
MfiUB, ^ffnctt, gtoffnti open
■^■c with mx. withoat, Ex. 12
bci Cntltl. bit Onfcl uncle
bci Va^ft. bit gtiipnt pope
WVi VRta't' 'gtvRcfll ^ accustomed
<to), HBe (to)
Ifliniia BuddeD(ly}
btr VvtlS, bi( yrtife price, prize
bit Vi^lnjttflR. bit SWnjtffiniKn princess
TtStt right, adv. rery
ttht», rebett, etrcbtt talk, speak
tetn clean
bit Wtift, bit Stiftn journey, voyage
Ktten, "tftt, ifl fltttijl travel, go
bir Mtttcr, bit Sltiltr horseman
biT MU^tn, bit StlAttt judge
btr KKfc, bit Slitftn giant
btl NttMt, bit dtltttt Itnight
bit Waft, bic Sloftn rose
ral, i6tti, rittf) red
bit Stn^t quiet, pekoe
bti Ciul, bit ®alt (one a) hall
btr Qtad, bit Sndt sack, b^
f«^ tee netn
Ii^joKa (liA), fi^atntt, gtf4£itit
btr Sitiitten, bit €Aiilttn shade, ehsdow
MoBCB, fi^autt, BtfAoKt look
f^cteni, WiiB, B'ttientn shine, appear,
(dpiiha, iijKUt, gtfAiillsend
MlcB we Tiicintn
ba« S^tft. bit Si^iift ship, vessel
btr e^ilb, bit Sifiilbt shield
bit ttSfiaSfi, bit e^IaAtrn battle
M'nfnt, r^Iitf, gtf^Iarnt deep
btr V^Isfl, bit S^bldflc blow, stroke
fitlagnir TAIue, BcFAlOfltn strike, beat,
Mlri^t bod, poor, mean
f411tf *ee filuftn
t4ntl quick
t4r«flt« terrible
Mnibtn, f^riti, Btftbtitbtn write
Wnlcn, fArit, etfAticcn cry, scream
fdwitbtt' rA'itt *«« (dirtlbtn
f Atbra WB fi^TticK
bud MHfhidp, bit 64ulbi<ittT school book
bit Clonic, bit Si^ultn school
bii C4filtt, bit SdiKitT Bcholai, pupil
bri O^nlfirnuih, bit ®d)ulfttunbt school
bit C4nlt|)9r, bit ®i!tuIl&Aitn door of the
school house
fdltnac}, r4n>aijti, (i^tDatitft black
f^lntigtn, f^niig, grfi^niitBtn be silent
ftQwcr heavy, difficult, hard
but VAlPfTt, bit €Antrter sword
bit tt^Htftc*, bit S6»t(ttTn sister
bit Zttlt, bit Sttltn soul
bn^ Ctad, bit Scgtl sail
ber Scgtn, gen. sing, iti Stetni blessing
tcfit very, much, greatly
ftln his, ftintr etc., Ex. 6, 9
fett with dot. since ; cotij, since
bit 9rHt, bit ©tiltn side, page
reUra^rc<b|i, Ex. 4; von ftlbH of ile
own accord; ftlt9 adv. eren
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULAIty
fntbtn, rouble, gcranbt Bend
iai eilbet, gen. ting, tti ®il6erS silver
btr Sinn, bii Sinnf senae, mind
nntn, fog, gtfflTfn sit
fn BO, thus; intmdacing a claKse, aee
729 'b
fnbnlb conj. as soon as
fngnr adv. even
foflltld^ at once, immediately
'foUt Buch, such a, Ex. 7
bet eolbat', bte Snlba'ten soldier
\»atn, rollte, aefolt, 339, shall
brc Cannin, bic SommcT Bnnuner
tie Svnne, bit SonnMi smi
bcT Cnnnlas, tie SDnntngt Sunday
(onfl else, otherwise
fpit late
tt>i>tl(»n aee fa^rm
bcr Ctxn, bit ©»((« spear
bit Ctilnbtt, Ht <3t>inbe[n spindle
fptnncn, fvann, eifliEiniitii apin
FtiraA see fpid^cn
ftmdlcn, rvriifb. etfpTti^tn speak, say;
with ace. ofperg. speak with
ftiTi^ft, rprii^I tee fpKtbni and 3S2
ht etafl, bic eidllt stable, stall
ftorfc see ftctSfn
ftarl, lliliffr, tfirfd strong
flatt uitA jren, instead of
flti4en, |lii4, flEftiM^en stiag, prick
flttftB, fitjtt, fitiletfl stick, put
fttlBtn, (litB, Bcftiffltn rise, mount, climb
bee Sttin. bit Sliine stone
bit etfllc, bie Slcllen place, spot
n»btu, llart, ill Bfflctbtii die
pm still, qolet
bit CtimMt, bit <Stimintn voice
RttSt see (if tbtn and 392
fiDlj proud; f. auf loifA owe. proud of
bit Ctrafi, bit Strnftn punishment
^aftn, firafte, etiirflfl punish
bit Cmnbc. bit Stunbtn hour; «pi tintr
3(unbe, an hour ago
fn^tn, ru4t(, aefu^l seek, search, look
btrXag, bit Subc day; linci
day, some day
bit SoHle, bic XaxtUii aunt
hutiint, titn)te, ettan)( dance
taff" brave
tie Xankc, bit Xau&cn dova, pij^eon
btT Xcfl, bic Xcile part
iai 3«at, bit ZWti valley
t4«t «•
bae Ib»i/ bic XtDTt gate
bcc Z^on, bic Vixmt throne
t^n, t^nt, gettan do
bic 3«flr, bic XHrcn door
lltf deep
ba« Xln, bit Xicrc animal, heast
bcr 3aft, gen. sing, iiti %eiitt death
lat dead ; tstmiibc tired to death
tM* sse trclcn
tiagtn, tnig, BclroB'" carry, wear
tMiNn, Itaf, B'Wofftn hit, meet
tnltcn, tritt, gctiictcii drive, chase
tiettn, nut, i{l jctrttcn step, tread
tna [aithful, true
ttitb eee trtibcn
bie Xntti|Kn troops
btt Xnim, bic Ziirmc tower
flfcee wUh dat. or ace. over, across, he-
ilbnnll everywhere
filctnatgcM day atter to-mnrow
bicll4«, bit Uircn watch, clock; mhi ftija
llir. at six o'clock
an Kith ace. round, around, about; uin
uai itT round about us; um ttnia^ Um'
VFtn struggle or fight tor something;
utn ju with irt^n. in order to
iunb're'4*n, gina um^ct, ifl umbcTBceiiR-
gen go about
iui^(^>ini, fptaiiB umbtt, ift unbcc'
Bcflininflcn jump about
nat^onmtn, lam um', i|1 um'scFDnimcn
nm'U^tn (ili6), fal) um', nm'gtfc^cn look
niibefanni nnknown, strange
bat llHglftit, gen. sing, iti nnglud^ mis-
nnaiSelli^ ij
tntra^tg restless
nKf», unftrti etc., Ex. S, 9
nalm below, down-stsdrs
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
a, vtctriiitntt, Mitinnnt bom
iMrtirBtK. ncibicnlt, vnbJEnl earn, desorre
kcTlIltftrB, tnSii, ifl vtiflofrcn elapse,
expire, pass
MtiHTcR, Migiif, vngclTdt forget
MHaflcm, united, MtUfftn leave, desert
MtltncR, onlsr, vtrlnni lose
Mrftnc^en, Dfrftmit, iitrfljiinScn ptomiBe
iMrthlirM, vtrflant, ncinanbtii anderatand
^tzfa^ta, Btrfu<6l(, Dcrfutftl try
fecrtoanbtlK, HiwanbcUt, leimiinbdt
chBii(;e, tmufonii
Vicl, ££. 7, 9, much, many
til(l(j(4t perhaps
Wer four
kitri- looTth
ba4 V»gI(lB, bic eiglcin little bird
bus Vail, bie ©oitd people, nation
*aB full
Mr uitfA (Ja(. or ace. belore, in tront of;
with dat. alao ago, e.g. vol fttbA Xagin
six dayB ago
bic QocIMM, bit Snftabtc soborb
bic fBafft, blc SBofra weapon, arms
Ma^T true; niitt Qati? isn't It (ao)?
■wasn't it (so)? don't yon? didn't yon?
WitVMib Kith gea. AaAng; conj. while
bit VBabifirlt. tic ffij^cbeiltn truth; in
3D. in tmth, in reality, at bottom
t>abtt4ciMll4 probable
btr fDotb, bic IDilbcr toreet
and a.
WaiBn why
was, Ex. s, wliat; Kai fiii (ein--, 1S2)
what sort or hind of
Haffttu, wiif*. fltWiiWcn wash
taeifcn, wcdlf, fltlDctft trans., w»ke, conse
tMg away, gone
twgcM, toi</i pen. on account of
WtebltllM, Mitt n>cfl, ill ntgacblicbtn re-
main, or stay, away, t^t to come
totbmii! woe Is me I
WHl) white ; al»o A 3. mnj^. pre«. inrf. of
iDincn know, J#«
tacti tai, distant; btt latiltm by far; vin
ntilen trom alai; vstlUt farther, fur-
ther, on ; immci Utilcr on and on
totbtn, Ex. 6, which, who, that
bic ehli, bit aDcIien world
WckIS, Ex. 7, little, few
McHii If, when, SSS
Met, En. S, who, be who, whoever
Mttbea, warb or n>uibc, ift etmnbcn be-
come, grow, get
mvfta, nmrf, utmocfen throw
toic as, like; Id ... nic or aid aa ... as
Wick«l ag^n, back
HirbcHnancn, (am »iebci, ift utitbriBC'
iMtimtn come again, come bock
bit fSltff, tit Sitfcn meadow
hiKb wild, fierce, savage
bcT KDinb, bit SOinbt wind
btt CBIMci, bit ISintti winter
MifIcK, nn^lt, atmugl, 384, know
bic fBMfee, tit S}oAtn week
MDbtr whence, from where
taabi well, indeed, I admit, probably,
likely; mtifil buiDpll,£'«- 20, don't you
know or yoD know
MablbrldHMl well-known
laalltB. W«]lK, gtmsUl, 330, will, be wil-
ling, intend to, be about to
Motta nUerein, In which, in what
lit ISoM, bic fBcrtc word, saying
WDrm8 out of what or which, where-
Mttfie see niii4ftn
btt tSnnbcf, bit SQunbrt wonder, mar-
Tsl, astonishment
bcc cennbcrf^llb, bit Stunbtrfi^ilbt (mai^
vellous) magic shield
l»i«tiboi, »iinf*t(,atniunMt wish, desire
UHf4 see nafi^tn
uatttt >*e ttilTtn
itb> ten
bit 3clt, bit 3tittn time
Sttbra, )»e, eti«etn draw, pull; inlrans.
<i|1 Btj«gcn) march, move, go
bae Simmct, bic Bimmci room
tat *ee jitfrtn
ja too
jafritbtn contented, satisSed, happy
D:,t.:f:k«Ck>0^1c
VOCABCLARY
pere, listen to
guIcKI at last, finally
itttfifit t«-righ1», In order
gniflif back
iutatnitihtti, Uitb jUTUd, ifl guifidgctlic
btn rem^ii behind
gatfiittrettra, ttitb ini^d, piildsctiieftEii
driye hack
tBtonntii together
lafdnntB^ltiM, Iiicli jufmnmcn, jnfani'
ntrpflefeailfn hold, or cling, t«gelber
}Wat to be Bnre, it ia true, I admit
jkHtt- second
abl«, be able to linntit 339
about adu. '•»■ ; prep, an loifft ace. ;
round about ua nn m»9 ^n; talk about
it or them bakm ttin4<n or rtbtn ; go
or walk about nn(trge(tn, gins nnbtt,
(ft Mnfwcs(Rii>S(ii
above prep. »*rt wirt dat. or ace. ; a.
= np^t^is or on deck ettu
aDoompany tigltllln, ilgUUett, itghlitt
aonnint, on a. ot Kxgcn viUh gen.
aeenatomed, be a. (to) pKifltn, nllfRti,
acquainted tttannt
aeroH Mte wrffA <ia(. or ace.
afraid, be a. of fi4 f^4<'» *» uifA dal.
after con?, ■■'t^™ witft transp. order
afterward! na44"
asain Mitkcr
againit fl<S<n isiM occ.
ago >>n loifA, liat., f.^. an cincm ^atn
a year ago
air kli euft, kit SftfK
all an, Ex. 7; = entire flanj, e.g. all
night bit B'OJ' Kilt'! not at all B^'
iri^t, none at all tax f tin ; for all that
b*4, bnina4
allow nlBMbra, trUnblt, tiUnkt; be al-
lowed (tol ktrftR ^f
almoat faR. ttinntt
alone ■O'ln
althoiwll olgltill with transp, order
alwayi iramtc
Jjnariaa VmtriU, neuf,
Amerteaii i*r UvuiUmui. bit nauritanci
amoag wUtt with dat. or ace.
anir; *W<
animal biS Xicc, bit Xitrt
appear = look anSftttM, fat one, anggf
ftSnt; = come into view crI*tiiKM.
(TtAint, Ifl trtilinita
amu (weapon) bit tSufle, hit ffiifltn
army ba$ ^tn, bit ^ccrt
arriTe wii«>iintii, lam an, ift anetlDm-
art bit ftoMn, bit fiftnfit
ai cojy. bn wiiA (roTisp. order; as. . .
aa t* . . . nif or aU ; jnat aa . . . as
titnfo . . . wit or nl^
ask ^ inquire fragtn, Iragtt, gtfragl ; ^
beg (tor) billta, bat, gcbittn i/"' am
asleep, be a. MUftM, (ftlitf, «(!.-?" -n;
fall a. tlniAIaftN, f^litf tin, ^ ' <;f
Mlaftn
at, at my bouse bti nic, at yo. . .ise
kti bir, ici tuti, tci Stnta e(c.
attain ttrtiditn, tmii^ic, tmiill
attempt «trfu4o>i ncilaittt, HifnAt
attentive anfBciHam
awake, intr., (twa^cn, (rWaAtc, [ft ft-
MaAt or aafwait"!. waA't oaf, 1ft anf-
gtwaili
back jnrttit ; = again Wiebct
bad = poor, mean Wltl*t
bag b(t Cad, bit Siitt
battle bit e^ld^t. bit S^la^len ; battle-
field bag e^la^tfttb, bit eAta^tftlbcr
be fern, nat, ift gtWdcn ; I am to, I was
to elc. IvDtn 339, 369
bear ttagta, true, flttragtn
beaat bag Xicr, bit Xltrt
beoause Wil icith transp. order
bed baS 8tfi, bit ectun 84
befall twlftn, ttaf, ■tttDfln; itntfftH,
frctraf, bttrafltn
before eor^. t%t tcith tranap. order; a
hundred years before, Ex. IS, not !■»•
btri 3D4""
3.n.iized by Google
270
VOCABULARY
Imk (tor) tfttra, Ut, ittittR with an
and ace.
^fgtn aHfaitgnt, Rag *■, aagtfa*!'*. Un
often ItiiRMi, trtmn, titmnta
htflnzing kcr HMfang. kit SBfixgt
behind %Mrt with dot. or ace.
baliiTS gloMtiM, g[Mt((, gtgliiMtl', b. In
■(■■tTM «■ IDitA occ.
below = down-Htalra or below tn the
uttAd
Mtf
i, 246; = thick
UeninK ^' Btgn, gen. ting, kit Bcicne
blool k«» eiw. j/en. ■ins- *t* BImU»
Uow w«|n, M«»tt, gewctt
blue >f«
both ttt>-, Ex. 7, 9
boy ktt ftnakc, ki( Itaaki ; ^ lad kcr
3Mgt, lie 3iaa(M
hnva ta|>f(r
brtak tnitn, traft, gil»4tn
briar kn X«ni, kit SfracB #4
brliht 1(0
briDK krinfltm, kraAH, itkca^t
broftd Ittft
bom = be an fire Icckmn, traoMtc, gi-
traiMt; = put into the £re MtkmHm,
but = yet, fltill Mt, Ex. 12; = only
wu ; /or aktr and fiWcra tee 687
bnj taafcM, laxftt, gilmft
by — at, near bm with dot. or ace, e.g.
by the liver an ^ti^t ; viith pauive
% teith a
; hj the hand k
a of
oall <= name Mcwi(M,nanKtc,gniaalil ; be
called, have a name DclfelB. I|<«ft. $*•
tcifecn : c&ll on ^ vUit ttfttOtn, kc
fii^te, kifiuti
tare (to) niigni, nsitlt. gtnu^l 339
Aarriaffs kcr ffiagcn, kit SagtN
oany tragni, bng, gtttagcn
Bast lBtr((K, worf, gcnarlcH
oeaaa aMftarra, tiiiU aaf, iMfgibirt fot-
lowed by irifin. after ga, e.g. he stopped
playing «r fiStM ««t i" (»i»I"l
eert«ln(ly) e'Olfi
ehanlNr kit Kanuntr, kit ftamauni
ebangs trans, attmmktla, ktmaakettt,
MiVaMkcll v>ith (a and ace.
dmreh kit «in»t, kit fiit«ta
eity bit 6takt, kit eiikit
oleai rlar, !(■
elftTST tlNg, tlBgtr, nsgit S4J
elimb Rti««t, ftitg. Vf gtftltgtK MifA aat
clock kit VAt, kit ttlirtB ; at dx o'clock
MX tti«« Ml 1 it U six o'clock te ifl
f«|> ttkt
oloH =^ thick, dense kiitl
elothea kit itieiktt, nam. 8ing>. ka« Sltik
Mid fall. »l(tt, filitB 2«s
eomB fiMnuN, tan, ift gilrnncn; come
bac^ = come again witktrKiMUii. Ion
Ivitktr, ifl witlctgtianmtn ; come back
eompel, lie com
genalt 339
oontonted juFritkcn
oool tftbl
Dapper k«8 ihtpttt, gen. sing. tt» itn|>fti'i
eoorafa ktc Wul, gen. nng. kts Wntte
oonnweosf nntig
oonm, o[ course naHttliit
eonrt, courtyard ktr $iif, kit $ilft
Mw kit Bxfi, kit lllkt
eroH ttll"i Willi UBtr and occ.
snt off ^ akl41agcn, W«i nk, akgtfitlagtn
danM lanstn, lanttt, gttan«t
dark kuntel ', it is growing or getting d.
t§ Mirk kml(( or t9 »Irk SJnitt or tlktak
day kti Xag, kit Xagt ; the otiier d. =
recently atiili^
dMd M
daatli ktt Xak, gen. sing. kt« StktS
dear (itk
deep lief
datbat f^lnstn, Mlufl, gtlAlagta
dkUvor = tree ttfrtita, ttfrtiK, ktfnit
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
dMMTt MrUflia, Millet, VtrUncB
dwwra tntlniin, wiklintt, Mrbltnt
aidn't I? didn't yon? etc. uliU ntlit t
dia fittm, ftiT», ifl giftirtcM
diiTarentlr =" othemlBe *uiti»
difflonlt WW"
dlUcant fcllig
dine iffn. «t. IcI'Hcm 39Z
diMOTH (mtkifn, tntktdK, niikctft
dteUiit fm
do llni, ttil, t'l4'" ; doesn't he, don't
you, didn't he? didn't yon etc. Bl^r
MulR ? do ^ make ru^cn, mi^tt, gc
dootOT ^ physician kct )lt)l, W( firjtc or
ker XsMn, kit 2«n»'mi M; d., (m
do( k«r 4Hit, kit fiinkt
donkey htt Oftl, kit lifel
dDor kit Xtftc<c). kit Xtftrai
dOTk kit X«nt(, kit XaMcs
draw forth or out MnKgittXi 3*< iKi'
•(I, |tra>Tgc)*gtn
droM k<a ititik, kit ffKikcc
drive = chase, impel trtiben, ttict, |(-
tritktK ; drive in a carriage fibrcn,
fNlf, Ift gtfitmi ; go driving or take a
drive for pleasure ff *ji<"n M"". W^
ttaafettB, ift f*«jlcmi itfatren
duke ktr ittas, kit ^tjlgt
dull ~ stupid tMiun, knnnut or kllM-
wui, kMttnft or ktKMR
each (one) Icktr, Ex. 6; each other, one
another tiHuikti, indeed
sarly frit
(am vtTkltn<n, vtrkltxlc, BtrkltNl
•aay, easily [cli^t
sat tfltn, *t, gtgtlltH 39?
elapM Mtfllttcm, ktrdat, ifl vtrflantn
elH I*>R
empty l«r
end k«« Smkt, kit Cakni 84
enemy ktr ^Imt, kit Scinki
Enrland OngUnk neia.
EngUtlimui kct OEglimktr.kicQhtgltaikci
enongrlk »*•*»
enter trttnt, Itit, ift gtttctrn vtith in and
ace. or tlntingttm, ging ^lula, Ifl «[■-
H with i« ami oec.
sntira<ly) gnj
eqnal(lr) gltiit
SMort ktgltiln. ktgltittic, btgltiret
BTen l»gat, g<T
BTsnInr ktr Rktnt, bit Hktakt ; in the e.
am Mttnk, aktnki ; this e. I|ihM Mnk;
yeeterday e. gttltni HkCHk ; to-morrow
e. nutgta Sktnk
every <one) Ifktr, », («, Ez. 6
evkiyvherk BkrcaK
emnlne ktfc|tH, \t\a^, ktfetn
expect tMMrttn, ttnirttit, trwarttt
•ye kaC Kagc, kit angni 84
bdthAil tttm
fall film, fltl, it gcfaUni ; f. aaleep (fn-
f4laftN, f4llt( tin, id tlitgt|4Ufi« ; f.
down MickcrfaVcn, (iti nickti, iR aitktt-
gtfancn
ttt Mil, ftra 1 as far as kit aa with ace.
farmer ktr Vintt, kit ttaitm 84, SB
fartkw Bititti
bit = qolck f«BtlI ; = firm, somid f tH
fear fte^tta, ffin|ttlc, gtffti4(tt
feel Win, fillK, gimit
fartlle fiuilitar
fat«li Ml», bkllt, fltb*!'
f«w Wtalg, Kt:. 7,9; a few tiMifl-, Ex. 7
flaroe Oattle) t'i| ; t. (giant) niik
finally takll^
finger ktr 9i"B<r, kit ^tagtr
fire ksB Stntr, kit StMtr; put into the
I. wrkreiMtB, ktrkraaMit, ■tckranat
firm ftft
ant O* 276
flee Hitttn, |*4, Ifl gt|[>4tn
fly litgtK, flag, IB g'fl'B'"
foolisli kvoun, kUBmrr or kinimcc, kamnfl
lOr it, lor them =^ tlierefor kafSr
fbrekt ktr SBalk, kit EBaikcr
ferret kcrgcffcn, WtRal, Btigtffni
lOrtreBS '»^ Stftaiig, kit Seflnnflcn
ttortonate giMIiit
taw >itr ; fourth Vitrt- 27e
tZBB = loosen l*i nu4tK, na^lt l»«, f»-
gtniAl; ^ deliver tcfitin, btfrtilt,
ktfrtU
Jrenobman kcr giantiilt, kit Sraaiaftn
fraih ftiM
Mendly fmakii*
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
rentl«Bbn kcr ^rr, tic 1)ttm 76
(Mtnliie e4'
Ocniuui Mr 2wat(«e, kU Scatf^n s^ar
Oarnun; StMlMluk neut.
K«t ^ obtain, recxire «Mfi«*. trtkU,
trM'to and kctiMMtn, ttt«a, Iclni-
mcn; = fetch tilet, t*llt, ■(«*»; =
become, gruw MrtbtN, tMtb ur l"Hrtf,
IR atwtthni 1 get ap — rise «itffKk«>
fr<nk iKl, ffl aNtgiOinkra
K^ott kit StiR, kic UttOttt
lUat kcT 8lic|(, kit KicftM
Kladly B<n ^O!*
fo :^ walk gt^tR, Itel, IR flcgMin ; =
travel Una. f«M, I* ■((■*"« or rci-
tra, niRc, iR itrtiR ; go about Nnk"'
Idra, gtig NMtn, tR HMkrgtgaagn ;
go into = enter tini'g«k(«, giBg ■)<■-
til, iR ('■"'■■g'SO'ati V)ilh la anci occ.;
go out aaSgctta, gtng ««*, 1ft lafge-
gaaRta; go driving for pleasure fvagic-
na film, laft fk«il(mi, !R tkilfnta
■(falna ; go to sleep (ia|41at(a, WW
tia, iR tiagcfAUIca
(od kcT e«tt, kit esiMT
raid ka# ««lk, 9«n. (£rtr7. b(« etalkct
food-lMk »■« «««, gen. Hag. *c»
Vrand ttnll*
yntTe k*e »Tak, kit «rlkci
vreea |r«a
(TDT = increase niai||«i, Ma<|a, IR gl-
Mai^ftn ; ^ become, get wrckta, a»tk
or Mnukt, IR gtMMkta
liaiT kaS 4*«t, >i( 4<l*n
lull kct e*a(, kic 64l( {one i)
band kit faak, kic $<«kc ; on the other
b. kagcgia ; a bandtol clat ^akanl
handioma f4>a, «Hkf4
hanr — be siupeDded ^aagtn or ttngta,
hsiiUr taaai
lUT« (to) ^ be obliged or compelled (to)
■dHfia, aiaftc, gcaiall 339, 372
lie, etnpAatic, = that one k<c, Ex. a ; be-
. /ore a relalive krtltaigc, Ex. 9
hMd ktr ft>|>f, kit ftlktc
hrart kaf 4trj, kic 4njtH «ff
hautli kn «ctk, kit «nkc
hMven ktr 4lauacl, kli ^mawf
lieftTy f4Wtt
hBdKB kit itOt, kic ^4ea
help Itlfta, |al(, gtkslfta 392
henoa katcr, al|a
har Ikr, ikrt, tti, Ex. 6 ; kct, article, 139
Iiera kcr«tl>, »ic«clkta
hen ikccr, i|cc, itrcS, Ex. «, S
henalf. emphaiic, ItlkR, fclktc, Ei. 4;
refiexiie f.il
hi* a*. Itla, ftlac, fda, Ex. 6; ktr, ar-
tlcie, 13B; pron. (tiatr, ftlac, ftlatf
Ex. B, 6
hiitot; kit «(f4i4tc
Mt ttcffta, tt«|, gcttiRta
hold taltcn, «ic», gttnltta; holdorcting
ti^ether aafamacalMltca, tltll nafati-
auR, j|af*Matcagc|allca
hone ; at home ga 4aafc
honett ikrilA
honor tttta, t*r(t, gtttci
hope taftta, taftt, gtl|<RI
honmun kcc IRcilcr, kic Mctm
hotktit
hour kit eiaaki, kic 6t*akcn
hoBM M« «8al, kic (iafer ; at m; h. kcl
mic, at your bouse kcl kic or ca(| or
3*ata, etc.
however akrr; kaflcgca
hudred laakttl ; a fa. taakttt S67
hnrrahl ^arral 1 or tnrca !
ti«fl.
,, , a loiiA tratifp. order;
inlerrog., *k witA Irantp. order
til ttaaf, (ciahr, MalR i45
impoHtbla aanitli*
ID it or them =■ therein kaila ; in the
evening or morning a»i tikcnb or SNar-
etn
indaed wa^l
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
inUremnr {ntmnntf
iin'tU? nUttwt1>rf
tt ; in it ^ therein bnin ; ot it => there-
oF kMmt 1 on it = thereon k«raKf
itt, a4)., ftf", (">". t«'", Sx. e ; %tx, ar-
ticle, 139
itiaU; ol Itaeir = oF its own accord «»
jolly laRfg
jonnMy hit Mftlc, bit m»t»
joj iiir SrtMbt, bie grtiitcii
Jodre kcr WiAM?, blc Kii^KT
jump about Mntcrf)nlngni, tlf as nvf*.
m nntngcff niMien
Jut; just then or now (ioi, (trakt ; joat
as . . . oa ttc*I> ... wU or "13; jnat
whoa 8(t«M, *lt
keep Mil", 4»U, ectaltta
Uxd frcnntliit, gNt
kind; of one k. tiacdii, indecl.; ofwhat
k. or what kind of HmI (Br (liM-} MZ
klnr'B-daufliter >it ftai<iH»ig4»T, »lc
tlteig«(i41n ; kiog's^on ktt Mait^-
f>kN, kit ftihiigSfltni
knight k«T NUitr, kie HIttn
know tmncn or wiflia, leessa
known ^ acquainted ftttuort
Ud ktr 3»«ic, kit 3HMsni
Iftdy ; young 1. ttt gcdtilriK, ki( gtibilcte
lut a$. left-; !. ni^l |tfltn Btrttk;
at 1. jnlt*!
Iat« fl>it
U.ngh laitnt, U4I<, ■'■■<|t
lay Ct|in, t^tt, ickgl; 1. down nlihtf
Iri«n, ItrM itbkn, «ltk(r|cCt|i
Uiy f*«l
load fikini, fUrtt, gtfHI|H
iMif U» eintt, klc BIdNcr
learn ttnitm, Irwh, «rlinil
= deeerc MritfTtn, «(tI1c|, MrlaftcM
[eg k*e Ottn, kit Oetnt
leu than ninilgtc ali
t Ulfta, Iltt, gtlalFni; 1. through tin-
km41«n», Iit| aiMkar^, tivkaf^t*'*!!*"
lBtt«r k«t Bikf, »tc erUfc
lie ~ be situated licgn, lag, gcdfltii
lil« ks« eth*; p«n. ting. kcB Scktaf
U«ht lliAt ; ^ btiglit ^n
like (to) ailgfn, mtt^U, gtntaitl JJ9, 37e
like adc. Wlr
listen {KkSriM, tiitc ^, jastk^rt ; ^Ictn,
tMt. gtk»n uiCA aaf and ace.
little in ^ze IWa ; in quantity ivniig,
Sx. 7; a 1. tlu wniifl or ttMiJ*
live IctiM, liktc, gtlckl ; ^ reside woft-
an, a»kaw, gtwekal
long laafl, Ungtr, Cingft ?^ ,- adir. loagi
look fttra, f*k, itfitta; look I gt4 1 ^ ap-
pear, seem tMS\tfin, (ak aa', saSflC-
tt^ta; look at oaKkn, fak-ia. aasf
ft^ ; look at ^ examine it\tittn, kc
f*t, tefitta ; took for fa4ia, ta4tc, 6'-
\utfi; look out tiaaaAf^miia, |4tat(
Maaai, kiaaaflgtlitant, or ^iaantfttta
looasn l*Snt<t(n, ataftlt Iii, Uigtmai^t
IMS kcrlitrca, ItcliiT, ktrlarca
lend laat
lore litkta, lltktc, gtlictt
Inok, good 1. ba# Qtltttf, gen. ting. ki(
nacnifleent ttrrli4
laany aiil, Ex. 7 ; many a aMlli|> Ex. 7
maroh )i(k(a, i*e, iR stjRgni
marry ftlcatta, k(<f*ttK, gtltiratei
■ary SHatic
meadow kf( IBlift, bit ffiitftn
mean auiani, Hcintc, gcmtiat
meet trtRtm, ttaf, g(tt*|ftn
merry (nfltg
middle kit niiit
mine awiaft, t, tt, Ex. e, 9
mlsbrtnne kag naglRd, gen. sinji. kt«
tlagtHd«
Miu Srtaltia
moment btt fiagtaklltf, kli HHgtaklliTc
money bai 9clb, kl< (Sflkii
month btr 9lM«t, kit SRmtt
momins kti anargra, kit tnargta ; in the
m. ata Wargta ; this m. ^aK Wotgn
marrow, to-m. aurgra
mountain ktr Qcrg, bit Bergt ; moun-
tadn range ba8 miirai, bit ekklrgc
more ^ remove or march (IcIkb, gag, id
gejegta; =stir M rH«a, rDQrtt, gt-
D:,t.:f:k«Ck>OJ^lc
VOCABULilter
Xr. «(Tr
Kra. Srax
mvoli •kl, Ex. 7, 9
mf MCbi, MtiKi, Mtbi, £z. e
name Wt tt«Mt, tel S»mnB S2; his
name la Charlei tt \ti%t (tarl ; what is
hlanune? Mil IriH ft 7
namely alMll^
nation ha« »>1I, kit Blim
natnnl aalftrll^
near a^. ail. U|er, hJ4I> SA!, ^'fi
nearly fafi, »«bM|K
nsirlibaT ter MiAkar, kit Ra^tani m, «5
n«*er afc, aitaitll, aiataur
nerertlielta* Waaait
new at* ; ^ beah hit*
next nX4R 3^0
niflit Ut n«4l. kfc 9»4lc; lo-nlght
KaK atcnk ; last n. tdhra Rktak
no lebt. Mat, hia, £z. 6; no ... at all
noble tkcl
DolMdy airauKk laz
none tt\»a, Hbtt, liiati, J?x. 6,- none
at all gar Icla-
noon Wi nutag, ktt MfMngt
north kn Nerkca, ^en. ting, tti ttatktai
nortlkern «lTkfl4
nothing BlAtB 184 ; n. at all aai ai^t*
netioe kcntrtra, itaintte. ktaurlt
obli^, be o. (to) adIfliH, nattt, giMatt
339
ooean k«« men, kit DKtii
ooonr (to) (fataBta, fitl dn, Ifl (fagtfaHca
wiiA (tai. of person
of it or them == tbeieot ka«« ; I have
heard at U 14 %»*t k*MM Ittlct
oh! Ct
Da It or them, thereon kataaf
onoe tlamal ; o. npon a time ctafl ; at o.
f<eltii«, skill
one (ia-, Ex. e, »; nome one tiaa 1S3
open a4i- 'H"
open p6. iffaen, it((a(t». (tilFait
order, Id o. to aai JB uieA trt^n., Sx. 12
ordinary itmbi
aM|iia-
othenrlaa = differently aaktid ; = at
other Umea, else IntR |
oncht (to) fsKn, falltt, gcfeHI 339, 369
am aafn, aafcrt, aatcr, Ex. 6 ; ours aa-
fmt. t, tt etc., Ex. 9
oDtiide of the cily kn kn CMakt
orei Ikn teit/t dal. or aec.
own a^}. tlgta
pagg kit Stilt, kit Ctitta
parent* kit ailtra.pfur. onJp
part kti I«il, kit Xtik
pait = elapse kttflittea, kcrllkl, iR Mr-
UHn
peaaant kcr Baacr, kh ttaittn S4, SB
penetrate krinscK, kreng, ift ■tkntnita
people ^ nation kai Bair, kit BBIIn ; p.
in general aua, bit Etalt.plur.
perbapt kklti^i
permit tTlaatta. (rlaaktt, tthiakt
phyucian kti Writ, kit ftijtt
plBtnrs ka« Silk, kit Bilkti
plfaon kit laafte, kit Xaatta
place kit CttBt, kit etf Hta; eb.,inEx.l9,
RtUta, Rtait, (tfltUt or ftttn, (Ollt, |(-
|t*l
play f^itlta, f*itltt, attVltlt
pleaaant fit aak lift
ploaae gtfaflta, gefitl, gtfaXtn
pleasure, with p. gtta
pope ktr ***ft. kit Vi*fit
poudble MSgliit
pralie [>kta, inktt, atlekt
present ka« «kf4tal. kit ettAtatt
pretty *eif*
prloe kcT Vtti«, kit fnift
priek Pt^t", 8*4. MF>»4ta
prlnoa ktt »riaj, kit «ti>«tB
prlneeii kit fciajtflin, kit eiiajt||ia«ii
probable weHAtiali*
Htf
premise ktrflwe^ta, »tr(inra«, ktrfttMlca
prood fieli
pnnlsh Stafta, fMttt, gtftrafl; ktfnafm,
ktlffaftt, tt«iaft
punishment kit etraft, kit Ctrafta
D.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
275
qaoen tft ftSKlgin, bit tthilgtaKCM
qaMtlon bit 9r*«i. bit ffMgcii
quick fttmO
qnlst ntig, ftiH
quiet ikWHlit
reach tittUHn.tmiilHt.mtltlit
read (t((H. l<e. gtKttM
receive (r^alttH, tT^itlt, tiftiilltn; kcl*»-
mem, tf(«a, bdomuuM
recently R(Rlli4
red »t, rittt, laicfl 24j
rqjoioe M tctBt", fitM**, grfrMI
remain tiditn, blltk, ift gtUUirn ; i. be-
hind iMftiiMitn, blitb jmiM, tft jk-
rfl«g(Bli(ltH
remark ttmtrltu, titaattt, binntt
replf «nttnTl«i, «ntM«rtttt, gt*KlBi«tttt
r«tt bi( WmM ; the rest ^ the others
bit onbcni, Ex. 7
rider ber Mtiln, bit MtlMr
riclit n4t
rin amount Reiflen, Rltfl, i% iilHtgeM;
= get ap auffltttB, RMb aM. ift xMtgf-
rivtr btt fflBl, bic ffiaHi
Berne Mam
room b*8 Sinmti', bit ^iatntr
TOM MtWaK, bltWafnt
ronnd prep, ma uitA ace; r. aboat lu
run liNtta, Uif, l|l gdtafta
tMk b«r ea«, bit eifc
laU bU Ctfltt, bit et|t)
Mil forth tteaaBfami, h>«i M«*«<. IR
Mneniatfabna
tune btrftlbt, Ex. 9
Uanelr (mm
leholar bn e^iltr, bit e4lltt
•choel bit 64ult, bic 64>itini B.-houae
t«i e4n»iin«, bit e^MlHuttT
■aa bn» aHttc, bit Wjttrt
iMk (mi^k, f ■<!>(, |ttad|t
M«m MciBtM, MItn, gtfQinin
MDd MlHtll, ft^i'lc, S(f41<»; rnbia.
fmblt, gttulbl ; b. acmes I|tTllbcrf<|fdtN,
fiftlfftt tttl»tr, ItcHictiditUt; a. off
■bf^iifni, Witt tt, ■bgrfwitt
■errant btr Sintr, bit SitNtr
Ht ft*", fUtt, irt««t
itTeral wtlirtr-, Jix. 7
the, emphatic, bit, Ex, S
•Maid btr e^llb, btc e^llbi
akine (ilclntK, fi^itii, g(f41cMtK
akip b«8 e4ifl, bit e^lflt
■kort Iiiri, tfirjtr, tftrjcft 24B
■kont rntcK. tief, gttafcn
aiok tvmt. ttjinttr, (rantft 24j;
aida bit etilc, bit CtHtR
ailver ba« ettba, gen. ting. bc« etlbcr«
ilns* prep. f«H mith dot. ; conj. (til with
trangp. order
■ir PuiN 4tni untratufated b^ore nanwg
■Utar bit 64lKft<i. bit eilMfttra
■it n«n. fa|. Itftnn l s. down |i4 IdtKr
(tint, gtictl
■kr Mr ^Innil, bit 4in»Kl
•leep WaftD, W\t\, gff4laftt; go to
alaep ri«(4laftn, Wltf tin, iR tisgt-
f«l«ft«
alow IlKgtaK
■mall titia
■0 f * ; ^ and aa, theratore, hence alf*,
battt
■oldler btt ealbal', bic Calbo'ltn
thing, a iittle tloaj, e.g. soma monejr
tn>a« 9tlb
aomabody itaianb 1S2
aouethinr tmal 1S4
•ometime* nitaaitt
■onr *•* !ii(*, kf( Sitbtc
soon balb; as soon aa \titn with transp.
wanj ; I am 8. that t» l|M nir leU, b«t ;
I am g. to say or unfortunately Itlbtt
■onl bit 6ttlt, bit CttltH
■oatli bti eabta, gen. Hng. bi8 CUt**
•ontkem fibli*
■pin Ititnatn, nioan, gtfyannta
■pot bit ettUt, bit ettlta
■table btt etaa, btt SIHt
■tand ftttcH, (tanb, gtRanbca
■toy bltibta, ilieft, Ift gtblicbcn ; s. away
Mcgbltibtn, blltb UKg, iR Mcgstilitbta
■tep mtca, tral, ift gttrelta
■tiii = quiaC, calm IHII, rntiS
rtiU = yet, hu( b«(
•tinK ftt*". fta*. gtflo«t«
VOCABULARY
atoie *** Ctebt, kk CMcbw
■top " cease (to) nftiRK. ^Mr *>(,■>(•
fltt»n w£(A IM and infln. ; = some to
a ilandtHU IH^tH tlcilra, ttiti (Mm,
ifl Rtt«M itlbttni
■trure freM
■trlke nUara, MlKt, fltMI'tnt
itronr (l«H, MrItT, fU'W J«
■tndant »n MUn, kit e^actr
■tvdr ItniM, Itralt, atUtnt
or ktanll
nseaad giliagra, |tCn|, i|l gitwiara; I
hftve succeeded in finding him ti in
Mir idMfltm Urn )« MsbtM
raeh (a) filit, £z. T; b. & thing fa (twa«
nddmar) l>Ui|i>4
mthi i«iH", llll, fldima
nutuaer ktr e*MM«, Wt Sannn
mn kit 6>K«, kit 6<nuni
Bnndmy k(i e*WiMfl, kii
tmke Kttmn, Na|ni, ifl
drive f|iii|itn> f«|mi, Mr !*«ilnta, ft
tliitinn (*f«*r«»
taU g»|, «cattr, ftiei S«, 9tfS
teuher kn Btfmt. bit Brtm
tell f«S(l. t«S». flfegl; t. at length,
narrate »iMlt>, «iti|IK, trj4tli; t.
the truth Mr fBattfl fatt"
t«n itM
t«nlbl* fi^ndli*
t^ftn «l«
tkuik Nam, kM^tt, Rekralt with dot.
iktX (ixiti) imtx.t.tS, Ex. S ; kct, Ex.S;
knjniflt, Ex. 6; t. whtch Ma«, £x. «
tlMir ilr, Itrc, l|r, Ex. e
tliein ikret, itn, Urt« e(e., Ex. 9
tlwmi«lT«e, enqrhalU:, (tUR, ftlin, Ex.
*; T^. M
tlun >= at that tinke ke ; ^ thereupon
therein knia
thereof kakaa
thereupon kannf
therewith k«atil
thlok ^ Mg kid ; = closa, dense kf^t
thing ; snch a th. f> (twefi
think krartn, baittt, gcbiAl ; th. of knr
Iw n loitt ncc; th. in (fte aenae 0/
suppose or believe Ca vtimllf/ g(BHk»
thia Mcfii, I, (8 Ex. 6
thorn k(T Xsn, bit Sarata S4 ; th .-hedge
kit Samtaktde, Me Xaraiaftcdnt
threo kRf
throne ktr Tfirne, kit X^»
throw kKttni. *«rf, gtlPBtfta
tlU kU, see «70
tins bit Btit, bit Stitea ; at times, some-
timee atitnntcr ; some time tfaft
tired MUe
ta ja tcilh dot. ; btfore it\fin. ft
to|«thaT jafnaawN
there k« ; = Tonder b»
are <t glttt with ace
thorefliTe all*, katei, ki
to-night %t»tt Hbtab
too = also aa4 ; = too mach in
touoh btratna, btrBkrlc, tt tikn ; <nui|-
na, tf^rtt «a, aagtrS^
towards |(gta teith ace,
town btr Xana, bit XBtmt
travel rtifm, rtiRt, 1ft fltttiB
troopa bit Tnfftn, plw.
tna l*«|i ; it is tme = to l>e sore jwat ;
= talthtnl tna
truth bie n«4t«ttt, kit Salcttitca; tell
the t. kit Ba^tclt fagca
trj Mr(n4ita, btrfiultt, btrfaitt
twice as aMt (iamal (• 706
two |<mR ; bifb-, Ex. 7; the t. M( befbis
unable, he unable <to) al^t linata 339
nnole b» OMtl, bl« Caltl
nnderatand BtrRclta, MrRaab, uttftaabts
nnfortnnatalr <(iWr
vntll bi», sea 670
np aaf with aee., np the hill «n| btn
0ng; up h> bU ■> taith ace.; up-
stairs *tni
nisi make nse ot getrsn^ra, gibrai4K,
gtbmattt; nse to, be accustomed to
tifltgtn, rttatt, itfHigt with «■ anil
3.n.iized by Google
VOCABULARY
valley M« I6«l, »1» mtn
very fl^'i 't4<
TOHMl k«# 64ifl, kit 64iflc
Tuit 6ifH4cn, tc|ni4lc, IitfniQI
TOloe tic eilmBC, bit etinuntn
wait waitta, mntttt, itniaEKI; w. for
watttn Buf with occ.
wftlk gt4ttt, ging, ifl Btgingcn ; w. about
sen
want (to) nrilin, wafllt, ecwant J^9
war Mi ftrita, bit nritgt ; wage w. ffrltg
1tt«tn> (Wftrtt, |tfft»rl)
wum woira, MMnntt, Mimt S^s
wun't it? Bi*! »«*t ? was to, were to
f*l(B, f*[IU, gifPlt ^9, .JSS
waUh kic tttt, kit tUttin
wftapon kit OoHc kit nafliN
wear tragcn, tTBg, gitTigni
week bic CB*4i, kit Si4ra
well gut; wellnow, well then nMH,l»|I
well kcr SruKncN, kit Vnonun
wliat ttw* Ei. «; ot what, what ... of,
out of what MirBBi
wheo intenvg,,*ittani at the time that,
whenever *19, mom, see Sits
wheaoe Nktrt
whenever MtaH, see 688
where «• ; from where wrttt
wherein MHm
whether 'k uifA rrannp. order
whinh MHligtr, i, ti Ex. S; ktr, kit, ka3
Ex.8
while conj. wolirtnb with Iran/p. order
whlU nt[t
who relax. Vtll^ct, (, IS £z. S; k(t, kit,
MJ £»;. 8; whoever wtr Ex.8; in-
whole gsR}
wloked tBf(
wide wtii
wUe kit Sfn», kic ffraMni
wild niik
wind ttr »i«k, kit IBInkt
winf ktr fflflgti, kit 9li«(l
winter ktr ffitatfr, kit ninitt
wiH Una, nHstr, lUgS 24S
wiih wlintitta, wMf^lt, gt*enf4(
with mil wUh dal. ; = at the house of
kti with dal. I he has money with him
tt IMI etlk kci m
withoat <tBt Toith ace. ; w. saying a
word a^nt tin ffiirt ju fBgtn
wood bae $ii1j, bit fiiltft
word bae tBict, bit ffiartt
work )it «Tltil, kit arktilta
work acbtllcM, aibtilctt, gintteiltt
world kit »(ll, bit IBtlttn
wone Mlt^itr
write (to) fArciitM, Mcitk, gtMiiekta
with BB and ace.
yard ktt $o(. kit «lft
year kaa Saftr, kit Satct
" ira i y. evening gtRtra
yet — so tar, up till now b*^ ; not yet
m4 aiAt ; ^ but knt
yonder kert
youn« fang, iHngtt, JBngfl 24a
yonnr lady ka8 StlBltin, kit StlBltln
youns man btr ^fingliBg, kit ^ingllBSt
yonr ktia, tatt etc., Ex. 6
yonra kttair, tartr elc., Ex. S, »
yoorulf, emphatic, Itlkft, fttktr Ex. 4;
UNIV. OF MICHtGAW,.
APR 18 1912
3.n.iized by Google
3.n.iiffid by Google
3.n.iiffid by Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11